ITALIAN GRAMMAR.

r
.....
WORKS BY THE 'SAME AUTHOR.

ScB.ta di Prd8e Baliane, tratte da' pitt, Clkbrl Scrittdri J.lntichi

e Modtmi, per (]lao degli Studidai di quelta Ltngua. 1 vol.
12mo. pp. 450.
IN PRESS.
Teatro SceUo Baliano: cOfltenente I' J.lminta di Tasao, 1'.t1.rla-
abae di MetaatQ.aio, la Griaelda di Goldani, la Merope di
Maffei, il :Said di J.l7jibi, e l'/lmtodemo di MOnti; with
Notes, &c. 1 vol. 12mo. about pp. 400.
A Collection of Exercislls on the Italian Language, adapted
to the Grammar; &c. 1 vol. 12mo. about pp. 100.
P. B. is now occupied in compiling, Scelta di Powltaliane,
tratte da' piu. Celebri /lutdri /lntichi e Moderni, per (]lao degli
Studidai di quelta Ltngua; a work intended to follow the SceUa
di PrOBe, and to form with it a l'Omplete Balian Reader.
A
GRAMMAR
QrTHlI:
ITALIAN LANGUAGE.
lIY
I I
PIETRO BACHI,
IN9TBUCTER IN HABVAJlD UNIVlI:JUITT.
BJee de grammaticl, quam bl'll'riuime potui, non nt omnia dicerem,
aectatua, . . . led nt muime neeeuaria.
Q,tJ'UC'TILU.!I'.
BOSTON:
HILLIARD, GRAY, LITTLE, AND WILKINS.
H DCCe XXIX.
\9 I "is I l..- '1 I l \
CAMBRIDGE:
HILLIARD, llOlTCALJ', ..urn COllPNT,
p,.;,,"r. ID lA. U"'lrlit,.
IAIIVARD COLlt\.a lleRARY
GIFl Of
IEOIlGE M.l HUH PLIIlPTOI
JANU'-tiY 25, 1924
DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS,TO WIT:
DUtrIct Clerk'. OJllt:tt.
DE it remembered, that 071 tbe twent,.-fint da,. of Jannary, A. D. in the
fifty-thin! year of the Independenee of the United Statea of Ameri"", william
Hiniard, o{ the .aid diatriet, baa depoaited in thi. omce the title of a hook, the
right whereof he elaima u proprielDr, in the wonla following, t. ""It ,-" A
GnunllUU" of the Itlilian Language. B,. Pif:tro Bfl.ehi, Inatrueter in Hananl
Univenity. H",e de grammatie&. qut,m hreviaaime non ut omnia c1ieerem,
.eetatua . led ut mui,me neceuoaria. -In eonfbrmity to the
act of the Conr;reu of the United Statea, entitled "An aet fOr the eneourage-
ment of learmng, by aeenring the eopiea of mapa, eharta, an. hooln) to the
authon and proprieton of .nch eopiea, during the tim.. therein mentioned;"
and 71110 to an aet, entitled " An aet ,"pplementar}' to an aet, entitled An aet
fOr the eneoUl'llgOlDl!nt of learning, by .eeuring the copiea of mapa, eJ.a;U, and
hooln, to the anthon and proprieton of .ueh eopiea, C1uring the tim.. therein
mentioned;' and extendi"8' tIae benelltl thereof to the arta of deaigning, en-
IfIlvinl', and etching hietoneal and other prinla." JNO. W. DAVIS,

1'0
CHARLES FOLSOM,
A LOVEll OJ' ITALIAJr LITJI:IIATVllK
AJrD
THE nlllT TO lNTllOllVC& TIlJ: ITt1lIT OJ' IT
IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY,
THIS GRAMMAR
II IJrIClIIBED
BY
THE AUTHOR.

...
PREFACE.
As A NATURALcpnsequence of the general advancement of
this country in literature, the importance attached to an ac-
quaintance with the Italian Language, as a part of polite ed-
ucation, has considerably increased. Not only does it now
enter into the circle of the-elegant studies of females, as the
handmaid and ally of the ornamental arts, but the spirit of
its higber literature begiIJ6 to be understood by the culti-
vated of both sexes; and within a shurt time a place has been
conceded to Dante and TrUllo in the same academic course
with Homer and Virgil.
But while the other langnag-es or" the continent of Europe
have possessed the advantage of a variety of good gram-
mars written in EngliJh, the Italian Instrncter has had the
mortification to see in almost universal use tbe farrago of
Veneroni,* to the disparagement of his native tongue and
the perplexity of those who would learn it. It is true that
other grammars are extant of vaHons degrees of merit,
and those of Galignani and Vergtini are entitled to much
praise; the former, however, is hardly k;nown here, and the
latter, which is perhaps the best of them all, has been connn-
Vener6ni was a native of Verdun, a small town of Burgundy,
in France; his real name was Vtgneron; but having learnt Italian,
and wishing to teach it in Paris, he Balia14ized his name and called
himself a Florentine. The Comp/de Balian MlJ8ter by SignOr
Vener6ni was written for a few crowns by ROBelli, the extraordinary
adventurer, who has left us his history in the romance entitled The
Unfortunate Neapolitan. I
viii PREFACE.
ed principally to New-York; where indeed the wanl of a
6uitable grammar has been far less felt than in other places,
from the 6ingular good fortune of that city in enjoying the
living instruction of the venerable Da P6nte, whose own writ-
ings, in prose as well as in verse, form an integral and perma-
Dent part of the Doble literature, which he has done 60 much
to propagate in America.
The field, therefore, was open for attempting to treat in
English the Grammar qf the Italian Language in a man-
Der belter suited to the wants of the public; and the au-
thor, in entering it, has flattered himself that he should
render an acceptable 6ervice, if, after a thorough study of
Italian writers on their own tongue, and a diligent examina-
tion of the labours'of his predecessors both in Great Britain
and France, he 6hould be able to produce a more complete,
and methodical, and, at the same time, strictly practical trea-
tise, than now exists in English, however far he might fall
short of that perfection of which he has the idea.
As the general plan of this Grammar will be r ~ i l y
perceived from the .lJ.nalytical Table of Contents at the end of
the volume, only a few observations are here necessary re-
specting it.
In the Introduction are givep very summarily the principle.
of general grammar, and the terms are defined in which those
principles are afterwards applied to the Italian tongue.
The Part devoted to Prollunciation affords, it is believed,
more full information on the subject than can elsewhere be
found; and as the words are carefully represented by English
combinations of letters of equivalent sound,* students who can-
not avail themselves of oral instruction, may yet mal\e such an
The vowel a is represented by the combination of letters ah, pro-
nounced without aspiration as in the words airr'ah, allelujah, &.c. :
e, by ay, as in day, except when it is occurs before certain consonanla
with which in English it has what is called the short sound, nearly
resembling the sound in Italian, as in the syllables en, el, &.c.; be-
fore r, however, e is sounded long, like ay, and indeed the name of r
would have been l1etter represented (on page 12) by ayr-ray:
i, by ee, as in aleep: u, by 00, as in doom. In the _combinations
k,y - g.y - l.y - n,y, a comma is inserted to prevent the letter
before it from coalescing with the y, which is to be pronounced with
the following vowel as if it began the syllable.
PREFACE.
ix
approximation to a just pronunciation, as to perceive and enjoy
in a good degree the rhythm and harmony of the classic au-
thors, and, with few errors to unlearn, be prepared to take ad-
vantage of future opportunities of improving their pronuncia-
tion by intercourse with accomplished speakers of the lan-
guage.
The Orthography contains the result of what has been writ-
ten by Italian authors on the subject, and such rules as have
been deduced from the usage of the best writers.
In. treating of the different Parts of Speech, in the division
called Analogy, while the author has wished that nothing
should be wanting to the completeness of this part of his trea-
tise, he has striven so to mcthodize the various particulars
that they should lie ready for use. The verbs, especially, are
given with unexamplcd fulncss; and to both the regular and
irregular verbs are annexed the poetical forms, which consti-
tute no sm,aU difficulty for learners, even in reading the older
prose writers. This is an advantage not lI-1l"orded to the Hamel
extent in a,ny preceding grammar.
As to the Syntas, a few scattered observations only are to be
found in the be&t grammars, like those of Galigntini and Verga-
ni. These are here dig"llted under their proper heads, increas-
ed by various new ones (particularly those on the use of the ar-
ticle, of the'pronoun Ula in addressing persons, of the prepori-
tiom, and of the ellipaia), and all of them supported by cita-
tions from those classics from whose authority no appeal can
be allowed, thougb colloquial usage may in a few instances
be at variance witl thell1.
It was the intention of tbe autbor to follow the Syntax by a
body of Exercises adapted to the Grammar; but the size
.which tbe volume had already attained, determined him to re-
serve them to be published in a separate form, in which per-
haps they will be on the whole more conveniently used, if not
attended by other advantages.
Throughout the Grammar, it should be observed, the
principal rules are placed under their approprialeheads, in
a larger type; and under each head, separated by a line,
follow observations which, o w ~ r important, are less strict-
ly essential. Exceptions to general rules and subordinate
obServations are printed in a smaller type. Every Italian
x PREFACE.
word of more than one syllable is carefully accented, that
the mere perusal of the Grammar may operate as a per-
petual lesson in pronunciation, preparing the pupil to read
currently the first author put into his hands, and sparing the
instructer the trouble of much inculcation. For an analo-
gous reason, every Italian word and sentence is accompanied
by a literal English version, which is often indispensahle to the
beginner, and can rarely be unuseful.
The author is well aware. of the amount of indulgence
which his n ~ i s style will require on the part of his readers,
whose very pursuit of a foreign literature implies a degree of
cultivation in their own, which must make them impatient of
the constraint and want of idiomatic propriety they will here
meet with. Grammatical propriety, however, and perspicuity
were the highest qualities to which he could at present pre-
tend, in a language whose idioms are so remote from his own;
and if he has been in any good degree successful in attaining
these, he relies on the candour of ingenuous scholars to attri-
bute his defects to the difficulty of the case, and DOt suppose
that he undervalues or is insensible to the charms of a good
style; which would indeed be inexcusable in one whose ambi-
tion it is to spread a 4nowledge of the most graceful of mod-
em dialects: .
"nlam, quidquid agit, quoque'> vestigia movit,
Componit furtim subsequiturque Decor."
Cambridge, February, 1829.

List of Works examined 'With reference to the Compila-

tion of this Grammar!
Bembo (P'retro), Prose, nelle quali 8i ragiona della Volgar Linpa,
colle Giunte di Lodovlco Caatelvetro. Napoli, 1714. 2 vol.
4to.
Varchi (BenetMt:o) , L' Erco](mo, 0 Ragionamento 8ulle Lingue, ed
in Toscana e Fior6ntlnB. Venezia. 1680.
1 vol. 4to.
Buommattei (Benedello), Della Lingua Toscana, colle Note dl
Anton-Maria Salvini. Verona. 1744. 1 vol. 4to.
Pergamini (GitU:Dmo), Tratti.to deUa Lingua Italians. Venezia.
1613. 1 vol. 8vo.
Cinlinio (alias Mambetli (M .qnt6nio)], OsservazioDi della Lingaa
Italiana. Verona. 1722. 2 vol. 4to.
G1g1i (Gir61amo), Lezioni di Lingua T08canB. Venezia. 1722.
1 vol. avo.
Manni (Dom. M.), Lezioni di Lingua T08cana. Firenze. 1737.
1 vol. 8vo.
Broni (Donato .I111t.), OS8ervazioni sopra la Lingua Toscana. Na-
poli. 1759. 1 vol. 12mo.
Cortict!lli (SalMd6re), Regale ed Osservazioni della Lingua To-
8cana. Bil.ssano. 1817. 1 vol. 12mo.
Soave (Franceaco) , Gramatica Raglonata della Lingua Italiana.
Venezia. 1807. 1 vol. 12mo.
Tomano ( Giovanm), The Italian Revived, or an Introduction to
the Italian Tongue. London. 1689. 1 vol. 12mo.
. Palermo {Evangeluta), A Grammar of the Italian Language, in
two Parts. London. 1755. 1 vol. 8vo.
BorsacMini (M. Guelfi), The Tuscan Master. Bath. 1791. 1 vol.
8vo. '
Galigntini (J. .q.), Twenty-four Lecturee on the Italian Lan-
guage, London. 1796. 1 vol. 8vo.
xii
Baretfi (Gimeppe), A New ~ l i n Grammar. London.--I vol.
12mo.
Laune (C.), AGrammar of the Italian Language. London. 1813.
J vol. 12mo.
Ra"ie.6tti (GtUlano), A New Italian Grammar in English and
Italian. London.--I vol. 12mo.
Graglia (G .8.), A "New Gf!lmmar of the Italian Language.
London. 1822. I vol. 12mo. ""
Yergani (N. 11.), A New and Complete Italian Grammar. Leg-
horn. 1824. I vol. 12mo.
De Bold6ni (l'/lbbe), Grammaire Italienne 'dtSveloppee. Paris.
1787. I vol. 12ma.
Sc6ppa (/lnt6nio), E'ltSmens de 10. Grammaire ltalienne. Paris.
1811. I vol. 12mo. .
Bmno (Cesare), Grammaire Italienne. Londres.--l vol. 12mo.
Z61ti, (-"--.-), Grammaire Italienne, et Themes sur 10. Langue
ltalienne. Paris. 1823. I vol. 12mo.
Biagi6li (G.), Grammaire Italienne E'ltSmentaire et RaisonntSe.
Paris. 1819. 1 vol. 8vo.
Especial use has been made of
Compagn6ni (Gimeppe) , Teorica de' Verbi ltaHa.ni, compilata
sullo. O'pere del Cinonio,' del PistoltSsi, del Mastrofini, e d' aItri
pilll\l6stri Gramatici. Milano. 1817. 1 vol. J2mo.
Barberi (J. Ph.), Grammaire des Grammaires ltaHennes, ou Cours
Complet de Langue ltaHenne. Paris. 1819. 2 vol. 8vo.
A
OF THE
ITALIAN LANGUAGE.
INTRODUCTION.
is the art of rightly expreuing our thoughts
by words.
\VORDS may be considered as articulate sound, or as
signs of our thoughts.
Words considered as ARTICULATE are formed
of syllables, and syllables of letters.
LETTERS are certain figures or characters, which re-
preseut sounds and articulations.
SOUNDS are simple emissions of the voice; and ABo-
TICULATIONS are the modifications which the .ounda
receive by the movements of the organs of speech.
The letters which represent the sounds, as, a, t, &c.
lire called vowels; and those which represent the arti-
culations, as, b, c, d, &c. are called consonants, because
they can only be sounded leitA a vowel.
SVLL_\IlLES consist of olle or more letters pronounced
hy a single impulse of tllP. voice, and constituting a
word, or a part of a w()rd; as, a, to; re, king; If-ra,
lyre; a-mi-stci, amity.
1
2
INTRODUQTION.
Words considered as SIGNS 01' OUR THOUGHTS are ill...
vided into different classes, commonly calied PARTS OF
SPEECH. These in Italian are ten, viz. the noun, arti-
cle, mijective, pronoun, verb, participle, adverb, preposi-
tion,' conjUnction, and interjection. .
Of these ten parts of speech, the noun, article, ad-
jective, pronoun, verb, and participle are VARIABLE, that
is, change their termination; the rest are INVA-
lliABLE.
A NOUN is a word, which subsists by itlel' inde-
pendent of any other word, and denotes a person or
thing; as Pietro, Peter; s6le, sun; virtu, virtue.
Nouns are either p'"oper or common.
A proper noun is one, which is individually appli-
cable to a person or-thing; as, Cesare, Cresar; R6ma,
Rome.
A common noUn is one, which may be applied to
all persons or things of the same kind; as, uumo, man;
cittd, city.
There are three things to be considered in nouns,
viz. gender, number, and case.
GernUr is a division of nouns according to sex., Nouns
denoting males are masculine; nouns denoting females
are feminine.' ~
This division, which properly regards only nouns
haying sex, is in Italian extended also to all other nouns,
though they have no sex; so that every noun is either
of the masculine or feminine gender. But there are
certain nouns which belong to booth genders, and these
are Ilaid to be of the common gt'lnder. .
Number is the designation of one or more objects.
There are two numbers, viz. the singular and plural.
, ~ singular designates one single person or thing;
the"plural, more than one person or thing.
Case is, properly, the change of the terminatioR
of noUm to express the relations they bear to eacb
Gther. -
INTRODUCTION.
The Italian hu DO real cases, but has borrowed thi'
term from the Latin, in which nouns bave six dif
ferent terminations, viz. tbe gtflili"e, dati"e,
Iluusati"e, "ocati"e, and ablati"e.
The nomiNati"e represents the slIbject of a proposition.
The genitive denotes the person or thing to whicla
belongs the object of which we speak.
The dative shows the person or thing to which the
object is attributed.
denotes the o'?ject, or the cnd of the
action expressed by tile verb.
The vocative is used for calling or naming the penOD
to whom we speak.
The ablative eXpI'esses tbe object from which a tJting
proceeds, or the manner in which it is done.
The mode of turning nnd changing a noun according
to its several relations, both in the singular and phr-
tal, is called decleJuioll.
Italian Douns are nried by gender Rnd Dumber...
The various relations of nouns, in Latin are de- .
Doted by dilferent terminations, are expK'ssed in ItRHaa
by certain pt'epositiolls placed before them; and for
the 7Iorninati", and accusali"e of the Latin, have beeD
substituted the terms ,ultjective and oldective; anrl for
the genitive, dati"e, and ablative,-the terms relatiort
IIf possession, of attribICtion, nnd of ckri"ation.
The ARTICLE is a small word placed before a noua
to determine the extent of its signification.
Articles are either definite or indefinite.
The de.fillite article determines the particular object
of which we speak; RIl, ii, 10, la, the: illtbro, the book;
lo the Ipur; ia cGsa, the house. ,
The indefinite article 'leaves the object of whit..
we speak in a vague and indeterminate sense.
Tho Italian has no proper indefinite articles; the
English articles a, an, are expressed by the indefinite
pronouns un, uno, llna; as, un cappello, a hat; un.
a looking-glass; una :dba, a goat.
INTRODUCTION.
The Italian articles are varied by gender and Dumber.
An ADJECTtVE is a word added to a noun to express
its quality; as, d6tto, learned; bella, beautiful: un
1I6mo d6tto, a learned man; una bella cittd, a beau
.nul city.
Adjectives may express th.e quality of a noun ei-
ther absolutely, that is, without any relation to other ob-
jects; or "elatively to other objects; which .produces
different dewees of qualification: these have been re-
duced to the following three, viz. the positive, compara-
tive, and superlative.
The positive is the adjective itself expressing the
quality of an object without any relation of compari-
son; as, ricco, rich; p6vero, poor.
'l'he comparative is the adjective expressing a relation
of superiority or inferiority between two or more ob-
jects in comparison; as pill, or meno rlcco, more, or less
rich; pi'll, or meno p6vero, more, or less poor: Pie-
tro pi'll, or meno rlcco di Tommaso " Peter is. more,
or less rich than Thomas; Tommaso e pill, or meno
p6vero di Pietro, Thomas is more, or less poor than Peter.
The superlative is the adjective expressing the quality
of the object in the highest degree of superiority, or
lowest degree of inferiority.
There are two kinds of superlative, the relative and
the ahsolute.
The relative superlative expresses the superiority or
inferiority of an object with relation to 'others; as, il pi'll,
or il meno ricco, the most, or the least rich; il pili, or
it menD p6vero, the most, or the least poor: Pietro il
pill, or il menD ncco,-Tommaso eil pill, or il menD p611e1'0,
eli tUtti; Peter is the most, or the least rich,-Thoma:!
is the most, or the least poor, of all.
The absolute superlative shows that the object spoken
of possesses a quality in the superlative degree, but with-
out reference to any other; as, riccltfssimo, very rich;
poverfssimo, very poor. .
Italian adjectives are varied by gender and number.
INTRODUCTION.
A PRONOUN is a word Used instead of a DOUD, al-
ready expressed, to prevent its frequent repetition.
Pronouns are either personal, POSSt,l'il1e,
demonstrative, interrogative, relative, or indefinite.
The personal pronouns mark the perloll' whose place
they supply. -
The persons are three, viz. the first, second, and
third. The first is the person that speaks; as, 0, I ; n6i,
we: the second is the person to whom we speak; as, til,
thou; v6i, you : and the third is the person of whom
we speak; as, egli, he ; ella, she; eglino or Uleno, they.
The conjunctive pronouns are those, which are always
joined to a verb; as, mi, me; ti, thee; gli, to him; le,
to her; si, himself, or herself; ci, us; vi, you; 16ro, to
them; si, themselves.
The possessive pronouns are those, which mark the
possession of a thing; as, mo, my; tUo, thy; suo, his,
her, or its; n6stro, our; v6stro, your; 16ro, their: il mo
cavallo, my horse; il t40 cappello, thy hat; il sUo libro,
her, or its book; &c.
The demonstrqtive pronouns are those, which precise-
ly point out the particular person or thing to which
they relate; as, questo, this; que-llo, that: questo gi6'1lane,
this youth; quello specckio, that looking-glass.
The intcrrogatilJc pronouns are those, which are used
to interrogate, or a.k a question; as, "chi?, who?; chef,
what?; quUle?, which?: chi e?, who isit?;
are you doing?; qu.afc volete?, which will you have?
The relative pronouns are those, which relate to a
person or thing that has been before spoken of; as,
rhi, who 0/1 he that; clu and il quale, who or which,
tll:lt: chi si umHia si esalta, who, or he that,
himself exalts himself; Pietro che or il quale scnvt,
Peter who or \hat writes; il libro che or il quale oleggo,
the book which or that I read.
- The indefinite pronouns are those, which express a
person or thing in a general and unlimited" sense;
as, aldl1w, some-one; ognuno, e\'crJ'one; niuno, no-
oue; &c."
6
INTRODUCTION.
. Italian pronouns, like the nODnl, are varied by geu-
der and number.
A VERB is a word, which serves to express the beiug-,
action, or passion of a person or thing; as, essere, to
be; agfre, to do; patfre, to suffer or undergo.
Hence the general division of verbs into active, pas-
rive, and neuter.
Active verbs are those which express an action;
as, amare, to love: and necessarily suppose an agent,
and an object acted upon; as, fo amo la virtu, I love
virtue.
Passive verbs express a passion or the receiv-
. ing of an action; as, essere amata, to be loved: and
necessarily imply, like the active, an agent, and an
object acted upon; but with this difference, that in the
passive the object acted uf-0n takes the place of the
agent; as, la virtu e amata da me, virtue is loved
by me.
Neuter verbs express neither action nor passion,
but simply being or a state of being'; as, dormfre, to
sleep: fo d6rmo, I sleep.
To these may be added the pronominal, and the uni-
personal verbs.
Pronominal verbs are those, which are conjugated,
through all their tenses, with the conjunctive pronouns
mi, ti, si, ci, vi, si ; as, penHrsi, to repent one's self:
to mi pento, I repent myself; tu ti penti, thou repentest
thyself; egli si pente, he repents himself; Ula si pente,
she repents herself; &c. .
Unipersonal, or, as they are usually called, imper-
sonal verbs, are those, which. are used only in the third
person singular of each tense; as, accadere, to happen'
accade, it happens j aCClidtk, it happened; accaderd, it
will happen,
Italian verbs are varied by mood, tense, number, and
person. .
Mood is a particular form of the verb, which shows
the manner in which the action is represented,
INTRODUCTION;
'7
There are five moods, viz. the ifljnime, indieatil1',
amdititmal, imperatil1e and
The infinitive expresses the action in an indefinite
manner, and without distinction of penon or Dumber;
as, scrlvere, to write.
The indicati"e represents the action absolutely, and
without any dependence upon any other word; as, fo
scrfvo, I write.
The condititmal represents the action with depend-
ence upon a condition; as, 0 "ri"erei, Be potelsi; I
would write, if I could.
The imperative marks the action in commanding, ex-
horting, or intreating; as, ,c""i, write thou; ,crivett,
write ye; scnmamo, let us write.
The conjunctive represents the action of the verb
with dependence upon another verb with which it is
connected by a conjunction; as, bisogna, cAe fo scrf"a;
. it is necessary, that I write.
Each of these moods, except the imperative, has durer-
ent tenses.
Tense is a distinction of time, which shows when the
action is done. Time strictly speaking is either present,
past, or future.
The present denotes the action doing by an object at the
very time in which we are speaking ;- as, fo canto, I sing.
The past or preterite denotes the action done by an
object before the time in which we are speaking; as,
fo cantai, I sang.
The future denotes the action to be done by an ob-
ject after the time in which we are speaking; as, fo can-
teri}, I will sing.
The present is indivisible; whatever is not present is
preterite, or fnture.
The preterite is divided into imperfect, perfect-difi-
nite, prfect-indefinite, pluperfect-definite, and pluperfect-
iJUlefiniteo .
The imperfect expresses an action done in a time
past, but in respect to another action done in
a time also past; as, fo cantci,va, quando viii entriste ;
I was singing, when you came in.
INTRODUCTION.
,The perfect-dtfinite denotes indeterminately an ac.-
tion done in a time completely past; as, fo canttH ieriJ
I sang yesterday.
The perfect-indefinite expresses an action done in a
time not specified, or in a time specified but not com-
pletely past; as, 1,0 0 cant.1.to un' aria; I have sung
IDa air; fo 0 cantato oggi; I have sung to-day.
The pluperfect-definite denotes an action done before
another in a time past; as, 10 ebbi cantato, quando
giuocai; 1 had sung, when I played. .
The pluperfect-indefinite denotes that an action was
already past when another action also past was done;
10 avel)a cantato, quando finii di ballare; I had sung,
when I finished dancing.
The future is divided into indefinite and definite.
The future-indefinite denotes an action to be done ill
a time yet to come; as, fo cantero, I will sing.
The future-definite denotes that an action not yet
done, will be done, when another action not yet done
sha1l be accomplished; as, fo avro cantato, quando voi
verrete; I shall have sung, ",hen you come.
Each tense contains two uumbflrs; the singular and
plural.
The number is singular when one single object caus-
es the action of the verb; it is plural when two or more
objects contribute to the same action; as, 10 pario, I
speak; n6i parliamo, we speak.
Each number has three different persons, which are
.denoted by the personal pronouns, fo, tu, egli or ella,
in the singular; and n6i, '06i, eglino or elleno, in the
plural ; as, fo veao, J see; tu vedi, thou seest; egli or
UZa veae, he or she lIees: noi vedij,mo, we see; v6i
fJedete, you see; eglino or ellcno "eriono, they see.
The due distribution of verbs into their moods, tenses,
Ilumbers, and persons, is called conjugation.
The term conjugation is also applied to an assemblage
of several verbs fo.rming all their mflods, tenses, ",um-
bers, and persons according to the same rule.
Such verbs as conforQ) to the rule of a conjugation
IN'rRODUcmoN.

are called regular; aDd such all dift"er in any respect are
caUed irregular.
Verbs which are not used in certain tensel, numbers,
or persons, are called difectifJe.
The PARTIGIPLE il an inflexion of the verb, which
partakes at the same time of the nature of the verb and
of the adjective. It partakes of the nature of the verb,
because it has its signification, and has reference to
time; and it partakes of the nature of the adjective,
because, like an adjective, it expresses a quality.
Participles are divided into present and past.
The present participle expresses the action or the
quality of an object at the moment in which we speak;
as, amante, loviug: un u6mo amante, a man loving.
The past participle expresses the action or quality
as perfected or past; as, amato, loved.: UII u6mo amd-
to, a man loved.
These participles are also called active and pa";,,e;
because the first expresses always an action, whilst the
second expresses a passion: amJnte, in the above
example, means ehe ama, who loves; and amoto means
ehe a7l1ato, who is loved.
With the 'participle is usually classed the GICRtlND,
which, like the participle, is an inflexion of the verb,
bnt has notbing in common with the adjective.
Italian participles arc varied, like the adjectives,
by gender and number.
An ADVERB is a word, which serves to modify a verb,
an adjective, or another ;ldverb, expressing the man
ner, quality, or circumstances of its signification.
Adverbs are divided into those of time, place, o.,der,
quantity, &c.
Adverbs of time are those which express some rela-
tion of time; as, ieri, yesterday; 6ggi, to-day; dimrini,
to-morrow: 10 "Wi Uri, I saw him yesterday; vieni
6ggi, come to day; verro dimani, I shall come to-
morrow.
INTRODUCTION.
Adverbs rJf pldu serve to denote the situation or the
distance of an object; as, q u t ~ here; ld, there; tnclno,
Dear; ltmtano, far: s6no qllt, I am here; gu6.rda lei basso,
look yonder; non ~ viclM, it is Dot near; ~ tr6ppo lon-
tMO, it is too far.
Adverbs of order serve to express the arrangement of .
things in regard to one another; as, prIma, first; poi,
then ; &c.: prima andremo in Fr,incia, e poi in Jtiilia ;
we will go first to France, and then to Italy.
Adverbs of quantity are those, which modify an ob-
ject in relation to quantity; as, piu, more; ~ n o iess i
qudsi, alm9st: s6no piu di sei, they are more than six;
Ire ghinee per 10 meno, three guineas at least j s6no
gf4asi Ie dieci; it is almost ten o'clock.
A PAEPOSITION is a word, which is placed before a
Doun, a pronoun, or a verb, to show its relation to some
preceding word j as, in, in ; con, with j metro, after j sino,
till; &c.
Prepositions have several" denominations, viz. of
plau, ortkr, union, separation, &c. according to the sev-
eral relations they express.
A CONJUNCTION is a word, which serves to join sen-
tences together. It sometimes connects only words.
Conjunctions are divided into copu.lative, augme.nta-
five, altlrnative, adversative, &c.
Copulative conjunctions are those, which merely
express an idea of connection; as, e, and; n ~ nor,
neither: mangio e bevo, I eat and drink; n ~ bella,
fIi bu6na, neither handsome, nor good.
Augmentative conjunctions are those, which, besides
the idea of conlJexion, express the idea of increase
or augmentation; as, in6ltre, besides; di pill, more-
over: in6ltre gli dirai, besides you will tell him; di
pi'll cORviene dfrc, moreover it must be said.
Alternative conjunctions mark an alternative or dis-
tinction between the things that they connect; as, 0,
or; ovvero, or else: vuole il bicinco, 0 il nero'! do you
!NTRODUCl'lOK.
11
wish for the white, or the black 1 'UKlieu guiIt_, tIfIfItra
gueUo, choose thia, or else that.
Ad"ersati", conjunctions connect two propolitioDI,
expressing an idea of opposition in the second u
respects the fint j 81, per., but; ~ neverthe-
less; &c.
An INTERJECTION it a word, which ia UJed to es-
press an emotion or affection of the mind; 81, tM I,
ah! ; ola /, ob !; i ~ /, o i m ~ ! alas I, &c.
The affections' of the mind may be of grief, jay, i,..
dignation, contempt, &c. which give to the iuterjectioDl
different denominations.
Words form the whole subject of Grammar.
The collection of the leHers of which the words o(
a language are formed, is called the ALPHABET.
The art of expressing the soundll of the letters, ia
called PBONUNCJATJON.
The art of combining letters into syllables, and s,lla-
bles into words, is called OIlTHOGBAPHY.
That part of Grammar which treats of the different
. sorts of words, and their various modifications, is call-
ed AKALOGY.
That part which treats of the connexion and light or-
derof words aUlong themselves, is called SYNTAX.
OF'1'IIE
ITALIAN
-
THE Italian Alphabet contains twenty-two letters, viz.
(Fig.) (Name.) . (Pron.) (Fig.) (Name.) (ProD.)
A a ak
I
M emme {!1II
1
Jf1&ay
B bi bee N enne
en
l
-1UI!/
C ci ehee 0 0 0
D di dee
i
P pi
r:: E e ay
f
Q
cu
F etTe efl-:fay R erre . erl.ray
G gi jet:
i
s esse ,-sl-say
H acca ahe'-kala
I
T ti tee
I i ee U u 00
J ilungo
ee loonI_go
i
V vi vee
L elle ell-lay Z zeta d
saY
/-ta1
Of these twenty-two letters, A, E, I, 0, U are vow-

consonants; J is considered as a vowel; and H is a
simple sign, baving no sound.
PART I.
0.. THE
ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION.
CHAPTER I.
Of the Pronzmciati01l of Vowels.
a'ra, ah'-raA, altar;
fama, fak'-mak, fame.
E has two sounds, one open, the other close.
E open is pronounced like e in the word
met; as,
A is pronounced like a in the English word father ;
as,
tema, (em'-ak, C
pesca, pt,'kah,
E close is pronounced like ay
day; as,
theme;
peach.
in the English word
Uma, tay/-mak, fear ;
pay'-skah, fishjng.
I is pronouDl:ed like ee in the English word sleep; as,
divlnt), dee-vee'-no, divine; .
finito, fee-netl.to, finished.
2
PRONUNCIATION.
0, as well as E, has two sounds, one open, the other close.
o open is pronounced like 0 in the English word
not; as,
v6to, vol_to, void; ,
C6rso, kor'-so, Corsican.
o close is pronounc"ed like in the English word
note; as,
vOto,
cOrso,
vol-to,
kur'-so,
vow;
course.
goodness;
aloes;
so i
bonfire;
virtue.
bon-tah
'
,
a1t,.lo, ay',
ko-see
'
,
fak-loh
'
,
veer-tool,
U is pronounced like 00 in the English word doom i as,
duro, doo
'
-'1"o, hard;
t/J,tto, tootl-to, all.
When these vowels are at the end of worns marked
with an accent, they have a quick and sharp pronun-
ciation, which very seldom occurs in the English lan-
guage; as,
bontd,

cosi,
JaUl,
"irt'll,
CHAPTER II.
Of tAt Pronunciation of Consonants.
THE consonants, except C, G, S, Z, are pronounced
as in English.
C before the vowels a, 0, u, is pronounced hard, like
k in English; or like c in the English words cabin,code,
eook; as,
casa, kah'-sah, house;
c611o, kol'-lo, neck;
cUra, koo
'
-'1"ah, care.
Before the vowels e, i, it is -soft, like eTa
in the English words eherry, chilly; as,
fUl, cMy
l
4ah, supper .;
cfbo, chee'-lJo,
-.
PRONUNCIATIOl'f.
---
je,a1&r-dee'''''o, garden;
je,ori-no, dRy;
je;oo'-du-e1&ay, judfl8.
It takes the IwnJ .ound if an AI iI pieced .wee.
it and the vowels 0 e, i; u in the syllab" ., eM,
kay, kee;
- elifo, kay'-to, quiet;
eM"o, leu'-fUJ, incliDeCl.
And it takes the soft sound jf an i is placed bet"".
it and the vowels a, 0, II; III in ei4, ci6, eiV ; cAt.pJI,
clu,o', CMIJO';
cidlda, clu,ahl'-dd, wafer;
ci6mpo, clu,om'-po, carder;
ciurma, crew.
If cc come before the vowels e, i, the former t: is
pronounced like t, the latter retaining ill proper IOUJId;
as,
QUelltO, dt.dm'to, accent;
acddio, a1&t-eItt:eNI, slaugbter;
faccia, fdt'-che,ah, face;
HJ.ccio, loot'-che,o, pike;
lacci1l61o, IDAk1&e,oo,o'-Io, .nue.
G before the vowels a, 0, II, i. pronounced .."u i.8
tbe English word. g""', gou, good; as,
gabbia, cap ;
g6l4, go'-liM, throat,
gU.to, p'.,to, ta.te.
Before the vowel. 0t:, i, it is pronouDc:ecl 111ft, liM j
iB the Engli.b word. jut,jiK; a,
gelo, jay'-lo, frolt ;
giro, ju'-ro, turn.
It takes the 1&arrJ sound if an 1& i. placed between
it and the vowels e, i; u jn g1&e, gli; g1&u;
glaiJllbo, gaym'-io, crooked,
g1&lro, gliu'-ro, dormoUle.
And it takes the .oft sound if an i is placed between
it and the vowels a, 0, II; as, in gid, gi6, gi'i je,aA',
ie,o', je,DO' ;
giardino,
gi6rno,
giudice,
16 PRONUNCIATION.

When gg come before the vowels e, i, the former g
is pronounced like d; as,
oggetto, odjet'.ta, object;
oggi, od'-jee, to-day;
pi6ggia, pe,nd'-je,ak, rain;
raggio, raJuJ'-je,o, ray;
aggiunta, ahd-je,oon'-tah, addition.
S in the beginning of words; and in the middle of'
words, when preceded or followed by another consonant,
Qr when doubled, is pronounced sharp, as in the English
words saint, pulse, discount, assembly; as,
santo, sakn'-to, saint;
gelsa, jel'-sah, mulberry;
e'sca, ay'.skak, bait;
lesso, les'.so, boiled.
Betwe!ln two vowels it is g(lnerally pronounced flat,.
or soft, something like s in the English word easy,
though not so soft or similar to z; as,
vbo, vee'so, visage;
'sp6sa, spo'-saA, spouse.
It is pronounced sharp in the last syllable of all adjee-
aves ending in6so,. 6sa; as, _
virtu6so, fJeer-too-o'.IIO, virtuous;
maest6sa, mah-ay-sto'sah, majestic.
And in the last syllable of all Douns and adjectives
that end in ese, usa, usa, it is pronounced flat or soft,
like z, or lil\e s in the English word easy; as,
arnese, alar-nay'-zay, harness;
palese, palr.-lay'-zay', manifest;
abUso, ala-boo'-zo, abuse;
tkluso, day-lvo'-zo, deluded;
musa, moo'-zak, muse;
confusa, kon-forl-zak, confounded.
Z, likewise, i. pronounced sometimes sharp, and some
times flat; but no certain rule can be given respect-
,
It can only be said, that, when z is single or in the
beginning of words, it is generally pronounced flat, or
soft, like ds in the English word Windsor; as,
PRONUNCIATION.
11
aJab-bon-dalm'-saJa, abundance;
tke-lee-jen'-saJa, diligeuce;
lon'-sd, panther.
lAzaro, lalt'.tbalrro, Lazarul;
zodiaeo, zodiac.
And when it is double, in the middle of WOrdl, it il
generally pronounced slarp, like Is in the Englilh word
hemfils; as,
farzoletto, falat-so-kt'-to, handkerchief;
beUezza, bel-let-salt, beauty.
It is pronounced slaarp in all words, in which it is
followed by two vowell, the former being aD i; or pre-
cedet.( by the consonanta I, _, r; as,
grazia, gralt'-tsu-a1l, grace;
spezie, spay'-tSUJoaY, Ipeciel;
no, tsee'-o, uncle;
calza, kalil'-tsalt, Itocking ;
dtmzella, don-t,el'-lnA, dameel ;
sc6rza, skarl-tsail, bark.
In the last syllable of all word!! ending in O:n%(l, btu,
6JIza, it is pronounced lomething like, in the Englilb
word stife; as,
abbond6.nza,
diligenza,
16nza,
CHAPTER In.
Of Jand H.
J is considered as a vowel in Italian. It is used in-
Itead of ii in the / plural of those nouns which in
the singular end in io unaccented, temple,
spc1zio, space; and it is sounded like ee in tbo English
word fee, separately pronounced, as,
timId, for timpii, tem'-pe,e, temples;
sp'bj:, for spdzii, spal'-tse,e, Ipaces.
We very often in books meet with words in whichj
is used instead of i, either at the beginning or in the
middle of words; as, in jeri instead of ieri, yester-
day; juridico instead of iuridico, lawful; n6ja inltead
2-
18
PRONUNCIATION.
of Mia vexation; librajo instead of libraio, bookseller;
but this use is not approved by the authors of the Voca-
bolario della Crusca.

I have;
thou hast;
he has;
they have;
H, whether in the beginning, or in the middle of words,
has no sound in Italian.
It is only used,
1. disti::Uisb words,
Mi, ah'-ee, (verb)
Aa, ak,
kanno, ahn'-no,
it is a
ah!
alas!
ohl
aM
day!
o!
oo!
&c.
And in each case h has no particular sound j
sign, a mark of distinction, rather than a letter.
from
0, 0, or;
a"i, ak'-ee, prep. & article) to the;
a
J
ak, preposition) to ;
anno, ahn'-no, (noun) year.
2. To denote the hard sound of the consonimts, c, K,
before the vowels e, i; as, in
cherico, kaY'-ree-ko, clergyman;
china, kee'-naIl, declivity;
gherbino, gayr-bee'-no, the south-west wind;
gMgno, gkee'-n,yo, smile.
3. To prolong the sound of the vowels a, e, 0, tt,
in the interjections,
Ah!
Deh!
Ok.'
Uh!
OJ the Pronunciation oj Syllables.
Ck followed by the vowels ia, ie, io, iu, as in the syl-
lables chia, chie, ckia, chill, is prunounced like k in the
English word kind; k,yah', k,yay', k,yd, k,yoo' ;
ckiave, k,yah'-vay, key;
chiesa, k,yay'-sah, church;
chiam.a, k,yo'-mah, head of hair;
chiusa, k,yoo'-sah, hedge.
Gil. followed by the vowels ia, ie, io, iu, as, in the syUa-
bles ghid, ghie, ghi6, ghiu, is pronounced like g in the
English word guide; g,yaJt, g,yay', g,yo', g,yoo;
ghianda, g,yahn'-dak, acorn;
ghiera, g,yay'-rah, quivpr;
gAi6tto, g,yot'-to, glutton j
teggkiuzza, teg-g,yoot'-sal., baking-paD.
Gl followed by-the vowels a, t, 0, u, is pronounced hard,
in the English words glance,gleR,glory,gloamy ; as,
gladiat6re, glah.dee-an,..to'-ray, gladiator;
gleba, . glay'-bah, glebe;
-glubo, glol-bo, globe;
glutine, gloa'-tee-nay, glue. ,
Followed by the vowel i, it is pronounced liquid, like,
11 in the English word ,b,"illiaRt; as,
gli, l,yee, the, or to him;
e'gli, ay'-l,yee, he;
qucgli, ,kway'-l,yee, he that. ,
It has the same sound in all tbe words in which gli
is followed by another vowel; as,
v6g1ia, va' -l,yah, desire;
m6g1ie, mol-l,yay, wife;
d{{lio, chee'-l,yo,
jigliuMo, jee-l,yoo,o'.lo, son.
But, in all the words in which gli is followed by a
consonant, gl is pronounced hard, as in the
word glimmer; as,
negligente, nay-glee-ien'-tay, negligent;
Anglicano, ahn-glee-kah'-no, Anglican;
f .
r
I
I

I
PRONUNCIATION.
CHAPTER IV.
19
20
PRONUNCIATION.
band;
sottish;
dry.
It has the same sound in the words,
A'ngli, aknl-glee, Englishmen;
A'nglia, aknl-glee-aA, England.
Gn in the syllables gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, is pro-
nounced liquid, something like ni in the English word
onion; n.yak', n,yay', n,yee', n.yo', n,yoo'; as,
magtigna, mall-gah'.n,yah, blemish;
agnello, ah-n,yel'-lo, lamb;
inc6gnito, een-ko'-n,yee-to, unknown;
bis6gno, bee-so'-n,yo, need;
ignudo, ee-lI,yoo'-do, naked.
Sc followed by the vowels a, 0, u, is pronounced hard,
like sk in English ;-or like sc in the English words
scant, sconce, scoop; as,
scMa, skall'-lah, ladder;
sc6rno, skor'.llo, scorn;
scltsa, skoo'-zak, excuse.
Followed by the vowels e, i, as, in the syllables
ue, sci, it is prorrounced soJr, like sA in the English words
shdl, ship; shay', shee;
scena, shay'-nah, scene;
sdmia, sheel-mee-ak, ape.
It takes the hard sound, if an h is put between it and
the vowels e, i, as in the syllables sche, schi; akay, skee ;
scherno, skayr'-no, mockery;
schifo,. skee'-fo, skiff.
And it takes the soft sound if an i is put between it
and the vowels a, 0, u, as in the syllables seia, sci6, scilt;
she,ah', she,o', 5he,00';
jauia, jah'-she,ak,
seiileeo, she,ok'-ko,
asciittlo, ak-she,ool-to,
Sch followed by the vowels ia, ie, io, iu, as in the
syllables schia, schie, schi6, schilt, is pronounced like sk
in the English word sky; sk,yah', sk,yay', sk,yo', Sk,yoo';
schifvo, sk,yali'-vo, slave;
sehUna, sk,yay'-nala, the back j
PRONUNCIATION.
21
schi6ppo, sk,yop'-po, musket;
schiu7lla, sk,yoo'Jfllah, froth.
The syllables gua, gue, gUI, are pronounced like pah,
pay, gwu in English; as,
g'llCincia, gwahn' -che,ah, cheek;
guerra, gwayrJ--rah, war;
guida, gwee'-da/a, guide.
The syllables qua, que, qtlf, quo, have the same
sound that kw"n', kway', kwd, boo', have in English; _
as,
gwinto,
questo,
quiete
quotidiano,
kwahnJ-to, how much;
kway-sto, this;
kwu-ayJ.tay, rest;
daily.
,
General 'f!,emtJrks on the Italian Pronuraciation.
ITALIAN words are pronounced exactly as they are
written, there being no silent letter except 1.
Every vowel preserves always its proper sound, inde-
pendent of the letters which 8(:company it.
When consonants are doubled, each of them is sepa-
rately pronounced; and when or more vowels come
together, they are pronounced distinctly one after
another, as they are written; as,
errore, ayr--ro'--ray, error;
attrezzi, aht-lrd'see, utensils;
a'ere, ah',ay-ray, air;
B6rea, boJ-rfly,ah, Boreas;
.fiore, fe,o'-ray, flower;
v6i, voJ,ee, you;
u6mo, oo,oJ-mo, man;
miei, me,ay',ee, my, or mine;
tu6i, too,o',ee, thy, or thine.
If a word ends with a consonant, and the follow-
ing word begins with a vowel, the consonant of the for-
\
\
22
I
PRONUNCIATION.
mer, in the pronunciation, is joined to the vowel or first
syllable of the lauer; as,
per am6re, pe-ramore, pay-ralwrul-ray, for
love;
61'and' ang6scia, gran-dango'scia, grairt-dalm-gll-sM,aJa,
-great anguish.
And when gli precedes a word beginning with a vow-
el, the vowel or first syllable of the latter is joined
to gli, so as to form a single syllabic; as,
gli onlJri, glio-1I6ri, l,yo-no'-ree, the bonodi'll;
6ccAi, beglioe-chi, bay-l,yokJ-ku, beautiful eyer.
Rule, for determining ",ken tlle vowels E, 0, at'e prll-
7Wunced open or close.
E is pronounced. open,
1. When it is deriVed-from as io
rege, king;
impero, empire.
2. When it comes after the vowel i j as in
- - light;
.ft.era, a wild beast.
S. At the end of words when is unaccented; as in
. voce, voice;
g6te, cheeks.
4. When it .is preceded by an r joined to any other
consonant; as in
'crema, cream;
greve, hea\'y.
5. When it is followed by two different consonants;
as in
veste, garment ;
,erto, wreath.
6. When it is followed by tt; as in
affetfo, kindness;
perfetto, perfect.
PRONUNCIATION.
is
7. In the terminations htto, hua, mo,
esialo; in their ; and ia their plural; as ia
bird;
premo, I press;
sentellZ(J, sentence ;
sen"o, serioua :
earth;
t:entesirao, hundl'edeJa.
E is close,
1. When it is derived from the latin i j as i.
pUo, bair;
letteTa, letter.
2. When it is immediately followed by an j as i.
" supper;
pena, pain:
Uoleu it comes after an i, as in ldaihla, tbe beck; wbeD It Is.,,..
s. At the end of words wben it is acceated; as ia
[merce1 reward ;
he feared:
Escept iD foreign Dames as NOll, Noah; NoN, MOUI"i ...
-t. In die, what, and its compounds; as
perclai, [percli] wby;
fuorchl, [fuorcAeJ except.
5. When it is followed by M ; as in
bint ;
pen.
6. In the monosyllables, _, me; ru, u.; u, himself;
te, thee; &c.
7. In the terminations Sggio, 110, Ito,
8zzo j in their feminine; and in thf'ir plural; as in
a walk;
anger;
neguo, I follow;
I1elo, veil;
fresco, I play;
Qceto, vinegar ;
rezzo, shade:
PRONUNCIATION.
Except wbere, in tbe termination eguo, it is preceded b, r joined
to another consonant, as ill Ireguf1, truce; and where, In tlte ter-
mination eto, is preceded hy r joined to another consonant, or
by a vowel, sa in deereto, decree, queto, quiet; when it ia upen.
o is pronounced opEn,
1. When it is derived from the latin au; as in
o'ro, gold;
tes6ro, treasure.
2. In all words which the accent falls upon the D "
as in
b6sco, wood ; .
o'rto, garden.
3. At the end of words when it is accented; as in
amo, [am6] lie loved;
cantero, [canttr6] I will sing.
4, When it is preceded by u " as in
cu6re, heart ;
fu6co, fire.
5. When it is immediately preceded by an r joined to
another consonant; as in
pr6va, proof;
tr6vo, I find.
6. When it is followed by two or three consonants,
the first being an s; as in
r6spo, toad;
chi6stro, cloister.
7. In the last syllable but one of those words in which
it is followed by a double consonant; as in
n6tte, night;
t6sse, cough.
8. In the monosyllables do, I give; fo, 1 do; no, not;
so, I know; sto, I stuy; va, I go; &c.
9. In the terminations 6so, 6sa, of nouns, and in their
plural ; as in
rip6so, rest;
sp6sa, spouse.
10. In the terminations 6g1io, 6g1ia, 6g1ie, and in their
plural; as in
f6g1io, a sheet of paper;
PRONUNCIATION. 25
,,6glia,
c6g1ie,
wish;
he gathers.
o is dose,
1. When it is derived from Latin the "; as in
colpa, sin;
p8lve, dust.
2. "When it is at the end of words and the accent falls
upon some other vowel; as in
amo, [amoJ I love;
p6mo, [p6mo] apple.
s. In all words in which it is preceded by an "'; as in
m8nco, maimed;
multo, much.
.c. When it is followed by nt; as in
monte, mountain;
fr8nte, forehead.
5. In monosyllables in oi; as n8i, we; "oi, you; &c.
ElI:cept pOi, then; nOi, thou tired; where 0 is open.
6. In the terminations
in their plural; as in
amortJso,
paurOsa,
7. In the terminatioDs
as in
oso, osa, of adjectiws, and
full of love ;
fearful.
aio, oia, and in their plural;
jilatdio, spinning-wheel;
mangiatdia, manger.
8. In the terminations ogno, ogna, and in their plu-
ral; as in
bisOgno, want;
verg8gna, shame.
9. In the terminations 000, ana, one, and in thcirplu-
ra]; as in
pertUno, forgiveness;
corOna, crown;
ragiOne, reason.
10. In the terminations oro, ora, ore, and
plural; as in
corD, choir;
3
in their
PRONUNCUTI9N.
adOra,
fiOrI,
adore. ;
1Iowel::
E:lcer.t when 0 is used instead or the IIU or the Latin, u ill fIlUro,
laore J where it is OJICII.
There are many words containing I, 0, which are Dot
comprehended in any of the preceding classes.; bu.
they are too various to be reduc:ed to general rules.
It may be observed, boweTer, with regard to the e, that
when there is in a word an e close and the accent falls
upon it, if by the addition of one or more syllables to die
word, the accent is transferred to one of the following
syllables, the e which was close becomes opefl; as,
I think, pensier6so, (.pensier6so] pensive;
Calsar, cesareo, Lcesareo] imperial.
And with regard to the 0, when the accent renders the
sound of the 0 OPC", if, OD account of the addition of ODe
or more syllables to the word, the accent passes to one
of -t"e following syllables, the 0 open becomes close; 81,
6rts, garden, orticHlo, [orticello] little garden;
b6sco, wood, bllsClaetto, (bOs'hetto] thicket.
.-
A SVNOPTICAL TABLE
OJ' TBE
SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.
(Letters.)
~ 1
:I
E l ~
~
(SOUDds.)
f
a] (father;
e Imet;
ay i I day;
-
(Examples.)
fama,
tema,
te_a,
(ProuuDciatioD.)
fala'-maA,
tem'-tiA,
. tay'..aA,
fame.
theme.
fear.
~
-0
~ .
I
{u ~ s ~ ,uep;
I
o
u
~
IT
~

00
flDt;
Mte;
tlomrI ;
dittfno,
,,610,
,,8to,
cl'ro,
,ue-41ee'-fUJ,
fJO'-to,
"o'-to,
lo.'-ro,
diviDe.
void.
vow.
hard.
...
""
ca, kalr.; ceis., kalr.'-saA, house;
Nl
oe
..}
co, ko; c611o, kol'-1o, neck;

..., ...
cu, koo; cUra, koo'-raTa, care;
J ?.l che, kay; cheto, kay'-to, quiet;

cTai, kee; chblo, kee'-no, inclined.
C
}
ce, cllay; cena, eTaay'-nah, supper;
...
ci, eTaee; dbo, ehee'-bo, food;
...
f5
cia, che,alr.' ; cidlda, ehe,ahl'-daA, wafer;
"
ci6, che,a' ; ei6mpo, ehe,om'-po, carder;
0
ciu, ehe,oo' ; ciurma, ehe,oor'-malr., crew.

cc I
1
t-eooy' ; accento, alr.t-eTien'-to, accent;
(")
.s
eee,

t<-::
cci, t-ehee' ; acc1dio, aht-ehee'-dee-o, slaughter;
J:
r
eciei, t-ehe,aTa' ; Jaccia, JaM-' ehe,alr., face;

t
..:.3
eci6, t-ehe,o' ; luccio, loot'-cl&e,o, pike;
=
J eeiu, t-ehe,oo' ; laht-che,oe,o'-lo, snare.
h
d
}
ga, gaTa; g6bbia, gahb'-bee-alr., cage;
0<1
..
!
go, go; g61a, go'laTa, throat;
G

gu, goo; gUsto, goo'-sto, taste;

l
.s
ghe, gay; gJ&e'lllOO, gaym'-bo, crooked;
100
ghi, ghee; gAiro, g'hee'oro, dormouse.
!

1
ge, jay; gflo, jay/.lo, frost;
51llit
gi, Jet; FO,
jee/-ro, turn;
Q
.....:::,
gid, je,aA' ; giardfno, je,ahr-dee''''I/,o, garden;
0> ...
gi6, je,o' ; gi6rno,
. /
day;

Je,or -no,
J
giu, je,oo' ; giUdice, je,oo'-cke-ellay, judge.

oo{
}
gge, d;jay'; oggetto, od-jet'-to, object;

a
...
ggi, rJ.jee' ; 6ggi, od'-jee, to-day;
"d

ggia, d-je,aA' ; pi6ggia, pe,od'-je,ala, rain;
!

ggi6, d;jt,O' ; raggio, ralld'-je,o,

,
ray;
!2l
ggiu,
; aggiunta, a1J;je,oon'...tall, addition.

sd1lto, salln.!to, saint;

C':l
t J
g
elsa
,
jef-sall, mulberry;

esca, ay'-skoA, bait ;

.5.1
le.so, ks'.so, boiled;
J .. virtu6so, veer-toQ-6'-so, virtuous;
..
maest6sa, maJa...ay-sto'-sal, majestic.
S

vuo, vee'.56, visage;
{ .... f:
sp6sa, spo'-sal, spouse.
JIB
t.rrnlse, alr-nay'-zay, 'harness;
...

==
pa-""lay'-zay, manifest;
M
:5'
aWso, aA-6oo'-zt>, abuse;
Ilt
o.
delUso, day-kJo'-zo, deluded;
ii_a
musa, JIIOO' -zaA, muse;
confusa, ktJn,.foo'-zoJa, confounded.
jazzoletto, ja1&t-so-lef-to, handkerchief;
CAl
0
t:
bellezza, . bel-let'-sah, beauty;

fTah' -tsee-ah, grace;
t
.!
spezle, spay'-tsee-ay, species;
.S
%10, tsee'-o, uncle;
4
ccUza, kahl'-tsala, stocking;
J
donzeUa, don-tsel'-lah, damsel;
Z sc6rza, ,kor'-tsah, bark. .

lAzaro, lah'-dsala-ro, Lazarus;
zodiaco, dso-dee'-alt-ko, zodiac.
I'd

..
abbondanza, ahb-bon-dahrlJ-sala, abundance;
diligenza, riee-ke-jen'-sah, diligence;

.!i!
16nza, lon'.sah, panther.
to ...
}

-
temp,j, tem'-pe,e, temples;
0
J
0; f! g
.. It= spazj, spah'-tse,e, spaces.
.... e
.. c>.
}
chia, k,yah' ;
clairfve, k,ya1&'-vay, key;
CH
cllie, k,yay' ; r,hiesa, k,yay'.sah, church;

chi6, k,yo' ; ehi6ma, k,yo'-mah,
head of hair;
ole eMU., k,goo' ; ckiusa, k,yoo'.saA,
hedge.
{ i }
gAid, ; gAicfnda, g,yahn/-dak, acorn;
OH

g,ya:/ ; glriera, g,yay'-ra1&, quiver;
Q.! .
gAia, g,yo ; gkiatto, g,yot'-to, glutton;
J ghifJ, ; teggkifJzza, teg-g,yoot'-sak, baking-pan.
r
cl
J
gla, glaA; gladiat6re, gladiator;
ol/
I
I
gk, glay; gleba, glay'-bah, glebe;

1
glo, glo; gl6bo, glo'-bo, globe;
J
a
gIll, gloo; glUtine, gloo'.tu-nay, glue;
i
GL
gli, glee; negligente, nay-glee;jm'-tay, negligent.
0

}
gli, l,yee' ; ay'-l,yte, he, or to him I
('.l
} .1
glid, l,yah' ; ,,6g1ia, vo'-l,yaA, desire;
S
. i
glie, l,yay; m6glie, mo'-l,yay, wife;

gli6, l,yo' ; cSglio, ,Me'I,yo, eye-brow;

l::l
gli", ',yoo' ; Jigli1l61o, fu.l,yoo,o'.lo, child.
{ }
1fJUJ,
n,yaTr; lIIagtfgna, malt-gak'.""yak, blemish;
.9 .
p, n,yay'; agnello, ah-n,yel'.lo, lamb;
GN
... !
grai, nyee'; inr.6gaito, een-ko'-n,yee-to, unknowD; ll'
;ig
po, n,yo'; bis6gno, bee-so'-n,yo, need;
n,yoo'; ignUdo, 'ee-JI.,yoo'-do, naked.
Ul
gnll,
...
r
I 1
C f

sc

i I
l
{
... I
"'", .t r
SCH 1
o l:S- .....
=.... "l
02
sea,
seo,
seu,
selie,
Si:hi,
see,
set,
seitt,
sei6,
uiu,
sehia,
sclaie,
selai6,
sc1aiu,
skala ;
sko ;
skoo;
skay;
skee;
SMy;
sftee;
sie,sIr ;
slu,o' ;
she,OO'1
sk,yah' ;
slt,ylJy' ;
sk,yo' ;
sk,yolJ' ;
scala,
se6rno,
scUsa,
seherno,
sehifo,
scena,
scimia,
flseia,
sci6cco,
asciiAlto,
sclaicivo,
-schiena,
scki6ppo,
sclaiuma,
skah'-lalt,
skor'-no,
skoo'-zah,
skayr'-no,
skee'-fo,
shay'-naA,.
shee'-mee-ah,
fak' -slae,aA,
sAe,oIc'-ko,
ala-she,oot'-to,
sk,yo1&'-vo,
sk,yay,-nah,
slc,yop'-po,
sk,yoo'-mah,
ladder;
scorn;
tlxcuse;
mockery;
skiff.
scene;
ape;
band;
sottish;
dry.
slave;
the back;
musket;
froth.
c.a
M
j

Ifutf,,}
, I>

quit,}
que, I>

"', -
u6,
r gwah'!
gway;
L gwee';
{
kuJaA;
kuJay';
kuJu';
kuJo';
,
gudncia,
guerra,
gWla,
quanto,
questo,
quiete,
quotidiano,
gvJahn'-de,ah,
Ifwayr'-rah,
Ifwee'-dah,
.cheek;
war;
guide.
~
r ak,ay;
dere, aA',ay-ray, air;
al,
a",ee
mai, mak',ee, never;
00, all,o; Paolo, poh',o-lo, Paul;
au, ak,oo ; aur6ra, aA,oo-ro'.,.aA, aurora;
ea, ay,an; B6rea, bo'ray,ak, Boreas;
ee, ay,ay; veemente, vay,ay-men'-tay, vehement;
ei, aY,ee; Dei, day',ee, Gods;
eo, ay,o; E'olo, ay',o.lo, Eolus;
toa
eu, ay,oo ; Eur6pa, ay,oo-ro'-pah, Europe;
~
ia, e,ak; jidto, fe,ak'.to, breath;
~
ie, to,ay; miMe, me,ay'-lay, honey;
io,
.:l
e,o ; .fi
6
re, f/!,o'-ray, flower;
i'll,
:.:l
e,oo ; piuma, pe,oo' ,maA, feather;
oi, o,ee; v6i, "o',ee, you;
aa, oo,ak; guan,ia, goo,akn'-ene,ah [pa1&n'-che,al] ,
~ cheek;
ae,
I oo,ay; questo, koo,ay'-sto [klDay'-sto], this;
ui,
l~ /
lui, wo',ee, him ;
ao, 116mo, oo,o'-nw, mani
iei, e,ay,ee; miei, me,ay' ,ee, my, or mine;
aoi, oo,o,ee; 1u6i, 100,0' ,ee, thy, or thine;
iuo, e,oo,l} ; figlill6lD, fee-l,ye,oo,o'.1D [fu-l,yoo,o'-ID],
child;
Cd
Cd
iuoi,
',DO,o,u ;
lauiu6i, lti1&1-cltl.,oo,o' p, IDarel.
Words of Similar Ortlwgrap'ky, but of Different' Signification, distinguiihed
by the Different SoUfid 8j E, o.
(R

ProDounced with e open.

accetta,
hei,
Dei,
[e],
esca,
jero,
jeste,
legge,
mele,'
messe,
mezzo,
nei,
perfJ,
pesca,
pesco,
peste,
$ete,
tema,
'emi,
he accepts;
handsome;
Gods;
is;
let him go out;
fierce;
feasts;
he reads;
honey;
harvest;
middle;
moles;
let him perish ;
peach;
peach tree;
plague;
you are;
theme;
;
ProDOlJDced with e'do8f.
auUta, axe;
be;' drink tholl ;
of the ;
e, and;
bait;
flro, they made;
jute, you made;
legge, law;
mile, apples;
*sse, masses;
too ripe;
nei, in the;
pear;
pest;a, fishing;
I fish;
peste, tracks ;
sete, thirst;
tana, fear;
t""i, thou fearest ;
I
s

PJeggia,
viglio,
w.ena,

cask;
an old man;
oats;
winds;
v6ggia,
veglio,
vena,
venti,
let him lee;
I am wake;
vein;
twenty.
./
Pronounced with 0 opetIl
accorrlJ, to receive;
acc6rsi (mi), I perceived;
Mtte, blows ;
dJgli, thou gatherest;
dJllo, neck;
caito, gathered;
Cfwso, Corsican;
sea-eoast;
fosu, ditches;
F6ro, the Bar;
indOtto, ignorant;
posta, post;
rocca, fortress;
r6go, funeral pile ;
r6sa, rose;
sc6po, scope;
Pronounce!! with 0 cZo-.
acc6rre, he runs;
acc8rsi, I ran ;
Mtte, pipe ;
c8gli, with the;
with the;
"'lto, cultivated;
c6rso, course ;
c8stG, it costs;
flsse, that he might be ;
flro" hole ;
ind8tto, induced;
p8st., place ;
roC", distaff ;
,.oge, blackberry bush;
rOsa, gnawed;
sc6po, I sweep;

i
I
e.t
\II
ProDDunced with 0 open.
,
sc6rsi,
s6no,
torre,
t6rta,
t6sco,
fJ61go,
fJ6lto,
.6to,
I perceived;
sound;
to take away;
twisted;
poison;
I turn;
turned;
void;
PrODOIUlced with 0 c!ole.
scorsi, I ran over
sono, I am;
torre, tower;
torta, tart;
Tosco, Tuscan ;
volgo, the vulgar;
v8lto, face;
voto, vow'
toll
O'l
;
I
,"
..
..
.
"
,. .. (
.
, .
. . ,
PART II.
'-
OJ' TBE
...
.
.. .
"
.
, 'ITxLIAN'ORTHOGRAPHY.
CHAPTER J.
Of tke Accent.'
THE Accent) in Orthography, is' a small sign placed
upon the "vowels of words to determine their pl'0nun- ..
ciauon. '.
There are twoac:cents in Italian) the grafJe aDd the
.
.The grave accent ill an oblique line dra'Yn from the-
left to the I:ight (').; and the acute) an oblique litu!
from the right t9 left (I)
.These accents generallJl' put ,all words ,in which a letter
or syllable I!as been as in milio, "irtu, in which v, and
te, de, or e are' from natitlo, native,; tlirlule, mrlude,
or Ilirllle, virtue: ...,. .
.. , And on those words in which the sameness of spellin,; might
produlll! II confRs",n of signification; as in perd, but; balla, pow-
er ;, &C. to dist4nguish them from pero, pear-tree; batie, nurse; &c.
The grave accent is put,
1. On those nouns ending in ta, which in Latin ter-
minate in tas, and in English in ty; as,
. ..
4
II
'.,-
'.
,"
..
. .
. ' .
; .
,. -
..
.
. , .
":"' ..
..
.
.. .'
, .
..
J.' :
".. -
'.
:.. ..., ...
0' .
.. ".
....
, ........
.. .'
ORTHOGRAPHY 38
.: . ["ufitasJ .' castitd,. chastity;
. . J onestd, . honesty.
2. On n01.\1JtI ending in u; as,
.. Corfi, Corfu;
, trilN, ' tribe.
S. On nouns ending in i; as"
alcaU,' alkali; ,
. crimisl, . crimson. '0 -.. .
4: On the first and third pe.-soJ1S singular of. ..
ture of all verbs; as, 0 '. :. .,'
amer
o
,' love; amerd, " "0
temero, I will fein ; temere, . be will fear.; .
smtir;', hear; sentird, hear.
5. O. 'the third person singular of the perfect-defi- .
aite of all those verbs in which the fil,'st persoa of :the -
same tense terminates with two vowels; 8S, . ..
[canMi, sang; J canto, sang; ,.
I believed ;] 'he believe.d';
slept; ] dorml, , slept. .
6. the words oibo, y ; orsu, come; .cosl, .so, or
thus ; just now; coil, cold, 'costl, costd, there; and
the interjections (fime, alas; &c. ,
. 7. Gn the words cio, this, or that; gid, already; giu,
below; pill, more'; pud, may, or can;' qua, qui, here j' ,.
which are written with a grave accent in order to mow -
that the two vowels are to be pronounced both in oDe,
:, 9ylIable.
8. And on the words
di, (nolln, or verb) day, or say thou;
dG { S ; .-
(verb) {IS;
ld,
(adverb) there;
it,
I
(affirmativ'e parti- .
si, cle, or adverb) ,. yes, 011 so ;
(negative particl,e, 'th
,.:) nor, or nel er;
or cOJ'lJunc..oD .
' (conjunction) .' because;. ' , .
in which the grave accent is used as a mark or dis:', '
tinction between them, and the words .

.. . , .". :
..
.
.- .
-
# '" . -
, ......
'.
"
:,.
", 4t) ...
"
'. '.
,,:. 't.

,"
to more agreeable; ;'; '.
. '. . [qlle,lo u6mo] qMll' u6mo, this UlIID ;
:., . {!luellQ cUbero, that tree: .
.. .
. . The' Italians .write with an apostrophe, . _ '.'
: . 'i:,Tbe articles 10, la, VJe, making an elision oft,pe vow-
words beginnillg with a ,.,'
. .' -" -I'. on6rf, . the hOl!our; .. '. . -/ _ ..
....: l' " .,: : _
. \rtlclllS are. also written without an ap9slro- ,
", '. phe; iii,' ."' . I '. I' ". r f .,.. _
.', '.. ' ". the love -: .' ...;( ... -:-
. '. . . ' la enerjria, tbe energy: ....
.... ': )Jut tbe article la, the, is followed by aD ti, -it it ..
. . , Wltb. lin apos
tro
l?he; BB,. .' ".'. . '. ci " .
-;...... , " . l'amma,,, ,theeoul: ".,-; I-:.. .. .
... j.. . .. ' ,. . ... ......
. '. ", .. The article {!Ii, the, when it is followed'by aD i; at,;'.
. :' ." {'. ft.l' ingegni, : . ..; . .' ' ". .-.,'
.' l' <.J_J" It 'd I ..' "'. -
.; ".'; ..... g ,_'I,. ." t e J 0 S" . . f.'
-' s:-Tbe uticle' Ie, the, whell the foUdwiug -'Ord'beglD' '" a.
'With e; as, . .,
: k '. ..1' the heresies; , " " 70"'.
, . . . .." ,the emendatioDs. .".'. ....
'.' ': : :.' 'we'- write also with a.n apostrOphe -at1iciidu.:;..-...
...- ...... th.e, a'l:owel,.au!l tDlijre ail ;..',
'. yowell; as, . .. . -, . ,. , '. .. _. t":" . - 4i. ..
.. .' .' . ,. tUtlll'Z mdn/Jo,.. ,. all the world;' : .
., .... : .' ". ..'1pro, '('pelto,' upon the " ,. .., .
II' " "'- . . : 'of', r
_' " .', ,4., .T.he 'Words mi, me.; ct',' us; . ;'.$l . ,."
.. of it, or pfthem; st,'if; di, .....
, : ' ",they colne .before a vowel; as, '.' : .... . 1; l.
',m', inganno,- ,I deceive myself; . .
.. : , .. t' :ama; , .' " 7' he lov1l8 thee ,.
". c' intende,. '. :he 'us;" .&c. )' .:
. ". .'" d th d'.:I ,. , -"-' , , 'b '
...., J . .J;I.n e wor 8 e:, ae, co, ne",pe, . ' ',.:'
.. se', ve'''r.o', me', from el, he,
'they,.; .(/1;- . of the; .al, the; dal, from' or by the
. 6i,. with the;. nei, in. the; for or by the;
'.' . hand&OlDe ; sei, tbou aft; vedi, see $ou ; p6,0, ..
. better; v6glio
,
1. wiBl,t; .&c. ' . " . ' :. i.. .....
. ", : ' ....... \... .. . ".\7 ...
".: ... ,. ," ' , N- .,. ,I:
'. Ill' . r..,. .. :""
." " ... 1".' . ........ ,.. . I
'.: \;.... ).J..\.;.. .. :,
," _I I I; _ .. , ., t"( .... ... j
,...'
"
' ..
0(,
,f OJ
L
i .
ORTHOGRAPHY.
.," .
41
.
. .. . .
The apostrophe is never used when the elision of
the ,:owel might produe-e, in o'o\lns or adjectives, a COD-
" .. fusion of gender, number, or relation.
, Thus the feminine of all the adjectives of the commOD
- gendlfr, like i7&nocente, innocent; errante, wandering;
'&c. preceded by the a,rticle la, the, are written with-
'Out.elisioD, la i7l1locente, la errante, to distinguish them
froin 1he'n1wIculinel l'innocenu [10 innocente], l' errante'
, [10 errante] : .
, Tae plural of those IlOUDS that, in the plural, do
oot termination, as, eNe, image; es{asi,
extacy; which, preceded by the article Ie, the, are written
,k elftgie, the il\1ages; ie elltasi, the extacies; to distin-
-psh tbem from the singular, l' eiftgie [la effigi.], the
,rgstasi [lIZ es(asl], the extaey : '
And the preposition ria, from or by, expressing the
, of derivation, followed by a noun beginning with
" '. a"vow:el,' as, da am6re, from or by loV'e; is written with-
; ,,' out elision, ,to' 'distinguish it from the telation of pos-
, sessioD, d' am6re [di am6re], of love. ' ,
. '. ',' ' is the, apostrophe used when the elision of tbe
. vowels.would cbange the sound of the consonants; as
_ iIi the,. by the vowels a, e, 0, ti, the
eliSion' of the i- would render hard the souBd of the
gl;, in '". . . P,
gl? (lvci.rj, aoon, the misers;
gl' editt.i, 1i gii editti, 'the edicts; .
glr .. ?r gli flccki, the eyes;' .
,--' ' gl' uccetli; , gli 'uccelli, .the birds.
For lhe re'ason, ci, us, Rnd words ending ill
'. ,ci, ge, gi, written w.it.h an bef?r&
vowe!s a, 0, u, !IDce' the ehslOn of e" gIve
\ "ttl. the,coDsO"nllnts a hard sound t; as in . "
,'. fac'" ardente/ ardlnie, burnillg light;
... :Jo./r.' 4
c
centi;" . d6ici' sweet ;
. "piiigt' aprJc,he, ' piagie aprkM, ,sunny places; ,
. -... allltni, : p6ggi. ameni) 'pleasant hills :
,i,'- . . "
" .' ."S!'e P.!'QDunciatillll. page 18. ,t Ibid. Po 15, 16-
.. ..,J ,:', :'" .. .'4.. " '"
.; '. - ..
. .
,,'11Io
.. ... ,.
: . ."
. ',: ::.. .... . ........ -.
l ..
,'.
....
.. '
..
,',
.....
"
.'

.. ...
:-..
.. ,.. ......
42' ..'. OR;HOGRAPHY. .' :':. ,li."'
.But written with an t},.: ..
tb I
. ........ .
e vowe s e, l j as In : _ .
felic' evento, happy success ;
mulac' imprese, bold enterprises; ,
pitJgg' erbfJse, . grassy places; , .
freg' illustri, illustrious honours; " _
sinoo the sound of the consonants does not' suffer' any ,..i'l
,alteration by the elision of e, i. .:; .
. Words end with two vowels, as cambio,
change; fog; though .followed by another v0\y,
el, do not receive an apostrophe I ; , ."
Ellcept" few 7Ierhs, in io, IllIl)oglio, doglio, which
byio, I, "re w.ritten .:....
. io. I wisb ; ,-
rlU dogl' w, I grieve. . ,':.;
The WQfds that are marked a grave accent, as ',y.,:;
felicitd, hll,Jipiness; c-ioventu, youth; &c. do not re- ...
ceive 11n apostrophe: . . .

X,cept pereM, RlId all the componnds of ehe,. as, ., '!.
" perM' duse, because he said; ,
. . bencb' ella fosse, although she was j
amoreh' io t:oteSft, although I would,
,
...
CHAPTER III.
Of the Reduplication of C:msonants.
. I
'.
I
. .
The Italians all 'words as they pronounce
and in those words in which a consonant is. pronounced
:with,double force, they double the consonant ill writing; as,
, 'obbligo, obligation; ,
. ," . faccenda,. business; .
imm."trine, image;
. legtttimo, ,lawful.
Consonants are generally doubled,
", , 1. In words compounded of Qne .of the partieJes a, 0, ,
'sl, Bt; and Qf" any .other word. beginning with'a .con-, '
. " sonant; as, ' , ,
. . [a pe71a] t1ppena, hardly;
[9 ve,:!,] or ebe,;
. "
....... -- '.
ORTHOGRAPHY. 43
. "

come] sicc6me, all;

se berle] sebbelle, although i
nA mello] nemmhno, nor yet.
2. In words compounded of a verb ending with
vowel upon which the accent fWls, and of a coujunC\ive
pronoun; as,
[a. 10] dllo, be ha!l it ;
, [diro vr] dir6ovi, ] will tell you.
s. In all words compounded of an adverb, a
tion, or a conjunction, emling with a vowel, and of an)'
other word beginning with a cousODan!; as,
[6ltre cia] oltrecciti, that;
[Li gill] laglJiu, there below;
[gid marl giam.mdi, never;
[s6pra nume] sopronn6mc, surname;
[cold su] colassu, there above.
G is doubled before the vowels ia, io, iu, when they
make but a single syllable; as in
pi6ggia, rain;
rriggio, ray;
potfgiwila, hillock:
But when the vowels ia, io, iu form two syllables, iii
in bugia, lie; &c. g is Dot doubled.
This rule ill Dot without pxception, since we find "/rin, ease; leg-
gin, readlng-rlesk; \hI' former of wbicb is wrillell wilh a aillgle g,
and the latter wilh a double g.
In words ending in gione, g is always single; 'as,
cagione, cause; ,
pigi6ne, house-rent.
is doubled between two vowels; as in
gazza,. magpie;
, . .n6zze, nuptials :
But if the second vowel is an i followed by another
vowel, z doubled; as, . ,
grdzia, grace;
, 'lipezie, ' , species;
azione," action:
Es.cept'inpv.i.ia, madnclts j which ill written with a double .,
.'
' .. ,
' .t' :. c..."-:
" 9RTHOGRAPHY. . .... ', .. "......
."'" ....-....
. ". :: ..
-,
, .....
":' 44
........
.'
.. .... .
-a.. _
.' .
, -.
CHAPTER.Iy:.
", . .. - -- ..
.',
.i
-.
-'.
..,,'
"'. ' .
.
" . , Of the' Fo.rmation of SyllQbles..
' .', a;e of :., ..
, 'Every syllable 'contam a 'vowel. ' A
, receive after it, in the -same syllable,.no more than
consonant; but may be preceded by goe, t'Wo, '01' three; ::.
as, '". ", .- . - :.,
. tilma, soul; , ",b,
"n6,..ma, . rule:;.- , . .".' ':
ifar-7.Q,' poml? ; - .' ,: '
strdl-cio, ' " pruning. , ....
, A syTIable cannot end, witt. aoy uf the coosooan"ts h, rl; ..
. -}, t, V)' .Z)' unless it i$. by' a:'Syllable begilluin,' .
, "ith the l;l!:IDe consonant; as, " ;.', ' ..
ldb-bro; , lip; .
: fred-rJo, ' cold;'" _ .
. . . office;
. '-,' at-fo, act;
, '. Qv-vio, r ' ' .
: '. l!a%-zo, ' , .' mad: . . ."
, ,Nor with eitber Cj tn, they ar6: ...
double, or fu)lowed, the [prmer by q" aop .tll!! latter by , ,
b or p; as, . , , . "
... ,. . - :et,;.co,
: .. ' .' ',g6m-ma,'. gum;
.. )." .. r
". ", om-bra, ... shadow; "
. " .' " : .'empire. ;"" '.' '.' '.
4.,sy!lable may' elfd with either"ofthe I, m,'T.
n, r; .but when ally-of t1,ese CO!1:SQDarUs 'is found ,in, the....
middle of a word followed by a ',vqWel, it'always belengs
'to the following syllable; 'as, . , ' ". -: " '
'.' " .. "'le-la:., " 'apple '; .
. '., , ". hunger;
.. .grd-no, " grain,;
t6-ro, ,choir. .
, .
.. ,
..
" .
" t
: .....
: '
. l. ,
"
Or
.1 .
... .-.
.. . "'.
'-.. -
..
... .. t
, "
..'
. ..
0
.. : II ..
ORTJlOORAPBY,
.'
.. i -

. . .
'A syilable c8miot willi two cobion8nlS, unless
be I, n, o'f r; or the 6rst be '; in whicb Jasr
'cate it may begia eyeD' with three; as,
.... . fl,,-g.elIo, . . scourge; "
't.. - grwom6ne, gllQIDOn,,;
;.. .. , cri-ticlJ, .. . .' e.tii'c}sm ;' ..
. . 'pD.-da, '... '. sword;
'.' ". ilt,.G.da
1
." lllft'et:. .
'.\ And if tWit COOllonaBts are fuund in JDiddle of
,W'Qrds Of which the. former,is Qot- an s,'.Dor the an
00 QJ' r. the conllOnKntibeloollgs "to the preced.
and the latter to Ute followin,g i as,
.' " '.' .6f.mo, .. ' elOl ; .
.. '. tirI'CO, . bow; ...
'. .' 0 ,. - , , -l4.n-eia, , , J lance, _
'oA "aoDq,t. begin 01' eb9 witll 8 double coillp. '.-
: {I,' mlJl., SS, becaule it 'c1Juld not -be loi'ndf;d t'
:w-ben;a double iOqsonlUlt is- found ih the m'i'dple of !'"
.a w_d, tlte first beJongs te the preceding lyUaDllt, and
to the following'; HI, . :. '., f ,
. '..... , fJel-lo, tleece ; /'.. ..
... "': '. .' or. pe.JUJ," pen; ., . ,
.' < 1';" -. cas-s., .. ,bex. 0- 'I" "
. -. between. twei vowe1s 1te18Dgs ak:tays to
. : "the-latter ot>wel; HI"
- . .' :pe-pe,'.1' pepper; . , " ...
': . ..... ".... . fa.to;. ..... fate_. ' . .. .."
'.. !J'he last in. all Italiu words endr witlt ,a
., . .... . ...# '... . . I A"" .: ...
(he i' jper, b1. '
"c" ..... " iI. .... ...... ...
..... . ..
... " - CHAPTER V: .
.... '.
.
".e ;
.". . .. ...It; .
......
. , .
. , Pf the Increase of Word.. .' ":' '4
.. ' ., 0"
Wlien ilia i!'l; con, ROnt per; are followed by''' : .....
a word begiQ.Ding .with a.n s follow:tl 'by another .. " "
sonant. (which, is. called by the .Italians lib impure s),. .":
spaventq; striFe, i to tpe. hiu'slt, ' ....... ,
, j". ..:.'.. .'.>..:'. ..:\<.
t '. ....".. ( J" " .'"
:': . "'I. ".' .a ",. '. ... . .; ........,
.,......... ,
:.. _. : ...'" :'\ ; ...... t;" . '"' ."_ ir
. : '. I '.
.
'"
'.
'- .
" ' ..
.... .. ,.- ..... '\ Ii":.,'.
.,: ... p : \ , ,:'
.. - .:.. : ,.: ,.
. .;.; 1 '. , .... " ..- "..., ... ..... ":., .. ;
... > .;. ,':'. ,,' ',,";: '47.-, '
. . .,....... -f..,;... "." ." '. .' J
."""0, 'good ;' and the list of the worda iJM,,;
, " lijtndsome; tpJWo, that; gra.nJe, great; when they are"
-'fonowed by a word beginning with a cODlionant, are al- .-
, ' ways ; as, '
," ,,," ullji6re, ,a flower;'
" : ti ,thou de/lervest it;' '
biten mno, good wine;
, "bel prato, beautiful meadow;
... quet IUJro,. . i that ;. '. .
_", -gran nvrcc1to, market; " .
, ." ,grtm citta, ',,' gfjJat cHy. ' .' :,. ,
The last syllable of tbe wor,ds Frate, [Friar}; : :,'
Santo, Saint; when they are' used as is also re-- ,:, .
.. trooched before a consonant; as, '
F:ra"tJiofJanni" . John;
, , San Pao19, ". ,Saiot Paul.'
, . :'" Words terminating in a ate 'never'retrenebed : ,.'
.. . . .. . . . . . . ' ..
Ellcept SUdra, Sister; whlcb, wben osed 8S a title, 1000u tbe' _; lI.,
, .. SuOr Mana, Silter Mary ;
and ora, now, wilh ill IIOmpoand., rllldrIJ, medra, tllldrll, Itc.
, whicb, before, a cODsonaot, may be fe.trenched;
0 lIf' di, now S8Y ;
allJ,. flilli, 'tben I 18W; 0
amUr pitinge, ' , he weep. still ;'
tllldr flegghia, sometime. he i. awake,
. W..ords ending in i ';e never :
Except fuOri, out, whicb bE'fore a consonant loses its i; 0,
fuJr di citt4, out of to":D,
. .. '
Wo!"d!l terminating in 14, and words accented on the
,hUlt syllable, are never rl'trenched.
o ords retrenched in the singular are" never retrench
- ed in0the; plnral: 0'
J. great, in plural grandi, also, lose. the
. last .)'lIllble ; 8S," '
" gralt perieali,. grt"at dangers ;
. .' !ran riee"!ne, " riches. '
" 0\,d8 which w()uid be retrenched befMs a word be-
ginning with It. consonant, are always written with an
before- heginning ,wid! a vowel; as, ,
, .
.. .." ....
( .,
,.
""
.'
.....
'.. \. . ." '. ,- .. - . II'
, ,."._ ',,' ..... :;. r 4'" t.... .<1.. -. . I . "' .._ .
"'ll IIf'P .... .. . , ...
.. " .... .. :.": ',. "!. ... '.- "
... ,.. .." " .."' - .
.:, ',. ,:,,: " ...:,<'.....\.::... :, ".
"' ..:'. ORTH()(fRAPHY,' ,>, .: ' '1'
." .. . . .. ." ...... '
lir.um' 61io" go'od' oil; , . .'
:; , " bell' ,handsome appearuco';
f '. quell' arw, 'that bow; ,
, ' ',' inciso, wt;ll engraved; ,
", ;' -', '"'' '. ,', grand' uOmo, ' great man;'
';, ," " " . 'Frat' Alberto, . Brqther Altiert;
.. I Silint. And ::
,-"" t .'
", .,}.'-.cept uno,a; an; BoP Sudra,.Si'ster; which Dever f'!cei".... "
, apostrophe; ' ' ' ;' '. /, . " " :
,." '". un ai71iflO. ' a friend; , ",
, ,', '., ., ,SuSr Angelica, . Angelica, . '
.. . . ... '.
:.. " , WQrqs are never retrenched, when they ar.e folJow:ed
" - " ,\)y an impure s; when. they lIl"e at the end Df a -, ,
, ',' Sentl\t;e,; "or when they are followed by a comma, or '
';tny ather stQP' ,"
. .. .... ".
.. ' '0 .....:: :".
" . e. to
" .... ' Sdme, compound wordll,in their compositKi.n loile a'
, letter, or a: syllahle; as, "i
[ieri'sera] iersera, last evening; ,
(s'IU!J terra} 'solterra, :tmder ground; , ,'. "
(domani mattfna] domattitia, to-morrow mor.DIDg.',
Jnfitlitives'of verbs joined to it conjunctive pro'nolm', '
, drop tht';J: .fillal.e as, ' . ': .
, [amare ttl am-:J.rct, to lov'e 'us;
, ': [vede.re 10] vede."lo, to see him;
[sentire 1iJ sentirli, , to hear them. , '.
The first and third per'lODS singular, and the thir:d pel;.
son plural ofthe imperfect of the 'indicative of all ,
verbs, which in the infinitive terminate in ere, ire:; as, io .
it meva, eg1i tem-eva, eglino tem-evnno,. io
't sentiva,. eglino sentivanv; generally' drop the v; as, .
'" ?' 'hI, . 2feared;
eg,z 5 e S '.
,eg1ino tem-eano,: ' they : .feared j
10 ' I 2
h
' d
eg1i sentza, : he S- llar, ,
si7/:tiano" they heard. .
The words cavcilli, crtpUli, frate.lli, t./uelli, belli, aelli.
tilli, dcUli, nflli; pWi, colli, s-lllli, tr111i, and, qauili, mali,
I
"
. !
ORTHOGRAPHY.

49

..
t41i, may be contracted into urvai, capei,
Mi, dei, ai, diJi, "i, pei, c6i, sui, trcU,
qUf14? mai, tai; which, when they are followed by a
consonant, it is more elegant to abbreviate, aDd.
write with an apostrophe ; as,
light horses j
cape" Winchi, white hair;
.frate' carJW.li, own brothers ;
que' signori, thoae gentlemen;
be' coswmi, good manners ;
, tk' nemici, of the enemies j'
a' pare"ti, to the parents;
da' lddri, by the robbers;
'At' bis6gni, in the necessities;
p' crimpi, through the fieldw;
co' denti, with the teeth j
su' monti, upon the mountains;
tra' Mschi, amongst the woods ;
qua,' dolori, \vhat pains j
ma' pensi'ri, malicious thoughts ;
ta' discorsi, such discourses. ,
. The words egli, he j aDd- eglino, they; both of them
make ei, and e'.
Tbis is aU that neo to be said on the diminution or
retrenchment of words; except that the rule respecting
the retrenchment of e, 0, when preceded hy I, m, '" r,
..does 1I0t hold in certain ilHltances, where sucb retrench.
ment would produce a harsh sound. Thus the words,
c6me, how j nome, Dame; a"imo, courage; cltit1.ro, clear j
raro, rare; nero, black; duro, hard j osefwo, obscure.i.
are never written com, nom, anim, chiar, ner, rar, dur;
oscur.
5
..
..

..

Of tM Articles.
-. .
~
~ THE Italilin has three articles, ii, 10, la, the. R, 10,
" are used with masc!Jline, and Ia, with feminine Douns.
II is prefixed to masculine nouns beginning with any
cllnsonBnt, except z and impJlre s; and makes Ii or i in
. the plural; as, ~ .
il libra,. the book;
tbe books.
.... .,..
.
Ii libn, 2
or i libri, 5
We meet with Ii frequently in the clUlic8; but modem writers
generally use i in preference to it.
Lo, which makes gli in the plural, is put before mas-
culine O U ~ bRgiDDiDg with an impure s, a z, or a vow- c.
el; as,

10 spr671/!,
10 mclero,
10 am6re, }
or l' am6re, t
10 ingegniJ, ~
.or I' ingegno, S
gli spr6ni,
g.li zuccheri,
See OrthogT. pale 45.
the"spur;
the sugar;
the love;
the genius;
the spurs; ..
... the sugars;
t Ibid. pI .to.
."

.
.. .
.,
O

..
,

"

t.

:11
ARTICLE.
gli am6ri, the loves;
gl'inggni, the geniuses.
La precedes feminine nouns begioning either with
a consonant or a vowel; and makes Ie iu the plural; III,
la casa, the liouse ;
la ingiuria, } h.'
orl' ingiuria,t t e InJury;
la eresia, l
or l' eresfa, 5 the heresy;
la ejJigie, l
or I' elftgie, 5 ,. the effigy i
I' daima, the soul;
le
,, thh
e ouses;
Ie ingiurie, the injuries;
Ie eresie, } f
or l' eresfe, t _ the heresies;
ole ejf''I{fie, the e1ftgies ;
Ie liaime, the souls.
After the word Messire, Master or My lord; and after
the preposition per, for or by, whether it be followed
by impure s, z, or any Offer consonant, lhe article 10
always used; as,
Messer 10 principe, My lord the prince ;
per 10 regno, through the kjllgdom
In the plural, however, if the article iI followed by anr conNln-
aut bnt or impure I. we may.u.lJ indil'emntll either gil or Ii; H,
per gli l . tb be ...-
or per Ii Sbdlcht. roup t
The word Dio, God, before its plural D6i, Gods, takes
the article gli; as,
gli Dei, the Gods.
I
When these articles. are immediatelY preceded by the
prepositions di, of; <I, to; da, from or by; til, iu; COR,
with; per, for or by; SU, upon; tra, amongst,.in 0 ....
der to avoid the harshness of sound produced by two
ml?nosyllables coming together, they are united, lUld
form a single word."
See Orthogr. pp. 40, 4J. t Ibid: p. 40.
tIbid; pp. 40, 4J. "I!. t Ibid; p. 46.
,

..

....
": Union of. the Prepositions di, a, da, in, Call, per, SU, ..
tra, wit" the Articles ii, lb, lao
[di ill
[a il ,
[da i ]
.[in ill
i
con ill
. per ill
. sfl'ill
[tra iT]
J
..

."
l .

!.,

, ,!
IL.
Singular.
dei,
fll,
dal,

nel,
.. wi,
pel,
ml,
fral,
Plural. -.
r
rdi Ii, di a1 dati, dei, de',
a Ii, a i] alli, ai, a',
do li, rJa'a] wai, dtii, .',
E
',. Ii, in 11 nefli, ne',
ctm li, ctm i] c611i, c6i, "o',
er Ii, per i] pelli, pei, pe',
[S1I 'Ii, !U a1 iUlfi, sui, su',
[m. fi, '?:G (I 'tniHi, trai, tra',
LO.
'.
of the;
to the; .J
from or by the :
in the;
with the;
for Ir by the ;
upon the;
amongst .the.
ef1'lae ;
to the;
iroa (III' ..ythe :
in the-;
with the;
for or by the;
upon the;
amongst the.
Singular.
[!Ii '10] deno,
[a 10J dUo,
[dfl 10] didio,
neUo,
[con 10] ,6Uo,
1
per 10] pWo,
SrI 1o] .. suRo,.;
trllo] .trcWo,
See pp, 40, 48, 49

,
of the
to the;
from or by the :
in the;
witb the;
for or by the;
upon the;-
fhe.-
r
;
.-

AJ{TICLE.

...
"
Plural

[diM/I] degli, of the;

fa gli)
dgli, to the;
".
..
diJgli, from or by the :
..
[in gil] negli, in the;
[con
c6gli, with the;
gli
pegli, for or py tho;
sugll] sugli, upon the;
."
tra gli] trdgli, amongst the.
..
LA:
Singular.
".
fdi.<la]
della, 'ofthe j
..
ala) cilla, to the j
[da la] dalla, from or by :.
rn la]
nlla, in the;
con la) c611a, with the;
per la] pella, for or by the;
rsu la] sulla, upon the;
.
[tra la] trdlla, amongst the.
. Plural.
..
fdi Ie]
dUk, of the;
a Ie] dlle, to the;
...
[da k] d4lk, from or by,the : _
...
. .
[in Ie] rrelk, in the ;
r
UJ
c6lk, with the;
perle pelle, for or by the;
Sll k] sulk, upon the j

fra k] traile, rquongst tbe.

t'
t
.J( hO\yever, that pel, pet:. and
pUltJ;' pMli, pegli, and pelle, have become a olete,
alid per 10, per la, ,e. Ii, per gli! and per k, are now
.. ..
ibste,d of them, .,
b A.
with' .And scrupulous writers before nouns eglUnIng
5-
,.

.,
'*
"
.'
-or
, ,
,

..
ANALOGY.
t." z, or im,ure s, c6llo, t,uUo, c6lla, cogli;
tNgli, c6lle, trazle, aad rUgli, separated; and say, con 10
zuc/:ldb, with the sugar tra 10 sdegno, i!l the anger; con
la dzzer/l, with the head of hair I two la smcinia, in
the madness; con gli %Ufoli, with the flageolets; Ira gli
stuqj, among the studies; con Ie dnne, with the tusks;
, Ira le stelle, among the stars; S" K'i scudi, upon the
shi\ds.
The e.nglish'indefinite III'ticle a, an, is expressed by
the indefinite pronouns uno for the mascuHne, and
, u.a for the feminine, which in the plural make
.alcftni fer the IDRsculine, and alcun; for tho femi-
as; un a friend; "n a hat; uno
.- z6ccolo,. saRthl; uno spcccltio, a looking-glass; una
.zeba, a goat; un' tillatra,f a duck; alcUni amici, some
frlends; alcuni cappelli, sOlDe hats; alcUni zOccoli, some
sandals; alcuni some looking-glasses; alcUne
z.ebe,) some goats; alcune anatre, some ducks.
And when a noun is taken in a partitive sense the ad-
jectives some and any are' expressed in Italian by the
words del, delio, della, for the singular; and delli, dei
tk', degli, delle, for the plural; as, del pcine,...aome
.. or 11ny bread; dUlo spirito, some Ilr any spirit; tUllo
zucchero, some or any sugar; .dell' 61io, some or 8ny
,. oil dftlla carne, some or IfJY lJIeat; tkll' tUqutJ, some
or any water; tk' lbri, llome or any beaks; digli strl4l
menti, some or any instruments; ucchmi, some
or anJltsequins; degli wcelli, llome or any birds; delle
ciliege, some or aay cherries; tUlle crance, some or
aD1 oranges.

See OrthOiraphy, p. 46,47.

" .
.t Ibid. p: 39..

."
I
I
..
. ...
NOUN.
, ...
CHAPTER II.
,\
Of NotJ.flI.

,
..
ITALIAN Douns have but five terminations; viz. those
of the fi"e vowels, a, e, i, 9, U.
It is these t61minationJ, that show their gender"end
number.
Gender.
-.
Nouns ending in a are of the feminine gender; as,
cdsa, house; p6rta, door j &c.
Except:
1. The.proper names of meti ; as, ,
Enea, JEneas ; Andrea, Andrew i &l.c.
2. The nlltDes of professions exercised by men i as,
ar/iI/a, artizon i .ertba, scrivener i
leg/a, lawyer i poe/a, poet i &c.
3. Nonns of dignity; as,
. Papa, Pope i dooa, duke;
, monarca, monarch; gerarca, high-priest; Itc'.
4. Nouns J1erived from the Greek; as,
anathema; clima, cli!'late ;
.dramma, drama; enimma, elllgmaj
ididma, idiom; prUma, priam i &c.
6. Nouns formed of a verb and a nOl1n ; as,
pasciMe/ola, loggerhead; .antin!ill8a, hypocrite; &e.
6. ADd tbe following 'iPIHIS :
w!lt, sofo i .clpa, sot ;.
rcudma, discourse j caltapa, bemp;
,rilich are all of the gender..
...
ateilta, atbeiRt i
Gia_nUla, Jansennt ; &ic.
regiclda; regicide;'
fratiddf1., fratricide; .:
an/agonilla, antagonist i &l.c. "
".
. 'The names of sectarians; as,
..I deftla, deist i
Call1iautD,. Calvipillt i
and the foJlowi.ng, .
deic/4p,' delcide;'
plllJ'icida, ...pt.rricide;
. ' l1lyalist '-..
are. okbe COmlDeD gender.
The words lema, tfar1' cope, ;
theme, and pittnela, planet, are masculine." .

..,\'
..
I
but lemll,
Nouns ending in i are feminine; as,-
ensi, crisis j tesi, thesis; &c.

..
56
A.NALOGY.
..
,..
noon;
Tuesday;
Thwwday;
alkali
toast;
eclipse;
ambs-ac e;
delay;
..
EllCept:
1. Tbe proper names of men; as,
Luigi, Louis; Giovtinrti, John; &tc.
2. Nouns of dignity; as,
,1Iu/H, mufti; ban, bailif, pari, peer;
3. Words formed of a verb and a noun in tbe plural; as,
guardaporfcini, porter; C/lvadenti, tooth-drawer;
gra,Dia.anfi, hypocrite; .., leeeapiQlfi, glutton; &C.
4. The word d\, day, and its componnds; as,
bllondt, good-morrow ; me
Lu"edi, Monday; .IIIartl:dt,
Merco{ed\, Wednesday; Giovedi,
Venerd\, Friday.
6. And tbe following,
appigiOnan, (notice of a house alcali,
barbagilinni, owl; [to let); brindin,
san"i, merry-andrew; eeelun,
dien, diesis [in music] ; amM.n,
crel1lu\, crimson; .0praUieni,
which are all of tbe masculine gender.
The nouns pari, equal; Genen, Genesis; are of both genders.
Nouns ending in u are feminine j as,
tribu, tribe; gru, crane; &c
Ellcept:
1. Proper namel of men; as,
E,au, Esau ; Ferrau, Ferragu!; &c.
IZ. And the following nouns,
Gem, J"SllS; Bellrebu,.. Beelzebub;
8Oprapp;u, oV'erplus;
which are masculine. '
ending in .are 'Of ihe mllsculibe gender j
.. . If6mo, lDan ; ca'ldllo,. &S:.
EllCet>t: .. . . ,
Proper names of as, I
86ffo, . Sappbo; E'rat!h El'tlto; <
Jltropo, Atropos; Jlteltr, Alectg j. &tc.
I. And tbe words, . .
. mano, hand; lItho;
which are femin,ine.
..,
..
..
"f
..
hope;
c611e, m. hill;
'riepe, f. bedge; &c.
(
,.
I
..
NOUN.,
Nouns ending in e are some- of them masculine, and
some femi.oine. as,
carme, m. -poem;
neve, f. snow;
Tbose ending in me are masculine; as,
rame, . copper; ceTt ime, combat;
jiume, river; co.stume, custom; &c
Except.
j(JtM, bunger; .eIRe,
wbich are feminiDe.
Those ending in re are mascuiine; as,
,colare, scholar; ostiere,
alar.e, aDdiron; qUllrliUe, quarter; &c.
..
Except:
" febbre, fever;
pettler'lI, dUIt ;
,,*re, batubet ;
wbich are femiDloe.
dn'e, air;
cenue, he. ;
are oC the common gender.
mddre,
f6n'"
mother;
tower;
-prI.on ;
llue;
Those ending ill ore are masculine; as,
jiore, flower; ellore, heart;
pud6re, modesty; splend6re, splendor; &e.
Folgore, thunderholt; arbore, tree'; are oC!he common gender.
A
Tliose ending in nte are masculine; as,
. dlmte, tooth; monte, hill ;
pOlite, bridge; 'gigame, giant; &c.
mente,

}deept:
gente, . people;
.. pater;le, .- patent;
lOllree;
.& which are feminine. ."
Fante, lervant; Iront., f,prehead;
.re of the coulmon gll'Dder.
mirftJ;
current;
fdnte,
.'

" ..
fountln;

58 ANALOGY.
Those ending in 6ne are feminine; as,
eanz6ne, song; . ragi6ne, reason;
eonfessi6ne, confession; tribulation; &c. .....
Except:
... blUtdne, stick; matt6ne, brick;
parag6ne, comparison; guiderddm, reward; and a few others;
which are masculine.
A
rope;
beam;
f6tae,
tr
a
l1e,
The nouns,
fine, end;
serpe, snake ;
gregge, flock;
are of the common gender
, The DOUns 6ste, 6rdine, when they mean host, all
innkeeper; and orde", a command, are masculine: but
wben they mean bost, an army; and order, arrangement,
or a religious order, they are of the common gender.
Margine. wben it means scar, is feminine; but when it
means extremity, is of the common gender.
Tbe noun dimane, when it means to-morrow, is mas-
culine; and wben it signifies the beginning of the day,
is feminine.
As to other nouns ending in e, no rules can be given,
which are not subject to so many exceptions as to ren-
der them useless to learners.
....
myrtle-tree ;
lemon-tree;
Names of countries and cities ending in tI, e, are femi-
. ,
ome.; as, '
Francia, France ; Florence; &c.
Names of countries ending in ." are masculine; as,
PerU, Peru; &c.
Names of caties ending in i, 0, are of the common
gender; as,
Napoli, Naples; MildllO, Milan; &c.
Names of trees are masculine; as,
6lmo, elm-tree; mfrto,
n6ce, walnut-tree-;

-<t'
NOUN.

Eacept:
quercuz, ;
"Ite, vIDe;
whic:h are feminine.
elu, holm-tree
g1J1btra, broom;
Names, of fruits are as,
pera, pear; mela,
ard7lCia, orange; ciriegia,
apple;
cherry; &c.
Escept:
pdmo, apple; fico,
plno, pine; cedro,
dat/,ro, date; lim6n"
pi6ltJcchio, . piltache nut;
which are masculine.
Ii$: ;
cItron;
lemon;
...
The names of the vowels a, e, of the consonRnts f,'
" m, n, ", s, z, and of h, are feminine.
The names of the vowels i, 0, u, and j, of the con-
sonants b, c, d, g, p, q, t, v, are masculine. '
Number.
ending in a form their plural by
as,
Nouns feminine
changing a into e ;
mensa, table;
chi6ma, head of hair;
mense, tables;
chi6me, heads of hair; &c.
poems;
climales; &C.
poemi,
c"mi,
poem;
climate;
Nouns masculine ending in (I, form their plural by changing a
into i; as,
poema,
clima,
Nouns ending in e, 0, whether feminine or mascn
line, form their plural tby changing e, 0, into i; as,
madre, mother; madri, mothers;
mano, f. hand; mani, hands;
flume, m. river; jil/mi, rivers;
cappello, m. hat; cappelli, hats; _&c.
The nOlln mOgUe, wife, forms its plllral by suppressing" tbe
it i and ..ging tbe 8 into i; or what is the SlIme, by sllppressing
the,; m6g1i, wives. And tbe nOllns Dio, Gou; u'6mo, man; Me,
'Oll ; mille, thollsand ; in the plllral make Dei, Gods; u6mini, men;
bu6i, /hen; mUa, thoulands.

..
ANALOGY.
Nouns ending in i, N, de not change their termina-
tion in the plural; as,
eel,ssi, eclipse; lfssi, eclipses;
htasi, extacy ; estasi, extacies ;
grU, craDe; grV, eraaes;
INu, tribe; trilm, tribes; &c.
Nounll &ndiog in ie, do not change their termination
in the plural; as,
sort tror'ts ;
or 'Pu.u, S ' or sp6ZJe, S
ref/trie, requiem; req_e, requiems;
superficie, surface; superj'kie, surfaces;
barbeirie, barbarity; barbcirie, barbarities;
eJligie, effigy; eMe, effigies ;
serie, series; sene, series.
Nouns in which a syllable has been suppressed,
and likewise nouns accented on the last sJllable, do
not change their termination ; as,
king ; kirgs ; .
pie, foot; pie, feet;
cittd, city; cirta, cities;
reward; merce, rewards; &e. .
but when they are pronounced or written emire, iliat
is, without the suppression M any syllable; as, rege,
piede, cittcide, -mercfde, &c. they change their termina-
.tion, and make in the plural regi, piedi, I:ittddi, mer-
tsedi, &c. according to the general rule.
. Nouns ending in ca, ga, in order to preserve in
the plural before the vowels e, i,"the same sound which
c, g, have in the singular before the vowel a, take an
11, in the plural, after the consonants 1:, g; as
monaco, nun; m6nac1ae, nuns;
verga, rod; verghe, rods;
gerarca, high-priest; gerarchi, high-priests; &c.
Nouns of two syllables ending in 1:0, go, alsf lake
an 11 in the plural after c, g; as,
gi'Koco, ,port; giu4chi, sports;
iuogo, place; luoghi, places; &c.
NOUN.
61
Escept:

which in the
Greci,
Greek; porco, hog; mago,
plural make
Greeks; pOrci, hogs; magi,
wise mIlD;
wise men.
physicians;
theologians; &c.
medici,
teologi,
, Nouns in co, go, of more than two syllables, if pre-
ceded by a consonant, take an 11 in the plural j ai,
manisclcao, farrier; maniscalchi, farriers;
"albergo, inn; alberglai, inns; &c.
And jf thuy are preceded by a vowel they . are writ-
ten without h; as,
medico, physician;
te61ogo, theologian ;,
Except the following, which in the plural take an h;
bucafico, becca(ichi,
trriffico, tradin!!: ; trriJfichi, tradings ;
stomach; ,tJrnachi, stomachs;
ftirmaco, medicine j ftirmlUlti, medicine. ;
f6ndaco, warehouse; f6ndachi, warehouse. ;
ptirroco, parsou ; ptirrochi, . parsons;
pedagogo, pedagogue; pedagJghi, ;
mOnOlago, monologue; mon6lo/{hi, monologue.;
gastigo, punishment; galt/ghi, punishments;
catcUogo, catalogue; cattiloghi, catalogues;
impiego, employment i. employments ;
intrigo, intriguf' ; intrighi, intrigues;
cibbiigo, obligation; obblighi, ohligations;
pruago, divinpr; prestighi, dh-inerl j
oriprego, el.pedient; ripieghi, el.pedients.
I
beggars;
savages;
dialogues;
diphthongs;
6
{
{
dialogue; {
diphthong ; {
..
salvatico, savage;
mendko, beggar;

diU6ngo,
Several other nouns in co, go, are indifferently writ-
ten with or without the h; as,
mendl.c11i,
or mendici,
salvAichi,
or salvatici,
dialoghi,
or dialogi,
ditt6nghi,
or ditt6ngi,
rivulet; Mi, rivulets j
desire; desli, desires; &c.
ending in aio, 6io, form their plural ill ai, 6i ;
ANALOGY.
Nouns ending in cia, gia, in one syllable, foriD
their plural by changing a into e, and suppresssing
the i; as,
lancia, lance j lana, lances ;
jrQ,ngia, fringe j frange, fringes;
jreuM, arrow ;, frecce, arrows;
pidggia, 8trand ; pisgge, strands; &c.
But if ei_, gia, make two distinct syllables, the i is
never suppresaed ; as,
jlJ1'7fUM;ia, pharmacy; farmaef.e, pharmacies;
. ekglia, elegy; elegie, elegies; &c.
Nouns ending in cio, gio, in one syllable, form their
plural by chaDging into i, and suppressing -the i that
they have in the singular, or what is the same, sup-
pressing only the 0; as,
Meio, kiss; Mci, kisses;
fregia, honour; fregi, honours;
staccUl, sieve"'; stciui, sieves;
raggio, ray; raggi, rays j &c.
Nouns ending claio, glaio, glio, ,also, form their plu-
ral by suppressing the 0; as,
6ccJ&io, eye; 6cclai, eyes;
mugglaio, bellowing; mugghi, bellowings ; .
sc6g1io, rock; scagli, rocks; &c.
All other nouns ending in io, if io is unaccented, and
makes but a single syllable, form their plural by changing
io into j; as,
studio, study; stutY, studies;
1Ieneflzio, benefit ; e n i f ~ benefits; &c.
But if io is ar.cented, and makes two distinct syllables,
tbe plural is formed by changing the of io into
i; as,
rio,
desio,
Nouns
as,
libraio, bookseller; librai, booksellers;
jilat6io, spinning-wheel; filat6i, spinning-wheels j &c.
NOUN.
cars ;
heels;
bowels;
castles;
arms;
brains;
riDgi i
circles;
heel;
brain;
caStle;
car;
circle;
arm;
bowel; .
castello,
cervello,
cerchio,
carro,
calcagno,
braccio,

There are some feminine nouns which have two
terminations in the singular, and two in the plural; as,
ala, 1 ale, 1.
or ale, 5wmg, or ali, 5Wtngs ;
arma, 4.rme,
L weapon, ,. weapons;
or arme, or arm.,
d6te. 1d d6ti, 1d .
or dota, 5 owry, or d6te, 5 ownes;
"este, "esti, &.
, t garment; , t garments; we.
or ves a, or "es e,
Some masculine nouns have two terminations in die
singular, and but one in the plural; as,
cClfJClliere, jk . h _J' k . h
J' nlg t, c""",,c::n, mg ts;
or CClfJaero,
destriere, h "16 ..7_ .,. h
or destriero, 0." _stnen, ones i
Ithought, pens;eri, thoughts;
or penszero,
KOldre. hi'" . h I ,,-
u. SC Q lU", leo...n, sc: 0 ars ;
or SCOlaro,
Others have a single termination in the sinpl8l' and
two in the plurat; -as the (ollowing, which in the plural
end in i, aDd more elegantly in a ;
wllo ring; anelli,
, or anUla,
bracci,
or braccia,
lnulelli,
or budella,
calcdgni,
or calcc1.gna,
carri,
or carra,
5 castelli,
l or castella,
l
or
cervelli,
or cervella,
ANALOGY.
armpit;
finger;
dlEmon;
hide;
harD;
,{glio,
60ltello,
suoio,
dem6nio,
ditello,
dUo,
86mo,
6amanda-
mento,
eyebrow; S cIgli, "2 eyebrows;
lor dglia, 5
knife ; cottelli, k .
..
( to., 5
or horns;
cu6i, IhOd '
/0 les;
or cuola,
dem6nj,
or dem6nia, dremons ;
ditello, .
or ditella, armpits;
dUi, ,
dft
fingers ;
or a,

fUi,
filo, thread; fil threads;
or t a,
fOfldamento, foundation; l' foundations;
or J tnlUamen a, S
fi
' frammenti I
rammento, fragment; fi ' t ' fragments ;
or rammen a,
.1 spindle ., J fusi, "2. dl
J I so, or fusa, SSpJD es;
. 6 2. knee ., gin6cchi, k
Iftn CCnIO, 6 2.. nees ;
or {J1n cCflla,
grdo, cry; . or Icries;
.mJ.scio, shell S shells
b- 'lor guSCla, '
labb r t ldbbri, r
ro, Ip ; or ldhbra, IpS;
the sheet of lenzu6li, "2 the sheets of
lenzu61o, a bed; or lenzu61a, S a bed;
letto, bed ; or Ibeds;
mulno,. mill . 5 mulfni, mills'
, or muUna, '
NOUN. 65
muro,
wall;
I ...uri,
twalll;
or .ura,
oreu1&io, ear ;
{ orncIH,
lean;
01'
]H"tlto,
Un;
peccciti,
.in. ;
orpecc4.ttJ,
p6m0,
apple;
p6nti,
app1. ;
or jI6truJ,
pfIpo,
fi.t;
pWp,
tiIaI ;
or J1f.'gu, .
lID,
arre., ;

&ITO". ;
or qucdrHla,
r4bbj,
(a kind o(

meaare
or r4bbia,
(01' corn) ;
sacea, bag;
t
}bap;
or IGCCIJ,
stndo, shriek;
{ Jtndi,
} shrieks;
or ,trida,
tiM, vat;
tl.,
Ivall;
or tina,
fJutigio, footstep;
{ fJest{gi,
. } footttep. ;
or ve.tigia,
ve,timerato, garment;
{
} ;
or
(jrlo, bowl;
{ 6.rli,
} howls.
or fAria,
Collello, eomll7ld4llll!nlo, demdnio, UtllJ, ..ulino, ,4fte,
are more commonly Died with the termination in i.
When these nouns take the termination in a in the
plural, they become feminine, and receive the article k
before them.
The following have only the termination in 1I.i1l
the plural, and become feminine like the precedwll',
centinaio, hundred; centinaia, hundreds;
migli6.io, thousand; migli6.ia, thousands;
miglio, mile; mf{(lia, miles;
m6ggio, .oggia, (a .0rt of lIHlasure of
corn or 41fJani) ;
.....
66
ANALOGY.
.paio, pair; p6.ia, pairs;
stail', bushel; ,'dia, bushels;
116vo, egg; 116va, eggs.
Rlso, laughter, membro, limb, or member of the hu-
man body, form their plural in i and a: nsi, rfsa,
laughter; membri, membra, limbs: but nso, rice, mem-
bra, member of a corporation or political body, form
their plural in i only; risi, rice; membri, members.
Gesto, exploit; frw.tto, the fruit of a tree; ligno,
fire-wood; form their plural in i and a; gesti, gesta,
exploits; frutti, .frIttta, fruits; legni, legna, wood: but
gesto, gesture; frUtto, production of the earth, in-
come; legno, the hard substance of a tree, form their
plural ini only; gesti, gestures; frutti, produce; legni,
billets of wood.
Ossa, bone, has a treble termination in the plural,
making ossi, usse, and ussa, bones.
knives;
ears ;
footsteps;
exploits;
fruits;
wood.
col/clle,
DTecchu,
'I1e&ligi.e,
gble,
Iridic,
legne,
knife;
ear;
footstep;
exploit;
fruit;
wood;
The nouns col/clio, orccchio, tJelligio, gello, frldlo, and lCgflo,.
also haVl" a third termination in e in the plural; but this comes
rather from the feminine termination in Q which also they have
in the singular; as,
colt,;lla,
orCcchia,

grala,
frUlla,
tegna,
Finally there are in Italian, as well as in aU other
languages, some nouns which have only the singular
number; as, prole, generation; progenie, progeny;
race; mline, moming; miele, honey; &c. and
others which have only the plurRI; as, lari, house-
hold gods; onnali, annals; calz6ni, breeches; vanni,
win.,.s; fJrbici, scissars; nOzze, nuptials; esequie, exe-
qui:s; reni, the reins; maIZe or molli, tongs; spezie or
spe7;j, spices; &c.
Case.
The several relations of the Italian nouns are ex
pressed, 110t by change of termination, but by the pre-
NOUN.
67
positions, di, of, for the genitive 01' relation of pOSlession;
a, to, for the dative or relation of attribution; and da,
from or by, for the ablative or relation of derivation,
The su1QectifJe and o1QectilJe are distingui.hed by the
place they occupy in the sentence.
Proper DOURS are genllrally declined or lJaried with
the prepositions only; common nouns with the preposi-
tioDS and articles.
Variation Of Proper Nouns,
Subjective,
{
Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
Cresar;
of Calsar ;
to Calsar ;
from ur by Cresar;
Cresar.
Variation of a masculine proper noun beginniDf wirh
a consonant.
Cesare,
di Cesare,
a Cesare,
du Cesare,
Cesare,
Variation of a masculine proper noun begiimiug with
a vowel.
Subjective,
,
Relation of Att'b t'
rl u IOn,
Derivation,
Objective,
Antonio, Anthony;
S di Antonio, of Antho-
or d' [ny;
S a Antonio, to Antho-
U or ad [ny;
du Ant6nio,. from or by
[Anthony;
Antonio, Anthony.
Variation of a feminine proper Doun beginning with a
consonant,
Subjective, Roma,
{
Possession, Iii R';ma,
Relation of Attribution, aRoma,
Derivation, da R6ma,
Objective, Ruma,
Orthography, p.40.
Rome;
of Rame ;
to Rome;
from or by Rome;
Rome.
t Ibid. p. 46.
63
,
ANALOGY.
Italy;
of Italy;
to Italy;
from or by
[Italy;
Italy. Iteilia,
Objective,
I
Variatwn of a feminine proper Doun beginoing with
a vowel.
Subjective, ltalla,
{
Possession, or ; ltalia,
of Attribution, ior :, ItGlia,
Derivation, da lteilia,
the Gods;
of the Gods;
to the Gods;
from or by the
[Gods;
the Gods.
God;
of God ;
to God;
from or by God ;
God.
gli Dei, Objective,
, Variation of the proper noun Dfo, God.
Singular.
Dfo,
di Dfo,
a [)(o,
daDfo,
Dio,
Plural.
Subjective, gli Dei,

Possession, dlgli Dei,

Relation of Attribution, cigli Dei,
. Derivation, d4gli
Subjective,

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
, Derivation,
'Objective,
Variation oj Common Nouns.
Subjective,

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Variation of a
Objective,
Subjective,
masculine common
with a consonant.
Singular.
illbro,.
del Ubro,
allbro,
daltfbf'o,
illfbro,
Plural.
l or lfbri,
noun beginning
the book;
of the book;
to the book;
from or by the
[book;
the book.
, NOUN.
69
I
dell;
I
Possession, dei libri, of the books;
or de'
aLli
Relation of
Attribution,. ai libn, to the books ;
or a'
MI.
Derivation, dtii libn, from or by the
orda' [books;
Objective,
Ii rho
the books.
or i t n,
the spur;
of the spur;
to the spur;
from or by the
[spuq
the spur. .
noun beginnin&,
the spurs;
of the spurs ;
to the spurs;
from or by thtt
[spurs ;
gli sIJr6ni, the spurs.
masculine common
with impure s.
Singular.
10 'pr6ne,
dello spr6ne,
6110 spr6ne,
00110 sprone,
Objective,
Variation of a
10 spr6ne,
Plural.
Subject,ive, gli spr6ni,

Possession, degli spr6ni,
Relation of Attribution, dgli spr6ni,
Derivation, ddgli spr671i,
Subjective,

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,

Objective,
Subjective,
{
Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation, I
I
Variation of a masculine common noun beginning with z:
Singular.
10 zitcc1&ero, the sugar;
dello zucc1&ero, of the sugar;
dllo zucc1&ero, to the sugar;
mUlo zut;ckero, from or by the
[sugar;
10 zUcckero, the sugar.
70
ANALOGY.
Plural.
gli 1itccheri, the sugars ';
rUgli zuccheri, of the sugars;
dgli zuccheri, to the sugars;
dagii %'Ucc1aeri, from or by the
[sugars;
gli zUccheri, the sugars.

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
the loves I.
of the loves;
to the loves;
from or by the
[loves;
the loves. gli am6ri, Objective,
Variation of a masculine common noun beginning with
a vowel.
SinJ{ular.
Subjective, Ior am6re, the love;
P
, j dUlOl b I
{
osseSSlOn, or dell' am6re, of t e ove;
of Attribution, or am6re, to the lave I
D
t' } ddllo l 6 fi . b
erlTa lon, Z0 dall' mn re, rom or y
S r l [the love;
Objective, or am6re, the love.
Plural.
Subjective, gli am6ri,

Possession, degli am6ri,

Relation of Attribution, dgli am6ri,
Derivation, ildgli am6ri,
Variation of a masculine common noun beginning
with i.
Singular.
S b
' , { 10 }" h
u or i' mgegno, t e
{
dell } [IUS;
. { Possession, or cUiP it&gegno, of the
RelatIon of { ail } [IUS;
Attribution, ingegno, to the gen-
or a [ius j
NOUN.
11
Objective,
Objecth'e,
BeJ.atjon of Derivation, {or } ittvl,.", from by
{
10 }. [the
or " '''ffip, &he geDI-.
PluraL
Subjective, gl' iJllfegni, tbe geniuleI;
{
POIIsellien, flegl' iJllfepi, of tbe geniUleI;
Relation of Attribution, agP iJllfepi, to tbe geniuleS ,
Derivation, dagl' inge{f7li, from ur by tbe
[geow..;
81' the geniUlel.
Variation of a feminine common noun beginning with
COJllonant.
Objective, la cdsa,
Plural.
Subjective, Ie cdse,
{
Possession, delk cdse,
Relation of Attribution, aile Mse,
Derivation, ddlle case,
the bouse;
of tbe bouse ;
to the bouse ;
from ur by tbe
[boQH ;
the bOUle.
the bouses;
of the bouses;
to the houses;
from or by the
[houses;
the houles. Ie case,
Singular.
la ctha,
della casa,
tilla cGsa,
Mila edsa,
Objective,
Subjective,
{
POlsession,
Relation of Attribl1tion,
Derivation,
Variation of a feminine common noun beginning with
a vowel.
Subjective,
Singular.
{
la
or l'
the inju-
[ry;
ANALOGY.
rp' . S della} . .,. f h .
I OSleSSlOn, or dell' Inglurla, 0 t" e IIi
R I
"f1 A "b' { cilia}" .," [
J
h
u
9';
e atlOn 0 ttrl utlOn, or all' tngluna, to t "e ID-
{
dall} [Jury;
Derivation, or ingiuria, by
{
l t [the IOJury;
Objective, or , ingiuria, the injury.
Plural.
Subjective, le ingiurie,
{
Possession, delle ingiurie,
Relation of Attribution, dlle ingiurie,
, . Derivation, dalle ingiurie,
Objective,
Ie ingiurie,
the injuries;
of the injuries;
to the injuries;
from or by the
. [injuries;
the injuries.
Subjective,
Variation of a feminine commQD noun beginning
with e.
Singular.
Subjective, eresia, the heresy;
fP
" S della l . , f h h
, osseSSlOn, l or dell' Serena, 0 t e eresYl
Relation Attribution, eres{a, to tbe heresy,
. lD . " S ddlla l erena, from or by
eriVatlOn, l or dall' 5 [the heresy;
Objective, 01" ertsia, the heresy.
Plural.
or 7, erfsze, the heresies;
S delle eresie, of the here-
1
Possession, l ur dell' 5 [sies ;
S ,We freSIe, to the here-
Relation of Attribution, lor all' 5 [siel;

ddlle erfsfe, from or by

Derivation, [
or dall' the heresies;
1
NOUN. 18
Objective, S lei' l eruie, the heresi..
tor S
the effigies ;
of the effigies;
to the effigiel;
from or by the
[effigies ;
the effigies. le ejflgie,
Variation of a feminine common noun, beginning with t,
which in the plural does not change its termination.
Singular.
Subjective, tor Itfftgie, the effigy;
{
Possession, {or effigit, ofthe effigy I
Relation of Attribution, tora,::;: Iefftgil, tothe effigy;
D
. S dalla .1It,.; b
eurauon, l or dall' t.u 'S.e, IrO. or '1
l [the effigy;
Objective, tor; It.fftgie, tbe effigy.
Plural.
le tht,
delle effigie,
aile e.fffgie,
ddlle ejflgie,
Subjective,

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,

the souls;
of the souls i
to the souls;
from or by the
souls; .
the souls. le anime,
I' anima,
Plural.
le ani"'t,
delle anime,
. iUle tinime,
dalle anime,
Objective,
Variation of a feminine common noun, beginning with a.
Singular.
Subjective, I' anima, the soul ;
{
Possessio., ddl' anima, of the loul;
Relation of Attribution, all' anima, to the soul;
Derivation, dall' anima, from or by the
[soul;
the soul.
Subjective,
{
Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
7
ANALOGY.
,.ariation of Common Nouns tsken in an sense.
Variation of a masculine commOD noun, beginniBJ
with a vowel.
Singular.
Subjective, un amico, a friend;
. Possession, or lamico, ofa friend;
Relation .f A 'b' { a un ... . d
ttrl utlOD, or adUfl Sam.co, to a Irlen ;
Derivation, ds.. tJlIdco, (rom"., by
[a friend;
Objecti..., .,,, tmrieo, a friend.
Plural.
Subjec:tiYe) aleani amici, some
[friends;
fP
. dialealli} ,. f
OSIleSSIOn, or d' alJC1, o. some
{
l U . } [fnends ;
Relatio. on Attribution, C:Z:!". amici, to some
. I or cuna [friends;
l Derivation, da amici, from or
by some friends;
Objective, alcUm amici, some
[friends.
Plural.
alcuni cappelli, some hat. ;
Subjective,
Objective,
Variation of a masculine common noun, beginning
with a consonant.
Singular.
SlIbjective, 1111 cappello, a hat;

or } cappello, of a hat i
Relation of Attribution, { or:a:. } cappello, to a hat;
Derivation, da .. from or
[byahat;
am cappello, a hat.
ROUlf.
P . { f

0118181011, or t1' aldlni ' 0

a1cfI' lOme ha.. ;
Relation of AUributioo, { :cz leU'".} to
or a na (lOme ha.. ;
Derivation, dtJ fIlcMi from
- [or by lOme hats ;
Objective, alt:Uni ct.rppilli, lOme
[hats.
Variation of mucaline common nouD,
with z.
Singular.
Sabjeetive, 6110 z6culo, a sandal;
l
Paae.ion, { .. } z6ccolo, of.
or III" [ ....dal ;
RelatioD of A.ttribution, { . ... t z6"01o, to.
or "110 f [..ndal ;
Derivation, da VjIQ \ z6uolo, frOID or
[by a sandal ;
Objective, VIIO z6ccolo, a IaDdai.
Plural.
Subjective, alc4ai z6uoli" lOme
LAndala i
D....._. { dialeUm (

ortl' alcUm f _c:_, 0 tome

{
alcfJ. . } [Iudall ;
Relation of AttriDutiou, r alcUna. z6uoli, to lome
o [Andals;
Derivatio&, da alc:Um z6uoli, from til"
[by lome Iandais ;
Objective, alc:U1Ii z6c:c0li. I e
[sandals.
Variation of a
Subjective,
muculine COlllmOD DOUD, beginDing
. with i_pur, .
SiJJgular.
UIIO lJMultio, a look
[iDg-c
I
..;
76
ANALOGY.
Objective,
Subjective,
P . f
RelatioD of t:: }
( (looklDg-glass ;
Derivation, da URO speecAio, from or
(by a lookiug-glass ;
. Qbjective, uno a look-
. [iug-glass,
Plural.
Subjective, ak11m some
. ,. (lookiug-gIUlles ;
p . t dialcunl t h' f

OI8e8l10n, or d' aldini f sp I, 0 some

t
1u . t lookmg-glasses;
Relation of Attribution, or f to some
looklDg.glas5es;
- Derivation, ria ale6ni . from or
[by some looking-glasses;
Objective, aleUm some
(looking-glasses.
Variation of a feminine common noun, beginning with
a vowel.
Singular.
{or } ardneia, an
{
di tina} [orange;
or di un' ,
rPossessIon, d' tina aramla, of a.
or d' un' [orange;
. Relation of ., {or : ,
AttributIOn, adtina ardllcla, to an
or adUII' [orange;
Derivation, tor: } ardneia, from or
i
' [by au orange ;
una "
or un' aranela, an
[orange.
I
J
Plural.
Subjective, alcWN trdnu, lOme
. [oranges;
P . S f

oasesslon, or d' akU1Ie UlUJIU,O some

a aIeVru [oRnges ;
Relation of Attribution, orwlakMe ardftce,tosome
[oRngel;
Derivation, tla tJlcU1Ie ardAu, from or
[by lome oRnps;
Objective, cakUae arOJIU{":;::
i

NOUN.
.77

Variation of a feminine common Doun, beginning with

a consonant.
Singular.
Subjective, Ior ::: 0;::::;
Relation of or cdIa, to a boule;
Derivation, tla UlltJ edlG, (rom or by
[a boase;
Objective, tllItJ ecUa, a house.
Ploral.
Subjective, altUfN ecbe, lOmB
. POISBSliOD, Ior Iecbe,
l f1 [houlel ;
Relation of Attribution, cd.$e, to some
or fN [houses;
Derivation, tla alct'lrae edle, from or
[bysome houses;
Objective, alculle edit, lome
[house.
78
CHAPTER III.
Of .I1djectives.
Italian adjectives have three terminations, viz. the
vowels 0, (l,e.
Adjectives ending in are used with masculine
nouns, and form their plural by changing (1 into i; as,
",irtu6'o, virtuous; 116mo virtu6so, virtuous man;
wirtuelsi, virtllOUS ; u6mini virtu6si, virtuous men.
The adjecti..e bello, handsome, before nouns beKinnin'g with
..,.re.'.J or a vowel, makes Mgli In tbe plural; as,
lJegli Itr-omenli, beautiful instruments;
begli .affiri, beautiful sapphires;
kgli tkehi, bealltiful eye.
Adjectives ending in become feminine by changing
o into a; as,
mrtu6so, virtuous; 116mo virtu6so, virtuous man;
virtfl6sa, virtuous; d6nna virtu6sa, virtuous woman.
Feminine adjectives ending in a form their plural by
changing a1nto e; as,
virtu6sa, virtuous; dOnna virtu6sa, virtuous woman;
7Jirtu6se, virtuous; d6nru virtu6se, virtuous women.
Adjectives ending in e are of the common gender, aDd
form their plural by changing e into i; as,
dente rUdent'l u6m8 prude,!te, prudent man;
pru , p 'd6nna prudente, prudent woman;
dh&ti d t . u6rnini prudenti, prudent men;
pro ,pru en. d6n718 prudbtti, prudent women

Adjectives ending in co, g", ca, ga, cio, cia, gio, ckio,
gkioandio,in the singular, follow, in their plural, the rules
alreadyiiven for the formation ofthe plural ofnoun8.
-
Of Comparatives and Superlative,.
C07IIparatives of Superiority, Inferiority, and Equality.
Comparatives of superiority are generally formed by
prefixing the adverb piu, more, to the adjective; u,
L 79

;
I8OI1l iKJnest ;
pruc1enL
London is larger than Con-
stantinople;
.be isle.. cheerful than you;
more or less handsome thaD
that.

CompvatjftlS of inferiority are formed by pre1ixing

tile adverb 11I8110, less, to the adjective; as,
{
sincero, { sincere;
.&0 alUgra, less merry;
lelia, happy.
The English particle tAma, which is used after the
comparative of superiority and inferiority, if it is fol-
lowed by a nOUD, or a pronoun, is generally render-
ed in Italian by di j 81,
LOndra pi. grande di
Costantin6,oli,
ella eIIIer& listll di ,,6i,
pi'll or men bello di queUo,
If tbe nODo or F,'0Donn wbich follows thaR, requires the artiele
before it, tllml, wltb the article, is rendered by del, delio, tUlIa for
the singUlar, and by dtlli, dei or tk', degli, dille for the plural j ..,
il malltro jliu ,igro degli lbe malter it more Idle tbllll tbe
oldri, scbolars j
il "duTe libr. A piv or men your book is more or Ie. larre
grande del miD, than mine.
But if tAma is followed by aD adjective, a vel'b, or aD
adTerb, it is rendered by che; u,
ella pi'll grazi6stJ che she is more geDteel thaD
bella, handsome;
aJ!ligge piW cite non -con- she afflicts more than ahe
f6rta, consoles;
6ggi che domani, better to-day than to-mor-
. row.
Comparatives of equality are formed by the adverbs
si or cost, so; tanto or altrettcinto, so, so much; quanto
pi'll, the more; &c. and their correlatives c6me, as,
qrafnto, as, as much; tanto pi", the more; &c.
lifo fratelto lIOn st or cod my brother is not
bv6no c6me il v6stro, as yoers ;
so
ANALOGY.
ella era tQto or altrettanto
qwiRto egli deside-
ra"a,
qwiRto piu la tanto
piiJ di lei m' innam6ro,
she was as handsome as he
wished; -
the more I see her, the more
I am enamoured of her.
worse.
Cicero was much or a great
deal more eloquent than
Hortensius ;
the sun is much or a great
deal larger than the
earth;
Ariosto is much or a great
deal less correct than
Tasso;
Pompey was much or a
great deal. less esteemed
than Cliesar.
Pompeo era "fa or me me1l0
stimcito di Cesare,
Ari6sto e ".61to or assai
meno carretto del Tasso,
There are a few comparatives, derived from the Latin,
which do not require the addition of llny adverb i as,
maggi6re, greater;
min6re, less ;
superior;
inferi6re, inferior ;
migli6re, t better;
or miglio, f
pepgi?re,
or pegglo, S
JIleglio and are of both genders, and of both numben.
To increase or diminish the force of comparatives,
we make use of the adverbs 1I161to or assai, or "fa or
"fe, much or a great deal, before pitl, meno i as, m61to or
assai piu, IIfa or me piiJ, much or a great deal more;
m6lto or assai meoo, lila or me meno, much or a great
deal less; &c. as,
. Cicer611e m61to or as-
sai piu eloquente di Or-
tensio,
il s6le "fa or "fe pi"
gr6.JIde della terra,
Relative and Absolute Superlatives.
C,tative superlatives are formed by putting the

ii, the, for the masculine, and la, the, for the
pre XlDg before the comparative; as,
11
il } . , { tl6tto,
ltJ billtJ,
il or ltJ or",eM grandt,
the most {lftI'ned;
or least bandlume
great.
Absolute superlatives are forml'd by changing the
last vowel of the plural of the adjective into '$limo, for
the masculine, and into isrinaa, for the feminine; as,
trirtu6so, virtuous; 'lJirtuoslnimo,
pOvera, poor ; pO'Dtrfssima, poor;
{
corte$issi1ll0, } very
eortese, courteous; t . courteou
cur ts.sSlma,
Absolute luperlatives may be allo formed by
ting the adverb assai or m6lto before the adjective; as,
{
bello, { handsome;
IllSai or m61to bu6na, very good;
amtibile, amiable.
A few absolute superlatives take the termination em-
"'0, for the masculine, and emma, for the f('minine; ai,
fantegro, just; integemmo, { just;
- salubemmo ver
salubre, wholesome; S . ,l y wholesome;
sa... r:rnma, S [&c.
The following adjectives, derived from the Latin, are
superlatives by theJDJelve. without any addition or al-
teration:
",assimo,
",enomo,l
or ",il"1II0,
S1Jpremo, 2
or s6mlnD, S
''!limo,
6ttimo,

greatest;
least;
supreme;
highest;
lowest;
very good;
very bad.
The superlative is sometimes formed by the repeti-
tion of the adjective; as,
AJlt'ALOG1'
...,"'''0, {. lively;
ellMa chela, . very quiet;
fiae fine, fine.
And to give more force to the expression, the repeated
_jecrive is used ia the superlative form; as,
freddo freddissimo, cold, extremely cold;
c4lda l:GldWima, warm, exceeding warm;
...6ruk S l large very large. .
e' l grandfSSIJIUJ, S '
These are commonly called superlali"e. of euI6-.
,.,.fIIion.
-
A great DUmber of ItalilUl nouna -an' adjectives IU'e
81l8ceptible of a change of termination, which, modify-
ing the primitive idea expresaed by them, augments or
diminishes their signification.
The nouns and adjectives thus altered are called
tallptnlati11U and diminuti"u.
Augmenlati"u.
There are tbree kinds of augmelltatives; those
that expreu bigness ..41 grandeur; those that e:lpt'eR
strength, vigour, and beauty; ani those that exprell
contempt.
To express bigness and grandeur", we change the last
vowel of nouns or adjectives, if masculine, ioto 6ne, 6zzo,
and, if feminine, into 6=a; as,
cappello, hat; cappUlone, large bat;
forua, country girl; foru6zza, a large country
[girl; &c.
When a feminine noan take. the termination dM, in the aal-
ntalive, it beoomes IDucwine ; as,
d6nna, f. woman; donn6ne, m. larce woman;
p6rlfJ, f. door; port6lu, m. Jarp door j .0.

AUGMENTATIYD AND DIMlNUTIVE8. ..

To express ItreDgtb, .vigour, or beauty, we un 6tto
for themallCuline.and6tlGforthefeminine;.as.
gi6l1ae, youth; gitJfHl1l6tto, handloae aad ItOut
(youth;
ragszz(J, girl; rggazz6fta, large handiome girl; &c:.
To express contempt we use the terminationl accio,
azzo, astra for the masculine, and Gccia, az.:a, astra,
and tiglia for the feminine; as,
lUJro, book ; libr<iccio, bad book;
ppolo, people; popOw,zzo, populace ; [woman;
. gi6nne, young woman; giol1ana,stra, contemptible youae
g ~ n t e people; gentc1glia, rabble; &c.
We can join the augmentative termination of big-
ness to that which expresses contempt, and that of COD-
tempt to that of bigness, from which results a double
augmentative; as,
riMldo, ribald; ribaldOne, great ribald; ribaldonciecio,
[very great ribald;
a6mo, man; omaceio, bad man ; omacei6ne,
[large man; &c.
And we can sometimes make a treble augmentative; as,
bianco, white; biancastro, whitish; . biancastr6ne,
sligbtlY'whitish; biancastronaccio, ofa dirty white; &c.
Dimilluti"es.
All the Italian diminutives may be divided into four
classes, viz. those that express smallness or prettiness;
those that express kindness or tenderness; those that
express compassion; and those that express contempt
and indignation.
To express smallness or prettiness, we generally
change the last vowel of nouns and adjectives into ino,
etto, ello, ",ccio, uzzo for the mascnline, and fno, ~ t t
fila, uccia, uzza for the feminine; as,
fancifJ.llo, child; fancilllll.no, pretty little child;
rllscello, brook; rul'elletto, small brook;
154
ANA.LOGY.
etmestro, basket; etmUtrello, small basket;
cappello, bat; eappellUet:io, pretty little hat;
b6cca, mouth; bfJt:cUua, pretty little mouth; &c.
capaMtJ, f. cottage;
campdna, f. bell;
Some feminine nouns take tht; terminatioDs ,no, ello, ella, ill
the diminutive, and thell they become masculine; us,
ClUtJ, f. house; canllo, m. small house, or a coun-
(try seat;
capanntJtto, m. little cottage;
campanella, m. small bell; &c.
ter-
the
puny fel-
[low.
dear little fool;
little old woman;
[&c.
use the terminations
icciu610 for .the mas-
uzza, and icciu61a for
people; gentilccia, low people;
poet; poetuzzo, petty poet;

omicciu61o,
man; omircititto, despicable
or omiccirittolo,
To express kindness or tenderness, we use the
minations erello for the masculine, and for
feminine; as,
p,I.ZZO, fool; paz'terello,
vecchia, old woman; vccchierUla,
gente,
poeta,
To compassion, we
{no, etto, ello, "ccio, ilzzo, and
culine, and ina, etta, ella, uccia,
the feminine; as,
p6vero, poor man; poverino, poor little man;
gi6vana, young woman; giovanetta, poor 'young woman;
misera, unhappy wo- miserella, poor little unhap-
[man; [py woman;
clisa, house; casuccia, miserable house;
fanciullo, child; fanciulbtzzo, poor little child;
membro, member; membricciu61o, poor little mem-
. [ber.
To express contempt and indignation, we use the ter-
minations etto, ello, uccio, uzzo, icciu61o, icciatto or icciat-
tolo, for the m81lculine, etta, ella, uccia, uzza, icciu6la,
iccititta or iccilittola, for the feminine; as,
dOnna, woman; donnetta, despicable little woman;
paese, cOWltry; paesello, petty country, of no im-
[portance i
membrolmo, little member;
biancolina, whitish;
raggiu6lo, little ray;
bestiu61a, small beast; &c.
an irregular termination; such are
,
]
,
I
i
AUGMENTATlVI:B DB DIMINUTIVES. 85
Tbese are the termioatiou. most generally usee to
form the different ,kinds of diminutiyes. Many of
them are used prooHacuously to expr8111 compassion,
indignatioD, &e. I and some vary tjleir signification ac-
cordiog to theW di1fere8t CODlIUi08S ;
fanciumno, pretty little child; pOf1erino, poor little
[man;
casUccia, miserable house; gmtUccia, low pea-
[pie;
tilI.tta, dfospicable little woman ; amdbik doJa.
lovely little woman;
despicable puny fellow; 6tt6n omiccill6lt1,
[poor good little man.
There are a few other terminations which are some-
times ako used to express either smallness and pret-
tiness, or and compassion, as, dno or idno,
and cello or icell9, for the maseuline ; and dna or icina,
and cella or idllo., (or the feminine;
llime, light; - lumicmo, small light i
song; eonzemeina, little song;
porzi6ne, portion; porzioncHla, small portion;
el.mpo, field; campicello, little field; &c.
The terllilioe.tiQIII lID, _110, and eUuJ, cella, e.re used -witla
nouns, the final 'Vowel of whiob i. preceded by "; and icino,
icello, and icinlJ, icellll, with nO!lns, the final vowel DC which is
preceded b,Y any other conlonant.
Some noons to form their diminutives, take the termin-
ations lhlO, Uno; and some, the terminations u61o, u61.a;
as,
membro, member j
bianca, white;
raggio, ;ray;
bestia, beast ;
Some others take
the following:
8
dbbrucidto,burnt;
fl6tola, little note;
, paglit1cold, Ii ttle straw;
corpuscolo, small body;
cagnu6lo, little dog;
{
casfpola/a' Ismall poor house;
or casU"po , .
{
libncolo,
or libercolo, small poor book;
5 baci6zzo, cordial smacking
t baci6cc1&ib, soft kiss; [kilS ;
dottoriccmo, little young doctor;
mulic6m:olo, quack, ignorant
, [physician.
pretazzu61o, ignorant and despi-
[cable priest;
trUtaraziu610, unhappy Joung
lman;
lupatto, young wolf;
cerbiatto, fawn;
orsatto, cub;
) lepratto, l
t or lepr6tto, 5leveret ;
1
abbruciatfccio, superficially
. [burnt;
abbruciacc1&iato, burnt here and
[there ;
} reddish ;
{ bitterish;
greenish;
red;
priest;
kiss;
doctor;
physician;
{
rossfuio,
or rossigno,
S anuzriccio,
'bitter; 2 amar6gnolo, .
green; Sor=s::,
2or verder6gnolo,
book;
.NALOGY.
unhappy
[man;
wolf;
stag;
bear;
hare;
note;
straw;
body;
dog;
house;
csmdro,
verde,

86
11611J,
paglia,
e/Jrpo.
CelM,
clisa,
lfbro,
Mcio,
dott6re,
medico,
prete,
tristo,
lUpo,
cervo,
6rso,
lepre,
We may join two different terminations in the forma-
tion of diminutives, and then we form a double diminu-
tive; the first termination expressing kindness or tender-
.ess, and the second, prettiness or flattery; as,
.. AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
87
eatti"a,
glutton; g1&iottmllo, little glutton; gTriotte-
[rellino, .. ' ;
miserable woman; tatti"ella, a wretched wo-
[man; tatti'Dellutda, sorry woman; &c.
...
In some double diminutives the second termination
serves to diminish the object still more, and in that case,
. it always conveys also the idea of prettiness; as,
libro, book; libritto, small book; librUtino,
[pretty little book;
rosa, thing ; little thing; tosettlna,
. [pretty little thing; &c.
Sometimes we make use of the diminutive termina-
tions to diminish the augmentatives; as,
lddro, robber j ladr6ne, highwayman; ladroru:ello,
[ ;
edlla, box; tass6ne, large box; tassontello,
[ , . &c.
And when we want to express contempt for the ob-
ject represented by the name already diminished, W8
augment this diminutive; as,
ddma, lady; damuzza, petty lady; damuuaceia,
[pretended lady;
room; stan':Utcia, small room;
[da, a dirty little room; &C.
Finally, such is the genius of the Italian language in
this respect, that we may even modify the verbs and ad-
verbs by one or more syllables added to them; thus from
{
to give many
baeidre, to kiss; we make baciucthidre, smallrt"is.es
one a. er an-
I other;
rubtJre, to rob; rubacchidre, to pilfer;
t
' , {tanterelldre,} h
CaD tire, to sIDg; t' h'J, to um;
or can tee t...re,
rn6riUre, to bite; . { to bite soft-
or morseg(flare, fly
I
one;
two;
three;
four;
five;
six;
seven;
eight;
nine;
ten;
88
ANALOGY.
p6co,
little;
{ poclafno,
}
'Very little;
or pocolino,
lJene, well ;
{
_'e7ino, pretty well;
ben6ne, Yery well; &c.
Of Numeral Adjectives.
Nume,.l adjectives are a certain elan of words
which are particularly used to qualify objee.. either
with regard to their number or their arrangelllent.
TheBe are commonly called numbers, and are divided
into 'wo kinds, ,be cardirtGl aua ortliraal.
Cardinal numben are those which detumlne a col-
lection of objects with regard to their number; such
are the following:
tiM,
dUe,
tn,
quattro,
clnque,
sei,
sett"
6tto,
n6ve,
diCct,
undiel,
d6dici,
tredici,
gufZtt6rdici,
qu4ndici,
tedici,
ditiasutte,
diti6tfo,
diriaraniSfJe,
.eati,
ele'Ven;
twelve;
thirteen;
fourteeD;
fifteen;
sixteen;
seventeen;
eighteen;
nineteen;
twenty;

"eat' _,.
}
twenty-one;
or "",,110,
"mtidilc,
twenty-two I &c.
"ent' 61to,
}
twenty-eight j &c.
or "",16t,.,
treat", thirty;
"""110,
thirtl-oue ; &c.
par"'''
forty; &c.

fifty; &c-
,IlSSanta, sixty; &C.
"-'a,
levellty; &c-
ottanta, eighty; &c..
IIOtIcilIta, aillety; &c.
eento, hundred;
_chato,
}
two hundred ;
or
truMto, three hundred ; &c.
",ilk, thousand;
ffJi1i01Ie, million.
89
Ordinal numbers determine objects in relation to
their arrangement; these are,
priJllO, first;
sllc6ndo, second;
tuzo, third;
quarto, fourth ;
tJ1Antll, fifth;
8
90
ANALOGY.
,uto, sixth ;
settimo, - seventh;
ottavo, eighth;
,wno, ninth;
rUcimo, tenth;
dtcirnopr{mo, eleventh;
dtcimosec6ndo, twelfth;
dtcimoterzo, thirteenth;
dtcimoqwirto, fourteenth;
dtcimoquinto, fifteenth;
dtcimosesto, sixteenth;
dtcimosettimo, seventeenth;
decim' otta"o,
eIghteenth;
er dtcimottavo,
lkcimon6no, nineteenth;
"mtesimo,
twentieth;
vmtesimoprfmo, twenty-first;
verttesim"sec6ndo, twenty-second; &c.
"entesimotta"o, twenty-eighth; &c.
Ireatesimo, thirtieth;
trentesirraopnmo, thirty-first; &c.
fortieth; &c.
cinquante&imo, fiftieth; &c.
sessantesimo, sixtieth; &c.
settantesimo, seventieth; &c.
oltantesimo, eightieth; &c.
nOl'antesimo, ninetieth; &c.
tJentesimo, hundredth ;-
tlugmtesimo, two hundredth;
91.
. treuntesi-.o,
ffliUbi.",
three hundredth; &e.
thousaadth ;
millionth.
Buidel the.. two kina of Dumben, dlere are dlree oth.,.
which are formed from the numerai adjectivel, but belong to the
Dounl; these are the collcui.c, diltributitll, and proportional _-
'w,.
Collective Dumben deDote a determiDate number of obJectI ;
. u,
a pair;
the number of live;
t ~ or half a lCore ;
doseD;
triple;
qUlDtupJe; &c
ITiplo,
.quintuplo,
paw,
einquiM,
tUcina,
dodiclM t
or dossina, S
..ntillO, a 1C0re, or twenty ;
lTentina, thiny, or a Icore and a balf;
centi,idio, a hundred;
rnigliliio, a thoulBnd.
Distributive Dumben..p..... the dilferent pull or a whole; a,
UIIO melG, ODe half; un terso, one third ;
un quarto, one .fourth; un quinto, one lIftb; &e.
Proportional DumbeR show the progrelslve increase of the
.umber of tbings; as.
tl6ppio, double ;
qudtlruplo, quadruple;
The cardinal numben, except UIIO, one; mflle, thou.
sand; mili6ne, million; are invariable.
U'IIO and its compounds "entulIO, twenty-one; trentUlIO,
thirty-one; &e. before, feminfne aouns, like other ad-
jectives, change into'a; lUI,
una ltbra, one pound;
"en,""a pera, twenty-one pears;
trentUna ltra, thirty-one livres; &c. '
MUle, in the plural, makes "ltZa; as,
due mUa, two thousand j
tre maa, three thousand; &c.
ADd mili6ne makes mili6J&i, millions.
The ordinal numbers, primo, first; sec6ndo, second;
terzo, third; &c. decimo, tenth; "entesimo, twentieth;
trentesimo, thirtieth; &c. before feminine nouns change
92
ANALOGY.
eleventh ;
twelfth;
thirteenth ;
(J into II: aad ill the plural change (J into i for the mas-
culine, and a iato e for the feminine; as,
la deeima lezi6ne, the tenth lesIOn;
i primi libri, the first books;
k teru n6te, the third l1ot81; &c.
And their compounds, cleeimoterzo, thirtieth; trentesi-
""'P"tno, thirty-first; untesill107l6no, hundred aod oiath ;
&c. change both the last vowel of the last, and the last
vowel of the first of the two component numbers; as,
la cleeimaterm.giontdta, tbe thirteenth day ;
la trmtesimaprima settimdRa, the thirty-first week;
la untesiman6na stanza, the one hundred and nintb
[stanza; &c.
The collective, distributive, and prqportiooal namben folIow
the rules of nQua..
The cardinal numbers "mtisei, 'Dl!1Itisette; and 7IOI1tm-
tDsei, 7UJI1antasette, are sometimes contracted into venza,
twenty-six; venzette, twenty-seven; and novanzei, nine-
ty-six; 7Wvanzette, ninety-seven.
The last syllable of eento, bundred; when it is fol-
lowed by quaranta, forty; einquc2nta, fifty; sessanta,
sixty; or settanta, seventy; may be suppressed; as in
unquaranta %ieeMni, one hundred aDd forty sequins;
cencinquanta u6mini, one hundred and fifty men;
el!1lsessanta fanti, one hunared and sixty foot-sol- ,
[diers ;
eensettanta etll1alieri, one bundred and seventy horse-
[men.
The ordinal numbers from tktimoprfnao to tkcimon6no,
are expressed likewise by
untUtimo,
duodeeimo, f-
or dDtUeimo, 5
tenodeeimo,
e]eyenth;
twelfth;
thirteenth;
fourteenth;
fifteenth;
sixteenth;
IIeYenteenth ;
eighteenth ;
aiJlett!8Ath ;
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
quartotUcilllO, fourteenth;
fifteenth;
,eItOtUcifltO, sixteenth;
,ettirllOdtcimo, ;
ottotUcimo, eighteenth.
JUneteenth.
The numbers from tkcimoprfmo to may also
be written,

dodice,imo,

qaatto,.dieeslfJID,
guindicesirno,
,edicesimo,
dUUu,ett6m..o,
diciotte,imo,
tltci..."UiIu,
eente .",
"entrlnea.o,
wntiduuu.u.,
vmtit,.esimo,
"entiscisimo,
",endsette,imo,
twentieth;
twe.ty-fil'lt ;
twenty-eecond.
twenty-third; &c.
twenty-sixth ;
twenty-seventh; &c.
"'fisimo, thirtieth;
thirty-fil'lt; &c.
And instead of "mte,imo, t,.eate,imo, &c. we may ule
.ngesimo, twentieth ;
triP..., thirtieth ;
guadrage,imo, fortieth ;
quinquage,imo, fiftieth ;
selSagUiMo, sixtieth ;
settutllfe,imo, seventieth ;
ottagesimo, eightieth;
ntmf1(fmmo, ninetieth.
94
MfALOGY.
CHAPTER IV.
Of Pronoum.
Personal Pronouns.
TRJl personal pronoulll are,
0, I;
tu, thou;.
egli, he;
ella, she;
esso, he or it ;
essa, she or it ;
5one's self, himself, henelf,
se, (. itself; themselves.
1'0 is for the first person, both' masculine and femin-
ine, and makes 1I6i, we, in the plural.
Tu is for the second person masculine and feminine,
and makes ,,6i, ye, you, in the plural.
Egli and esso are for tho third person masculine,
and in the plural make egli1lo, essi, they.
E'lla and essa are for the third person feminiDe, and
in the plural make ellmo, esse, they.
E'gli and ella are ulIld for animate beings: euo and lUG are
UIIld for beings both animate and inanimate. -
Se is used tet express a relation of identity with the
subject, and consequently has no subjective; it is for
the third person of both genders and of botb numbers.
8. may be applied both to animate and inanimate beings.
Personal pronouns are varied, like the nouna, "iththe
prepositioDs di, a, da.
I;
of me ;
to me;
from or by me;
me.
Variation of the pronoun w.
, Singular.
fo,
di me,
a me, mi,
dame,
me, mi,
Subjective,

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
PRONOUN.
95
Plural.
1I6i, we ;
di 116i, of us ;
a 1I6i, ci, till, to us;
da 7I6i, from or by UI;
n6i, ti, lie, us:
Subjective,

Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Dl;lrivation,
Objective,
thou;
of thee;
to thee;
from or by thee,;
thee.
Variation of the pronoun tu.
Singular.
Subjective, til,
{
Possession, di te,
Relation of Attribution, ate, ti,
\ Derivation, da te,
Objectin, te, ti,
Plural.
Subjective, ,,6i,

Possession, di 'fJ6i,
Relation of Attribution, a v6i, vi,
Derivation, da ,,6i,
Objective, v6i, vi,
ye, yOU;
of you ;
to you;
from or by yoU' ;
you.
he;
Subjective,
Variation of the pronoun

el,
or e',
{
Possession, di lUi, of him;
Relation of Attribution, a lui, gli, Ii, to him;
Derivation, da lui, from or by him;
Objective, lui, il, 10, him.
Subjective,
Plural.

el,
or e',
they;
* See Orthography, p. 49.
96
AN.nDGT.
~
Possossion,
Relation of AttributioD,
Derivation,
Objective,
Ili 16ro, of them;
a 16ro, lOro, to them ;
Ga 16m, from or bythem;
lOrtl, gli, a, the...
Variation of the pronoun ella.
she;
of her;
to her;
from or by her;
her.
Subjective,
~
Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
Singular.
Subjective, ella,
t
Possession, di lei,
Relation of Attribution, a lei, Ie,
Derivation, da lei,
Objective, lei, la,
Plural.
elleno, they;
tU 16ro, of them i
a 16ro, 16ro, to them;
da 16ro, from or by them;
16ro, Ie, them.
they;
of them ;
to them;
from or by them;
them.
Variation of the pronoun esso.
Singular.
Subjective, us,, lie or itJ
~
P
.. 1di ~ s s o ~ f h' ,
ossesslOn, d' ~ 0 1m or It;
or ~ s s o
Relation of Att 'b f a esso,2 t h' 't.
rl u lon, or.ad esso, S 0 1m or I ,
Derivation, da ~ s s o from or by kim
. [or it;
Objective, e"o, him or it.
Plural.
Subjective, ~ P , . ~ di ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
OSSe&llIOn, d'"
. or e'SI,
Relation of Att 'b f a fssi,
. . rl U lon, or adessi,
. Derivation, da essi,
Objective, elli,
97
I see him, it is btl;
certainly it il 1M; &c.
V_dOD of tile proDOUD .....
.
elia, .he Dr it i .
{
Possession, S Iof her Dr it 1
Rei
' f or c;ssa,
ation a I a essa
Attribution, ad ' to her or itJ
or t:ssa,
DerivNioq, da essa, from by ber
(or it;
essa, ber or it.
fluraL
Subjective, . esse, .hey ;
. P . I di esse, If h
{
OSSellllOD, ... ' a t em;
or u' esse,
R,:Jt,tioa flf A"ribution a esse, to them
,0 'oradesse, '
da file, fromor by th.m ;
them.
Variation of the pronoun se.
{
pOSBeUlon, di se, of one'. self,
, [self, herself, or itself; tbemselvea ;
Relation ef Attribution, a se, si, to one's self, him-
[self, herself, or itself; themselves;
Derivation, da se, from. or. by
[self, himself, herself, or itself; themselves;
Objective, se, si, one's self, himself,
[herself, or itself; themselves.
Instead of esso, essa, in the subjective only, the
words tUssa, and, in the plural, desse, are
more elegantly used; as,
If ,; deslD,
c:erto dUss,
9
con se, [se con]
ANALOGY:
To give emphuis or to express opposition, we oftell
add to the personal pronouns, the indefinite pronoun
steslo or medUimo, self, for the masculine; and stessa or
metUsima, for the feminine, and thus f.rm the compound
pronouns, ,
ill stesso, 6 i ,tessi, }
or fo medesimo, myself; or n6i medesimi, our-
. fo stessa, n6i stesse, [selves;
:: E th self. ::::; '}
tu stessa, y, ,,6. ,tesse, [selves,;
8r tu medesima, or ,,6i medesime, .
egli stesso, h' }
or egli medesimo, 1m " or eglinomedesimi, them-
ella stessa, herself. . !lleno [selves;
or ella medesima, ' or cUeno medes.me,
esso stesso, himself, essi nessi, }
or medesimo, or itself; or essi medesimi, them-
essa stessa, herself, or esse stesse, [selves;
.ressamedesima, itself; or esse medbime,
se stesso, himself, or, se slissi, }
or se metiesimo, itself; or se medesi mi them-
se stessa, herself, or ' ,se stesse, [selves
r Ie medesima, itself; or se medb.;ime,
When the pronouns me, me; te, thee; se, one's self,
&c. are preceded by the, preposition con, with; we of-
ten transpose the preposition, make an elision of the
n, and form of them a single word; as,
COli me, [me con] meeo, with me ;
con te, [te con] teeo, with thee ;
{
with himself, with herself,
seeo, with itself, with them-
selves; with bim, &c.
'We find in the classies nOICO, lind vd.eo, used for eon ROi, witla
us; eon 116i, with you; bnt these expressions hllve become
ebsolat.
1
r
PRONOUN.
Corpj_difl' PrOllOlllU.
Tbe co.junctive pronounl are,
""'


to me;
me'
me;
ti
{
a w thee;
[tel
thee;
gli,
}
[a lui] to him;
or Ii,
ii,

["'1
bim;
or 10,
Ie, a lei]
to her;
la, lei] her;
ci,

a ,,6a1 to UI;
or JIll,

us;
n,
{
a"
to you;
v6:L,
you;
l6ro. a ]
to them;
Ii,

[16m] them;
er Ii,
l6rO,
fa l6ro]
to them;
Ie, 16ro] them;
J
[a Ie]
Ito &;",..If, heneH; or
[itself, themselves;
si,
himself, herself, or
!
[se]
[itself, themaeivel ;
{
fdi lUal
of him ;
di le'l
of her;
nt,
[di
of it;
[di lorD of them.
Nt, of it, of them;' which generally is eluted with the con-
junctive pronouns, is more properly considered u a relative par-
ticle.
Mi, ti, ci or nt, vi, are of both genders, aDd CaD
only be applied to persons.
Gli or Ii, il or 10, gli or Ii, are masculine; Ie, la, Ie,
are feminine; ri, De, 16ro, are of both genders j and all
of them may be used for penons or things.
100 .A1'fALOGY.
\
When the pronouns mit til gi, ci, 'lli, si, are immedi-
ately followed by the pronouDlI J.. ,., gli; Ii, k, ne;
they are generally united and form a single word.
UniOJl of l'rf1lfOuns mi, ti, gli, ei, vi, ai, with the
.PNmOUtlS 10, la, gli, Ii, Ie, ne.
MI.
[mi
melo, him or it to me;
[mi la mela, her or it to me ;
fmi g1l1
megli, }

them to IDe ;
(tJIi Ie mUe,
[mine] mAne,
to mel of it, Of' to me of
[thelD.
TI.
[tilo] t6lo, bim Of' it to thee;
lal
tela, her or it to thee ;
ti gl'1

ti
t6li, them to thee ;
Ie
tSle,
Ii ne tene, to thee of it, Of' to thee of
[them.
[gli 10]
[gli la]

"2
Ii Ie
Ii ne
GU.
glielo, him Of' It to him or her;
gliela, her or it to him or her;
glWi, them to him or her;
gliete, S
to him of it or to him of
[them.
'1'0 her of it, tIr. to her of them, i. expreued by Ie fle.
el.
[ei 10]
[ei ta]
ld gl'1

die
ei 71e
dlo,
eUa,
}
eeli,
cUe,
cene,
him or it to us ;
her or it to us;
them to us;
to us of it, or to us of them.
PIlQl'WOB'.
101
VI.
r!
HIs,
IWD 0,. it to you;
vila fiela, her or it to you ;


tbem to you;
" I.,
fle/e,
Vell,l, to you of it, or to of
, them.
51.
[si 10] sew,
\ him ... it to h_lr, hene1f,
iSlelf, themselves;
[si la] sela,
her or it to hilDl81f, he..lf,
itself, th8Blselves ;
f.n gla1
segli,
them to himself, herself,
si Ii] seli,
itself, themselves;
[si Ill] aile,
to himself, herself, itself,
[si ne] Sellll,
cbeDilelves of it, tIf' to him-
self, herself, itself,
the..
.,
selves of them.
-
'.
Mew, gliUo, celo, "uo, seID, &c. before a verb
which does not begin with z or i.pare I, are sometimes
contracted into mel, tel, gliU, clll, vel, sel, &c. ; as,
tael promise, he promised it to me;
tel concede, he grants it to thee;
glUl celai, I concealed it from him;
pr_u, he pro.miaed it to us ;
'Vel dico, I tell it to you;
sen Mse, he laughed at it.
Before yems with a vowel they are writ
with an apostrophe; as,
mel' ill,nerd, he will send it to me ;
tel' i) detro, I told it to you;
sea' ando, he went oft".
When the pronoun 10 is preceded by the Deganve par-
ticle 11011, no, not, it i. more elegantly changed into ii,
aod joined with the particle in a single word, [rllIII il] 1101;
thus we say, IIDI fl6glio; nol nego, &c. instead of ..,. 10
,,68'io, I do Dot want it; non 10 nego, I do Dot deny it, &c.
9
102
ANALOGY.
Possessi"e Pronouns.
my or mine;
thy or thine;
his, her or hers, its ;
our or ours;
yeur or yours.
is of both genders and of both
The possessive pronouDI are
7
_, mia, my or mine;
tUo, tVa, thy or thine ;
sUo, sUa, his, her or hers, its ;
rWstro, rWstra, our or ours ;
,,6stro, "ostra, your or yours;
16ro, ' 16ro, their or theirs.
.Mo, lUo, sUo, n6stro, ,,6stro, are masculine; and ill
the plural make,
m ~ my or mine;
tu6i, thy or thine;
su6i, bis, her or hers, its ;
n6stri, our or ours ;
,,6stri, your or yours.
Mia, eva, sUa"rWslra, YJ6,tra, are feminine; and in the
,lural make,
"ie,
tUe,
sue,
n6stre,
,,6stre,
L6ro, their or theirs,
II umbers.
Possessive pronouns are generally varied with tbe
prepositions and articles.
Variation of a masculine possessive' pronoun.
my or mine;
of my or mine;
to my or mine;
from or by my or
[mine;
my or mine.
.
il mto,
Singular.
il ""0,
del mio,
almw,
dalmw,
Objective,
Subjective,
~
Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Subjective,
PRONOUN.
Plural.
S Ii

lOS
my or mine;
{
tUlli
I
Poession, lUi fflia, of my or
or de' [mine;
. {dlli}
Relation of tAttribution, or fflia, to my or
.. [mine;
Derivation, f } miti, from or by
l or 00' [my or mine;
Objective, Ior f my or mine.
Variation of a feminine possessive pronoun.
Singular.
Subjective,
{
Posgesaion,
Relati. of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
la n6stra,
della n6stra,
alia Mstra,
ddllt.l n6stra,
la ruSstra,
our or ours;
of our or ours ;
to our or our. i
from or by our
[or our.;
our or ours.
Plural.
Subjective,
{
Possession,
Relation of Attribution,
Derivation,
Objective,
le ruSstre, our or ours ;
delle n6stre, of our or ours i
dlle n6stre, to our or ours ;
ddlle n6stre, from or by our
[or ours;
Ie Mstrt, our or ours.
1M
Al.'ULOGY.
Variation of the pronoun 16ro, of the common gender..
Singular
....b , 5 il loro,? h . .L_._
.... l la loro, 5t elf fir unnn;
{
P
, {del loro,} f h' th'
osse8s10n, tUlia loro, 0 t elf or elrs;
Relation of Attribution, { :t:: }totheirortheirs;
D
' , {dal lora, fi b th ..
envatlon, d4.lltJ Uro rom or y . elf
, [or theirs ;
Ob
' . { il lora,} h ' h .
la 16ro, t elr or t elrS,
Demo1}stl'at'ive Pronouns.
The Italian has three kinds of demonstrati,,-e pro-
Douns:
The first points out an object oear the persoD who
speaks; as,
Subjective,
Relation of
Objective,
Plural.
S 16ro,
2 Ie loro, S

de/Ii , lora
PossellSlOn, or de' .'

16ro,
A
'b ' di 16ro,
ttrl utIDD, or a'

loro,
dcii 16ro,
Derivation, or 00'
daUe lora,
{
Ii}
ori IOro, }
Ie lora,
their or
[theirs ;
of their or
[theirs;
to their or
[theirs j

from or by
[their or
[theirs;
their or
[tbeirs
I
I
I
I
J
t:tHlUta { tbat woman
or 8t' thing Dear
, yoo.
186
quelk, thOle ;
they fIT tlrose wo-
[men.
object near the persoD who
PRONOUN.
The third points out an
is spoken to j as,

that man or
code,sto, thing ntlar
or cotesto, you;
and in the plural,
__.:I; t' those men M' t those women
liUUell I,. cuuc:s e, .
t
' t' thlDgs Dear t' t or thlDgs Dear
or co es _, or co es e,
you; you.
Questo, questa; or ftd/, q..ella; codelto or co-
testo, codestp. or cotesta, are generally used in speaking
both of peisons and things.
Cosrni, costei; colVi, colii, cannot be employed but
in speaking of persons,
To these may be added the proneun cia, this or that,
which is equivalent to questo, quUIo or quU, cotesto;
in the signification of questa or qudkl'C6sa; cotesttJ c6sa,
this or that thing; that thing near you j but it never
refers to a person.
this; yue'td, tlris;
costUi, he or this man ; costei, she or this ",0.... ;
and in the plural,
these; queste, these;
cost6ro, they or these men; coll6ro, they or these wo-
[men.
The second points out an object at a distance from
the person who speaks, as well as from the person who
is spoken to; as, .
tpl6llD t
or quel,' f that; quUla, that;
colUi, he or tbat man; coUi, ahe or that wo-
and in the plural, [man;
quelli,+
quei, those;
or que',
col6ro, they or those men; col6ro,
1
r
.. See Orthogr. p. 46, 47. t Ibid. p. 48, 49.
106
ANALOGY.
stanaattiJla, th' ,
t
' 11 momlDg ;
s amane,
stasera, this evening;
stan6tte, to-night, or last
[night.
Demonltrative pronounl are varied with the preposi-
tions only, . -
Questa before the nounl matti.a or meine, morning;
sera, evening; n6tte, night; often losel in the lingular
its first syllable, and forms with them a single word;
as,
Quello followed by a noun beginning with a vowel, it,
or impure I, in the plural makes quegli; as,
quegli u6mini. those men; .
quegli zaffri '" those sapphires;
guegli Itromlnti, those instruments.
We sometUnAtl llsequesti, and quei, in the sin-
and queglitw in the plural, speaking of persons, but
in the subjective only; and then is equivalent to
guest' u6mo, this man; tpdgli and quei to quell' u6mo, he
that or that man; and queglino to quegli u6mini, those
men.
E'llo, ella, for quelto, quliltG, this; and co'e,'ui, colutei, for co-
lello _, that man or the man near you; colella d6nJltJ, that wo-
man or the woman Dear you, have become obsolete.
Relati", Pronouns.
The Italian relative pronouns are quale, de, who or
which, that; chi, who, he or she that, they that.
The first two refer to persons or things, the last to
persons only,
Quale is of both genders, and in the plural makes
lJua1i, who or which, that.
PItONOUN.
107
CAe, eli are of both poden aod of both Dumben.
Quale is yaried with the prepositions aod articles;
the others, with the prepQsitioos only.
V of the pronoun pcUe.
Siogular.
Subjective, S il tpuik, l who or
. or la qudle, S[which, that;

Possession, Ior =:Iof ,,!,hom or

al qvdIe [whIch, that;
RelatioD of Attribution, or /illa quale: to ",.
dal 6.le [whIch, that;
DerivatioD, ddlla qu'le' from ",. by
or qua , [whom",.
[which, that;
:Objective, S il whom ",.
or la quale, [which, that.
Plural.
Subjeetive,
{ ort
quali,
who or
quali, [which,

[that;

ilei } quali, ofwhomor
ordt.' [which,
_,
[that;
RelatioD of Attribution, or } qucli,
to whomor
[which,
aile qudli, [that;

from or by
.. ddi .,ali [whom or
DerIvatIon, or da' } q ,
[which,
ddlle fJ.1Uili, [that;
{
}quali,
} whom or
Objective, [which,
Ie quali, [that.
101
ANALOGY.
VaraatioD of the prODOIJIl cAe.
cke, wh. or "hich, that;
di cite, { of whom or
[which, that;
a eke, { to whom or
[which, that;
ria eke { from or by whom
, [or wlUch, tblt;
eke { whom or which.
, . lthat.
Subjective,
Possession,
Rel.tif Att,'b.t',
Derivation,
f)bjective,
Possession,
Bela of Attt'b",'."
Derivation,
Subjective,
Objective,
Variation of the PFOQ01U' el&;.
cAi, who, he or she that i
[they that;
di chi, of whom, him tJr her
[that; them that;.
a chi, to whom, him or her
[that; them that;
da chi, frern whom, him or
[her that; them that;
chi, whom, him or her
[thllt ; them that.
lplltead of qucile, eke, chi, in the relations of posses-
sion, attribution, and derivation, cUi is often used,
which is also considered as a relative pronoun: it is of
both genders, and of both numbers, and is varied, like
ehe, chi, with the prepositions only.
O/nae is also employed, In poetry, a rel.tive
pronoun, .nd then it is equivalent to di eMi, del or 4ella quale, lUi
or delle quali j da e6i, tltJl quale, ,q,.' qutili; con e6i, tol quais j per
10 quale.
Besides these relative pronouns there are in Italian the
particles JU, ci, vi, which never vary, and always refer to
some perspn, thing, or place which has been spoken of
before.
PRONOUN.
Ne refers to one person' or thing, or to more than
o.ne, according to the number of the objects, which have
heEm mentioned; and it is rendered in English by-of
him, her, it; of them; some otit, some of them-; as,
ne pare innamc1rato, he seems enamoured of her;
m cmrei quattro,' I might have (our of them;
ne 0 preso, I have taken some of it or of
[them; &co
lie i, also used to upre.. the place which ODe comes
from or goes to, and then it corresponds to the Englialt
adverbs, benee, thence; as,
quando ne andrete when shall yougo hellce r
one vengo 6ra, I come thence now.
Ci, vi, generally refer to a place, and correspond to
the adverbs, here, there; hither, thither; as,
ci rimango con piacere, I remain here with pleasure;
vi passeremo tUtta la} we shall pass all the ,sum-
[state, [mer there;
ei ritomerete shall you return hither?
vi andro dimani, I shall go thither to-llIlorrow.
Ci properly refers to a place near the person who
speaks, and vi to a place at a distance. This distinc-
tion, however, is not observed when the particles ci, vi,
and the conjunctive pronouns ci, vi would be brought
together, as in 10 vi vi condurrlJ, v6i ci ci avete cond6t-
ti; in which case, to avoid the harsh sound, we say,
10 vi ci COndUTTo, I shall conduct you hither, or
[thither;
mSi vi ci aWte contl6tti; you have conducted us thith-
. [er, or hither;
whether the place refurred to is near or far off.
Sometimes ci, vi refer to persons or things, and then
they take the signification of the persons or things which
they refer to ; as,
plJnsaste a me st, cl pen- } did you think of me'? yes, I
[sai; [thought ofyou ;
iackrete a 9.uesto:1 It, vi t will you attend to this? yes,
lbadero; f '[I will attend to it.
10 .
110
ANALOGY.
whosoever,
whatsoever.
whosoever,
whatsoever;
4lvery each ;.
some;
Interrogative Pronouns.
The interrogative pronouns are who?;
what?; quale '!, which?, which of them 1.
Chi'! is used only in speaking of persons, and is of
both genders, and of both numbers.
eke? serves for either persons or things, and is like-
wise of both genders, and of both numhers.
Quale'! is used for either persons or things of both
genders, and in the plural makes quali '!, which 1, which
of them ?
The interrogative pronouns are varied with the pre-
positions only.
Indefinite Pronouns.
The indefinite pronouns are the following:
M. &.F.
6gni,
qualcke,
chiunque,
chicchessfa,
ehisiv6glia,
qualunque,
qualsisfa,
qualsi,,6g1ia,
Masc. Fern.
uno, or un, una, one;
unaltro, untiltra, another;
qualcuno, qualcuna.,} some
d
"" 1 h d one, some-
qualche uno, qua c e una, [body;
ognuno, ognuna,}
ciascUno, ciascuna, everyone, every
ciascheduno, ciascheduna, [body;
nsssuno, nessuna,
nissuno, nissuna,
niuna, no one, nobody;
veruno, veritna,
nUllo, .. nulla, .
which are used only in the singular
l
and cannot be put
. before nouns of the plural number.
PRONOUN.
III
some, the former;
lome;
others;
certain;
fsame;
lbce,t dp, which before aumeral adjectives, as la the ph_
tipi d," every two days; dglli lei men, every SiI moaths;
dgni dikJ tinni, every teu yean; &1.4:. and ill the word Opi.Mimi,
the day of Ali-IDiots; is used with nouos iD the plural.
urtuni, certUne, lome;
parecc1h, pareccAie, leveral, diverl;
which are uled only in the plural;
l'uno I'una, the one, the former;
alcUno, aleuna, } some one, some-
taluRo, taluan, [body;
altro, aUra, other;
certo, certa, certaiq i
,tesso, Rissa,}
.1' d' . same;
me..esuno, me eoUma,
tutto, tUlta, all ;
alqudnto, alquanta, a little,lomewhat ;
tanto, tanta,} h
' , 10 muc
cotanto, cotanta, '
altrettarato, altrettanta, as much, as much more;
p6co, p6ca, few;
m61to, m61ta, much;
tr6ppo, tr6ppa, too much ;
tale or tal,- tdle, such;
cotale or cotal, cotale, such, such a ODe;
which in the plural make,
gli uni, Ie thle,
aicuni, alcune, !
taluni, talune, 5
altri, aUre,
certi, certe,
stessi, stesse,
medesimi, medesime,
tUtti, tUtte,
alquante, a few, not many;
tantt, tante,
cotanti, cotante, so many;
pitrettt$nti, aUrettcJ.nte, as many, as many morc;
See OMbog. pp. 48,
112
p6dri,
m6lti,
tr6ppi,
trUi, tai, or ta',
cotali, cotai, or cola',
ANA.LOGY.
pSde,
m6lte,
tr6ppe,
tali,
cotali,
few;
many;/
.too many;
such;
such, such ones.
Chiurtqtle; chiule$S{a; qualdmo, qual-
61Ina; qualchtduno, fJlM'lchtdiAniz J opuno, ggauna; gi
uni, Ie une; certUne; talUrio, taluna; taluni, ta-
lune; are applied to persons only; the others may be
applied both to persons and things.
Indefinite prdnonns are generally varied with the pre-
positions only; except gli uni, lc'unt ; altro, altra; stesso,
stessa; medesimo, medesima; which are varied with
the prepositions and articleS.
8i is generally considered as an indefinite pronoun,
dnd is used both for the masculine and feminine, gen-
der, singular and plural; it is equivalent to the English
words-one, we, people, they-; as.
si ike sute un galan- l one sees that you are a gen-
[tu6mo, 5 [tleman ;
c6me si editto, as we have said;
si parlava di guerra, people talked of war;
si loderd m6lto il suo corag- } they will praise his courage
[gio, very much.
But in these and similar phrases si holds the place of
a passive proposition, and may be equally well rendered
in English by-it is, it was, it will be-; as,
si dice che la pace gid l it is said that the peace is
[fermata, S [already concluded;
si credeva e/lll generalmen-. it was generally so believed.
[te,
VZBB.
lUI
it ~ wlal&lc ". e6-( your fidelity will certaioly
[,Ira kalla, 5 [be rewardecl.
We sometimes use aim in tbe singular, aDd iD its
three relations altrUi, as di altrfli or d'alt",i, &C. speak-
ing of persons; and then tilm is equivalent to un '''''''0
.6""" anotber man; tlt altrUi, to di ..,. tiltf'o u6-.o, of an-
other man, &c.; but when it is IJIed distributively, it cor-
responds to the Engliala proDouns-one, another-; as,
6,ltri ~ I e , .,mrim, one weeps, another laughs ;
aimplJrla dipau, aIm di lODe talks of peace, another
[guerra, 5 [of war.
CTai is also used as an iDdefiDite pronoun iD a distri-
butiTe BelIR, and it is equivalent to-ODe, another-;
as,
Uti "a, cAi mene, one goes, another comes;
Uti a Gf1I1ellturlJto, eM ,.t- ~ ODe is happy, 1ID0ther is
[,ero, S [miserable.
-
CHAPTER V.
Of Yerbl.
ItaiiaD verbs are divided into three diJl'erent conjuga-
tions, which are distinpished by the termiDatioD of
the infinitive.
The tint conjugation compreheDds those verbs which
iD the infinitive end in tire; as, amdre, to love.
The second comprehends those verbs, whlch in the
infinitiYe eud in M. or ere; as, t-ere. to fear; ere-
we, to believe.
10-
ANALOGY.
The third comprehends those verbs, which in the ill-
finitive end in ire; as, sentfre, to hear.
All the verbs of these three different conjugations,
whetheuegular or irregular, are conjugated or varied with
one of the auxiliary verbs, avere, to have; or essere, to be.
The auxiliary verb avere in its compound tenses i.
varied with its own participle, avUto, had; and essere in
the variation of its compound tenses borrows the part..
ciple stato, been, from the verb stare, La be, to stand.
Variation of the auxiliary verb a" reo
In the variation of this Bnd the following verbs tbe words be-
tween parentheses, Bre the poetical forms of the verb. Some of
these are elegantly ulI6d even in pPOII6, Bnd some Bre entirely
confined to verll6; in order to dIstinguish the laUer, from the
former the latter are printed in Roman characten.
INFINITIVE.
PreseMt.
to have.
Past.
_ere ad awere, or
essereper aver,.
awntlo,
Future.
GBllVND-
Present.
Past.
to have had.
to have to have, (W'
to be about to have...
having.
having had.
:rA,llTICIPLB. -
Present.
hning.
/
VERB.
Past.
(lVu,to., v ~ t l. had.
au",t., av",te, S
JNDICATIVI:.
0,
ai,
d (be),
abbiamo,
miele,
dnno,
Presmt..
I have;
thou hast;
he, she, or it haa i
we have;
you have;
they have.
Imperfect.
I had;
thou hadst;
he, s ~ e or it had;
we had;
you had;
they had.
fJf1e"a or avea,-
a"e"i,
ave"a or avea (avia),
fJf1evamo,
aveotite,
ave"ano or aveano (avieBo),
ibM,
avesti,
ebbe,
ClVemm4t,
aueste,
abbero,
;) aWtD,
di avUto,
Ii af7uto,
Perfect-definite.
I had;
thou hadst;
. he, she, or it had;
we had;
you had;
they had.
Perfect-indejinite.
I have had;
thou hast had;
he, she, or it has had,;
5.8 Orthogr. p. 48.
n6
abbiamo al1Uto,
tzOete afJuto,
rlnoo av'Uto,
ebbi a"'to,
l.Westi avuto,
ebbe afJuto,
tmemmo avuto,
aveste aI1Uto,
ebbero afJuto,
avefJa awto,
l.Wevi avuto,
l.WefJa awto,
afJt'llamo afJuto,
tzOemite aI1Uto,
tmevano aWto,
arw;;,
I.Wr6.i,
avril,
aorerM,
avrete,
tmrtlmao,
arwa at16.to,
arwdi afJuto,
avril awto,
Qf1remo avUio,
I.Wrete avuto,
ervra,mo trDuto,
we have had;
you have had i
they have had.
Pluperfect-dtfinit,.
I had had;
thou hadst bad;
he, she, Of' it had had;
we had bad;
you had had;
they had had.
P.feu-inde.ftnite.
I had had;
thou hadst had ;
he, she, Of' it had had ;
we had had;
you had had;
they had bad.
Future-indejinite.
I shall or will haTe;
thou shah or wilt have;
he, she, or it shall or will
[have;
we shall or will have;
you shall or will have;
they shall or will have.
r ~ f i n i t
I shall Of' will have had;
thou shalt Of' wilt have had;
he, she, Of' it shall or will
[have had.;
we shall or will have had;
you shall or will have ha:d ;
they shall or will hafe had.
VEBB.

Prelmt.
111
avrei (avr1a),
avresti.
tnlrmamo,
tftJreb6ero (amiano or a- l
. ["nmo), S
I should, .would, or could
[have; or might have;
thou shouldst, wouldst. or
[couldst have; &c.
he, she, or it should, would,
[or could &c.
we should, would, or could
[have; &c.
you should, would, or
[have; &c.
they should, would, or could
[have; &e.
t.lfJUto,
avrbbe aeUtD,
....
avrefflfflO avuto,
a'Vreste arnJto,
tibbi,
abbia,
abbiamo,
abbicite,
libbiano,
\
Past.
{
I should, would, or could
[have had j or miJ.{ht
[have had;
thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[couldst have had; &c.
he, she, or it should, would,
[or could have had; &c
we should, would, 0'1' could
[have had; &c.
you should, would, or coulll
[have had; &c.
tbey should, would, or could
[have had; &c.
DlPJ:J,ATIVE.
have thou;
let him, her, or it have i
let us have i
havt" ye;
let them have.
118
dbbia,
dbbi or t1bbia,
tibbia,
abbiamo,
aMifJte,
46biano,

avessi,

avessi"",,
aveste,

dbbia (DJuto,
dbbi awto,
r1bbia arrilto,
abbiamo avil to,
abbidte avuto,
6hhiano avuto,
avessi armto,
avessi avuto,
aIJesse avuto,
avessimo avltto,
a"este aV1/,to,
avessero avuto,
ANALOGY.
CONJUNCTIVB.
Present.
that I have j or may have ;'
that thou hast; &c.
that he, she, or it has j &c.
that we have; &c.
that you have j ,&c.
that they have j &C.
Imperfut.
jf I had j or should have;
if thou hadst; &c.
if he, she, or it had j &c.
jf we had; &c.
if you had; &c.
if they had; &c.
Preterperfect.
that I have had; or may
[have .hadL
that thou hast had j &C.
that he, she, or it, has had;
[&c.
that we have had; &c.
that you have had; &c.
that they have had; &c.
Preterpluperfect.
if I had had;
if thou hadst had;
if he, she, odt had had;
if we had had;
if you had had;
if they had had.
VERB.
VariatioD of the auxiliary verb ellere.
INI'INITIVE.
Present.
to be.
Past.
119
issere stato, -a,
F u t u r ~
essere per euere, or
fJfJere ad esser"
GERUNb.
Prese"t.
Past.
essendo stato, -tI,
PAI\TICIPLB.
Present.
Past.
s. tato, stata, }
stati, state,
INDICATIVE.
to bave been.
to be about to be, tit'
to bave to be.
being.
baving beeu.
beeD.
56"",
5ei,
~
siamo,
siete (seta),
s6oo,
~ r t J
eri,
era,
Present.
I am;
thou art;
be, she, or it is ;
we are;
you are;
they are.
Imperfect.
I was;
thou wast;
be, she, tit' it was ;
1!8 ANALOGY.
er""limo,
er""ate,

we were;
you were j
they were.
Perfect-tkftnite.
JUi, I was;
f6sti, thou wast,
fu, he, she, or it was ;
furllWUl, we We;
foste, . you were;
furono (furno, furo, far, or ( th
[foro), ey were.
s6no ,t6to, -tI,
II ei stato, -a,
stato, -a,
lliamo st.1.ti, -e,
lIiUe steitz, -1:,
86no stati, -e,
fti sMto,-tI,
f6sti stato, -a,
fu stcito, -a,
furnmo stciti, -e,
fuste JiMi, -e,
furono slfti, -e,
era stdto, -tI,
en
era st.l.to, -a,
eravamo"stati, -e,
eravate stJti, -e,
stati, -1:,
PerfecHJlcle.finite.
I have been;
thou hait been;
he, she, or it bas been;
we have been;
you have been i
they have been.
P luperftct-tkfinite.
I had been;
thou hadst been ;
he, she, or it had been;
we had been;
you had been ;
they had been.
Pluperfect-inikftnite.
I had been;
thou hadst been;
he, she, or it had been;
we bad beeu;
you had been;
they had beeD.
" ..
.-,
..
..
..
"
,t .... '
. " ..: ..
! w " -:. r
. '.:' ..
, .' "
-" :'
" VERB,
"
:, F.tvro-iiukjiuite. " ,::
, ': ' .. " . . . '
sara .I shall 0; "fill be ;
.. ,,,;.a,,. thou shalt Or wilt be;
(fta), . spe,or it-sball.or will be;
sareJ1UJ, shall orwill be;
sarete, , .' )"Iu thall'or 'will be; .
J> '.IVamw (flano' or fl.tno), . th.y",baD or )ViII be. "
;. J .
.. , ..
. .
. ,' ..
.. ....
...
.... ,.
. .
" .
.....
...
.' ...
::. .' i." Fu'tt.crNUfiiai.
t
.. ...
jeri ,tatD, . Yshall 0; will been ;
sftlto, -a, ... thou shalt ur wilt hav6lJeen ;
sarli rt6-to, -a, ,.' : he, she, Or it or will
.. ".,:-" .'Ihave been ..
_. ... ........ J..&& ,
.. ' SQHfII'o 1fiiJi; ,., .,. 'we shan.; wiH,have been;
, . ;..' -t,. ' '. you shaH or"Will baYe been
: , .;. t!JeY shalI.f!":wjll
o ". ." "
.. "" f' ,
::.".:" '" ::. ' .. cqmit"JPNAL. .'
.. " " I ., ... t. ".1
"'" ". .... : ...a;.. . '... . Pr,k.,;,.:. .-:" ..... .
...... -. '.. ". '.". \ t, . . I
: ..tart. ... " i wm.dd;o;' :Could be.; ' .
.. ;.... .' ,':, '.. J.. ';'. 'h ...... [or migIdht'be;
. :'.' t 0111, IJlWU .wou st, ,or'
. :.c. r : " , , .[collldst be; &C,
.. "... fora), " he; 'or 'it.sRould; would.l.
. , " ' ..',... . ' .(or 'i:ould be; &c..
.. .." f
. " ' .... "shoqId, 0,. could
'11> " _:.!- ".,.: ko." ........ :. .. [be; &c.
saresJl; . , . I . ,. you. sh,Qut.d" or
., .', .. ,'. '., ..... .'. [be.' &c.
(sa;.u;,.o 0; -..". .}the
y
or, :'
r ,t.., I , .. ,!:be, &C. "
.......- .
'1-1
..
,.'
1,
.ot
l
.,
.. .. ' .
I.
" "- ..
. .. , " .....
'; ......

.'
.
.. ; ... .'.; ....
.'
.. ".... .
.
.. ......
" .. ,...
.: .. '...
. ,.
, 0
..
. ',.
' ..:
'\,
. ..
I .......
IIttito,..",
Past- . ,-,' 1
, : - I' shonld, .W.OUla, 6f' could"''-
". [bave bll,ep ; or mighh' .
, ',_,'. :' ,
..- -thou". shouldst," .. or. . ..
'. . [couldst have been; &C.:. ;.
" he, she, 'or it should, w',uld; Jf,' '
, '(o.r could have .been.i' .. , .....
'. shoulcT, couia: ,.
:' ., , " 'lb'ave' be.en"; '8&c.,. .;.. ",
" you should; or ,e0ti1d " ..
:- .:: ..... Thave- "een; &c:'"
" . they. shbu!d, or c(luld,; ".
01': ',:': - . :,.... . &c, 'r:" -" ..
. .... "..... :.- ... , . : : \. .'
, :, '.
'.
.sareste stati, -e,
t,:., .
. ! , .. .. .'. :
.,.rii or na,-, ' .,.,.. ', be,'thOll; :', .. I" ; >" ,' ..

I ." i.. I' , ... let him, het-,' odt hei: )11' .
.. .. ., .. ... ... -. ,:",'.7 ...
sialfU) .... ,;< , ;" .. let,; us. bl" . ,'.' . .' . ,.
, ". o,",.J .. ,.. ' ... .. .. . b- '. ':.. :. ... :., fl
o",ttl" " -.'. eye",' . "
sffUlO Or fun(,-, :.,; . :. let'them lie. t'.. , ' :.:.;).:..
, f' .,... 0' ,.' ....: ..... It : .....':," ' .........
_ ,: . '. .:. .
'" ': .. , M .. 'w '. 2 ,."... ...r: OIl
..t, .. ; :1['- 1;.< ...
,- ,I ... ... ":- , ", ." ". :.. ;.'
. sll1,,-. '.. /duit I be ;' or: may.b.e.,; ........ ; 4.;...
.," , '& -"
, ,sfi oqfll; .... ..,.. thqu,b!l ;'" e.. .;:'
, sfa; , : .".:tl1atJle,:.aM, {lr jt,tJe; &c, ":. ' ..
:l' . f' ." .....: .:... .. ,. ..... ..
_siamo; :', :,. '.: , that we ',;".,
iiau, . '\., I _, ; '&c. - r, ,f""f
.: .. 'sirJnb or sfenoj.. that.theJt. h;;; &c, '. '.\ .'"
:' ." _. 1
,:' ... .... .: - " .. p
.. r"" "'.*'" .. 10- "" . '.. /* ."
. l' .", .. .." .".;".: ...;. ,.. .. :.. ".: 7. ..
". f6ssi,. .... .' , .'. shilAlld be.....
f 65S;', ' :".- " .', . '
'flUe;_. _...... Itwqre; &e:,
.. "" '" ... ..- ... ' .... : . '" .'
'.
.... "
..
.'
..
..
".
.' VEllS.
123
f 6,siu}
f6sfe,
fOSlero,
..
.tfi '.t6.to, -fJ,
- -,fa "6.10, -fJ,
_ :, siIMao
, riau 't6ti, -fl,
',tdti, -fl,
" _ p- ' oI'6ssi ,t4to ;.i.r..
, .J' , ....
_ -I6sft .t6to,
, :'),'.c '
: : .' )1Jssima .l6ti; ..,'
..' . flste, stfJH;.:.e, '
f6,8ero ,tali, -e,
.' ,
,- "
".: ':.' ;..". ':.:4" ..
... . . ," . .. :"
." : -.- . ". .
. :' ' ..(
if we were; &C.
if you were; &c.
if they were; &c.
Perfut. ,
tbat I have been; or may
, . [have been;
tbat thou bast been; &C
that be, abe, or it haa been j
[&c.
we bave been; &c.
that you have been j &c.
that they bave been j &c.
Pluperfect. ..
if I had beep;
.. . if thou hadsJ beep,
, if he, she, or it had been;
.'.' if'm) had been ;. .
if you had been;
if they had beeD.,
-.
OfRegular 17erlJi. ",
" ,. '. - .
,,;j.; ..',:.. ."' ,.:' . ",if Aetive Verbs.
. - . . . . .
. . . .' - .. Aeti,ve" yerba in the cpmpound tenses a;e ..ried with'
:." tbo, IlJl:Jiliary verb p.vere, to have. .

. Fir;t C;njiigatioa.
. ..
,. .'
........
! .
V of the verfJ
of .he verbs in
, .. '. .
-. ,
.'
124
. ANALOGY:
I1'll'INlTivJ::
..are,
"
,to lore. . -
Past.
to have loved.
.' ..
pere ad amare, or
ellcre per fUllCire,
"
.,." I"
,to have 'to Of" "
to be about to loYe. ::
'.'
Present.

loving
," "
. ..... -1'"

\ , .
. ': " ...
, ,-
PAllTICIPLJ:.
. "
. ,
lQv,ed.
..
Pre,erat. t',
" ." -". ... ...... - _.J ,
_ ;, '. -
n'" ,.. \.. e . ... . "';.' ' ..
..-lJI'. .. ;,.. ....:.. '"..,
", ..'
.. . .' " "
.. ..

nonCATIVB. '
. "
,..:ato, t
, ,.,.ati, f
i" .
" 0"
"
...
;
.
" .
P..uent." ;
I lo.e;
love; ;". ;
, ' (loving;
.. ' tIulu loveit; &c: ' .
he, aile, or it loves; ,
we 10vl); &c.
<" you love.; &c.
they 10v6; &c._ , :'
"."'.' ..... .
"
.'
dnJ-i" .. " "
4m-a,
am-iA1IUI, '.
tmI-4.te,

... ' ..
..
.. . . ..
o. "
.." ."
;.
.. "
.
:

,
"
..
, .
...
, VERB.
125
; .. 'btIpufect.
I loved; '",. did love; ",. was
"4, , ' [loving;
. thou lovedst; &c.
QIIH1"a, he, sbe, or it l<wed ; &c.
t '.. Qm-aoamo, we 1Qved; &c.
' am-avtlte, you loved; &c.
.... ' they laved; &C.
',:, ' Perfect-defi.ni.te
.. ". : : czm.!.di, I loved; ",. did love;
,QIJto(iiti, ,thon lovedst; &Co
". ..... . aia-O;. l. he, abe, or it loved; &e.
. .........", . we Joved; &c=.
. , .:-' CDJIoCiste, loved i &C.
,',', am-arono or am-dr), they j , &c.
A .> amato,:
, ,'. Iii amelto;
" . , d am&to".
,::';'
/JIIiafo,
", ':.. : tJ1IJIito;,-
I. \
Ptr!ect-tudejinite.
I bave loved;
thou hast loved;
he, sbe, 07' ,it has loved
, '
w& bave loved;
you h!lvl' loved ;'
tbey loved,
"
"
"
"
.. "
,.... , ...."
.
."
.' J " Pluperfect-dejinite
.',::, .ebbiflDl4Co, , ' 1:had j ,
, ' , avuti 'amato, thou bads,' lovell ;
., 8Jlii. am4to, 'he, she, ",.'it, bad loved
......... . . '.. . we had ..
"0 ".,estnllRGfo, ';', you had loved;
J:I iblerd.to,. '. :: \ }iadJoved...
, '. . .": ! "
.'... :'" I, io;ed';
.,"a"e". a7ft-!i.U,' ..... , ,f!roit.badst loved I
,.df.e",! anKr0; , . ,: .. he,
..... t ." .. ' .. ... ". 11
41!' t. . .'"
,. t# .,..... ,'. .':
. .' .. -."
. ': -
t '.
o
,-. .
..
. -"
. -
.'
..,' ..:'
tnmla.,.. amjte, ,
aveiJdte Qmato,
avel1ano
CI'IIf-e1'O,.
" am-erai, 0
am-erd,
. tinHremo,
'

. .
we had' .loved ;" ..... _... . .
you had . 0
they had lo.ved. .
.l- . .'
.' .
I shall or will love ; 0
. thou shalt or wilt lovtl ; , - .

'we shall or will love ; , -
you sbalt" or-willloye ; .' \
they shall or williuve..
-'
'.
4vro am6.to,.
al1rai amelto,
, ,..ato,
CflTemo a".,1.to,
a"rite amato,
uranno amdltJ,
,
': .
I shalJ or will bave lo..ec.tt -: .
thou shalt orwih have lovftl";', '.' \
he, she, or It shall or will ".- ' .
[have l1Ved ;
we shall or 'will nave loved;: .
you shall or will have )o,..ENi ; , , .
the, shall tJ'I' "ill haore togetL. :
CONDITIOIJAL.
.'
... ..
.'. -
......
. , .
(am-eria),'

J ihouliJ" would; or' co'uld. :
[love;' or migb't love;" ," "
. theU' shoulds&" .or .:.'
.. " [c0!lldst &c.' t
he, shea or it should, WQuld; ,
, .' . ',[oJ" co,ul4 love f &c. " :. ,:-:.
" ""w".e'Mmo/ " ";e ;ou\d, "':''COUlcl'' ,.; 0 -
," : .,.. '.:. '.' .' .' .;' " [love; &c. f . '
. tlIIHrelti,.. ,.,' '; : ' '. ydu wC?l1}d, 'Or cOQld '
. '.' . .' . '.. , [lp.ve &t;.. .... l
o ir 0' )
, " 0 {lUIlPerieno), ... '. ,. ,,"'.. ,.(love I &!=" ", OJ,
#_:... .. /": '.:-', . .. ,": 4 "\'
" .'''''' " "," .. ' '. '. II

... '.' J
." . .,. .... -. . . .. .. " -
. . '. \ .. '... .. .. \
-.
,
..
,
. ..
.. ," ..
.'
..
illlr8i6e tJfItJ1to,' ,
.: ....,... . ", .- -,. ..., : . .. ...;.....
....'- "I.... ".". r ... :... ...-.. ..
," .. : . - ..... - t . .. # _ ;,. .. t.. :.
.v' ' ::':' -, .' . .. '. :', .
..,', . '" ,,- .' ':, '. ,': r!f .....
: .:' :. -..' ,: .. '..... "' -:. '. I. .-'- f
# .. Pa"...... I : : ..
"" {' I: Oro eould.;
' : '. . '. bate.Joved ; Of' might ...
' " ," .: I ' :- '{havidovod f' '
..in6to, -." thou shQDIdst, ,)iDulllst, 'or
.. '. have loved; &c.
_.. tW ii.shouI.d, "'ouId; "
. . [or l:ol1fq b,ve loved; &c..' :
. .. " . . ., , . , .
I .'Wluboutd... woldd, or coulc\' :,,:
.... '.. ." ... , ". IQvlld; &c., ,- .
, . .s!tdllJd,:wouJd, Or ..; ,
. '; , '{have loved t kc.. '
thei ,.;ould, (]JI coul4 : .
.' .,'. . -:. [have loved,; k . '
I" '.. . \.:. ....;. .:".. "
. . ... .. '. ,,'
".. #' '.
.. ihou.; .. : . .
.' lei her, tit' it ;.
ler ui love ';
'Iove.ye r '., .
'; .. .let :thexb.,love:, .,
:' .... \' '..:
'. ,
- "
. ... .
". iN'
. ,
6.m-i,
a-f4mo"

dtft-illo.. ,. .< .'
.. .. .
" .. ; _to,
..... (.: 4 .. .:' '.
.. . ... _.;. t." '.
. . . . '.'
.... ." ." .....
. ' '.
. . , '
,
-,

r
"
..
-
.
"
., .
.
' .
"., ....
. ..
, '.
" . .. .
',>
"
'.
.
.' .

. -:"
- "Pruettt.
, that I love; (if' maY,fo,"" ;
. that thou &c. :.
. _.. , . .that he, she, or U, loves; -&c:. ' , '.
- _that 'We '9ve ;' &c.' ..
that you &c.. ..
: . .'that love; .&c. :,
:. ",' .. .. ..' . .. .
',' 'Imp
er
fed,;' . :'; " ,
. if love;:" ..
. if1hou lete(Jst; . "
'. '-. -ifhe,'U1tl) or it 'lovec1; &t....
.' . '. ,.
"" , ...
.' ,
, I
.
...-; ,
-.
': .. ,-
",
- ' Ifm-i ..
, "m-i, . .
'.:. 4f.!M (1m-e)r
.
, '.' ariMdte,-
',- cim-iu,:
.... ..
. .:-,.. '"
..... ' ..
".
. : am-Gss.i"
. '"""asli;
. , : . sm-6.sse;
..... .
, .
, .

...
. '. ::,4- 0 -;..." '""'
M:,,", _ ... ............ : .. fl"' ..
.. f'" : a " '".' :... ..,.... .': .....'" '
...... .- ",0' ..... ll"', I .:.l=.. ":... .
", to to ,: .. , .'. .. """, ... '. ,,',,:; ..
' 12& .:- "... ....... ,,' .,ANALOG;!'., ' ., "
<I . _., .: :: ',,' " . .;.,: ";" ';.: '
.... : .. '.. " if we.'loved ; "&c. " .
, am-liste,', :- , 1.- if loved; &e. . ... '.,. ;..,.
:. , ..", '. ' .'. ..if,they; lovell ;' . "
".' t' . \' .'...:'. '. '.. ....... .l,,"
'. ... ,.' ' . Perfect.'; .,: "_
.. amift';". ... ' I loved' 0;' .-'.'... ; .
, ' . ..' . ' ':, '. . [haTe loVJld; ...'
-..' tibbi am6.to' '. thou hRst ll1;t:: . .. ' "
"L!L '. ".
I . uqbia am4to, . . lh'a$. he,.i}..;;.Of' ii hWl loved;" "
... .' 0 ' .. -,.. '" [&c.,
' .. tibbill",o mnato,' l .... "lciveci'j &::.,
qblJi6te fU1I
a
to, :.' you bne loved; '&c. "" "
" tbp.t .tbey toved; &e. :. '
.".... ' .' oil eo p'l '. -:; :'. . . ., ... ".
.. .... ''''PrJ eel. . " .'.. . .
, (Jt7usi .', . if I had '. :" '. 0' ,.' ..
. " tn1eSh.' -4mlito, . . ,.- 'jf.tbou hai-I,r lJwed ... .' .' :.:
.. '''' .0
'.. .-. . if het SOe;.or it had loved;
. '. a.,l!Slvnoarnatp, '. ifwe' had lovt:d ;. .
".: 'aves-te cm.ato, . if'you'had loved.;
".,,,' ImItJt6, 'if hild-1Qved. ... ' ...
po. ... .... ....... ' .. "'"
. " a"'.. .. .. .. , '... .' ,
I tit '. ' I .,' ."
'... erbs' in . cart, gare, in I to pres.err
. .' .. ibcdlaId SQund of c, g, ,l:ODJugatJon; take
'.' .&Jt" after thOse cOD8onants wbeneTer they. e, i.
:.. ". .... : '. '," . .
' ..:
.
, .
, .
.. .'
. .'
,: .
. .
. *.::
..
.
.'
-
;
."
, .
.
.

-

:'
"
#.
., .
r
,,' ..
'.' .
",I'.
. .t.... .
"
Present:
..to".sellrch.
"'0
.' .
- .-
"
'. . .' Varsation.of the yerb
. '. . . .... "
"...., ,.
. (Paradigm of the verbs 'ending in C'ffC-J..
0 .. " ... i ... ':
, .. ' f
," .
"II ,9,:, . " ,
. " /ert>are,
..... f ."' ...
... ' I' .
' ..
ave,.. a r;erwre, or.
essere per cercare,.
..
, ....
. .
'tit tr"
'.
1
'., 129
" t
Pasl. ",
to have searched.
FlItur..
to have to 'seueh, or
tQ be about to 'search.
..
,
.
.,
VEBB.
'.
"
"'1.1'
, .
'" .... ':' ...
, ,
, -' : ; .- '.
r,
.'
.'
I
t
f
I
GJ:llUND.
Present..,
Past.
...
..
."
-. '.
.'
...
...
',',
Pad.,-
hUin'g ad'"
;, .. I
I
'.
"
. , .
cere-ante,
." .'
.'
.' ....
. ..
,'.
.' ..
'-
.... '
; I
,.. ...
t :,.
: .
.... '. . ".,'.": . ..,
. "
.\
." 't'" ".:.!
'. : -.
ANALOGY:
, Perfect-dejinite.. .
1 ; or did ::'.
" ..; ...
PeTfer.t.,j,1ulefinite.
I have searched j &c.

t. ."
. ",'
... " ..
... ..' .
.... ' ..
..
180
,
.. cerc6to, :
I.
-,
.'
,,' .
. ,
.'
."."
I .
. .t. ';'.. . ...
'.
. ,
" ,
.... . ".
..
. . .."
.-
,," .. .. .. ".. . . #.. *.: ,.,' ....: "'
".: #I ' .. " r. ... .. , ...
. ::':.:...:.> ..'
,. '. ..... we ,should, Or
"' '. : "I ."...... {search; &c....
, .. . -. , wOllh),. ..
. . . '. , " . , . . '... ... .,[seatcb; .
.. ... : {cmn..ert'czno; they 'shoatd, 1Fould,'OJ" CQuid- ' ..
,: .:':.', : '. "'_
.:. '. : .. ". .. J .:" ... .' c ...
, , ". :':, . .fait. . '. ..' .
; 01 ::: .., ..." , .' ":. '.: -woldtl,,'M.' .
.. IJM:mt", ,., stilft!:lie<J'; or. migh&"
" "' .-. " .. """",, II [h .' b d 1iI.-'
.: : ..' '.' / "..: .. '. ave.seare e. ; """, , .
. ,.. . t; .: .. . .' ... ':"
" .;r .jMi'BRAT1Vlih" .. , .. ,
: -'. ,I; .' :._... .o, 'o, .. ,... r,
.. -.' '.' :;ert-q; . .. search th011 'j"". ..' :" f'
::: .. .... : '.. :" , '.' letpim, or)t. t .
. " .. tercl-idtno,' '.. . ... tis '!tearcR ;- .
.': t: cerc.ate, ". . ,'. ..s:earcb yf! 1' . " "
. ;.:', .>. ,'w" , __ ;..
' .. ,,' ..... ,... .." ".'.. ':. .. . ':.,. , ..." .... ,
.' '. ',. ... .:' . ." "
.i' I' , .. .. .... .,,' t ...........:"..... ,,-;. .... __ . ,. I' lo:
....... Jo '1_ .:"'.. "J .. :.. ' i ; .. ..,.. ..
.. , ".;4 .. ' .
__
: : '. .:. '.. . seaichest;' . .
<;erClJ,.e)j . t. that he, 0,. it searcltes.l
.......... '...... : ".': ' ..., .',. .." .. ' .. \,' :'.. .; r , .. [&c.
,.' . ,e;'/i-ia.rim, .' .. that we Search; .&c. '. -. . .
1111' .. .. ..
'. ... . . ..... ',. .learch f' _'. '" ;.,
", '.' ". .' that they sfll,lreh i &c., '; ,
; =.' '. " ... .. . "'. . '.. ... : . ".. "
-; .#;.. " ,-" ': , .c' . ", '.
.. . ;' .'" etc':- ." -- ." ii. I' Qr.
.. - '... .. .. ,. ''' .... II [. _
. rI';.' ; ... , l" ". , .:.' )." search; e&C.
. .". . . '. - ....... - .. " ..
JiN 1tI."'- JIll. .. ...
.' * r P.eriect: . . ,'.
"'- . . that } have searched;: Of'
.' .' '.. '. .,' . ,;' havSl seal;ched ; ..
I I .".. '-
',' . '. , . ..;,
...- ..
" 0' ,
'.. ,,: 'if I"'hita l"&c:" ,
f
-,
. ,
.,
"
, .
.... , .
",
"
,.. .:- I ..
" II "1 .. ,"
0 ... ,'C .....
, r.. :.', :.. i: ....... ,
. : .. ;"';y,1.. ," .. '"f :"10.
.' ., . i. ....
',.'" . .
',' fJD'essi 'cercdto, tc:
;'.:.. . ...... -:.'
.'
;:
..

,..
"
"
.
't
"
.
2 .
0
I
:
:
"
IS:
"
\

,
.

.

,f
"
., .
.' .
, ,
, .
.'

.
,
:l, .
, .
" .
. ..
.. "..":" ....
.'-,
'. .
.
. '.
"'. ,'..
.
"
.....
' ..........
..
'.
"'\ ,\.'
., '
"
'havUlg entreate,a,'
*'" '
.. ""'."

\
':
.. '

..
, ,
PaJt .'
.. -,
Prutfl,t:
Present,
..
, .
. '::.',,".'1 "
i' to have ,entreated,-
., ., II ...
" .
.' ' .. J. _
. I,' " \, . II, .' ..
, ,tl),. have to-entreat, or"
,to be about to entrea\.
. , .
, ,
o
.'
.'
.
, INPINlTI"B. :
,
,p - .. '; , " ,
, " ..... ..,..... -
., " ,'.l!' WI'"
D.... ',' ;.. -. ...
,_ " 'J" 4
" .: ..
entreating.
"
!
) "
,
,
,"
.'
, Vai-iation.of the verb'1':eC-SN.' "
" .
of.tlJe ,V6"_: .adiDg -,:..
... '. '". ... ......... I" .:- ,' ..
:
to
" "'. '.,.'. ",. ..
Clverl! ap.egare/or ,
I ", pet peg6.r'S;"
. ."... ., . ..
It' . !"
'1'
"
,
.11... ". __
' "ClfJJndo
.. ,. ..
, ,
.... .

... ': ...

. '<' p,.eg'4re,
:.,. "'. -. .. ....

, I,
, ..

, ..
..

, .
.. .
" .
. .
" .
"
, ...
..
..
"
.. .. . .,,' ,
,:.: .', ., .:
. "'. .
;
" '.

..
.;.
..
r
.'
,VERB. 133
Past.
preg-ato, preg-ata, entreated.
preg-ati, preg-ate, S
INDICATIVE.
,"preg-o,


pregTHamo,
preg-ate,
preg-a7W,
. preg-Gva, etc.
. preg.ai, etc.
opregato, etc:
Present.
I entreat; or do entreat; or
. [am entreating;
thou entreatest; &c.
he, she, or it entreats; &e-
we entreat;" &c.
you entreat &c.
they entreat,; &c.
Imperfect.
I entreated; or did ;
[or was entreating; &C.
Perfect-dtifinite.
I entre,Bted ; or did entreat;
, [&c.
Perftct-inde.ftllite.
I have entreated; &c.

ebbi pregato, tc. I had entreated; &c.
Pluperfect-indefinite. ,
aveva pregato, teo I had entreated; &c.
Future-indefinite.
I shall or will entreat;
thou shalt or wilt entreat;
he, she, or it shall or will en-
[treat;
134

preg1Hrtte,
preg"'-eranno,
tftJro pregrUo, .te.
ANALOGY.
we shall or will entreat;
-you shall or will entreat ;
they shall or will entreat.
Futun-tkjinite.
I shall or will have entreat-
Led ; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
. pregh-erei I should, would, or could en-
[treat; or might entreat;
preglt-eresti, thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[couldst entreat; &c.
1"6/toeri'bbe (preglHria), he, she, or it should, would,
Lor could entreat; &c.
preg'1&-eremmo, we should, would, or could
[entreat; &c.
you should, would, or could
[entreat; &c.
preg"'-erebbero (pregh-eri- they should, would, or could
[ana, pregh-erieno), S [entreat; &c.
Past.

I should, would, or could

[have entreated; or might
- [have entreated; &c.
DlPERATIVB.
png-a,
pregl-i,
preglHfJmo,
preg.fste,
p,.qIHno,
entreat thou;
let him, her, or it entreat;
let us entreat;
entreat ye;
let them entreat;
VERB.
CONJUNCTIVJ:
l ~
preglM (pregh-e),
preglM,
pregla-1 (pregh-e),
prtglHlsmo,
prtglHlste,
preglMno.
cibbia preg6.to. etc.
~ s s i preg6.to, etc.
Present.
that I entreat; or may en-
[treat;
that thou entreatest; &e.
that he, she, or it entreats;
[&c:.
that we entreat j &c.
that you entreat ~ &e.
that they entreat; &c.
Imperfect.
if I entreated j or should
[entreat; &C:.
Perfect.
that I have entreated; or
[may have entreated; &c.
Pluperfect.
if I bad entreated; &c
SecOJtd Conjugation.
The verbs of this conjugation are commonly divided
into two classes, those ending in ere (accented), and
those ending in ere (unaccented): both of which in the
perfect-tkfinite hllVe two terminations, ei and elt; i ex-
cept a few which have the termination ei only.
Variation of the verb temere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in ere, accented.)
INFINITIVB.
Present.
to fear.
1S6
l f ~ r temUio, .
t.n1fire a temere, or
essere per temere,
tern-endo,
QVentW temuto,
{em-ente,
tmMito, tern-uta, }
tmMiti, tem-Ute,
ibn-o,
tem-i,
tem-e,
tem-iarno,
tem-ete,
tem-ono,
ANALOGY.
Past.
to have feared.
Future.
to have to fear, or
to pe about to fear.
GJ:JlUND.
Present.
fearing.
Past.
having feared.
l'AIl.TICll'LE.
Present.
fearing.
Past.
feared.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I fear; or do fear j or am
[fcaring;
thou fearest; &c..
he, she, or it, fears; &C.
we fear; &c.
you fear; &c.
they fear; &c.
1ST
t...eva or lem-ea,
tena-evi,
t...eva or
tem-evamo,
tem-e"tite,
t...e"fJ7IO or t...efJ7lO,

I feared; or did fear; .,. wu
[fearing j
thou fearedst j &e.
he, she, or it feared; &e.
we feared; &c.,
you feared; &e.
they feared j &c.
Perfect-definite.
I feared; or did fear;
thou fearedst; &c:.
he, she, or it feared; &e.
we feared; &c.
_ you feared; &e.
the1 feared ; &c.
tmHi or tenWtti,
tem-esti,
tem-e 01' tem..eUe,
tem-emmo,
tem-este,
tem-erono or tem-etfero,
at_to,
di temuto,
Ii temuto,
abbiamo temmo,
avete temuto,
anno temMo,
Perfect-indefinite.
I have feared;
thou hast feared ;
he, she, or it has feared;
we have feared ;'
you have feared;
they have feared.
ebbi temuto,
avesti temuto,
ebbe temuto,
a"emmo temuto,
aveste temuto,
ebbero temuto,
Pluperfeet-definite.
I had feared;
thou hadsl feared j
be, she, or it had feared;
we had feared ;
you had feared;
they had feared.
IS8
temuto,
arJevi temuto,
cmeva tem6.to,
avevamo temuto,
avevate temuto,
cmevano temuto,
tmwr3,
tem-erai,
tem-erd,
tem-eremo,
. tem-mte,
tem-er6nno,
avr3 temuto,
avrai temuto,
avra temuto,
avremo temuto,
avrete temuto,
lWranno, temU'to,
,
ANALOGl".
Pluperfect-itldefinite.
I had feared;
thou hadst {eared;
he, she, or it had feared
we had feared;
you had fellred ;
they had feared.
Future-indifinite. ,
I shall or will fear;
thou shalt or wilt fear;
he, she, or it shall or will
, [fear;
we shall or will fear;
you shall or will fear;
they shall or will fear.
,Futflre-rkjinite.
I shall or will have feared;
thou shalt or wilt have fear-
[cd;
he, she, or it shall or will
[have feared;
we shall or will have feared;
you shall or will have fear.
[ed;
they shall or will have fear-
[cd.
CONDITIONAL.
telR-erei (tem-eria),
tem-eresti,
(tem-eria),
Present.
I should, would, or could
[fear; or might fear;
thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[couldst fear; &C.
he, she, iJr it should, would,
[or could fear; &6.
TERB.
139
tem-ereste,
tem-erebbero,
[tem.er1en6),
mJrei tem'Mo,
avresti t{muto,
mJrtbbe temuto,
(lI1rtlllmo temuto,
mJreste temuto,
temuto,
we should, would, or could
[fear; &C.
you should, would, or could
[fear; &e.
they should, would, or could
[fear; &e.
Past.

I should, would, or could

[have feared; or might
[have feared;
thou shouldst,. wouldst, or
[couldst have feared; &e.
he, she, or it should, would,
[or could have feared; &c.
we should, would, or could
[have feared; &c.
JOU should, would, or could
[have feared; &e.
they should, would, or could
[have feared; &c.
..
tem-i,
tem-a,
tem-iamo,
tem-ite,
tem-ano,
tem-a,
tem-a or tem-i,
tern-a,
UlPERATIVE.
fear thou;
let him, her, or it fear;
let us fear;
fear ye ;
let them fear.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I fear; or may fear;
that thou fearest; &c.
that he, she, or it fears; &e.
140
tutMtimo.
IDII-idte)
Unwmo,

imHssi,
tmHsse,
tem-essimo,
tem-este,
tmHssero,
dbbia temuto,
dhbi temuto,
abbia tmuto,
abhiamo temuto,
abbiate tem..uto,
6.bbiano tem-uto,
temu!o,
avessi
avesse
avessimo temuto,
aveste temUto,
avessero temuto,
ANALOGY.
that we fear; &0.
that you fear; &c.
that they fear; &c.
Imperfect.
if I feared; or should fear;
if thou fearedst; &c.
if he, she, or it feared; &c.
if we feared; &c.
if you feared; &c.
if they feared; &c.
Perfect.
that I have feared; or may
[have feared;
that thou hast feared; &c.
that be, she, or it bas feared;
[&c.
that we have feared; &c.
tbat you have feared; &c.
that they have feared; &c.
Pluperfect.
if I had feared ;
if thou badst feared;
if he, she, or it had feared;
if we had feared;
if you had fear-ed ;
if they had feared.
VERB.
Variation of the verb credere.
1..1
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in ere, unaccented.)
INFINITIVE.
cred-ere,
llt1ere credufo,
llt1ere tI aredere, or
ellereper credere,
cred-eruJo,
llt1endo credUto,
Present.
to believe.
Past.
to have believed.
Future.
to have to believe, or
to be about to believe.
GERUND.
Present.
believiog.
Past.
having believed.
,
I
cred-8ndo,
PARTICIPLJ:.
Present.
believing.
Past.
believed.
141
.ANALOGY.

Present.
t
I believe; or do believe;
[or am believing; &c.
Imperfect.
cred-eva or (ertd- I believed; or did believe;
[1a), S [or was believing;
crea.evi, tuon believedst; &c.
crea-eva or creO-UJ, he, she, or it believed;
[&e.
cred-ev6.mo,
creHate,
cred-evfJJlO or eruJ..etlRO,
we believed; &c.
you believed; &c.
they believed; &e.
Perfect-dtjinite.
t:rea-ei or cred-etti, I believed; or did believe i
ered-isti, thou believedst; &c.
ereU or crecUtte (ered-eo),be, she, or it believed; &e.
erea-emmo, we believed; &c.
ered-iste, you believed; &c.
,red-erono or erea-ettero th b I" d &
( d
') ey e leve ; e.
ere -ero ,
Perfect';'nf1Vinite.
acreduto, 4'c. I bave believed ; &c.
Pluperfut-dtjinite.
ibbi crwuto, 4'c. I had believed; &e.
Pluperfeet-indefinite.
vetla creduto, 4'c. I had believed; &c.
VEllB.
145
Future-irrdefiaite.
treNo, etc. I shall or will believe; &c.
Future-definite.
fJf1ro cred6.to, te. I shall or will bave believ-
[ed; &c.
CODI'l'fON.!L.
Present.
{
I should, would, or could be-
creNe; (ered-eria), te. [Heve; or might believe;
[&c.
Past.
{
I should, would, or could
[have believed; or migbt
[have believed; &c-
IMPBllATlve.
'II
I
I
I

j
ered-a, te.
ered-issi, te.
abbia ereduto, te.
believe thou; &c.
CON.JUNCTIVB.
Pramt.
that I believe; or may be.-
lieve; &c.
Imperfect.
if" I believed; Dr shQuld be.
lieve; &c.
Perfeet.
that I have believed j or may
[have lIelieved; &c.
144
IlfJessi ereduto, <teo
ANALOGY.
Pluperfed.
if J had believed; &c.
Variatlon of the verb t ~ s s e r e
(Paradigmof those verbs of the second conjugation which
in the perfed-definite end in ei only.)
INFINITIVE.
Presl!7lt.
tess-ere,
v ~ r e tessUto,
avere a tessere, or
essere per tessere,
tess-endo,
fJfJenilo tessuto,
tess-ente,
to weave.
Past.
to have woven.
"'uture.
to have to weave, or
to be about to weave.
GERUND.
Present.
weaving.
Past.
having woveD.
PARTICIPLE.
Presl!7lt.
weaving.
YERlI.
Past.
(tel-to), tess","ta (tes-ta), l
tess","ti (tel-ti), tess4J,te (tes-te),5 wove
INDICATI VII:.
Present.
1"5
te.
tess..e'Da or ten-ea, te.
I weave; or do weave; ",.
[am weaving; &c.
Imperfect.
I wove; or did weave; or
[was weaving.
tUMi,
tess..esti,
tess..e (tess-eo),
tuwmmo,
tus-este,
tUHrOltO (tess-ero),
Perfeet-definite.
I wove; or did weave;
tbou wovest; &c.
he, she, or it wove; &c.
we wove; &c.
you wove j &C.
they wove; &c
Perfeet-indefinite.
3 tessuto, te. I have woven, &e.
Pl.perfect-dcfinite.
ebbi tus-uto, teo I had woven; &c.
Pluperfeet-indefinite.
tessuto, te. I had woven; &e.
146 .4lfALOGY.
Ftlhlr..-i_fiflite
I shall or will &c.
Ptlttlr&odejimte.
I shall or will have woven; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Prelmt.
tell-erei (tels-erfa), etc. I should, would, or could
[weave ; or might weave; &c.
flfJrei telrito, tc.
tess.a, etc.
tess.e.ssi, ete.
.dbbia tessuto, etc.
Palt.
I should, would, or could have
[woven; or might have wov
[en; &c.
IMPJl:ItATIVJ:.
weave thou) &c.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I weave; or may weave j &c.
Imperfect:
jf I wove; or weave;
[&c.
Perfect
that I have woven; or may
[have woven; &c.
VJBJt.
P1Mpcrfeet.
if I had woven; &c.
147
Verbs ending in eere, seere, in the ptut"fHlrlicipk take
an i between the c and the vowel II; as, to
please; pleased ; p4lure, to feed; ptuci6to,
fed.
Regular "ubI of tM secorul COJfivgatitm, tTallt in tAt
perfect-definite 1&cRIe tk tmrairuJti07l 6i 07I1y.
abbtittere,
abdttersi,

I.Idh1Ipiere,
,..ettere,

Unaere,
cofIIbtittue,

c6rllpiere,



C07Itusere,
C07Ieuplseere,
diMttere,
discernere,
disef1ldere,
distulert,
empiere,
esipere,
eSlmere,
flrulere.
flrrJere,
to beat down ;
to meet with;
to approach;
to fulfil;
to annex;
to yield;
to aift;
to combat;
to rival;
to accomplish;
to grant;
to concern;
to connect;
to interlace;
to covet;
to.. debate ;
to diacern;
to rip;
to unweave;
to fill up;
to exact;
to ezempt;
to split;
to be fervent j
148
}iedD'e,
f
6
ndere,
inc6mbere,
intercedere,
intessue,
..eJcere,
mUtere,
pascere,
pentere,
precedD'e,
preJcirulere,
procedere,
rob&6.ttersi,
recere,
rucfndere,
retroceder"
ribdttere,
ric6mpiere,
riempiere,
rilvcere,
ripascere,
ripetere,
rifle-ttere,
ritessere,
Jcernere,
Jcfndere,
Jconnettere,
serpere,

JtrabfJttere,
strepere,
Juccedere,
IUcc6mbere,
sUgg.e,

teuere,
t6ndere,
t6rpere,
traZUur"
ANALOGY.
to wound;
to melt;
to be incumbent;
to intercede;
to twine;
to mix;
to mow;
to feed;
to repent;
to precede i
to cut off;
to proceed;
to meet again;
to vomit;
to rescind;
to go back;
to beat back again ;
to accomplish again;
to fill up again;
to shine;
to feed again ;
to:l-epeat;
to reftect;
to weave again j
to discern i
to sever;
to disconnect;
to creep along;
to solve;
to vex i
to bustle;
to succeed;
to sink under;
to suck;
to be lukewarm;
to weave;
to shear;
to grow stiff;
to shine through.
VERB.
149
The verbs. manetfere, comaettere, sconnettere in the past
participle, make annesso, aanexed; connesso, cODnected;
SCOn7&eSSO, disconnected. Esfgere makes exacted;
esimere, esento, exempted; resetndere, ruc1lSo, cleft; riflet.
tere, rijlesso, reflected; scndere, Sc1SSO, severed; and s61ve-
re, soluto, solved. The JUUt participles of
dere, serpere, strepere, tepere, t6rpere, are not in use.
BUggere in its past participle borrows the participle suc
cmato, sucked, from the verb succlliare, to suck.
Some of these verbs, besides the regular, have also in lOme
tenses an irregular formation; tbeir ditrereot forms will be given
with the irregular 1lerb,.
Third COffiugation.
Of the verbs of tbis conjugation, some, in the present
of the indicative, end in 0; some end in Sco; and some
have both of these terminations.
Variation of the verb sentire.
(Paradigm of those verbs of the third conjugation' which,
in the present ofthe indicati'lJe, end in 0 only.)
INFINITIVE.
Prese,.t.
sent..re,
avere sentito,
to hear.
Past.
to have heilrd.
150
tJrIue a smtfre, or
essere per smtire, .

afJendo smtUo,
(.ent-ente),

sent-iti, sent.fte, 5
sent-i,
sentoe,
sent-iamo,
sent-4te,
sent-ono,
sent.va or sent-fa,
ANALOGY.
FrtIrIre.
to have to bear, or
to be about to bear.
PreBmt.
hearing,
Past.
having heard.
PARTICIPLE.
Present.
hearing.
Past.
heard.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I hear; or do hear; or am
(hearing;
thou hearest; &c.
he, she, or it hears; &c.
we hear; &c.
you hear; &c.
they hear; &c.
Imperfect.
I heard; or did hear; or
[was hearing;
VEllB.
Ul
,mt.Em,
smt-i"a or smt-ia,
smt-i,,6mo,
stmt-irnitt:,
Hltt-ivano or sent-imlo,
thou beardst; &c.
he, she, or it heard; &c.
we heard; &c.
you heard; &c.
they heard; &C.
stllt-4i,

smt-i (sent-to), "
sent..f.mmo, .'
sent-fst.,

osmtUo,
rii sentHo,
asentlto,
abbiamo sentito,
alJete sentfto,
anno 'mtfto,
Perfct-dt:finit
I heard; or did hear;
thou heardst; &c.
he, she, or it beard; &c.
we heard; &c.
you heard; &c.
they heard; &c.
Perfect-indefinit
I have beard ;
thou hast heard;
he, she, or it has heard;
we have heard ;
you have heard;
they have heard.
ebbi
a"esti smUto,
ebbe sentito,
avemmo sentito,
aveste sentUo,
MJbero ,entito,
aveva sentito,
Ilvev; sentito,
aveva sentUo,
4lIev<11l1O seaUto,
avevate smtito,
alJfvano sentito,
Pluperfect-IMfiRit.
I had heard;
thou hadst heard;
he, she, or it had heard;
we had heard;
you had heard;
they had heard.
Pluperfect-indifinite.
I had heard;
thouhadst heard;
he, she, or it had heard;
we had beard ;
you had heard;
they had heard.
152
sent-iro,
stnt-irm,
sent-ird,
sent-iremo,
sent-irete,
sent-iranno,
afm) sentit;',
avrdi sentito,
avrd sentito,
avremo sentito,
avrete sentito,
avranno sentito,
ANALOGY.
Future-indejinite.
J shall or will hear;
thou shalt or wilt hear;
he, she, 01' it shall or will
[hear;
we shall 0" will hear;
you shall or will hear;
they shall or will hear.

Future-definite. ....
J shall or will have heard;
thou shalt or wilt have heud ;
he, she, or it shall or will
[have heard;
we shall.or will have heard;
you shall or will have heard ;
they shall or will have heard.
CONDITIONAL.
sent-irebbero (sent-iriano),
sent-irei (sent-iria),
sent-iresti,
sent-irebbe (sent-iria),


Present.
J should, would, or could
[hear; or might hear.
thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[couldst hear; &c.
he, she, or it should, would,
[or could hear; &c.
we should, would, or coulc;J
[hear; &c.
you should, would, or could
[hear; &c.
they should, would, or could
[hear; &c.
'.
sent'to,
smt,to,
.",.ebb, sentlto,
aoremmo smtUo,
slllltfto,
aribbcro UJItiIo,
sent-i,

smt-i6mo,
smt-ite,
sent-ano,
sent-a,
or sent-i,
sent-a,
smt-iamo,
smt-idte,
sent-ano,
VERB.
Past.
{
I should, would, or could
[have heard; or might
[have heard;
thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[eouldst have heard; &c.
{
he, she, or it should, would,
. [or could have heard;
[&e.
we should, would, or could
[have heard ; &e.
you should, would, or could
[have heard i &c.
they should, would, or could
[have heard i &e.
DlPBUTlVB.
,hear thou; ,
let him, her, or it hear i
let UI hear;
hear ye i .
let them hear.
CONJUNCTIVI:.
Present.
that I hear; or may hear i
that thou hearest; &c.
tbat he, she, or it hean ; &e.
that we hear; &e.
that you hear i &c.
that they hear; &C.
IeJlt-fssi,
,""..fssi,
,,,.,..fIse,
,mt-fssimo,
.m'-bte,
smt..fssero,
lfbbia smlfto,
dbbi setllfto,
66bia ,ent'lto,
abbiaJllO senilto,
abbidte sentlto,
dbbitlfto sentito,
ausi ,enlfto,
sentito,
.entfto,
Ilenlfto,
""elite senlfto,
setllfto,
ANALOGY.
Imperfect.
if I heard; or sbould hear i
if thou heardst; &c.
if he, she, or it beard; &C.
ifwe heard;
if you heard; &c.
if they beard; &c.
Perfect.
that I have heard; ",. may
(have heard;
tbat thou bast heard; &e.
that he, she, or it has heard ;
[&C.
that we have heard; &c.
that you have heard ; &C.
that they have heard; &c.
Pluperfect.
if I had heard;
if thou hadst heard ;
if he, she, or it bad heard;
if we had beard;
if you had beard;
if tbey bad beard.
Variation of the verb esibire.
(Paradigm of those verbs of tbe third c:onjugatioll,
which, in the preUflt of the indicanve, have the termina-
tion sco only.)
UfPINITIVI:.
e.ib-tre,
Present.
to offer.
'.
VERB.
Pat.
"
auere ad esibire, or
e,,.,.. pet' aitnre,
to have dered.
Future.
to have to offer, or
to be about to offer.
GlI::amm.
Present.
offering.
Pat.
having offered.

JlAB,TICIPLlI:.
Present.
offering,
P(Ut.
siMta, }
esib1ti, uilMte,
offered.
Present.
I offer;
esib-lseo,
esiMsci,
esilMsu,
ffsib-idmo,
esiJMte,
esiMscono,
INDICATIVlI:.
or do offer; or am
. [offering;
thou offerest j &c.
he, she, or it offers; &c.
we offer; &c.
you offer; &c.
they offer; &c.
156
esiM"" or esib-ia, te.
ANALOGY.
l_pufeet.
I offered; or did oft'er; or
[was oft'eriog; &c.
Perfeet-d4inite.
esib-ti, te.- I oft'ered; or did oft'er; &c.
Perfect-indefinite.
esibito, teo I have oft'ered; &c..
Pluperfect-dtfinite.
ebbi esibito, te. I had oft'cred; &c.
Pluperfut-indefinite.
aef1" esiMto, te. I had oft'ered; &c.
Future-indejinite.
esib-iro, te. I shall or will oft'er; &c.
Future-ikfinite
.".b uibfto, te. I shall or will have oft'ered;
[&c.
CONDITIONAf..
esi6-irei (esib.irfa), ote.
arei esibfto, te.
Present.
J should, would, or could of-
[fer; or might oft'er; &e.
Past.
{
I should, would, or could
(have oft'ered; or might
(have oft'ered; &c.
uib-Uei,
e,ib-isUl,
mb-itimo,
IsilMte,
esilMsctnlO,
VERB.
IMPDLtTIVIC.
offer thou;
let him, her, ()f' it g'-er ;
let III oft"er ;
offer ye;
let them offer.
CONJUNCTIVJC
Prelent.
157
e,ib-Uca,
uib-isca or mb-iscAi,
esilJ.-fsca,
esib-it1mo,
esib-itUe,
.esib-{scano,
esilMssi, tc.
abbiG esiMto,
minto, tc
o
that I offer; or may offer;
that thou offerest; &e.
that he, she, or it offers; &C.
tbat we offer; &e.
that you offer; &Ie
that they offer; &e.

IfI .offered ; or should offer;
[&c.
Perfect.
that I have offered; or may
have offered; &e.
Pluperfect.
If I had offered; &C.
Variation of the verb abborrire.
Paradigm oftbose verbs of the third conjugation, which
iB the pruent of the indicative end both in and ?sco.)
IJI'I'INITI VE.
abboJTe4re,
14
Present.
to abhor.
us
abborrito,
""ere ad abborrire, or
essere per abborrire,
abborr-&ulo,
uendo abborrfto,
abborr-inte,
ANALOGt'. -
Palt.
to have abhorred.
Fllt.re.
to have to abhor, or
to be about to abhor.
CJI:aUND.
Present.
abhorring.
Past.
having abhorred.
PAllTICIPLE.
Present.
abhorring.
Past.
l
5
abhorred.
INDICATIV'.
abb6rr-i or
abb6rr-e or
ablJorr-icimo,
abborMte,
.bMrr-oJUI or
[no,
or
Present.
I abhor; or do abhor; or
[am abhorringi
thou abhorrest; &c.
he, she, or it abhors; &c.
we abhor; &c.
you abhor; &c.
they abhor; &c.
VERB.
159
r_pwfect.
lII6borr-f"a or abborr..(a, etc. I abhorred; or did abhor;
[or was abborriDg; &c.
Perfect-dt}iniu.
I abhorred; or did abhor;
[&c.
Perfect-intk}inite.
I have abhorred; etc.
Pluperfect-de.ftnite.
ebbi abborrito, etc. I had abhorred; &c.
Pluperfect-intleftnite
"e"a abbonito, etc. I had abhorred; &e.
Future-intU.ftnite.
s b b o r r i r ~ etc. I shall or will abhor; &c.
Future-thjinite.
CI1rO abborrito, etc. I shall or will have abhor-
[red; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Presmt.
{
I should, would, or could
cbborr-irei (abborr-irfa), 4-c. abbor; or might abhor;
- [&c.
Pad.
{
I should, would, or could
have abhorred; or might
[have abhorred i &c.
160
ANALOGY.
1aD'I:UIl'IVL
abb6rr-i or abborr-fsci,
abb6rr-a or abborr..ucfJ,
abhor thou;
let him, her, or 'it abhor;
ahbmT-idntO, let us abhor;
abborr..\te, abhor ye ;
I'lbMrr-ano or abborr..bcarw, let them abhor.
CONJUNCTIVJI:.
:Present.
abb6rr-a or abborr-fsca, that I abhor; or may abhor;
abb6,'NI or aWJ6n-i, or ab- ~ th bo
[b
'" bb' ~ ~ at thou ab nest; &c.
o r r ~ c or a orr-lscf",
abborr-a or abborMsca, that he, she. or it abhors; &c.
abborr-i6mo, that we abho,:"; &c.
abborr-iate, that you abhor; &c.
abb6rr-ano or abborr-lscano, that they abhor; &C.
abborr-tssi, ~ c
dbbia abborrito, etc.
aDelli abborrito, etc.
Imperfect.
if I abhorred; .or should ah-
[hor; &c.
Pwftct.
that I have abhQrred ; or may
[have abhorred; &c.
Pluperfed.
if I had abhorred; &c:
...
161
&gular "er6, .., tie tlIrd CMfiqtJtiOll, tiGI i" tlle
of tlte indicative AGee tlte ter.i"atin 0 tnely.
atldornafre,
tIIlmtire,
etmlmtfn,
dilervire,
tlisleJltire,
dortJrire,
fwKgfre,
irtdormire,
partfre,
pmtire,
rifuggtre,
ripartire,
rilmtire,
leonlentire
lItgfIire,
lentire,
"TVare,
'.fuggfre,
lortfre,
"eltire,
to make Ileep;
to allent;
to cOOlent;
to lerve ill ;
to dillent;
to sleep;
to ilee ; .
to make lI1eep ;
to depart;
to repent;
to ilee to a place of reCuge;
to depart again ;
to awake;
to be of another opinion;
to follow;
to hear;
to serve;
to avoid;
to go out;
to clothe.
Regular !Jerbl of tlle tAird t:tIfINatiora, tNJl ia tie
present of tlle indkative eJUl in isco only.
abbelire,
abbonire,
abbri."idire,
abbronz{re,
ahbrosUre, 'f
abbrostolin,
abbrwtire,
abbrustolfre,
abbruttire,
abolire,
ahortire,
aecalorire,

14-
to embellish;
to improve;
to sbiver;
to taD;
to toast;
to grow ugly;
to abolish;
to miscarry;
to warm;
to ltir up to auger;
162
aecolorire,
aecud1re,
aeetire,
addolcfre,
admap(re,
a.derire,
a./fte1101re,
affort'&re,
affralre,
aggentilire,
aggrandfre,
aggvernre,
agire,
.lkggenre,
allenare,
aUutire,
tJftICIrire,
arebire,
ammamare,
ammtmsfre,
_attire,
,..".olllre,
ammonire,
IiIJIImorbidire,
ammortfre,
ammutlre,
ammutolire,
IInnegAitttre,
IIJInerire,
IIJIniclailire,
IIJInobilire,
apparfre,
trppaure,
appetire,
appiccinfre,
appigrfre,
ardfre,
arricchire,
arrosrire,
arrostire,
}
to colour;
to auiBt;
to grow sour ;
to sweeteD;
to accomplish;
to adhere;
to weaken;
to strengthen ;
to weaken;
to become or make gentle r
to enlarge;
to train up in war;
to act;
to eBBe ;
to soften;
to get ready;
to imbitter;
to .aspire with ambition ;
to prepare;
to tame;
to go distracted ;
to Boften;
to admonish;
to Boften;
to quench;
to grow dumb;
to grow lazy;
to blacken;
to annihilate;
to ennoble;
to appear before;
to fade i
to desire i
to diminish; ,\
to make lazy;
to dare;
to enrich;
to 'blush;
to roast;
V'DB.
163
lIrro=ire,
arrugginSre,
CIfT1j11idtre,
aualfre,
auerfre,
assop{re,
fJlsordfre,
assartire,
assDggettfre,
atrerrfn,
attriln,{re,
attriltt,."
attutfre,
tJfIf1ilire,
tw1rizzire,
balhutire,
bandfre,
bifJlll:Afre,
blCl7ldfre,
brCl7ldfre,
bnuifre,
,Cl7ldfre,
IfJpfre,
,Aiarire,
lircutre,
eolorirt,
,opire,
ItmIpanre,
ItmIpartfre,
IOmpatfre,
flOfllpfre,
eonupfre,
IDIIdfre,
lOn!erfre,
'tmstridre,
,ontribufr.,
IOntrfre,
umstitrnre,
flostnnre,
. custodfre,
to make rough ;
to grow rus'y ;
to grow rough j
to attack;
to llffirm;
to fan asleep;
to deafen;
to match;
to bring into subjection;
to frighten;
to attribute;
to grow wone and wone ;
to quench; .
to debase;
to fade away;
to stammer;
to banish;
to whiten;
to flatter;
to brandish ;
to burnish ; [Benes;)
to preserve (as in cen-
to understand;
to grow clear;
to environ,
to colour;
to strike;
to appear before;
to grant;
to compassionate;
to fulfil;
toconceive ;
to season;
to bestow;
to build;
to contribute;
to be contrite;
to constitute;
to construct;
to gulH'd ;
defmre,
dejimre,
demolire,
dicAiarire,
differire,
di.flinire,
digerire,
diminuire,
tIi..,rW,
diJeppellire,
disfavor'are,
~ b t
disfornb-e,
disgAiottlre,
disgradire,
dinmpedire,
disparire,
dilptl'"tlre,
disruvidire,
distribuire,
"'bbidlre,
_ftgorire,
disumre,
erudire,
esawlire,
esallrire,
mbire,
mnanire,
espedire,
fallire,
fastidire,
faoorire,
finire,
fiorire,
flaire,
fornire,
garantfre,
garrire,
gemire,
genlilire,
gestre,
ANALOGY.
to defer;
to define;
to demolish ;
to declare;
to differ;
to define;
to digest;
to diminish;
to mitigate;
to unbury;
to oppose;
to expound;
to unfurnish ;
to disgorge;
to despise;
to clear the way (or;
to disappear ;
to share;
to polish;
to distribute;
to disobey';
to weaken;.
to disunite;
to instruct;
to hear favorably;
to exhaust;
to offer or present ;
to annihilate;
to despatch;
to fail;
to molest;
to favour;
to finish;
to flourish;
to flow;
to furnish;
to warrant;
to chide;
to groan;
to ennoble; ,
to make gestures ;
VDLB.

,
glntttitr"
gWfre,
gradfre,
lJfV.IItdreI
graafre,
gremire,
gr'Uff'Ib"
"guaire,
gtmlcfre,
guarire,
guannr"
illaidir"
illanguidh,
iUiquidtre,
i.baldaarire,
irllbaldire,
Walsimire,
imbmadire,
imbarberir"
imbarbogire,
imbastardfre,
irllbastire,
imbelftre,
ialM,tidr"
irllbiane!lfr"
imbiondr"
imbif:zarrf.r"
imbolsire,
itllbmtire,
. imbottire,
illlbo=aeeMre,
imbrieetm",
imbrunire,
irllbrusehire,
imbruttire,
immagrire,
immalincotdrrl,
immalsmdrfJ,
immalflagU-',
immarcire,
to gripe;
to enjoy;
to like;
to hook;
to go to seed i
to snatch;
to gruat;
to wail;
to touch often ;
to cure;
to furnish;
to grow ugly;
to languish ;
to turn liquid ;
to grow bold;
to become balsam ;
to serve up a dinner;
to grow cruel ;
to dote through old age ;
to degeBe1'8te ;
to baste;
to embellish;
to grow brutal ;
to whiten;
to make or grow rair ,
to fall into a violent pauion;
to grow pursy.;
to grow better;
to quilt ;
to grow worse and worle i
to grow knavish;
to grow brown or dark;
to grow tart;
to grow ugly;
to grow lean;
to grow melancholy i
to grow unhealthy;
to grow wicked;
to rot;
immattire,
impaaronire,
impallidre,
impaurire,
impazimtire,
impedire,
impUlJertire,
impiantire,
impaccolire,
impidocchire,
impigrire,
impoltronire, S
imporrire,
impostemire,
importtmire,
impOf1erire,
improsperire,
impuntire,
imputridire,
impuzzolire,
}
znacefzre,
inacidire,
inacutire,
inagr1.re,
inalidire.
inanimire,
inaridire,
inasinire,
inasprire,
inallaNrfl.
ineagnire,
ineallire,
iracal"ire,
iracanckerire,
incarautire,
, iracaparbire,
incapocchire,
incaponire,
incapriccirfl,
ANALOGY.
to become foolish;
to make one's selfmuter of;
to turn pale;
to affright;
to grow impatient;
to hinder;
to become pervel'lle ; ,
to pave;
to lessen;
to grow lousy j
to grow lazy j
to grow rotten;
to imposthume ;
to importune;
to grow poor;
to prosper j
to quilt ;
to become putrid;
to stink;
to grow sour i
to make sharp, tJr sharpen;
to grow sour ;
to become dry;
to animate;
to grow dry;
to become stupid as an ass ;
to exasperate;
to become avaricious;
to become ;
to grow hard ;
to grow bald ;
to fester j -
to turn grey j
to be obstinate;
to become stupid;
to grow obstinate;
to fall in love ;
illcamarll,
incarogairll,
iJlt;atarMrll,
incatorzolirll,
incattiMrll,
~ r l l
incercmnrll,
inciprigairll,
inci"iMrll,
incodardirll,
incolkMre, ~
incolloMre, S
incoragirll,
incrudelirll,
incrudirll,
indebolirll,
indocilrll,
indolcirll,
indolmtfrll, }
indolnWrll,
indurirll,
i7lllrire,
infarcirll,
infastidlrll,
/ i'ifellonfre,
infemminire, -
inferfre}
i7lferoclre,
inferfJonrll,
infiacclaire,
infie1Jolfrll,
infingardire,
infistolire,
influire,
infollire,
infortire,
infracidire,
i'ifragilire, ~
infralire, S
infrigidire,
VERB.
to grow into the flesh;
to become carrion;
to catch cold ;
to blast;
to grow wicked;
to burn to asbes ;
to turn sour;
to grow angry;
to grow polite;
to grow faint-hearted;
to fall in a passion;
to encourage j
to grow cruel ;
to irri tate ;
to weaken;
to become indocile;
to grow sweet;
to grow numb ;
to grow hard;
to inhere;
to stuff;
to trouble;
to become wicked;
to grow effeminate j
to infer;
to grow fierce;
to inflame with fe"or ;
to grow weak j
to become feeble j
to grow lazy;
to turn to a fistula;
to influence;
to grow mad;
to strengthen;
to rot;
to grow weak;
to become cold ;
167
168
i ~ r
ingdoslre,
ingentilire,
ingmrsi,
iragiallire,
ingiOflCJfllln,
ingobbire,
ingrandire,
inlividire,
i"atlUrMre,
ianagresftrc,
innanimfre,
inaridire,
innaspnre,
innuzzolire,
inorgtJglire,
inorridire,
iraquenre,
nquisfre,
inreftre,
inriccAire,
inrigidire,
inrugginire,
iJlSalvatichlre,
insaawe,
inschiamrt,
insenre,
insignire,
iasignor{re,
insipidire,
iJlSohnftre,
insolltre,
iJlSoraM-,,
insospettire,
insozzire,
imterilire,
institufre,
imtolidire,
instruire,
instupitHre,
ANALOGY.
to grow brisk and Itroag ;
to grow jealous;
to grow delicate ;
to meddle;
to grow yeUow ;
to grow young apia';
to grow crooked ;
to grow large ;
to grow livid;
to grow acid;
to grow sour ;
to encourage ;
to grow dry;
tn exasperate ; [any ,thing j
to awake an esgerneu for
to make or grow proud ~
to shiver with horror;
to inquire;
to impeach;
to catch with ,a net;
to enrich;
. to grow rigid;
to rust;
to grow savage;
to grow mad;
to enslave;
to insert;
to decorate; [thing;
to make one muter of any
to grow insipid;
to grow insolent;
to grow soft ;
to deafen;
to grow suspicious ;
fo soil;
to become sterile ;
to institute;
to grow stupid ;
to instruct;
to fill with wonder;
iuwperM....
illtmelni ..
inteRerire
inttrfllDltlre,
intiepidir,',
illtigJlosire,
intimidire,
intimorire,
intirannlr,.

iJltisiclaire,
intorbidire,
intormmtifo.,
intorpidire, .
intristire,
inumidir"
in17ag/aire,
in17anir..,
inveire,
irroelenire,
inverminire,
inviglUir.,
invilire,
in17ineidire,
inviperire,
inrnscidire,
iJUJimr",.
involpire,
in'totic/aire.
irretire,
irriulafre,
irrigidu.e,.
irritrosire,
irrotrodre..
irruginil:,.
ispartire,
esterilire,
istituire,
i$tolidire"
i4!trllfl"e,
15
flO grow proud;
\t grow dark;
" make tender ;
" grow stitT or n '
." cool or grow " 10 ;
tt make or grow _. ;
to intimidate;
,. become a tyrant ;
,. grow stitT with c;oWI-
wgrow conswoP'i_ i
kJ grow thick or
,,, grow stiff or 1UtM.,
kJ grow stupid;
kJ grow wicked ;.
grow damp;
kJ inspire with 10... ;
vanisb;
\0 inveigh;
\0 become irrit.d.;
\0 breed worms;
to grow vigoro.,...
to ;
to grow ftac.cid i
to become
\0 grow viscid;
wither;
\0 grow crafty;
to grow clowniNl;
to catcb with a aet ;.
to enricb ;
to grow rigid. ;
to become froward ;
\0 rust;
\0 divide;
\0 become ste.a;i;ht t.
institute;
grow stupwh
to instruct ;
170
.zc.Mrc,
lIJrgn,
Imfn,
1IItJI'rin!,
m"ndirt,
_upt,
_",nrt,
Cl66etllre,
oUrt,
",.dirt,
....tnrire,
Flirt,
p",.'onn,
patlre,
pattuire,

Pidre,
polirt,
poltrire.
prtfenre,
preJaglrt,
prettrire,
profenrt,
projferirt, S
progml,re,
proi/Iire, .
ptdIre,
pdlre,
rtlb6elllre,
rabborIire,
raddoklrt,
raggeatilwe,
r_llire,
,.,..,.".bidSre,
,..,;idlre,
rapfre,

rtJDllilfN,
f'tJf1tMcidtre,
redarpre, .
.ANALOGY.
to lick;
to give liberally J
to allay;
to putrefy;
to grow musty;
to bellow;
to fortify;
to obey;
to be fragrant;
to strain the warp;
to obstruct;
to divide;
to bring forth;
to suffer;
to bargain;
.to perceive;
to plead;
to polish ",. clean;
to grow lazy;
to prefer;
to presage;
to omit ",. pus over;
to utter;
to proceed;
to prohibit;
to polish Of' clean;
to puni8h;
to embellish;
to pacify;
to sweeten;
to make genteel;
to mollify;
to make 80ft;
10 become raocid ;
to ravish;
to cool;
to dishearten;
to grow ftaccid;
to rebuke;
..uriMre,
"tribuire,
ria66ellire,
riogIre,
riapparirB,
riarricc/tlre,
""hadare,-
ribantAre,
rieAi",nre,
ricolorire,
-rit:tnlUpirB,
rit:tnUlire
J
rieostitvire,
riferire,
rijiorire,
rimbtJfllblre,
rinjronz1rl,
rirageJlCiHre,
ringimrl,
ringiOf1tJJ1fre,
1"ittgi000en'rl,"
ringitmialln.,
riragraatDrl,
rin.mnrfJ,
riJilumirl,
r i ~ r
rintetllrire,
rintiepidirl,
riuigonrl,
riJrDi'v-I,
riparfirl,
ripullrl,
ri.aren,
rUbaldfrl,
ri.quittirl,
ri.teuAire,
ritrorire,
riunirl,
ri",nre,
ntgire,
In .
to restore;
to recompense ;
to embellish;
to react;
to reappear ;
to enrich again ;
to rivet;
to recall from buail.....at
to clear up ; "
to colour again;
to conceive again ;
to season;
to ....eplace;
to refer;
to blouom again;
to grow childish;
to bring iorth new leaves;
to ennoble ;"
to rejoice;
to grow young again ;
to become jovial ;
to increase ;
to grow wiae apia I
to clear up;
to become lbas1;er lIpin i
to move again to pity;
to grow cool or lukewarm;
to gather strength again ;
to debase;
to part;
to furbish;
to mend;
to make joyful; [hawking;
to repair the feathen (io
to dry up;
to become froward; .
to reunite, to auemble I
to revere;
to roari
'.
to grow insipid;
to savour;
to despond;
to be amazed I
to banish;
to be dismay'" ;
to gratify oepftoe ;
to scarify;
to grow leaD'
to spring;
to clear;
to yelp;
to avoid;
aporfnl,

.balordir.,
Ibaatl1re,


.calffre,
.......re,
.caturire,
uAiarirt,
sclaiaMrt,
Klicncfre,
Kiapidfre,
,clapire,
scipillfn,
.a,,'re,
II:fJIoM,
,colp(re,
.comparire,
't:OrIIpQf"tire,
semendre,
seppelllN,
sJavorire, :
.}i_we,
Jjomfre,
'6'-",.,
'6,""w,
'6lMef&tfre,

smagrire,
l1IIaltfre,
l1IIarnre,
,mintlfre,
""'e,
1lIIpWe,
.lOrltre,
so,titaW,
1JHI"h,
spartfre,
'.P
aurlre
,
}
to fade;
to engrave;
to lose value b'eHIPI'i.oo'
to Ihare; ..
to Co to seed I
to bury;
to disfavour;
to faint away;
to unfurnisb ,
to beat in a eGWWIt,
to let loose J
to discourage ,
to displease,
to grow lean j
to digest;
to lose or min,
to diminish ; [office;
. to reinstate ill Clharge or
to quench;
to cast OJ' draw loClt ;
to substItute;
to disappear;
to separate ;
to ;
-
IJIeflfre,
,pervertfre,
'pessfre,
'qudtire,
'tabilire,
wuggilln, .
,tarnutlre,
'tatKire,
,teccmr".
,terilire,
,tiu'ir.,
,tolidir"
,tordfre,
,t-,re,
ItramortV-e,
,trl8lllUMfre,
,t.pidire,
.tupfre,
naire,
",ekan,
l'Pilire,
svggerfre,
",ppltre,
tradfre,
trafertre,
tr,.orftre,
trasferfre,
trtlllfTedfr.,
trasPtJf"'r.,
trasricclrire,
abbicllre,
a.e,
lIIrutaptre,
.,..sre,
"
V.ERB.
to despatch ;
to pervert;
to tbickeD;
to yelp;
to establish;
to free from ruR
to sDeeze ;
to resolve;
to become dry ;
to grow barreD I-
to make aDgry ;
to grow stupid;
to StUD;
to bustle;
to SWOOD;
to reduce or weaken;
to amaze;
to wODder;
to vanish;
to appease;
to abase;
to suggest;
to supply;
to betray;
to wound;
to faint away;
to traMfer ;
to traDsgress;
-to shiDe t,hrough i
to grow very rich;
to obey;
to uDite or jOiD ;
to hold by prescription;
to cry like aD WaDt
ITI
ANALOGY.
The verb In the pallt participle DIlHtto,
obstructed. The vetb8 ctnstru,re and co.tJ'tlire, itr,trufre
and istndrt, make C!"Utt'rrit6 and codruito, ot cot&ftrUlto '"
and costrUtto, consttutted; irutnlUo and ilttilfto, or ifJ-
strUtto and istrUtto, Instmcted. And apptJM"e, tllrrlp.
t'itlJ1Pll"frr, in the Pallt JHi1'!'ltipk make
apyarfto and app4rso, appeared; t:tnllpant6 lltId c"..
plJrso, appeared; trd'parlto and trallp6.r,o, sheoe through;
riapparfto and riappdr$(/, rllllppeared.
Yerbs of tlte tAt,1I tllat ira tM pnth, of
tAe indicative end bolA .. 0 filRd taco.
aggradfre,
applmulfn,
aIlsaporfre,
aIlsoriKre,
tJrJ'Dertfre,
bmedfr.,
bollfre,
coraseguire,
coravertre,
ullgwe,
disirag1&iottfre,
.vertire,
ftJrire,
forbfre, .
i7llpazdr't,
i7llpett'ft't,
iradunre,
irag1&iotttrt,
'JItm'dIr'e,
invtt'%'fttt,
iravutfre,
laragmre,
mtlkdfre,
IlIIlRtire,
nudMre,
""'"re,
to please;
to applaud;
to taste;
to absorb;
to warn;
to blell;
to boil;
to obtain;
to convert;
to execute i
to disgorge;
to divert or atrluse
to wound;
to furbish;
to grow mad r
fo petrify; ..
to harden;
to swallow;
to green;
to invest;
to languish ;
to curse;
to lie;
to nourish;
VEldt. '
. to otter;
offnre, S
perfre, to perish ;
per.egMN, to perltM:ute ;
JII"l'et',m . to J
prosegure, to prosecute;
to tWak ,
rin"erdre, } to grow green again ;
rin"emre,
rinwltb!.t .. to iD.... ;
rive.ttrep . . .to dress.a@ain ;
seAermire, to fence;
IClIaentW', . to lliup tQ scet. ,
\ to au6"er ;
soffrire, f
.orMre, to absorb ;
sovtlerflre, to subvert or overturn;
sussegure, to follow immediately; ,
tossire, to cough;
trangAiottfre, to swallow up ;
traoestire, to disguise.
In tbe verbs aggradire, assaporire, ferire, impetrire,
'''''''e, ao4 puUre, the ia #I itt fJO-
etical.
The verbs bene&We and mlJlf,d{re, ia tbe ]HIs' JHI"IiDipie
make benedetto, blessed; maletUtlo, c..ned. 0.lmre
and ojfrf,re, soffenre and soffnre, make olfirto, offered i
suffered.
TheverbBoppanre, eomparire, trlUpGrire, ritJppmire, in the pre-
ceding IiBt, bellide their repar, have a1Bo in 80me teDBe8 an irregular
IOrmatiOD; whidlwM'lIe gtftrr With 6llf iWtgvlm" 'Ile1'I*. .
There are some verbs of the tbird conjugation that
belong also to tbe second; haviDg two terminations in
the infiniti"e, one in ire, the otber in ere; as, .
appetfre, appetere, to dllllire;
ingliottfre, 'nt1&i6ttere, to sW811QIW ; _
176
lome that belong also to the fil'llt conjugatiOD ; baviDg tile
two terminations Ire and are; 88,
i.pazwe, to grow mad;
ifJcoraggfre, iJle6l'tlggiare, to encourap ; &c.
and some otbel'll that belong to alllhree of the conjup-
tionl; ai,
JRggfre, Mggere, JRggAitJre, to bellow;
olire, 61ere, 'olczzare, to be fragrant; &c.
Tbese verbs are diff"erendy varied according to the
conjugation to whieb their terminatioDi respectively be-
long. -
Variation of PalSiee
Pallive verbs are formed by joining the verb illerfl,
to be, to the pal' participle of active verbs.
P888ive verbs then, through all their tenses, are varied
"'ith the auxiliary verb essere.
Variation of the verb ilSere tIIJIlito.
(Paradigm of the passive
UfPINITIQ.
Pre,DIt.
to be loved.
ITt
SlJtiJltllltJaih, dl:lra amata, 2
elJlJcrl: ~ JtlJIi -ali, lJtJte tmltite, Sto have been loved.
F.ture.
GfJer' -' , ..., or 5..to, -a,
6ucre per ell.... llil'll'iti, -1:, .
PAIlTICIPLJ:.
~
to have to 'be loved,
or to be about to be
loved;
beMat love"
Palt.
Lmlo 5stelto amato, lJtata amata, l h . I
USr; ,stGti tlllllJti, dGte amdtB, S aVlug beeD OVM.
tNDtCATJViIl.
.6M amato, ...,
lei amato, -a,
eanuils, ~
,';0. aatiti, -1:,
siete awiti, -1:,
s6no amati, -e,
era am6.to, -a,
en amito, .Q,
era amato, -a,
Prel6ftt,
I alb lovell ;
th"u .... loved;
he, .be, 01' it i. 10ftCl i
we are loved i
you IIrs loved;
they are loved.
Imperfect.
I WAil loved ;
thou wast lond ;
he, the, or it WWi loved;
Irs
".a"dMo ",.ali, -e,
",allate amati, -e,
",antI ".ati, -e,
AN.ALOGY.
we were -loved ;
you were loved ;
tiley were loved.
fli ",.ato, -fI,
fa-.n al8cito,-fI,
fu amato, -fJ,
fUmmtJ am6ti, -e,
f6ste amciti, -e,
f4rorao amciti, -e,
Perfed-defitlite.
I was loved;
thou wast loved;
he, abe, or, it was loved
we were loved;
you were loved;
they were loved
.Perfect-indefinite.
16710 .,"to tDJtGto, .tata I have been loved;
[_ta,
.ei .tato ontdto, stata thou hast been loved;
[amcita,
tdto tDJtGto, .ttita al8citG, he, she, or it has been loved;
Ii_ .ttiti "",ali, state we have been loved;
[amate,
.tati amdti, stiite you have beeD loved ;
[_dte,
." "sli tlllltili, ,tdte they have been loved.
[amtite,

fUi ,tdto .to, ,tata I had been loved ;
[ana6.ta,
f6.ti stato amAto, .tata thou hadst been loved ;
[amcita,
fM .tato am6to, .tata he, she, or it been IOTed I
[amtita,
/umJr&O stdti mntiti, state we had heen loved;
[...lie,
f6ste "ati tDI,Jti, ,tcite you had been loved ;
[amate,
fUrorao stan fJIfIdti, suite they had been loved.
[amat"
l'EItB.
1I1uptff'fedwindeJillite.
17')
era 5tato amato, stata I had been loved;
. [amata,
en stato amato, stata thou hadst been loved;
Lamtita,
va
,tato amtJto, stata he, she, or it had been loved i
[tJJlldta,
eravamo stali omGti, ,tate we had been loved ;
[am,ite,
era"ate stati amati, state you had been loved;
[amate,
erano ,tati tm&o1ti, state they bad been loved.
[amate,
sar.D ,.,wto, -a,
,arai amflto
,ara amato, -a,
..ittto "".ali,
.,rete ,.,ati, -i, .
'arGlIIIO tJIIIdti, -.,
I shall or will be loved ;
thou shalt or wilt be loved;
he, she, or it shall or will be
(loved;
we shall or will be loved ;
you shall or will be loved i
they sbaH or will be loved.
Future-defiJ&ite.
sara ,ttit" amato, ,tata
[amtita,
.sariJi ,'ato amato, stata
[amata,
sard stato amato, stata
[amtita,
I shall or will have been
[loved;
thou shalt or wilt have been
[loved;
he, she, or it shall or will
[have been loved;

litO
... stliti -.:iti, .....
[amate,
s,..ete sttiti tlIIIlUi
J
stGle
[amate,
...aIUlQ stat; aadti, s{4te
[t.llllfite,
_ wm hav" heen
[loved;
.you ,hail or will have been
[loved;
thel ,ball or "ill have been
[loved.
, saresti amato, -a,
sarbl"'" -e,
sareste amati, -e,
CONDITlON4-..
Present.
1 shnuId, would. or could be
[loved; qF nI.igkt ;
thou 'bOiddst, wouldst, or
[I;ouldst be &c:.
he, slW. Of' it should, would,
[or could be loved; &c.
we should, would, or could
[be loved; &c.
you should, would, or could
[be loved; &c.
they should, would, or could
[be loved; &c.
Past.
raresti stato amato, .tata
[_fa,
sareb6e stato amato, stata
[amata,
stati amati, state

sareste dati amata, state
[amate,
Qlll4iti, state
[arnate,
I should, 1110,114, III eouM'
[have been 10\l4ld, fir might
[have benle-vell.; tho
thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[couldst have been loved ;
[&c.
he, she,or it should, would, or
could have been loved; &c.
we sPoqt<\, would, or could
[have Qi!en laved;
you llhould, would, or could'
[have bee.Q loved; &;(;.
they l\hould, would, or could
'[have been loved; &c.
VERII.
lIS!
lii,.,.sto, __,
sfa amato, -0,
., t.IfII4n,
%
Siano aman,
sia amato, -5,
sii amato, -0,
sla amato, -0,
siamo amati,
siate amati,
siano amati,
_ f6ssi amato, -a,
f6ssi amato, -0,
f6sse anlato, -0,
f6ssimo amati,
f6ste amati,
f6ssero amati, -e,

be thou loved ;
let him, her, or it be loved;
let U9 be loved;
be ye loved;
let them be loved.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I be loved; or may be
[loved;
that thou be, loved j &c.
that he, she, or it be ;
[&c.
that we be loved; &c.
that you be loved; &c.
that they be loved; &c.
Imperfect.
ifI were loved; or should be
[loved;
if thou wert loved; &c.
if he, she, or it were loved ;
. [&c.
if we were loved; &c.
if you were loved; &c.
if they were loved j &c.
Perfect.
sia stato amato, stata that I have been loved; or
[amdta, [may have been loved;
sii stato amcUo, stelta that thou hast been loved;
[amata, [&C.
sfa
stato amato, stUta that he, she, or it has been
[amata, [loved; &c.
16

182
.AlUL08Y.
if be, sbe, or it 8&d lleea
[loved;
if we, bad been loved j
MIllO "tUi t.IlItGti, ddt, that we bave been loved; &c.
[a_'ll,
siGtll dati tJffI4ti, "titll that you bave been loved;
[aMtll, [&C
.riano ,tati -Ii, ,tace that they bave beeo 10YPf;
[a.Gte, [k.
Pluperfect.
f6sn stato amato, ,tlita if I bad been loved ;
[amata,
f6ssi stato amato, statel if thou badst been loved ;
[amdta,
16,s. "a" ""0, .t4ta
,.ata,
f6ssifM st6ti tmt6ti, ,Mte
[amd:tll,
fl.tt ,ttiti tlfA6.ti, state if you bad been loved j
[,.tt,
f6ssertt stliM .NIi, st4,. if they bad bUll 1'""-
[....",
Variation of Neuter Verbs.
Neuter verbs are generally varied ,with the auxiliary
essue, to be, according to tbe conjugation to which tbey
belong. .
Va,iatioa of the verb partm.
(Paradigm oftlle neuter verbs.)
Ui'I'INITIVB.
Prllsent.
.prire, to depart.
.Past.
~ s s t partto, to have departed.

_ere tJ partire, or
!!Sereper parrire,
VERB.
Pttttn.
to have to depwt, or
Sto be about to depart.
183
Prumt.
partendo, departing.
PlUt.
tssmdo pardto, baving departed.
I'AllTICIPLL
p,....,.
partente, departing.
PlUt.
pa7'tito, partitlJ, 1 d d
partiti, partite, 5 eparte

parfiva, etc.
partii, etc.
INDICATIVE.
Presmt.
I depart; 07' do depart; 07'
[am departing; &c.
Imperfect.
I departed; 07' did depart ; 07'
[was departing; &c.
Perf,ct-definitt..
I departed; or did depart;
[&c.
Perfect-iruJefinite.
s67Io parrito, etc. I have departed j &c.
PluperffGt-dejinite
...... . ., ...

184
ANALOGY.
Pluperfect-indefinite.
ira partito, etc. I had departed; &c.
Future-indejinite.
partiro, etc. I shall or will depart; &c:
Future-dejinite.
sara partito, etc. I shall or will have depart-
ed; &c.
ClONDITIONAJ,.
sarti partfto, etc.
parti, etc.
Present.
I should, would, or could
[depart; or might de-
[part; &c.
Past.
I should, would, or could
[have departed; or might
[have departed; &c.
IMPERATIVE.
depart thou; &c.
pfsrta,4-
c

CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I depart; or may de-
[part; &c
vu.B.
I.pet:fut.
sia partito, tc.
f61si partfto, tc.
if I departed ; or ebould de-
[part; &c.
Ptrj,ot. .
that I have departed; or
[may have departed; &c.
Pluperfect.
if I had departed; &C.
There are some neuter verbe whieh are occasiOltally
varied with the auxiliary afJer,; alt, dunr" to last;
durato, or Ii durato. it has lasted; &c. Othen require
to be varied with aver'; as, 'acer" to keep silent; vf-'
ver" to live j' i> taciuto, I bave kept silent; 0 "iw'o, I
have lived; but in this ease tbey seem to take tbe na-
t,nre of an active verb, having the object generally un-
dentood. thougb sometimes exprelllled; as,
I) taciu'o [me],
.. Iliwtp una bu6na mta,
I bave kept [myself] silent;
I have lived a good life j kc.
Variation of Pronominal Verb,.
Pronominal verbs are varied with the auxiliary eller"
to be, according to the conjugation to which their termi-
nations belong. .
16
186
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb penlira.
(Paradigm of the pronominal verbs.)
INPINI'I'IVIII.
Present.
penlir-si,
pentito,
to repent one'. self.
Past.
to have repented one's self.
Future.
tJfJer-,i a penlire or to have to repent one's self,
esser-si F or to be. about to repent one's
.' [self.
GERUND.
Present.
pentendo-si,
euendo-si pentito,
repenting one's self.
Past.
having repented one's self.
I
pentente-,i,
PARTICIPLIII.
Present.
repenting one's self.
VERB.
181
PlUto
pmtito-si, pmtita-Ii ~ :
penttti-li, pentfte-li,' S[havJlIg] repeated oae'. self.
INDICATIV
mipmto,
ti p ~ n t
si pente,
ci pentiamo,
t1i pentite,
si pentonoj
Present.
I repent myself;
thou rep,:,otest thyself;
he repents himself, she
[pents herself, or it
[pents itself;
we repent ourselves;
you repent yourselves;
they repent themselves.
re-
re-
Imperfect.
mi pentiva, etc. I repented myself; &c.
Perfect-dejillite.
mi pmtii, etc. I repented myself; &c.
Perfect-indejinite.
mi s6no pentito, 4-c. I have repented myself; &c.
Pluperfect-dejinite.
Pluperfect-irulejinite.
mi era pmtito, etc. I had repented myself j &c.
Future-indejinite.
mi pentiro, etc. I shall or will repent myself;
[&c.
In
I sball or will' have repent-
[ed myself; &C.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.

I sbould, would, or could ra-
[pent myself, or might ta-
[pent myself; &c.
PQlt.
{
I sbould, would, or could
[
have repented myself, or
might have repented my-
self; &C.
phm-ti,
pmta-si,
pmtidmo-ti,
pentite-t7i,
phitan-si,
mi penta, tc.
repent tbyself ;
let him repent himself, her
[repeDt herself, or it ra-
[repent itself j
let us repent ourselves;
repent yourselves;
. let them repent themselves.
CONJUNCTlVB.
Present.
that I repent myself; or may
- lrepem myself; &c.
VERB.
189
Imperfect.
,
iflrepented myself; Drshould
repent myself; &c:.
mi M penfito, te,
Perfect.
that I have repented myself;
f
or may have repeDted
myself; &e.
Pluperfect.
mi f611i pent1to, tc. ifl bad repented myself; &c.
Ii edata un c6lpo,
A great Dnmber of active verb!! may become pronomi-
Dal by the addition of the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti,
.i, &c. either in the objective or in the relation of attri-
bution; and then these verbs are varied with the aux-
iliary u,ere, to be; as, IodaTe, to praise; dare, to give;
tacere, to keep silent:
Ii elodato,
,i edato per vfn'o,
he has praised himself;
he has given himself up III
[conquered;
he has givell [to] himself a
[blow;
Ii e'aciu'o, he has kept himself silent.
Usage, howe.er, in some instances allows us also
to employ the auxiliary avere, to have; but then the
conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, ai, &c. are always in the
relation of attribution; as,
melo 86no or mel' 13 I have enjoyed it;
[goduto,
'elo 8ei or 'el' di crll- thou hast believed it;

1Il1' eor ,,1' Ii he has drunk it; &c.
1.
AN.&.L08Y.
Yariatioa oj UMptr,onal Yerb
Unlpenonal verbs are generally varied with the aux-
Diary to have. according to the conjugatioD to
which they belong.
Variation of the 't'erb pi6vere.
(Paradicm of the unipersonal verbs.)
pi6-oere,
nere pWPuto,
avere a pi6'Dere. or
ulere per pi6'Dere.
a'Dendo pio'Duto,
Prumt.
to raiD.
PlUto
to have rained.
Future.
to have.to rain, or
to be about to rain.
GERUND.
Pruent.
raining.
Past.
having rained.
.BTlCIPLL
Pruent.

raining.
pioo4to,
1DlB.
F-.
rained.
INDICATIV
"'1
piOve,

it rains; It does rain; or it
[is rainiI!g.
r
Imperfect.
pio-ofoa or pio-oea, it ndned; it did rain; or it
[WBI raining.
piove, piovette, or pi6". it rained; or it did raiD.
['De (pi6bbe),
Perfect-indefinite.
Ii pio-OOto, it haa rained.

ebbe piO'Dfi.to, it had rained.
Pluperfett-indefinite.
a'De'Da pio'Duto, It had rained.
Future-indefinite.
it shalt or wilt raiD.
Future-dejinite.
it shall or will ban .-mec!.
192
ANALOGY.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
it should, would, or could
[rain; or might rain.
.-
Past.
it should, would, or could
[have rained; or might
[have rained.
DlPEBA.TIVE.
let it rain.
CONJUNCTIVE.
,.
pi6'OtJ,
bbia. pi<wfl.to,

Present
that it rains; or may rain.
Imperfect.
if it rained; or should rain. '
Perfect
that it has rained; or may
[have rained.
Pluperfect.
if it had I'llined.
The following are the unipersonal verbs most in use:
baleflare
.lampeggiare.
ftaoflGre,
l to lighten j
to thunder j
to hail;
to rain;
to rain very hard, to deluge;
to snow i
to happen i
to please i
to be n o u ~ i
to be needful;
to be important;
to seem.
I"
pi6veH,
dilurnare,
"evicdre,
grandinare, l
tempe,tare, f
geltfre, } to freeze i
ghiacciare,
dighiaccidre, to thaw;
o,cl.lrare, to grow dark i
far c/Hdo, to be hot i
far freddo, to be cold i
far chiaro, to be light i
far buio, to be dark i
far 11ento, to be windy.
To the above may be added the following verbe,
which, though not unipersonal in themselves, are often
used unipersonally. and may have the third person plu-
ral, as well u singular; and are varied with the aux-
iliary e"ere. to be:
accadere,
av'Denire,
occ6rrere,
aggraddre,
ba,tare,
bilogndre,
importare,
parere,
'tmbrare,
g"ere, to be, is also used unipeJ'llonally bot& in the
singular and plural, when it is joined to the relative par-
ticles ci or vi; as, u,erci or u,ervi, to be here, or to be
there. ,
Variation of the verb ellere, unipersooaUy used.
illerci, or e..enJi,
17
Il!fJ'IJUTIVJI.
Present.'
to be Mre, or to be theN.
194
ANALOGY.
6"erci or S,tato.
Ulenli, lltati, ,tale,
Pall.
to have been there.
Future.
unrn or es,trr1iIW" emlre, 1. to have to be there, or to be
_ern or ad erlere, 5 [about to be there.
Pruem.
there being.
Past.
ellendoci or 5,tato, ,tata, 1. th h i bee
u,endo'Oi t ,tati, Itate, Sere av ng D.
PARTICIPLE.
lNDIC..lTIVE.
Prumt.
c' eor '0' i.
ci ,6M or 'Di ,6M, .
c' era or '0' era..
c' erano or 'D' 6ra.no.
here is, or there is ;
there are.
Imperfect.
there wu;
there were.
ci fu or 'Di fu,
cifUrono or'Dif(j,rontJ,
therewu;
there were.
VERB.

e' eor'll' enato, -a,
ci I6no or 'IIi I6no dati, -e,
there has been i
there have been.
Pluperfect-definite.
ci Ju or 'IIi fu ,tato, -a,
ci firono or 'IIi !fJrono there had been.
[,tdti, -Il.
Pluperfect-indefinite.
c' or'll' ra. :a, } there had beeD.
e' ra.no or'll' rano ,tdt,,-Il,
Fvture-indefinite.
or 'IIi }there .hall or "ill be.
et ItJranno or v, ,ardnno,
.Puture-definite.
ci lard or 'IIi ,ara ,tato, -a, - ,
ci ,aranno or vi ,aranno there shall orwiIl have been.
[.tati, -e,
CONDITIONAL.
Pruent.
ei ,arbbe or vi ,arbbe, 1there should, would, or could
or vi 'arebbero, S [be i or might be.
Past.
ei ,arebbe or vi .arebbe}th h I.> ld ld
[llato, -a, ere B ou II, wou .' or cou
ci IIIJrebbero or vi 'arebbero [have beeni or might have
[,tati, -e, [beeD.
1"
ANALOGY.
ei ria, 'Di ria, or 'lOCi, na'Di,
c:i ritlno, 'Di ritlno, or rienei, let there be.
['Ien'Di,
COR'Jt7l'i'CTIVL
Prueflt.
c:i ria or 'Di ria, }
c:i riano, 'Di riano, or ei neno, that there be i or may be.
['Di neno,
c:i /611e or 'Di /6m,
c:i /611rro or ... Ju..ero,
Imperfect.
if there were; or sDoaJd N.
Perfect.
c:i ria or "i ria ,ttUo, -a, that there has been;
c:i riano oni riano "at" -e, that there have been i or
[may have been.
Pluperfect.
c:i /6"e or 'Di f6l1e ,talo, -a,
c:i /611ero or vi f6mro if there had been.
['tciti, -6,
Very often the verb avere, to have, Is substituted fbI'
the verb fllere when unipersonally used, and then it is
varied after the same manner; as, a'Dfrci, or aVfroi, to
be here, or to be there i ci d, or vi a, here is, or there
I.; c:i anno or vi anno,-there are1 &c.
VERB.
197
The greater part of the active verbs may become
unipersonal, and be varied in the third person both &in-
gular and plural by the help of the indefinite pronoun
n, one, they, people, &c. placed either before or after
the verb; as,
n dice, or d(ce.ti,
n 16da la 'IIirtu,
bicUimann i 'IIIzj,
one or they say;
they praise virtue;
people blame vices;
To express in Italian here or there v ,ome of it, here
or there are ,orne of them, we join the relative particle
fie, of it, of them, to ci or 'IIi, and say, or u,er'llme,
allercem or a'llervene; as, cen' eor 'lien' e, een' aor 'lien' a,
here is some of it, or there is some of it; cene ,6710 or
lIem ,6no. em' anno or lIen' anno. there are some of
them; &c.
The verb a'llere, not only may be used with propriety for the vedJ
Ellere, but is also elegantly used in the although the noun
to which it is joined is in the plural; as, quante miglia ci el1 how
many miles is it ? Ebbe'lli mOlti wmini. there were a great l118Dy
men there; l!tc. '
The English unipersonal verb it v, in the following
instances and in similar, is expressed in Italian byfa,
makes; as, it i3 hot,fa ealdo; it is cold, fa freddo; it
is fine weather,fa bel tempo; it is windy, fa it
is dark, fa OIcUro; &c.
A SYNOPTICAL TABLE
01' Tm:
VARJATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS,
SHOWING THEIR DIPPEUNT TERMINATIONS IN THEI:& stMPLJ: TENSE
...
to
aD
First Conjugation. Second Conjugation. Third ConjugatiOll.
;
INFINITIVE. Present. [am-] are. [tem-] ere. [cred-] ere. [a6borr-] (re.
GBRUND. Present. ando. Bado. endo.
{ ~ ~ 06,
Ito, -I, ito, -G.
~
PARTICIl'LB. Present.
at., .." uti, -e. iti, -e.
r
9, 0, leo,
i, I, i, tsci,
fPnumO
(I;
";
e, wee;
iafflO, icimo, it.i.o,
6.t., 41e, fte,
CIllO. ono.
ona, UCOIIO.

1
6ua
;
6ui,
""a;
illJamO,
.ate,
al7ano.
erJtlt M, (lei),
eui,
iva, ea;
lI'amo,
pdte,
617aJ10,
iN, fa,
in
, ,
..a, fA;
NHinIo,
.ate,
fl7aJ1O, faJIO.
INDIOATIVE.
: }.
!
0;, it, 6tti,
asll, hIl,
P
'-I: .. 't QI I, 6tte, (eo);
<ilJ IIc-J.na ,I. ammo hItmo
, ,
Glte,
arrmo, (aro, arlo Utero, (ero).
ii,
tti, (10) ;
immo,
lste,
irrmo.
!
{
llrO'
ertJi,
, em;
Puturo-iMejinate. erhM,
. mit,

erO
erai,
erd;
erefllO,
",eta,
"..".
iro,
ir6l,
ird;
irhM,
ir&"
i...".
...
!
rmi, (eria), mi, (eria), irei, (iria),
t.-
eresti, iresti,
8
, CONDITIONAL.
PRIen'.
t........ (<ria); ....... (<ria);
irebbe, (ina) j
eremmo, eremmo, iremmo,
ereste, ereste, ireste,
ere6bero, (maRO, mbbero, (enaRO, erieno). irebbero, (in-
[erieno).
[CIRO).
{; ...
i, i,
"ei,
I
uaKUTrn.
I; a;
a, uca;
iamo, iamo, iamo,
ate,
'te,
iRO. aRO.
IIJIO, (sellJlO.
1
(e), a,
a,
"ea,
II
If a, i, a, i; (sea, (stAi,
r
Prumt.
i, (e) ; a;
a,
itimo, ia"",,
iamo,
iate,
wte,
IRO. ano.
GM, fllicmC10
ANALOGY.
Oflrregtdar Yerb,.
In the irregular verbs, the irregularities are chiefly
confined to the pruent tense of all the fI'IOOtlI, the perfect-
definite of the indicati1Je, and the participle j but in these
tenses some of the persons remain regular. The irreg-
ular persons are here marked with an asterisk.
JTariatirm of the lrrf'gular JTarb, ofthe First CotVusatiott.
There are but four simple verbs in the first conjugation,
which do not follow the paradigm already given; viz.
andare, to go; dare, to give; fare, to do or to make;
,tare, to be, to dwell, to stand, or to stay.
Variation of the verb andare.
In the variatioD of the inep1ar verbl, we Iball give onlr the limple
tlIDlel, Iltcept In the irajinmtle, where the,." """II pYeD to Ihow
the an:dllary with wbleb the verb II varied.
INI'INlTIVL
anddre,
were andato,
IIndcindo.
andcito,
~ e s m t
togo.
.
PfUt.
to haTe gone.
GERUND.
going.
PAllTICIPLB.
gone.
..
"0 or 'lJado
.,,"i, ,
."".
tmdiamo,
Clndtite,
-"riranD,
ClndtJ"a, ,"c.
IMDICATIV
Premat.
I go; or am geing ;
thou goest; &e.
he. she, or it goes; &te
'we go; &e.
you go; &C.
they go; &e.
-perfut.
I went; or did go; or wu
[going; &e.
Perfed-definite.
I went; or did go ; &e.
Future-i"dejinite.
11M"' rby contraction I ~ l l or will go; &c.
for tmdero], 4"c.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
alldr.H [by ctSntrac-
tiOD for anderel1 (aD-
deria, andria), &C.
I should, would, or could go ;
or might go; &te.
"a,
-"dd4.
andidmo,
Clndtite,
-"adano,
IHl'EllATIn
go thou j
let him. her, Or it go ;
let us go;
go ye;
- let them go.
10&
*,,6da,
*1JIida (.Ada),
*"cida,
IIndicimo,
a.r&ditite,
*,,6dclftO,
AlfALOGY.
00If1VWOri'
Present.
that I go i or may 10;
that thou goest i &c.
that he, she, or it goes J &e.
that we go i &c.
that you go i &e.
that they go i &e.
I.perfect.
inwent i or should go i &c.
d4re,
Variatioo of the verb daN,
INI'INITIVE.
Present.
to give.
dtito,
PlUt.
to have given.
giriDg
,la'l'ICI1'LB.
given.
do,
ddi,
.ld,
dicimo,
date,
-danno,

I give; or am ;
thou givest; &e.
he, she, or it gives; &0.
we,give; &c.
lOG give; &te.
they give; &te.
Imperfect.
I gave i or dW or was
LgmDg; &te.
Perjec'-dejinite.
"'dim, or dibi), I gave, j or did lPW! ;
"'delti, thou 'gavest; &e.
*dette, or dide (d160,
[die), he, she, or it gave; &te.
we gave; &te.
*delte, you gave; &te.
dettero, or .diuerO}
(dierono, diero, they gave; &c.
[dier, derno),
daro, etc.
Future-inrkjinite.
I shall, or will give; &te.
CONOI'l'IONAL.
Present.
darei oS-c.
18
I should, would, or could
[give; or j &te.
206
. UlPElU.TlVE.
dd,
da,
diamo,
date,
dfano or dfeno,
give thou j
let him, her, or it give j
let us give j
give ye j
let them give.
CONJUNCTIVE.
da,
-d!l or *di,
*dia,
diamo,
diate,
*dfGno or *dimo,
*du.i,
Present.
that I give j may give;
that thou givest j &c.
that he, she, or it gives; &
that we give j &C.
that you give j &c.
that they give j &c.
Imperfect.
if! gave j or should give;
[&c.
Variation of the verbjdre.
INFINITIVE.
fare,
jatto,
Present.
to do, or to make.
Past.
to have done.
GERUND.
doing.
..
fa (faccio) ,
*jai,
fa (lace).
*jaccifJmo.
fate,
*fanno (fan),
VERB.
pARTICIPLE.
dODe.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I do j or am doing;
thou doest j &c.
he, sh'e, or it does j &c.
we dO-j &c.
you do j &c.
the)' do; &c.
207
Imperfect.
*faceoa, or facea (fea), I did j or was doing; &c.
[4-c.
Perfect-de.ftnite.
*feci (iei). I did j
zacu'i (fs.ti), thou !lidst j
"fece (feo,fe'), he did j
*facemma (femmo). we did j
face.te (fellte). you did j
*fecero (fen, fenno j ~
fer, fero, f ~ r n o f e they did.
rano),
Future-indefinite.
-.taro, 4"c. I shall or will do j &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
farei (faria, fare'), 4-c. I should, would, or could do j
[or Itlight do j &c.
103
ANALOGY.
fa,
*faccia,'
facciamo,
fate,
"faRRO,
do thou;
let him, lier, or it do j
let us do ;
do ye;
let them do.
CONJUIlfCTIVE"
*faccia,
*ffsccia,
faccia,
;C,acciamo,
raccitite,
fdcciaRo,
Present.
that I do j or may do j
that thou doest; &c.
that he, she, or it does j &c.
that we do j &c.
that yon do; &e.
that they do j &c.
Imperfect.
if I did ; or Mould do j
if thou diiJst i l.tc
if he, she, or it did i &c.
if we did; &1.
if you did j &c.
if they did; &c.
*.face88i (fessi),
"facessi (fessi),
fach,e (fe-sse),
faoessimo,
(feste),
*facessero (fesseno,
[fessono),
Variation of the verb ,tare.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to staniJ, stay, to dwell, er
[to be.
dando,
dato,
VERB.
Past.
to have stood.
GERUND.
standing.
PARTICIPLE.
stood.
INDICATIVE.
209
,to,
sttii,
,ta,
,tiamo,
,tate
*,tanno,
~ a v a ,s.c.
,tetti (ltei),
,testi,
*,tette (ste),
Present.
I stand; or am standing; &te.
tholl standest; &e.
he, she, or it stands; &te.
we stand; &e.
you stand; &te.
they stand; &e.
Imperfect.
I stood; or waa standing; &te.
Perfect-dejinite.
. I stood;
thou stoodst ;
he, she, or it stood;
sUmmo, we stood;
steste, yOIl stood;
.stettero (stero, ster, they stood.
[stiero, stier),
Future-indejinite
,taro; 4-c. I shall, or will stand; &te.
IS
210
AN4J.,QG-Y.
CONDITIOIUL.
Prue",t.
J should, would, or could
stand j or might stand; &e.
lllQ':BJU.TIVI:.
stand thou;
Jet him, her, or it stand;
let us stand;
stand ye;
, let them stand.
,titi,no,
stdte,
stfano or at'eno,
CONJUNCTIVE.
stia,
*atia or *"Si,
*,fta,
,namo,
,tidt"
,Aano or steno,
Prelent.
,that I stand; or P1ay.eland;
that tho'] standest j .&c.
that he, her, or it lltaQd&; &C.
that we stand j &e.
that you stand; &c.
that they stand; '&c.
lmptrfect.
if I stood; or should stand;
[&e.
" It should be observeil, that the above verbs,
fare excepted, in some of their become
regular; as, rianrJare, to go back again; trcl.lanaare,
to go beyond j so"rastare, to threaten; are all
varied like amare. Fare, in its compounds, always pre-
serves its irregularities.
VariatiOfl ofthe lrregula'f-VU'h. ofthe SecondConjugatiOfl.
Variation of the l""egular Verhs in ere tJccmted.
There are seventeen verbs in ere accented, which are
irregular i viz.
cadere,
disl1W.dire,
dolere,

giacere,
pnre,
permatUre,
piacere,
potere,
rimanere,
,opere,
,edere,
tacere,

"aUre,
"edere,
flo16re,
to faU i
to dissuade;
to grieve;
to owe;
to lie dOWIU
to seem;
to persuade;
to please;
to able;
to remain;
to knQw;
to sit down;
to silence;
to hold;
to w9rtb;
to see;
to .",iLl.
Varlation of v.erb cad&-e.
IN,FINITIVB.
Presen.t.
c:adere, to fall.
PIUt.
to have faUell-
A.NA.LOGY.
," ,
caduto,
falling.
PARTICIPLE.
fallen.
INDICATIVE.
Pruent.
cado (caggio), .
cadi,
cade,
cadiamo (caggiamo),
cadete, .
cadOno (caggioRO),
I fall ;
thou fallest j
he, she, or it falls;
we fall;
you fall;
they falI.
Imperfect.
cadeva or cadell, ttc. I fell; .&c.
Per:fect-definite.
"'cliddi, (cadei, cadetti), I fell j
cadesti, thou fellest;
*cadde (cadeo, cadette, he, she, or it fell ;
[cade),
cademmo, we fell j
cadeste, you fell j
caddero (cadero, ca-}
[der; caderono, ca they fell.
[dettero),
Future";ndifinite.
cadero (cadr3), 4-c.
I shall, or will fall; &e.
us
CONDI'I'IOJl'.u..
Pramt.
carlerei (cadrei, eade- I Ilhould, would, or could fall;
[ria, eadria), &c. . [or might fall; &c.
UIl'ElUTJVE.
clJdi, tc. fall thou; &c.
Pruent.
carla (caggia)J
cada (eaggia),
cdda (cdggia),
caditimo (eaggiamo),
eadiate (caggiate),
tJ6.dano (caggimwl),
that I fall; or may fall ;
that thou fallest; &e.
that he, she, odt falls; &c.
th.t W8 fall; &e.
that you fall; &C.
that they fall; tIie.
"
Imperfect.
if I fell i or should fall; &c.
Variation of the verb dilnMulere.
l'!eSfJ
7I
',
to dissuade.
Past.
to have dissuaded; or to be
dissuaded.
114 ANALOG'Y.
GERUND.
*dimltUo,
di,lUfido, etc.
*dirltUUi,
dir,uaderti,
dir,ua,e,
dirruademmo,
di'8Uadeste,
-di,ruasero,
di,madero, 4-c.
dissuading.
PAR'lIICIPLE.
dissuaded.
INDUlATIVE.
Pruent.
I dissuade; &c.
. lmperfect.
I dissuaded; &c.
Perfect-definite.
I dissuaded;
thou dissuadest j
he, she, or it dissuaded;
we dissuaded j .
you dissuaded;
they dissuaded.
Future-inrkfinite.
I shall, or will dissuade ; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
(dissuade- I should, would, or could
. [da},4-c. [dissuade; or might dis-
[suade; &c.
aunuidi, etc.
VERB.
lKPJlB.lTIVE.
dissuade thou j &C.
CONJUNCTIVE.
~ e s e n t
215
that I dissuade; or may ~
[suade; &c.
Imperfeet.
if I dissuaded; or should
[dissuade; &c.
dolere,
Variation ofthe verb doMre.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to grieve.
Past.
elltJre [""1 doluto,
dolendo,
doluto,
to have grieved.
GBRUND.
grieving.
.ARTICIPLE.
grieved.
AlIALOGY.
d6lgo (d6glio),
"d'oli,
"duole (dOle),
doglidmo,
floUt.,
tl6lgano (dbgliorae),
I grieve;
thou grievest;
he, she, or it grieves;
we grieve;
you grieve;
they grieve.
d6lri,
doUlti,
"dolse,

dolute,
d6lsero,
Imperfect.
doleva or 4-c. I grieved; &c.
Petject-ikjinite.
I grieved;
thou grievedllt;
he, she, or it grieved;
we grieved;
y-ou grieved;
they grieved.
Future-indefinite.
dorro rby contraction I shall or will grieve; &c.
[for dolero), 4'c.
CONDmolUL.
PreSeflt.
(dorria) [by I should, would, or could
[contractiontor do- [grieve, or might grieve ;
i (doleria)] , 4-c. [&c.

211
IUUATIVL
*du6li,
'*d6lga (d6glia),
doglitJmo,
doMte,
*d6lgano (d6gliano),
grieve thou i
let him, her, Of' it grieve i
let us grieve i
grieve ye i
let them grieve.
CONJUNCTIn.
Prumt.
that! grieve i Of' maygrieve;
that thou grievest i ,&c.
thatae,8he,oritgrieves; &c.
that we grieve; &C.
that you grieve; &c.
that they grieve i &c.
*d6lga (d6glia),
*d6lga (d6glia),
*d6lga (d6glia),
doglic1mo,
dolete,
*d6lgano (d6gliano),
dolun, ~
lmpeife.ct.
if I grieved i or should
[grieve i &c.
Variation of the verb do-oere.
INFINITIVE.
dO'Dere,
Present.
to owe.
Past.
to bave owed,
r
GERUND.
doendo,
19
owing.
218 ANALOGY.
PARTICIPLE.

dO'Outo, owed.
IlI'D1CATIVE.
Preaent.
*devo or *debbo (deg- lowe;
[gio),
*dvi (dei), thou owest ;
or {dee), he, she, or it owes;
dobbiamo (debbiamo,
deggiamo,devemo), Swe owe;
dovete, you owe;
*devono or debbono
deana, they owe.
aenno),
Imperfect.
dovva or dovea, 4-c. lowed; &c.
Perfect-difinite.
or dO'Vetci, otc. lowed j &c.
Future-indefinite.
dovero or dovro, I shall or will owe; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Preaent.
doverei or dovrei (do- 2I should, would. or could owe;
veriaordovria),4-c. [or might "we; &c.
IMPERATIVE.
VERB.
CONJUNCTIVE.
present.
219
tIIdebba tdeggia), that lowe, or may owe;
debba that thou owest; &c.
*debba deggia), that he, she, or it owes; &c.
*dobbiamo (deggiamo), that we owe; &c.
*dobbiate, (deggiate), that you owe j &c.
*debbano (deggiano), that they owe; &c.
Imperfect.
ifI.owed; or should owe; &c.

Variation of the verb giacere.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to lie down.
Past.
,
a'l1ere orellere giaeiuto, to have lain down.
GERUND.
giacendo,
giaciuto,
lying down.
l'.lRTICIPLE.
lain down.
220 ANALOGY.
Prumt.
gWccio,
gUici"
gilzce, .
giaccwmo,
giacete,
gidcciono,
IHe down;
thou Hest down;
he, she, or it lies down;
we lie down;
you lie down ;
they lie down,
Imperfect.
gi4ce'Oa or giGcea, 4-c. I lay down j &C.
giacemmo,
giace8te,
*giacquero,
giacero, otc.
Perfect-definite.
I lay doWD;
thou layest down j
~ she, or it lay down j
we lay down;
you lay down;
they lay down.
FuwrHntkjinite.
I ehall or will lie down j kc.
CONDlTIOIUL.
Pruent.
~
I should, would, or could lie
giacerei (giaceria).4.c. down; or might lie down;
&c.
VERB.
IMPERATIlVE.
221

giaccia,
..giaccidJno,
giacete,
..giacciano,
gifzccia,
-giaccia,
giaccidmo,
giaciate,
giacciao,
giaceSli, etc.
lie thou down;
let him;her, or it lie down;
let us lie down;
lie ye down;
let them lie down.
CON.JUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I lie down; or may lie
[down;
that thou liest down; &c.
that he, she, or it lies down;
[&c.
that we lie down; &c.
that you lie down; &c.
that they lie down; &c.
Imperfect.
if I lay down; or sbo.uld
[lie down; &c.
Variation of the verb parere.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to seem.
Past.
parot",
19-
to have aeemed.
222 ANA.LOGY.
GERUND.
parendo,
par(do,
paio,
pari,
pfr.re (par),
seeming.
PARTICIPLE.
seemed.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I seem;
thou seemest;
he seems;
pariamo,
pare-te,
paiono or parono,
we seem;
you seem;
they seem.
Imperfect.
parva or parea, ~ I seemed; &e.
Perfect-definite.
parvi (parsi),
paresti,
parve (parse),
paremmo,_
pare-sie,
.parvero (parsero),
I seemed;
thou seemedst;
ho, she, or it seemed;
we seemed;
you seemed;
they seemed.
Future-i,ndefinite.
parro [by contraction I shall or will seem; &0.
[for parero] , otc.
VERB.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
228
parrei (parrfa), [by I should, would, or could
contraction for pa- seem j or might leem ;
rerei (pareda], &c. &c.
1I11'ERATlVE.
{:dri,
paia,
pariamo,
parete,
paiano,
paia,
paia,
paia,
pariamo,
.paiate,
paiano,
pare,si, 4-c.
seem thou j
let hini, her, or it seem;
let us seem;
seem ye;
let them seem.
CONJUNCTI VE.
Present.
that I seem; or may seem;
that thou seemest; &c.
that he, she, or it seems; &c.
that we seem; &c.
that you seem j &c
that they seem; &c.
Imperfect.
if I seemed j or should seem;
[&c.
Variation of the verb persuadere.
[See dissuadere, p. 213.J
224
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb piacere.
INFINITIVE.
Present.-
p i c ~ r e
essere piaciuto,
to please.
Past.
to be pleased.
GERUND, &c.
[See giacere, p. 219.]
IMPERATIVE.
,
piaci,
piaccia,
piacciamo,
piacciat"
piacciano,
*piaccia,
*piaccia,
*piaccia,
*piacciamo,
*piacci6.te,
"piDcciano,
please thou;
let him,her,orit please;
let us please;
please ye;
let them please.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I please; or may please j
that thou pleasest; &c.
that he, she, or it pleases; &c.
that we please; &c.
that you please; &c.
that they please; &0.
,
VEIlB.
VariatioD of the verb potere.
I1Q'1NITIVW.
Pramt.
to be able.
Pat.
GBBUND.
p o t ~ n o
potUto,
being able.
PAIlTIOII'Lll:.
been able.
INDICATIVi.
Pramt.
p6uo
*pu6i (PU6'), ,
puo u;u6te, pate),
possiamo (potemo),
~ t ~ t e
p6ssoflO(p6mao, pon),
I am able;
thou art able;
be, sbe, or it ia able i
we are able;
you are abld;
they are able.
[mperfect.
potella or potea, ete. I was able; &c.
Pufeet-definiie.
potei, etc. I was able i &C.
226
ANALOGY.
Future-inde.ftnite.
potrO [by contraction I shall or will be able; &c.
[for potero], otc.
CONDITIONAL.
Presen.t.
potrei (potffa) [bYl
contraction for PO-J I should, would, or could be
terei (potma)]Cpo- able j or might be able; &c.
ria), otc.
IMPERATIVE.'
be thou able;
let him, her, or it be able;
~ o s s i m o
possiate,
p6ssano,
*p6ssa, 4-c.
potessi, otc.
let us be able;
be ye able;
let them be able.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that be able; or may be
[able; &c.
Imperfect.
if I was able; or should be
[able; &c.
VERB.
Variation of the verb rimanere.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
227
rimanere;
essere rimasto,
-rimanendo,
to remain. ,-
Past.
to have remained.
GERUND.
remaining.
PARTICIPLE.
rimasto (rimaso), remained.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
rimft.ngo, (rimagno),
rimani,
rimft.ne,
rimaniamo,
rimanete,
rimangono,
I remain;
thou remainest ;
he, she, or it remains;
we remain;
you remain;
they remain.
Imperfect.
rimaneva or rimanea, I remained ; &c.
ote.
128
ANALOGY.
Perfect-deflnite.
l/lriflldri,
riflltJJlesti,
-rimcUe,

rimanelee,
'"rimasero,
I remained;
thou remained't ;
he, ahe, or it remained ;
we remained;
you remained;
they remained.
F'attlrHndefinite.
rimarrO (by contrao-}
tion for rimanero], I ,hall or will remain; &c.
otc.
CONDITION.I.L.
Presmt.
rimarrei II should, would, or could
b! for remain; or might re-
nmtmerea (nmane- main; &c.
ria)], otc.
,
IMPERJ.TIVJ:.
rimani,
-rimanga,
rimaniamo,
rimanete,
-rimangano,
remain thou ;
let him, her, or it remaill ;
let us remain;
remain ye;
let them remain.
VERB.
ri7llanga (rimagna),
rimtingfl (rim3goa),
rimt.ingu;
rimanitimo,
rimanitite,
ri7llang(JJl(),
thad remain; ormayllemainj
that thou remainest ; &c
that he, Ibe, or itr8lUaial ; &c.
that we remain;. &C.
that you remain; &c.
that they remain; &C.
rimanesn, 4'e. if I ,emained; Of' should re-
[main; &c.
saFe,
Variation eI the verb sapere.
INl'llfITIVJ:.
Pruent.
to know.
Past.
to have kIl.QWJl.
a8B1JJ1D.
knowing.
PUTICIPLE.
sapUto,
20
known.
JSo- ANALOGY.
Presmt.".
'0,
,ai,
,a (d.pe),
'Clppidmo,
'apete,
sanno,
I know;
thou knowest ;
be, she, or it kDOWS ;
we know;
you know;
they know.
I,lIper!ed.
,ape"a or sapea, te. I knew; &c.
seppi,
sapesti,
seppe,
sapemmo,
,apeste,
seppero,
Perfect-definite.
I knew;
thou knewest ;
he, sbe, or it knew;
we knew;
you knew;
they knew.
Future-irukfinite.
sapro [by eontraction I sball or will know; &C.
[for sapero], <te.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
saprti (sapria)[bycon- I sbould, would, or could
traction for 'ape- [know; or might know;
r6; (saperia)],<te. [&c.
VERB. ;
281
*sappi,
sappia,
.appia7flO,
sappiate,
SappiflaO,
sapes,i, te.
UIP.ILA'I'IV
know thou;
let him, her, or it know;
let us kaow;
know ye;
let them know.
CON'UlICTIVE,
Pruent.
that I know j or may know j
[&c.
Imperfect.
if I knew; or should know;
[&c.
Variation of the verb setUre.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
seclere, to sit.
PlUt.
avere or esser.i sedllto, to have sat.
gERUND.

setUnrJo (seggendo), sitting.
PAB.TICIPLlI:.
seduto,
seated.
Pres.t.
I .it;
thou sittest;
he, she, or it lite ;
IlIltli6mD or -we sit ;.
Ilwete, you sit;
,iedono or seggrJFIo, they sit.
Imperfect.
secU"" or secUa, foe. I sat; &c.
Perfeet-de.fi1lite.
I sat; &c.
Future-indefinite.
sederlJ (sedr/), foe. I shall or will sit j &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Prcsfl1lt.
sederei (sedrei, seck- I should, would, or could sit;
[ria), foe. [or might sit; &c.
IMPElUTIVE.
siedi,
or *,egga,
sit thou; ,
let him, ,her, tit' it llit ;
sediamo (seggiamo), let us sit;
sedete, sit ye ;
siedano or let them sit.
that thou sittest; &c.
that I sit; or !pay sit j
that he, she, or it sits; &c.
that we sit; &c.
that you sit; &c.
that they sit j &c.
VERB.
CONJUNCTIVI!:.
PNlent.
sieda or
gla),
sieda or segga(seg-
gia or seggi),
Bieda or *segga,
sediamo or *seggiQ,mo,
sediate (seggiate),
siedaM or seggano
(Ieggiltno),
Imperfect.
2SS
if I sat; or should sit ; &c.
tacere,
Variation of the verb tat:ere.
Prumt.
to be sUent.
Prut.
or e"".si'tat:ifJ.to, to have been silent.
GERUND.
tacendo, being silent.
PA.RTICIPLE. .
been silent.
tflno (taccio),
tan,
tdee,
ANALOGY.
I am sile.t;
thou art silent ;
b., she, .". it is sileDt ;
tanamo,
t(J(;ete,
tantmO
we are silent;
you are silent I
they are silellt.
bnperfeet
or t(J(;ea, te. I was silent; &c.
Perftct-definite.
"'tdcqui,
tace4ti, .
"'tticque,
tacemmo,
taceste,
t(J(;quero,
t(J(;ero, 4'c.
I was .ilent ;
thou wast silent;
he, she, or it was silent;
w. were silent;
you were silent;
they were silent.
I shall or will be silent; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
Pruent.

I should, would, Dr could b.

t(J(;Uei (taceria), te. silent; or might be si-
lent; &c.
'I'DJI.
. taci,
tacia (taccia),
taciamo,
taeete,
ta'*-o, (tic:oiallO),
be thou silent;
let him, her, or it be silent;
let us be silent;
be ye silent; .
let thelll be silenL
COKJUNCTIVJ:
tacia (taccia). te.
taeessi, te.
Pruent.
that I be silent; t1r may be
[silent; &c.
Imperfect.
f1' I were silent; or should
[be silent; &c.
Variation or the Yerb tenere.
,lKftlftTIVJ:.
tmere,
Present.
to hold.
Pul.
~ r e or 6S1erft tenUto, to have holden.
CE1\tnm.
teJdndo,
tenuto
J
Jrolding.
bolden.
216
ANALOGY.
Pramt.
tengo,
tieni,
tiene,
tmidfllo,
teMte,
tbagOJUJ,
I hold;
thou ~ l d e l t ;
he, she, or it bold. ;
we hold;
you hold;
they hold.
Imperfect.
tmefJa or tmBa, teo I held; &c.
-tenni,
tenesti,
tenne,
tene..,.",
tentste,
tennero,
"
Perfect-defmite.
I held;
thou heldest;
he, ~ e or it held j
we held;
you held;
they held.
terrO [by contraction ?' .
for tmero], teo SJ .hall or wIll bold; &c:.
terrei (terria) [by eon ~ I Jhould, would, or could
traction for tefll>o hold; or might hold;
rei (tenerfan, ,,"c. &c.
tieni,
t ~ n (tepa),
terJidlllo,
tmete,
tenKono,
YmB.
hold thou j
let him, her, or it hold j
Jet us hold;
hold ye;
let them hoW.
.,
tenidmo,
teniate,
*tengmao,
tmelSi, te.
Present.
that I hold; dr may hold ;
that thou holdeJt; &e.
tbat he, she, (If' it holds; &C.
that we hold. &c.
that you hold; &c.
that they hold; &C.
Imperfect.
ifI held; orlhould hold; &C.
INFINITIV
"alere,
Present.
to be worth.
Put.
a,,6re or essere "alvto, to have IJeeD ....
lSI
ANALOGY.
.BRUND.
VGUndo,
valuto (valso),
-!lalgo (vaglio),
"ali,
"ak (val),
Pr.,em.
being worth.
PQ3t.
been worth.
INDIcaTIVE.
Prumt.
I am worth;
thou art WOI th ;
he, she, or it is worth ;
"ali_o, we are worth ;
"aUte, you are worth;
-"algona or .""6'-, they are worth.
Imperife',
"aU"a or "alAa, te. 1 was worth; &c:.
Perfeet-in.tleftnite.
,,6,lsi,
"alesti,
-",Use,
1 was worth;
thou wast worth ;
be, she, or it was worth ;
,,,aUmmo,
valeste,
-"azsero,
we were worth ;
you were worth ;
they were worth.
Future-inrkftnite.
"arrb [by contraction I shall or will be worth;
for "akro], te. [&c.
YDB.
OONDITIONAL.
Pre,mt.
219
v r r ~ (vania) [by I should, would, or could be
contraction for "a- worth; or might be
lerei (valena)], tc. , worth; &c.
be thou worth ;
let him, her, or it be worth;
"aliamo, let us be worth ;
'Dalete, be ye worth;
*'DlUq'aao or *,,6.g1iano, let them be worth.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Pruen'.
'Dalga or "aglia,
lIalga or *vaglia,
*"tilga or "aglia,
that I be worth; or might
[be worth;
that thou be worth; &c.
that he, she, or it be worth;
[&c.
"aliaJllO, that we be worth; &c.
"alitite, that you be worth; &c.
"algano or "dglitmo) that they be worth ; &c.
Imperfec',
if I were worth; or should
[be worth ; &c.
ANALOGY.
VariatioD of the verlt "edb..
INI'nR'I'I\II:
Pretenl.
to ltle.
PtUt.
to have Been.
GBIlUND.
vedemlo or ~ seeing.
PARTICIPLB.
Present.
*fJeggente, seeing.
PtUt.
"edf1t, (visto), seen.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
vUo, "'tliglCl or"eggio, I see i.
fJedi (ve'), thou seest ;
, , ~ , he,. she, or it sees;
we see;
you see;
they see.
VERB. .
f1ede"a or vedea, etc. , I saw; &c.
Perfect-defirl,ite.
-vitIi,

"'vide,
"edel1UM,
'Dedeste,
videre (vtder),
I saw;
thou sawest;,
he, she, or it saw ;
we ..Y;
you saw;
they laW'.

".dro ["by contraction I shall or will see ; &C.
Ii" waer
o
], te.
CONDmONAL.
Present.
f1edrei (ve.dria) [by I should, would, or could
contractIon tor ve- lee; or might see; &C.
derei(vederia)]A'o.
Il\IPERATIVE.
"edi see thou;
"Ua, -fJegga, or veg-' let him, her,6r itsee;
[gia, .
"ediamo or let us see;
"edete,. see ye ;
"edana, .veggano,or lot t.\ulm see.
(-veggiano,
21
ANALOGY.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
veaa,pegga, or that I see; or may see ;
, [gia,
vUa,"rJegga,orrJeg- that thou seest; &c.
[gia,
veaa,rJegga, orrJeg- that he, she, or it sees; &c.
[cia,
'Dediamo or that we see; &c.
[mo.
vediate or fJeggiate, that you see; &c.
ddano, "veggano, or that they see; &c.
["rJeggiano,
Imperfect.
rJede"i, tc. if I saw; or should see; &c.
Variation of the verb vorere.
INFINITIVE.
floUre,
au-e "oluto;
Dolflto,
Present.
to will; or to be willing.
Past.
to have been willing.
GERUND.
being willing.
PAllTIClPLB.
been willing.
VERB.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
24S
,
"'voglio or "'''0',
"'vu6i (vu6Ii, 'ouo'),
"'vu6le, .
vogliamo,
volete,
"'06g1iono,
I am willing;
thou art willing;
be, she, or it is willing;
we are willing j
you are willing j
they are willing.
Imperfect.
voleva or v o l ~ etc. I was willing; &c.
"'v611i,
volesti,
"'v611e,
'Oolemma,
voleste,
"'"ollero,
VOTTa, etc.
Perfect-dejinite.
I was willing;
thou wast willing;
he, she, or it was willing;
we were willing;
you were willing;
they were willing,
Future-inde.ftnite.
I shall or will be willing,
&c.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
f70rrU (vorria), etc. I should, would, or could be
. willing; or might be wil-
ling; &c.
v6gli,
'V6glia,
.,ogliamo,
'DOKlil&te,
'V6gliano,
*v6glia, etc.
volessi, etc.
ANALOGY.
be thou willing;
let him, her, or it be willing; .
let us be willing;
be ye willing; .
let them be willing.
CONJ'UNCTIVE.
Present.
. that I be willing; or may be
[williDg; &c"
lrBpcrfcct.
if I were willing; II,. should
[be wiDing; &c.
All these verbs in their compounds preserve always
their irregulacities.
YariatiOD of the Irregula,. Verbs in ere, uaacunted.
All the verbs which in the injinitive mood end in ere, .
unaceented, are generally irregular in the perfeet-difi-
nite of the indicative, and in the participle. The per-
fect-dejinite always ends in ssi or si; and the partici-
ple in tto or to, or in .sso or so; as,
S(:nv-erf
1
to write; sCrl-ssi, I wrote; scn-tto, written;
~ c e T e to conqU!lf; vfn-si, I conquered; ,vin-tQ, can.
quered:
VERB.
245
discut-ere, to discuss; discu-ssi, [ discussed; discU-6S0,
discussed:
",6rd-ere, to bite; mor-si, I bit; mor-so, bitten.
The verbs ending in ere, unaccented, in which ere UI
preceded by a vowel, in the perfeet-definite change ere
into ssi, and in the participle into tto; as tr6.-ere, to
draw j tra-ssi, I drew j tra-tto, drawn.
The verbs ending in ere preeded by the consonant
c, gg, or v, Of, what is the same, ending in cere, ggers,
or vere,' as, cu.6-cere, to cook; le-ggere, to read; scM-
vere, to write; in the perfect change those terminatioDs
into ssi, and in the participle int? ito; .
Those ending in mere, tere, or ttere from the per/ed
in ssi, and the participle in 550.
But if the consonants c, t, v are preceded by one ~
the consonants 1, n, T, the verbs, ill the perfect, change
cere, tere, vere into si, and in the participle, into to or
so, and retain the preceding consonant. r
Those in gere form the perfect in ssi, and the parti-
ciple.in ito; but if the g is preceded by another conso-
nant, they form the perfect in si, and the participle iD to
or so.
Verbs in bere., guere, or lere, change these termi.
nations always into si for the perfect, and into to for
the participle. And those in dere or rere, in the participle
change them always into so.
Verbs in {fliere form the perfect. in lsi, and the parti-
ciple in l t ~ And all those in gnere form the perfect in
nsi, and the participle in nto.
Verbs in nere form the participle in sto.
All the verbs in ere unaccented may thus be arranged
in sixteen classes according to their terminations; viz.
bere; as Iass6r-bere, to absorb; ass6r-si, I absorb-
, ed; ass6r-to, absorbed:
cu6-cere, to cook; c6-ssi, I cooked; c6-
tto, cooked:
cere; 'VIn-cere, to conquer; vi,..si, I conquered;
vin-to, conquered:
21
246
ANALOGY.
; as, aNler" to burn; ar-si, I burnt; dr-so, burnt:
5trti-ere, to draw; tra-,si, I drew; tra-Ito,
ere ; l drawn:
. .
1
diri-gere, to direct; dire-ssi, I directed; dire-
tto, directed:
gif.m-gere, to arrive i giun-si, I arrived; giun-
a gere; to, arrived:
to dive; mer-si, I dived j meMO,
dived:
gf!tJ"fJ J. li-ggere,' to read; U-ssi, I read i le-tto, read:
'gli".e. c6-gliere, to gather; c6-lsi, I gathered ;c6-lto,
l gathered :
gner, J spe-gnere, to extinguish; spe-nsi, I extlnguish-
l ed; spe-nto, extinguished :

distin-D"Jlere, to distinguish " distin-si, I .distin-

'. gaere; 0-
guished; distin-to, distinguished:
kre ; Ssvel-lere, to root up; srJel-si, I rooted up; srJel-
l to, rooted up :
mere ; 5espri-mere, to express i espre-ssi, I expressed;
l upre-sso, expressed: ,
mre ; p6-mre, to put; p6-si, I put; p6-sto, put: .
rere;
ttere;
"ere;
c6r-rere, to rUIl; c6r-si, I run i c6r-so, run :
{
diSCf&-tere, to discuss; discU-ssi, I discussed;
discU-sso, discussed :
river-tere, to return i Teller-si, I returned; ri-
ver-so, returned:
Sconne-ttere, to connect; eotme-ssi, I
.t ed j conne-sso, connected:
{
,cri-v.ere, to write; sen ssi, I wrote; scrf-tto,
written:
v6l-vere, to tum ; w61 si, I turned; ,,6l-t.,
turned.
VERB.
VariatioD of the verb ass6rbere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in bere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
247
ass6rbere,
*avere or essere ass6rto,
assorb6ndo,
to absorb.
Pmt.
to have or to be absorbed.
GERtJND.
absorbing.
ass6rto,
PARTICIPLE.
absorbed.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
ass6rbo, <tc. I absorb; &c.
Imperfect.
assorM"o or assorMa, ~ I absorbed; &c.
-as.orsi,
assorbesti,
ass6rse,
assorbemmo,
assorMste,
-ass6rsero,
.PerfBct-definite.
I absorbed;
thou absorbedst;
he, she, or it absorbed;
we absorbed;
you absorbed;
they absorbed.
248
ANALOGY.
Future-endefiraite.
[8ee crUkre, p. 141.]
Variation of the verb cuourt.
(Fint paradigm of the verbs ending in cere.)
INFINITIVE.
cu6cere,
avert cotto,
cocendo,
cu6co, &te.
coceflCl or GDua, &teo
Present.
to cook.
Past.
to have cooked.
GERUND.
cooking.
l'Al\TICll'LE.
cooked.
Ul'DICATIVX.
PM6ent.
I cook; &C.
Imperfect.
I cooked; &c.
t6ssi,
tOtesti,
t6sse,
cocemmo,
t;Oceste,
*cossero,
VERB.
Perfett-!kftnite.
I cooked;
thou cookedst ;
he, she, or it cooked;
we cooked;
you cooked;
they cooked.
249
cocerb, 4-,.
FuturHnile.finite.
I shall or will cook; &to
CONDlTIONll., &c.
All verbs ending in cere preceded by an u ('cere), as ,
conducere, to conduct, and its compounds, in the injinitit1e
mood are contracted into urre; condurre, to con-
duct; &c. . They are also contracted in the future-in-
definite, Bnd in the present of the conditional; as eontlum,
I shall or will conduct; tondurrei (condurria), I should,
would, or could conduct; &c. And they form the par-
titiple in 6tto; as t;Ond6tto;,conducted; &c.
Variatlon of the verb vincere.
(Second paradigm altha verbs ending in tere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
vintere,
ll'avere vfnto,
to conquer.
Past.
to have conquered.
250
vinco, tc.
vincefJa or vineea, tc.
ANALOGY.
OER17ND.
conquering.
l'ABTICIPLE.
conquered.
INDICATIVE.
Pruent.
I conquerJ &c.
Impelject.
I conquered; &c.
iilnsi,
vincesti,
*vinse,
vinummo,
vincbte,
vfnsero,
Perfect-definiie.
I conquered;
:' \'. thou ;
. . he, she, or it conquered j
. " . "c:":'we conquered;
you conquered;
,,,,.,,: conquered.
FUfure-intldnite,
Variation of the verb ardere.
cirdere,
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in dere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to burn.
ard&ado,
ardo, t,.
-arsi,
artIe.ti,
-drse,
art1&tlmo,
areltste,
drsero,
VERB.
Past.
to baTe burnt.
GERUND.
burning.
PARTICIPLE.
burnt.
INDICATIVE.
Prumt.
I burn; &c.
Imperfeet.
I burnt; &c.
Perfect-definit,.
I burnt;
thou burntst ;
he, she, or it burDt ;
we burnt;
you burnt;
they burnt.
251
...
ANALOGY.
The verb chiedere, to uk, and its compounds, in the
participle make c1&iesto, asked; &c. And in the present
of the indicative, of the i.perative, and of the co7fiunctWe
moods, they may have also the irregular forms chieggio, I
uk; chieggia, let him ask; chieggia, that I ask, or
may ask; &c.
The verb risp6ndere, to answer, and its compounds, in
the participle make risp6sto, answered; &c. And ald.
due, to conceal, and its compounds, make asc6sto and
asc6so, concealed; &c.
The verb f6ndere, to melt, and. its compounds, form
the perfect in usi; as fUsi, I melted; and the participle in
6so; 8S fiso, melted; &C.
Variation of the verb traere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in ere.)
INFINmVE.
Prumt.
trtiere,
traendo,
"tratto,
to draw.
Past.
to have drawn.
GE1UJJfD.
drawing.
PAB'l'ICIPLB.
VERB.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
253
trao or *traggo,
trai,
trae,
traiamo or *traggiamo,
t r e t ~
*traggono,
, ~
I draw;
thou drawest;
he, she, or it draws;
we draw;
you draw;
they draw.
traeva or t r ~ etc.
I
"'trassi,
traesti,
'rasse,
traemmo,
traeste,
-trassero,
Imperfect.
I drew; &c.
Perfect-dejinite.
I drew;
thou drewest ;
he, she, or it drew;
we drew;
. you drew;
they drew.
Future-indefinite, etc.
All verbs ending in ere preceded by a vowel, as tra..
ere, &c. are generally syncopated in the infinitive
mood, and make trarre, to draw; &c. And they conse-
quently are syncopated in the future-indefinite, and in
the present of the conditional; as, traTTo, I shall or will
draw; trarrei (trarria), I should, would, or could draw;
&c.
22
254
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb di,.{gere.
(Firlt paradigm of the verbs. endiDg in ger.. )
INJ'INITIVB
dirigo, etc.
Presmt.
to direct.
Past.
to have directed.
GB1\UND.
directing.
PARTICIPLB.
directed.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I direct; &c.
Imperfect.
dirigevCl or dirigeCl, etc. 1 directed r &c.
f<diressi,
dirigesti,
*diresse,
dirigemmo,
dirigeste,
*diressero,
VERB.

I directed;
thou directedst ;
he, she, or it directed;
we directed ;
you directed;
they directed..
Future-indejinite, 4"c.
Variation of the verb giungere.
255
(Second paradigm of the verbs ending in gere.)
INJ'INITIVE.

giungere,
*essere giunto,
giungenrIo,
to arrive.
Past.
to have arrived.
GERUND.
arriving.
256
giungo, <tCo
ANALOGY.
PARTICIPLE.
arrived.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I arrive; &c.
Imperfect.
giungeva or giungea, <tc. I arrived; &c.
. '" .
gwns"
giungesti,
flgiunse,
giungemmo,
giunge.e,
flgiunsero,

Perfect-dejinite.
I arrived;
thou arrivedst;
he, she, or it arrived;
we arrived;
you arrived;
tlley arived.
Future-indejinite, <tc.
o The verb stringere, to bind; and its compounds, in the
participle make stretto, bound; &c.
All verbs ending in gere preceded by an n (ngere),
may also end in gnere; as giungere or giugnere, to ar-
rive i stringere or strignere, to bind; &c.
V,ERB.
Variation of the verb mergere.
(Third paradigm of the verbs ending in gere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
257
m e r g ~ e
*avere or 6ssere m6rso,
to dive.
Past.
to have dived.
GERUND.
mergendo,
diving.
PARTICIPLE.
merso, dived.
INDIC.A.TIVE.
Pruent.
m6rllo, 4'c.
I dive; &c.
Imperfect.
merg6va or mergea, 4'c. I dived; &c.
~
258
-mersi,
mergesti,
-merse,
mergemmo,
m e r ~ e t e
-mersero,
ANALOGY.
Perfect-dejinite.
I dived;
thou divedst ;
he, she, or it dived;
we dived;
you dived;
they dived.
Future-indejinite, etc.
Variation of the verb leggere.
leggere,
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in gg'ere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to read.
Past.
leggendo,
to have read.
GERUND.
reading.
PARTICIPLE.
read.
leggo, ~
leggeva or leggea, ~
VERn.

INDICATIVE.
Present.
I read; &c.
I,nperfect.
I read; &c.
259
iff Iessi,
leggesti,
*zesse,
leggemmo,
leggeste,
*Ussero,
Perfect-definite.
I read;
thou readst;
he, she, or it read;
we read;
you read;
they read.
Future-indefinite, ~
Verbs inggere preceded by an u (uggere), may be syn-
copated into urre; as, distruggere or distrUrre, to de-
stroy; &c. And consequently they are syncopated in
the future-indefinite and in the present of the conditional;
as, distrurro, 1 shall or will destroy j distrurrei (distrur-
ria), I should, would, or could destroy; &c.
Variation of the verb c6gliere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in gliere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
c6g1iere, to gather.
260
fJf1ere c61to,
*c6lto,
*colgo (c6glio),
c6g1i,
ANALOGY.

PlUto
to have gathered.
QZ1\UND.
gathering.
P-"1\TICIPLE.
gathered.
INDICA.TIVE.
Present.
I gather-;
thou gatherest ; &c.
Imperfect.
coglielJa or I gathered; &c,
c6lsi,
cogliesti,
-c6lse,
cogliemmo,
cogliesti,
-c6lsero,
I
Perfect-definite.
I gathered;
thou gatheredst ;
he,. she, or it gathered;
we gathered j
you gathered;
they gathered.
Future-indejixite,
VERB.
261
Verbs in the infinitive ending in gliere; as c6gliert,
to gather; scegliere, to choose, &c. may be syncopated
into corre, to gather j scerre, to choose; &c. They are
consequently syncopated in the future-indeflnite, and in
the present of the conditional, making cogliero or cOTr(},
I shall or will gather; scegliero or surra, I shall or will
choose; (coglieria), or (corria), I should;
would, or could gather; sceglierei (sceglierfa), or scerrei
(scercia), I should, would, or could choose j &c.
Variation of the verb spegnert.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in gnere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
spegnere,
*avere
spegnendo,
*spento,
to extinguish.
Past.
to have extingl1ished.
GERUND.
extinguishing.
PARTICIPLE.
extinguished.
262
spengo (spEgrto),
sp8gni, tc.
ANALOGY.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I extinguisb ;
thou extinguisaest; &c.
Imperfect.
I extinguished; &C.





*spensero,
Perfect-definite.
I extinguished;
thou extinguishedst ;
he, she, or it extinguisbed ;
we extinguished;
you extinguished;
'they extinguished.
Future-indefinite, tc.
Verbs ending in gnere may end also in ngere; as,
spegnere or spengere, to extinguish; dgJUre or ctngere,
to gird j &c.
Variation of the verb distf.nguere.
(Paradigm of die verbs ending in guere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
distinguere, to distinguis9'
"'avere distinto,
distinguendo,
"'distznto,
distZnguo, tc.
VERB.
Past.
to have distinguished.
GERUND.
distinguishing.
PARTICll'LE.
distinguished.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I distinguish; &c.
263
Imperfect.
distinjue"a"or distinguea, I distinguished, &c.
. [ete.
Perfect-de.finUe.
*distZnsi,
distinguerti,
-*distznse,
distinguerlUM,
distingueste,
distins,ro,
I distinguished;
thou distinguishedst ;
he, she, or it distinguished;
we distinguished j
you distinguished;
they distinguished.
Future-intle.finite, etc.
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb svMlere.
(Pilradigm of the verbs ending in lere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
svUlere,
*avere svUto,
svelIendo,
sve/to,
svello (sve-lgo),
$'Delli, <te.
Jveueva or svellea; <te.
to root up.
Past.
to have rooted up.
GERUND.
rooting up.
PARTICIPLE.
rooted up.
INDICATIVE.
Preaent.
I root up;
thou roote.st up ; &c.
imperfect.
I rooted up; &e.
VERB.
Perfect.definite.
.265
-,vUsi,
stJellesti,
svUse,
svemmmo,
"'elleste,
svelsero,
I ro.oted up ;
thou rootedst up ;
he, she, or'it rooted up ;
we rooted up ;
you rooted up ;
they rooted up.
Future-indefinite, <te.
The verb espUlere, to Qxpel; impellere, to impel; aad
their compounds, in the perfect make espulsi, I expel-
led; impislsi, I impelled; and in. the participle, espUlIo,
expelled; impUIso, impelled; &c.
Variation of the verb upnmere.
(Paradigm the verbs ending in mere.)
INFINITIVE,
Present.
espnmere,
. -
*avere espresso,
espnmendo,
28
to express.
Past.
to have expressed.
GERUND.
expressing.
ANALOGY.
PAKTlCIfl.Eo
expressed.
IIfDIC,A.TIVJ:.
Present.

,spnmo, tC. I express; &c.

Imperfect
uprimeva or esprimea; <tc. I expressed; &c.
.-
Perfect-deji'1lite.
espressi,
esprimesti,

esprimemmo,
esprimeste,
espressflf'o,
I expressed;
thou expressedst;
he, she, or it expressed;
we expressed;
you expressed i
they expressed.
Future--indejinite, etc.
Asslt.mere, to assume, and its compounds, in the perfect
. make asslt.nsi, I assumed ; and in the participle, assV1&-
to, assumed. And redimere, to redeem, redensi,
I redeemed; retUnto, redeemed.
VERB.
Variation of the verb p6J1ere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ~ i n g in nere.)
26'1
168
*pfJsi,
p6nesti,
p6se,
ponemmo,
ponbte,
p6ssero,
ANALOGY.
Perfect-!hfinite.
I put;
thou puttest;
he, she, or it put;
we put;
you put;
they put.
Fllture-irulefinite, etc.
Verbs in nere, as, p6nere, to put; esp6nere, to ex-
pose; &c. in the infinitive are generally syncopated into
p6rre, to put; esp6rre, to expose; &c. They are .also
syncopated in the future; as, porrlJ, I shall or will put;
esporro, I shall or will expose; and in the conditional;
as, porrei (porrfa), I should, would, or could put; espor-
rei (esporrfa), I should, would, or could expose; &c.
Variation of the verb c6rrere.
'(Paradigm of the verbs ending in rere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
c6rrere,
*essere or avere c6rllo,
to rUD.
Past.
to have run.
VERB. 269
,
GERUND.
cOl"rendo, running.
PARTICIPLE.
*c6710, run.
INDICATIVE.
Prese1lt.
carro, etc. I run; &c.
Imperfect.
correva or correa, etc. I ran; &c.
Perfect-dejinite.
cOl"siy
corresti,
*e6rse,
corremmo,
correste,
c6rsero,
correro, etc.
I ran;
thou rannest ;
he, she, or it ran;
we ran;
you ran;
they ran.

I.shall or will run; &c.
270 ANALOGY.
VariatioD of the verb tliscUtere.
(First paradigm of the verbs ending in tere.)
I1fFINITIVL
discutendo,
disw.to, etc.
Present.
to discuss
.Past.
to have discu88ed.
GERUND.
discussing.
PABTICIPL:&.
discussed.
INDICATIVE.
Pruen'.
I discuss; &c.
Imperfect.
disCllterJa or dilCutea, etc. I discuued i &c.
discUssi,
discutesti,
discUsse,
discutemmo,
discuteste,
discUssero,
VERB.
Perfect-definite.
I discussed;
thou discussedst ;
he, she, or it discussed;
we discussed;
you discussed;
they discussed.
Future-indejinite, te.
Variation of the verb ri'Dertere.
271
(Second paradigm of the verbs ending in tere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
rivertere,
essere riverso,
rlvertendo,
to return.
Past.
to have returned.
GERUND.
returning.
PARTICIPLB.
returned.
ANALOGY.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I return; &c.
Imperfect.
riverte"a or m e r f ~ t tc. I returned; &c.
riversi,
rivertesti,
riverse,
ri"ertemmo,
""erteste,
riversero,
Perfect-definite.
I returned;
thou returnedst;
he, she, or it returned;
we returned;
you returned ;
they returned.
Future-indefinite, tc.
Variation of the verb connettere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in ttere.)
INFINITIVE.
Pre8ent.
eonnettere, to connect.
to have connected.
conRettendo,
*connesso,
CORnetto, etC.
VERB.
GERUND.
connecting.
PARTICIPLE.
connected.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I connect; &c.
Imperfect.
278
connetteva or connettea, I connected; &c.
connusi,

connesse,
connettemmo,
connetteste,
*connu.ero,
Perfect-ikjinite.
I connected ;
thou connectedst ;
he, she, or it connected i
we connected;
you connected;
they connected.
Future-indejinite, etc.
to put, and its compounds, in the pe1'fed
make min, I put; &c. and in the participle,
put; &c.
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb seri"ere.
(First paradigm of the verbs ending in "ere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
senvere,
ar7ere sentto,
*scritto,
seNVo, ~
to write.
Past.
to have written.
GBRUND.
writing.
pARTICIPLE.
written.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I write; &c.
Impetfect.
scrivtva or seri"ea, ~ I wrote; &c.
"scrissi,
strivesti,
sensse,
Perfeet-dejinite.
I wrote;
thou wrotest ;
he, she, or it wrote;
"
I
scrivemmo,
scriveste,

VERB.
we wrote;
you wrote;
they wrote.
Future-indllftnite, etc.
Variation of the verb v6Zvere.
(Second paradigm of the v:erbs ending in vere.)
INFINITIVE.
Present.
'V61vere,
OMe,re or essere v6lto,
volvendo,
,,6Ivo,
to turn.
Past.
to have turned.
GJ!lRUND.
turning.
PARTICIPLE.
turned.
INDICATIVE.
Pruent.
I turn; &c.
276
ANALOGY.
Imperfect.
I turned; &C.
v6lsi,
vol"esti,
,,6lse,
. fJol'llemmo,
vol"este,
"'6lsero,
Perfect-definite.
I turned;
thou turnedst ;
he, she, or it turned j
we turned;
you turned;
they turned.
Future-indefinite, etc.
Variation of other Irregular Verbs in ere unaccented,
not included in any of tke preceding classes.
Con6scere,
nasc;ere,
r6mpere,
oni5lCere,
to know;
to bl! born;
to break.
VlIriation of the verb con6scere.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to know
VERB.
Past.
277
auere conolliuto,
conoscendo,
conosci4to,
con6sco, etc.
to have known.
GJ:Jl.UND.
knowing.
PARTICIPLE.
known.
INDICATIVE.
Prll8ent.
I know; &c.
Imperfect.
conosc6va'or conoscea, etc. I knew; &c.
*con6bbi,
conoscesti,
con6bbe,
conoscemmQ,
conosceste,
con6bbero,
Perfect-definite.
I knew;
thou knewest ;
he, she, or it knew;
we knew;1
you knew;
they knew.
Future-inde.ftnite, etc.
The verb -&rescere, to grow, and its compounds, in the
perfect take the same termiDation: crebbi, I grew; &c.
24
278 ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb na.ure.
INI'INlTIVJ:.
Present.
Msure, to be born.
Past.
essere nato, to have been boro.
GIUWND.
naseendo, beiDg boro.
PARTICIPLE.
"'nato, been boro.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
ntisco, otc. I am born; &c.
Imperfect.
nasceva or nascea, otc. I was born; &c.

nac
9
ui
,
nascesti,
*nticque,
nascemmo,
nasceste,
-nacquero,
Perfect-de.ftnite.
I was born;
thou wast born;
he, she, or it was- born;
we were born j
you were born j
they were born.
Future-intkfinite, otc.
VERB.
279
The verb xuocere, to hurt, and its compounds, follow
the same irregularity: n6cqui, I hurt; &c.
Variation of the verb r6mpere.
INFINITIVE.
_ r6mpere,
avere r6tto,
rompendo,
r6mpo, te.
Present.
to break.
Past.
to have broken.
GERUND.
breaking.
PARTICIPLE.
broken.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I break; &c.
Imperfect.
rompefJa or r o m p ~ tte. I broke; &c.
rUppi,
rompesti,
*rt'lppe,
Perfect-rkfinite.
I broke;
thou brokest ;
he, she, or it broke;
280
rompemmo,
rompelte,
-",ppero,
ANALOGY.
we broke;
you broke;
. tbey broke.
Variation of tM Verb bevere or bere, to drink.

INFINITIVE:"
Pruent.
~ r (bevere),
ar1ere bevuto,
bevufo,
bevo (beD),
bev; (bei),
beve (bee),
beviamo,
bevUe (beete),
bevono (Mono),
to drink.
PlUto
to have drunk.
GERUND.
drinking.
PAR1'ICIPU1.
drunk.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I drink;
thou drinkest ;
he, she, or it drinks;
we drink;
you drink;
they drink.
bevel1a or bel1ea, etc.
VERB.
Imperfect.
I drank; &c.
281
Perfect-definite.
beoei or bevetti, bevvi I drank;
(bebbi),
thou drankest ;
he, she, or it drank j
bel1esti,
or bevette, Mvve
(bebbe),

belJeste, .
bel1erono or bevMtero,
vero (bebbero),
we drank;
you drank;
they drank.
Fllture-indefinite.
bero (bevero, bevr/)),
berai (belJerai) ,
berd (beverd, bevra),
I shall or will drink;
thou shah or wilt drink;
he, sbe, or it shaH or will
drink;
berMe (belJerete),
beranno (belJeranno),
beremo (belJeremo, bevre- we shall or will drink j
rno),
you shall or will drink j
they shall or wiH drink.
CONDITIONAL.
Present.
lerei (belJerei, beveria, be-
[ria),
leresti (bel1eresti) ,
'erebbe (beverebbe, beveria,
[beria) ,
24-
I
I should, would, or could
[drink; or might drink;
thou shouldst, wouldst, or
[couldst drink; &c.
he, she, or it should, would,
[or could drink; &c.

282 ANALOGY.
(beveremmo),
bereste (bevereste),
berebbero (bevenanl1, be-
(Mano) ,
we should, would, or could
[drink; &c.
you should, would, or could
[drink; &c.
they should, would, or could
(drink; &c.
IMPERATIVE.
bevi (bili),
beva (bila),
beviamo,
bevete (beete),
Mvano (beano),
drin.k thou j
let him, her, or it drink;
let us drink;
drink ye; .
let them drink.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
bevo Cb'ea),
bei),

that I drink; or may drink?
that thou drinkest; &c. .
that he, she, or it drinks; &c.
beviamo,
I beviate,
belJano (beam,
that we drink; &c.
that you drink; &c.
that they drink; &c.

[,nper/eet.
if I drank, or should drink j
if thou drankest; &c.
if he, she, .or it drank; &c.
if we &c.
if you drank; &c.
if they drank; &C.
bevessi,
bevessi,
bevesse,
bevessimo,
beveste,
bevessero (beessero, beesso-
[110),

VERB.
288
All these verbs in their compouDds preserve the
same irregularities, with the exception of a few, which
in some tenses become regular,.or have also a regular
formation, which will be noticed in the Table of tlae Ir-
regular VerbB.
Variation of tlae Irregular Verbs of tlae Third Conjuga-
tion.
The following are the Irregular verbs of the third
conjugation; viz.
cueire,
dire]
monre,
saltre,
segutzre,
ud(re,
useire,
venire,
cueire,
to sew;
to say;
. to die;
to ascend;
to follow;
to hear;
to go out;
to COIDe.
Variation of the verb cueir/!. I
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to sew.
Past.
to have sown.
284
c,,6to,
c"cio,
cUci,
,"ce,
c"cidmo,
c"cUe,
cvciono,
c"cf"a or cuda, etc.
ANALOGY.
GERUND.
sewing.
P4RTICIl'LE.
SOWD.
I1'fDIC4TIVE.
Present.
I sew;
thou sewest ;
he, she, or it sews;
we sew;
you sew;
they sew.
Imperfect.
I iewed; &c.
Perfect-definite, etc.
[See sentire, p. 149.]
DIPERATIVI:.
cuci,
*cUcia,
cuciamo,
cudte,
*cuciano,
cUcia,
*cucia,
cutia,
sew thou;
let him, her, or it sew;
let us sew;
sew ye;
let them sew.
CONJUNCTIY.E.
Present.
that I sew; or may sew;
that thou sewest; &c: .
that he, she, or it sewl f &c.
VERB.
8 ~
cuciamo, that we sew; &c.
cuciate, that you sew j &c.
*et1ciano, that they sew ; k.
Imperfeel:
cvcisri, etc. jf I sewed j or should sew;
[&c.
Variation of the verb dfl'e.
INFINITIV
Present.
dir. (dieer.', to say.
Past.
af1ere detto, to hi."ve said.
GERUND.
tlicentlo, saying.
PARTICIPLE
.
said.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
dieo, I say;
dei or *dl, thou sayest;
.lice,' be, sbe, ~ it says,;
diciamo,
we saYi
dfte,
you say j
dicOflO,
tbey say.
286
did,,,,. or dida, tc.
"dhn,
dfd,ti,
"dU,t,
dice-o,
dicestt,
dflltrO,
ANALOGY.
I.per/eet.
I said; &c.

I said;
thou saidest ;
he, she, or it said;
we said;
you said;
they said.
dirb [by
FaltllrHndeji"ite.
contraction for I shall or will say; &C.
dietrO], tc.
CONDITIONAL.
Pre,ent.
direi (diria) [by contrac- I should, would, or could
tion for dieerei (dice- [say; or miiht say;
ria)]; &c. [&c.
"dl,
dica,
dicitimo,
d{tt,
d,cano,
dica, te.
IJlPEJLATIVJ:.
lay thou;
let him, ber, or it say;
let us say i
say ye;
le.t them say.
CONJt1lfCTIVJ:;
Prtstflt.
I say; or may say; &e.
VERB.
28T
die6,si, te.
morire,
Imperfect.
I said; or should say; &c.
Variation of the verb morlre.
INFINITIVE.
Pre,ent.
to die.
Past.
.essere m6rto,
morendo,
to be dead.
GERUND.
dying.
PARTICIPLE.
dead.

Present.
mu6ro or -mu6io,
mu6ri,
*mu6re (mu6r),
moritimo,
mOMte,
-mu6rono or *mu6iono,
I die;
thou diest;
he, she, or it dies;
we die;
you die;
they die.
288 ANALOGY.
Iinperfut.
nIONo or moria, te. I died; &c.
Perfect-deftnite.
lUrii, te. I died; &e.
Futur"';ndeftnite.
mariro or morro, te. I shall or. will die; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
PreserU.
morirei or morrei (moriria
[or morria), &c.
I should, would, or could
[die; or might die; &c.
IMPERATIVE
mu6ri, die thou ;
mu6ra or *mu6ia (mora let him, her, or it die;
[or moia),'
moridmo,
moNte,
-mu6rano or muoiano,
let us die;
die ye;
let them die.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
.mu6ra or l1Iu6ia,
*mu6ra or -mu6ia (mora
[or moia, mori),
-mu6"a or mu6ia,
moriamo,
moriate
*mu6rano or -mu6imao,
that I die; or may die;
that thou diest; &c.
that he, she, or it dies; &c.
that we die; &c.
that you die j &C.
that they die; &c.
VERB.
289
lmpeifect.
jf I died; or should die; &Ie.
Variation of the verb salire.
INI'INITIVE.
salve,
avere or essere salfto,
. salito,
Present.
to ascend.
s t ~
to have ascended.
GERUND.
ascending.
PARTICIPLE
ascended.
INDICATIV,JI:.
Present.
"saigo or salisco.,
sali or salfsci,
.sale or saltsce,
saliamo or ",aglia.mo,
salite,
*sfllgOfUl; qr; ,P;liseOfW. (56.,.
[gliono),
I ascend;
thou ascendest;
he, she, or it ascends;
we ascend;
you ascend;
they ascend.
.49lft!Q'RJ: $(Zlw, 4'e.
25
Imperfect
I ascended; &c.
290 ANALOGY.
Perject-Jejinite.
I ascended J
thou ascendedst j
he, she, or it ascended;
we ascended;
you ascended j
they ascended.
JcdJi (sal.n),
JaliJti,
Jail (,alse, salfo),
Jalimmo,
saliste,
Jalirono (sdlsero, sallro, sa-
[lir),
Future-i,nrkjinite, etc.
IMPERATIVE.
Jtili or saltsci,
salga or satisca (saglia),
saliamo or sagliamo,
salit'!,
salgano or salfscano,
ascend thou;
let him, ber, or it s e n ~ ;
let us ascend j
ascend ye;
let them ascend.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
*s6.lga or saltsea (saglia),
sftlga or salisca,
Jalga or salisca,
saliamo or *logliamo,
satiate or *sagliate,
salgano or saliscano,
that I ascend j or may as-
[cend;
that thou ascendest; &c.
that he, she, or it ascends;
. [&c.
that we ascend; &c.
that )'OU ascend; &c.
that they ascend j &c.
ialissi, etc.
Imperfe.ct.
if I ascend; or should ~
[cend; .c.
segrdre,
VERB.
Variation of the verb seguire.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to follow.
291
avere or essere seguito,
seguendo,
Past.
to have or to be followed.
GERUND.
followiug.
uguito,
segu!.. or *sieguo,
s ~ u or $' siegui,
segue or *siegue,
seguirimo,
seguite,
segllono or *sieguono,
PARTICIPLE.
followed.
INDICATIVE.
Pruent.
I follow;
thou followest ;
he, she, or it follows j
we follow;
you follow;
they follow.
Imperfect, 'tc.
IMPERATIVE.
segui or *siegui,
segua, or *siegua,
seguirimo,
seguite,
seguano or .sieguano.
follow thou;
let him, her, or it follow;
let us follow;
followye;
let them follow.
ANA.LOGY.
COIfJ11lll'CTIVE.
Prumt.
sCpa or -siegua,
sCpa or neg-a (segui or
[siegui),
sigua or -neg-a.
that I follow; or may fol-
[low;
that tbou followelt; &c.
that he, she, or it follows;
[&C.
seguiamo,
Jepwte,
seg-ano or -neguano,
that we follow; &c.
tbat you follow; &c.
. that tbey follow; &c.
Imp".jeet, te.
Variation of tbe verb udire.
INFINInVI:.
udire;
af1cre allito,
lldendo,
IIdito,
Present.
to hear.
Past.
to have beard. '
GERUND.
hearing.
PARTICIPLE.
heord.
VERB: .
INDICA.TIVB.
293
-600,
6di,
~ d e
tUliamo,
udite,
*6dono,
Present.
I hear;
thou hearest;
he, she, or it hears i
we hear i
you hear;
they hellr.
Imperfect, etc.
FutuT&'indejinite,
udiro or udro, etc. I shall or will hear; &c.
CONDITIONAL, &c.
IMPERATIVE.

6di,
-oda,
udicimo,
udite,
*6dano,
~ d a
-6da (odi),
*6da,
udiamo,
udiate,
-odano,
hear thou;
let him, her, or it hear;
let us hear;
hear ye;
let them hear.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I hear; or may hear;
[&c.
that thou hearest I &c.
that he, she, or it hears; &c.
. that we hear; &c.
that you hear; &c;
that they hear i &1.
Imperfect, etc.
2:)-
%94
weirc,
enere us,;{to,
uscendo;
1I5C&to,
esco,
*esci,
~ s e
usciamo,
uscfte,
escono,
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb usefre.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to go out.
Past.
to have gone out.
GERUND.
going out.
PARTICIPLE.
gone out.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I go out;
thou goestout ;
he, she, or it goes out;
we go out;
you go out;
they go out.
Imperfect, <tc.
..

VERB.
295
-esci,
-esca,
usciamo,
uscf.te,
-escano,
u ~ c i m o
uscicite,
*escano.
-venire,
IMPERATIVE.
go thou out;
let him, her or it go out;
let us go out;
go ye out;
let them go out.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that I go out; or may go
. [out;
that thou goest out; &c.
that he, she, or it goes out;
[&c.
that we go out; &c.
that you go out; &c.
that they" go out; &c.
Imperfect, <tc.
Variation of the verb ventre.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to come.
Past.
-eucre venuto,
venendo,
to have come.
GERUND.
coming.
296
ANALOGY."
. I'Alt'l'ICll"LII:.
come.
INDICATIVB.
Pruent.
-fJengo (vegno),
'Dieni,
-mene,
fJmiamo (fJegnamo),
fJmUe,
-fJtrig0'!O (vegnono),
vae(va or fJmia, <te.
I come;
thou comest;
he, she, or it come. ;
we come;
you come;
they come.
Imperfect.
I came; &c.
-fJenni,
fJenisti,
-fJenne,
venimmo,
fJeniste,
-vennero (veniro),.
"Perfeet-de.finite.
I came;
thou carnest ;
he, she, or ii came ;
we came;
you came;
.they came.
FuturtHrukjinite.
tteTra [by contraction (or I shall or will come; &c.
fJeniro], <te.
CONDITIONAL.
Pr:esent.
fJerrei (verria) ~ contrae.- 'I should, would, or could
tion (or 'Denirei (veni- come; or might come;
ria)], <te. &c.
VERB.
IMPERATIVB.
291
"ieRi,
-venga,
veniamo,
venUe.
*vengano,
"enga,
-"enga,
"enga,
"enicimo,
veniate,
"engano,
come thou;
let him, her, or it come;
let us come;
come ye;
let them come.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Preleftt.
that I come; or may eome ;
that thou earnest; &C.
that he, she, or it comes;
. [&c.
that ye come; &C.
that you come; &c.
that they come; &c.
Imperfect, 4-,.
The verb bollfre, to boil, in the first person plural of
the present of the indicative and of the imperatifle, and
in the first and second persons plural of the present of
the conjunctive, changes II into gl, to distinguish these
persons from the corresponding ones of the verb bollare,
to seal; thus, bogliamo, we boil; bolliamo, we seal: bo-
I:'iamo, let us boil; bolliamo, let us seal: bogliamo, that
we boil; bolliamo, that we seal: bogliate, that you boil ;
bolljdte, that you seal. .
298
.ANALOGY.
Of Defective Verln.
[Thelll verba are uaed only in the tenset Bnd penont, which aN
here given.]
Variation of t he verb c l ~ r e
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to care for.
iller, CalNto,
calindo,
calilto,
cdle,
caleva or calea,
calevano or caleano,
Past.
to have cared for.
GERUND.
cariDg for.
PARTICIPLE.
cared for.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
he, she, or it cares for;
...' ..
Im.perfect.
I cared for;
they cared for.
VERB.
Perfeet-definite.
he, she, or it cared for;
IMPERATIVE.
299
ealesse,
(colere),j
(colo),
(cole),
let him, her, or it care for;
OONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
that he, she, or it cares for;
[or may care for;
Imperfect.
if I cared for; or should care
[for;
Variation of the verb colere.
INFINITIVE.
to adore.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I adore;
he, she, or it adorl. ;
(pavere),
(pave),
(sHere),
(sUe),
solere,
I
ANALOGY.
VariatioD of. the verb ptmere.
INrINlTIVll:.
to fear.
DmICATIVE.
Present.
he, sbe, or it feara ;
Variation of the verb silere.
INrINITIVlll.
to be or to keep silent;
INDICATIVE.
Present.
he, she, or it is or keeps si-
[lent;
Variation of the verb soler,.
,
Pruent.
to be woot.
"!essere solito,

s6glio,
su6Ii,
"'su6le (sole),
*sogliamo (solemo),
solete,
s6g1iono,
VERB.
Past.

to have been wont.

GERUND.
being wont.
INDiCATIVE.
Present.
I am wont;
thou art wont ;
he, she, Qr it is wont;
we are wont;
you are wont;
they are wont.
Impelject.
I was wont; &c.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
301
*s6glia,
soUssi, <tc.
that I am wont; or may be
[wont; &c.
Imperfect.
if I were wont; or should
[be wont; &,.
26
302 ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb stupere

INFINITIVE.
(stup(lre), to be astonished.
INDICATIVE.
Present
. . .
,
(stupe), he, she
1
or it is astonished ;
Variation of the verb algue.
INFINITIVE.
~ I g e r e ,
(*alsi,)
(algesti),
(-alse),
t
RlgemmO),
algeste),
*a]sero),
(angere),
to be chill.
INDICATIVE.
Perfect-definite.
I was chill ;
thou wast chill ;
he, she, or it was chill ;
we were chill ;
you were chill ;
they were chill.
Variation of the verb angere.
INFINITIVE.
to afflict.
VEllB.
UIDIOATIVE.
Pre3ent
..
sos
(ange),
arr6gere,
arrogendo,
he, she, or it afflicts;
Variation of the verb arr6gere.
INFINITIVE.
to add.
GERUND.
adding.
PARTICIPLE.
flrr6to or arr6so,
atT6ge,
"arr6si,
arrogesti,
arr6se,
arrogemmo,
arrogeste,
-arr6sero,
added.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
he, she, or it adds;
Perfect-definite.
I added;
thou addedst ;
he, she, or it added;
"If added;
you added;
they added.
1J04
(capere),
(cape),
(Capella),
. (cherere),
(chero),
(chere),
convellere,
ANALOGY.
Variation of the verb capere.
INFINITIVE.
to comprehend.
INDICATIVE.
Pruent.
he, she, or it comprehends;
Imperfect.
he, she, or it comprehended;
Variation of the verb cherere.
INFINITIVE.
to demand.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I demand;
he, she, or it demands;
Variation of the verb convUlere.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to convulse.'
.1
I
*conIJUZso,
convelle,
convellono,
VERB.
GERUND.
convulsing.
PARTICIPLE.
convulsed.
INDICATIVE.
Pre,ent.
he, she; or it convulses;
they convulse.
Imperfect.
30:5
conIJelleva 01' convell6a, he, she, or it convulsed;
convelUvano or convelleano, they convulsed.
Future-inde.finite.
c07lvellerd,
convelleranno,
convellerebbe,
convellerebbero,
he, she, or it shall or will
[convulse;
they shall or will convulse.
CONDITIONAL.
he, she, or it should, would,
0'1' could convulse; or
might convulse;
they should, would, or could
convulse; &c.
806
convellesse,
convellessero,
ANALOGY.
CONJUNCTIVE.
Imperfect
. . . .
if he, she, or it convulsed or
[should convulse;
if they convulsed; &c.
Variation of the verb lecere and licere, or lecere and lieere.
INFINITIVE.
(lecere or lfcere),
reee or lice,
to be lawful.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
it is lawfuI ;
(m6Icere),
(mO,lci) ,
(molce),
Variation of the verb mOlcere.
INFINITIVE.
to assuage.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
thou assuagest ;
he, she, or it assuage. ;
~
m o l c e va,)
molcevi,)
molceva,)
riedere,
riedo,
riedi,
riede,
riedono,
VERB.
Imperfect.
I assuaged;
thou assuagedst ;
he, she, or it assuaged;
Variation of tho verb riedere.
INFINITIVE.
to return.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I return;
thou returnest ;
he, she, or it returns;
they return.
307
riedeva or riedea,
riedevi,
riedeva or riedea,
riedevano or riedeano,
Imperfect.
-I returned;
thou returnedst ;
he, she, or it returned;
they returned.
CONJUNCTIVE.
rieda,
rieda,
rieda,
riedano,
Present.
that I return; or may re-
[turn;
that thou returnest; &c.
that he, she, or it returns;
[&c.
that they return; &c.
308
(serpere),
(serpendo),
(serpo),

(serpe),

(serpeva),
(serpevi),
(serpeva),
(serpevano),
<serpa},
,
(serpa,
(serpano),
ANALOGY.
Val iation of the verb serper.
INFINITIVE.
Present..
to creep.
GERUND.
creeping.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I creep;
thou creepest;
he, she, or it creeps;
they creep.
imperfect.
I crept;
thou crept;
he, she, or it crept;
they crept.
CONJUNCTIVE.
P'"esent.
that I creep; or may creep;
that thou creepest; &c.
that he, she, or it cree os; &e.
that they creep; &e.
urgere,
urge,
VERB.
Variation of the verb urgere.
INFINITIVE.
to urge.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
he, she, or it urge. ;
Imperfect.
309
u r g ~ f or urgea,
urgevano or urgeano,
he, she, or it urged;
they urged.
(tangere),
(tange),
(vigere),
Variation of the verb tangere.
INFINITIVE.
to touch.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
he, she, or it touches;
Variation of the verb vigere.
INFINITIVE.
to' be vigorous.
810
(vige),
gire,
essere gito,
gito,
giamo,
gite,
ANALOGY.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
he, she, or it is vigorous ;
Variation of the verb {fire.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to go.
Past.
to have gone.
PARTICIPLE.
gone.
INDICATIYE.
Present.
we go;
you go;
giva or g'ta, ~
gU, ~
Imperfect.
I went;. &c.
Perfect. definite.
I went; &c.
i
giro, tc.
VERB.
Future-indefinite.
I shall or will go; &c.
CONDITIONAL.
811
girei (giria), tc.
giamo,
gite,
gicimo,
giate,
gissi, <tc.
I should, would, or could go;
[or might go; &c.
IMPERATIVE.
let us go ;
go ye;
CONJUNCTIVE.
Present.
. that we go; or may go j
that you go; &c.
Imperfect.
if I went j or should go;
[&c.
ire,
Variation of the verb irt.
INFINITIVE.
Present.
to go.
812
e,sere {to,
to,
,te,
,va,
'"anD,
isti,
(ira, ir),
iremo,
irete,
iranno,
ANALOGY.
Past.
to have gone.
PARTICIPLE.
gone.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
you go;
J'lIperfect.
I went;
be, she, or it went;
we went.
Perfect-definite.
thou wentest
they went.
Future-indifinite.
we sball or willigo j
you shall or will!go ;
they shall or will go.
VERB.
CONDITIONAL.
313
(iriano),
{te,
"lire,
oliva,
olivi,
oliva,
olivfJfU1,
they should, would, or could
[go; or might go.
IMPERATIVE.
go ye;
Variation of the verb olfre.
INFINITIVE.
to smell.
INDICATIVE.
Imperfect.
I smelled;
thou smelledst ;
he, she, or it smelled;
they smelled.
General Obser'IJatiom on the Conjugations of Italian
Verbs, and the Formation of their Temes.
In all verbs there are four tenses, 8S well as the genlnd,
which are always regular, and have the same termina-
tiolls in all the conjugations.. These are the following:
The imperfect of the indicative-va, vi, va j v_,
,,6.te, vano.
21
314
ANALOGY.
The future-itukfinite-rlJ, rai, rd; remo, rete, r4nno.
The presmt of the wJUlitional-rei, resti, Tebbe; rCIfI-
11IO, reste, rebbero.
The imperfect of the conjum:tive--ssi, ssi, sse; SSifllO,
ste, ssero.
Tile
Except tbe tbree first persons, and tbe hut, of tbe imperfect of the
irulieali"e of tbe auxiliary verb CIIU'e, whicb makes era, bi, era;
erllflO; and Dot erava, eran, 4-c.
If the verbs end in the infiniti"e in are, the imperfect
of the indicati"e will always end in ava, am, a"a; tlr1a..
mo, a"ate, a"ano; as, amalia, amaTli, &c. And the i"...
perfect of the conjuncti"e will always end in assi, aSft,
aSle; assimo, aste, dssero; as, amassi, &c.
If the infiniti"e ends in ere or ere, the imperfect of the
indicati"e will end in eva, evi, e"a; &c.; as, ttme"a or
credeva; &c. And the imperfect of the conjunctive will
end in essi, &c.; as, temessi or credessi j &11:
And if the infinitive ends in ire, the formel: imperfect
"ilI end in f"a; as, senti"a; &c; and the latter in Is-
si; as, sentissi; &c.
The future-indejinite in verbs in are, ere or .ere, al-
ways ends in ero, erai, era; ere1lW, erete, eraliRO ; as, ame-
ro, temertii or crederai, tessera, &c.: and in verbs in ire,
it ends in iro, irai, ira., 4'c.; as, sentir;), sentirai, 4'c.
The present of tbe conditional in verbs in are, ere or
. ere, always ends in erei, eresti, erebbe; eremmo, ereste,
erebbero; as, amerei, temeresti or crederesti, 'esserebbe,
etc. : and in verbs in ire, it ends in i"ei, iresti, irebbe,
4'c.; as, sentiresti, 4'c.
The gerund of all verbs in are ends in ando; as,
amando; and that of all in ere or ere, (re, ends
in endo; as, temendo .or cretIendo, sentendo.
Tbe imperfect of tbe indiealitle of tbe verb fOre, is formed from
its ancient Latin inji'lilire, f6ere, syncopated into fare, and ends
io eVIJ; kc. as, faceva; kc. Tbe imperfect of tblloConjl.lnctive ends
io cui; &.c. as, faeem, kc. And the futureindefinite, and the
pruenl of tbe eonditional, end in arll and IJret j as,farll,farei; Ite.
VERB.
315
Dare and ,tare Rlso form thll future inaro and the conditional
in arei; as, duro, ,taro; dlZrei, ,tarei .. and iu the imperfect of the
make de.li, .teui.
Many verbs ending in ere, derived from the LRtin, are syncopal-.
ed iu the infinitiee and then their future Rnd conditional are so
likewise; thus, altlurre from adduure, t6rre from t6gliere, &c.
make addurro, torro; add"rrei, torrei, &c.
Some verbs eOlling in lere, nere, nire, though not syncopated in.
the i1!finitive; as, voMre, tenere,venire; are Sll in the future, and in
the conditional; as, oorro, terro, verro; 'oorrei, terrei, verrei.
All the irregularities of verbs, therefore, are confined.
to the preStnt and perfect-definite of the indicative, the'
imperative, the present of the conjunctive, and the parti-
ciple. In these tenses, however, the irregularities do
. not extend to all the persons,
In the present of the indicatipe, first and second
persons plural are always regular, and end in ia7ll0 aud
ate in the first conjugation; as, amiamo, amiate; in ici-
140 and ete in the second; as, temiamo or crediamo, te-
mete or credete; and in iamo and ite in the third; as,
sentiamo, sentUe.
In the perfect-definite, thare are also three persons,
which are always regular; the second singular, cnding
in sti, and the first aud second plural, ending in 7117110, and
in ste. If the verb ends in cire in the infinitive, these
persolls will end in asti, ammo, aste j as, amasti, amam-
7110, amaste: if the verb ends in ere or ere, they will end
in emmo, este; as, temtsti, credimmo, tesseste: and
if the verb. ends in ire they will end in uti, immo, 1ste j
as, sentisti, 'erttimmo, sentiste.
The auxiliary verb h.ere, in tbe perfect makesf6.ti,fummo,f6ste.
The verbs ddre, ffue, .Iare, make de.ti,/ace.Ii, .teati j &c.
Dire, srncopated from dicere, makes dice.ti, &c.
The first and second persons plural of the imperative
are always regular, and the same as the first and second
plural of the present of the indicative j as, amiamo, temid.
mo or crediamo, sentiamo; amcUe, temete or credUe, sen
tite. .
The two auxiliary verbs, in tbe second person pluraLof the im-
perative, make abbitite, n&le.
816
ANALOGY.
The first person plural of the present of the conjrmdive
is also always regular and the same as the first plural of
the present of the indicative; as, amUimo, temiamo or
crediamo, srntiamo.
The participk of all verbs in are is regular, and al-
ways ends in ato; as, amato.
Fare in the parlieiple takes another t, and makes leilto.
The participk of verbs in ere or ere may end in wo,
and tto, sso, or to) so; as, tem'Uto, creduto, lUJd letto,
m6sso, or giunto, arso
. Verbs in tre form their participles in to; as, senttto;
with the exception of a few, as will be found in the T.
ble of tM Irregular Verbs.
The first three persons of the present of the
tifJe are generally formed by dropping the last syllable
(re) of the infinitirJe, and changing the last vowel into 0,
i, a, for the verbs of the first conjugation; and into 0, i,
e, for the verbs of the second and third; as, [ama-re] amo, .
ami, ama; [teme-re or crede..,.e] temo, temi, teme, or cre-
do, crem, crUe; [senti..,.e] sento, senti, sente. The third
person plural is formed by adding no to the third person
singular ofvel'bs of the first conjugation, and by adding'
ao to the first person of verbs of the second and third;
as, [ama] amano; [temo or credo] temona or credono;
sentono.
The first person singular of the perfect-definite of all
verbs is generally formed by changing the syllable re of
the infinitive into i; as, [amare] amai, [temere or crede-
re] temU or credei, [sentire] sentii. And by changing ai
into 0, in verbs of the first and dropping
the final i of the first person, in those of the second and
third, is formed the third person singular; as, [amai]
am(}; [temU or credei] or [sentti] senft
The third person plural of verbs in are is formed
from the first singular, by dropping i and adding ro-
no; and of verbs in ere or ere, re, from the third per-
son singular, by adding rono; as, [amai] amarono; [tema
or or crederono; [senti} sentirOfIO. .
VERB.
317
The second person singular of the imperative of
verbs of the first conjugation is formed from the in-
finitive by dropping re; as, [amd-re] ama; and the third
person singular is formed from the second by a
into i; as, ramal ami. The second person singular of
verbs of the second conjugation is formed from the
infinitive, by dropping re ,and chang-ing e into i; as,
[teme-re or crede-re] temi or credi; and the third by
changing i into a; a8, [temi or credi] tema or ere-
da. And the second person singular of verbs of the
third conjugation is formed from the infinitive, by drop-
ping re; as, [sentire] senti; and the third by changing i
into a; as [senti] senta. The third person plural in all
verbs is formed by adding no to the person singu-
lar; as, [ami] amino; [tema or crfda] temano or crfda-
no; [sent a] sentano.
The present of the conjunctive of the regular verbs
in are forms its three persons in the singular, from
the infinitive by dropping re, and changing a into i;
as, '[ama-re] ami, ami, ami. And the present of the
conjunctive of !Ill verbs in ere or ere, ire is formed from
the infinitive by dropping re, and changing e, i, into a;
as, [leme-re or crede-re] tema or erMa, tema or creda,
tema or crfda; [denti-re] senta, senta, senta. The third
person plural of all verbs is formed by adding no to the
singular; as, [ami] amino; [tema or crecla] temano or
credano; [senta] senlano.
Some verbs in den cbange d into gg in some lenses j as, vedere,
chil!dere; veggo, cMegga, &c.
Many verbs in nere and nire take g in some persons and ten-
ses; as, rimanere, venire; rimango, [Iengano.
Some verbs in rere, nre frequently change the r into i; as, PIJ-
reTe, monTe; paio, moiano.
Several verbs ending in gmre very often transpose the I before
the g, in some lenses and persons j as, c6gliere, sci6gliere j c6tgo,
.rci6lga.
Many verbs ending in igtre, amere, in their irregular tenlel
change tbe i into e; as, diligere, impnmere; dile.n, impreMO.
All verbs ending in u6cere, u6tert, u6vtre, in all their irregular
tenses and in some of the regular also, 10le the U j as, cu6c.r.,
,eu6tcre, ",,,6DCrt j c6Mi, .,6uo, movendo.
27
A
GENERAL ALPHABETCAL TABLE
nrTIU:
IRREGULAR VERBS,
WITH
llJ:I'EBENCES TO THEIR PAJU.DIClIIS.
[This Table contains all the irreplar ,,,,.,,. of the three conjulntloDl. lind thol' ,......lar nrbl, III ""1"1 1111"
alao an irnplarfo""otion. It coDtalns likewise the "niperlo"ol Dnd 111 the verbl.
Such verba as are both replor anti irrlpla,. are here mllrked with lin obellik (t).
The forma encloaed in bracketl ( J) belonl to the particular verbl which lh,y 11'1 Inn'.ld, In Iddltlon til lh, '"rml
g1VllI1 under their Paradlgml.J
ABBREVI,lTION8: condo conditiona.l: fut. ind, iradilltlti"o I Inf, I
part. past-participle: pres. preunt: pert: va,. vari.d I' II. ,,,,
III
- ..

(;J
Q
Q

ro
Acu4ere, to bappeD; a unipet'llODal verb. See eadere
. . [Bnd
4erindere, to light. See ardere. Perf. tuu,i, I lit;
part. aecem, lit. [perf. (accensi), I lit; part. (neclm.
to enclose. See chirdere. [so), lit.]
eC'lgnerc or f'
cc1t1g.rc, 5to one's sel. See C'lg1Icrc.
cc6fiUerc or acc6,.."e, to receive. See c6g1iere.
ccOrgcre [si,] to perceive. See mirgere. Part. ace6rlo,
'ame, Lo receive. See tue6g1iere. [perceived.
ce6rrere, \0 run. See c6rrere.
'ure-cere, to increase. See crercere.
to hnppen; a unipet'llOnal verb. See "eolTe
[and
Ilddmere or t to aUege. See cll6cere. Perf. addum, I
Ilddurre, 5 alleged; part. add6l1o, alleged.
AJraggcrc, to affix. Seeraggere. Part. aJrlUO, affixed.
Lo amiot. See leggcre. .
to enfeeble. See /ra7llfere.
to be adjacent. See glacere.
.9ggf1Jgncrc or } . ,
.9ggtu.n(!;CTC to add. See gtugncre.
" '
f.9ggradare. to please j used as a unipenonal verb. See
[pi6tlere.
(A'igere), to be chill; a defective verb; var. p. 302.
.9Utulcre, to allude. See Ordcre.
.Ilmmellerc. to admit. See mellcre.
(Ancbkrc), to kill. See wiere.
J9ruIOrc, to go j var. p. 202.
i (A'ngere), to grieve; a defective verb; var. p. 302.
t .fAonellcre, to annex. See connellere. .
s or} to prefer. See p6nere.
i or to foretell. See Garc.
$ Anltd.rc, 5
S .9t1tivederc, to foresee. See vedere.
I
t.9pparire to appear. See wbiTe, p. 154. Also, inf.
(apparere); perf. appQn1i (apparsi) , I appeared; part.
.t1ppartenere, to belong. See tenere. [apparso, appeared.
S JJppendere, to bang. See ardere. Perf. oppe';' 1 bung;
S [part. appeso, hung.
l
.9ppo/iere or S.J...-
.Il.pp6rre, 5to Impute. ee yon"" e.
.Il.pprendere. to learn. SeeJ'rendcre. .
. t.Il.prirc, to open. See ,en/tre, p. 149. Also, perf. aper.
[Ii, I 0ltened; part. aperlo,
$ ./lrderc, to burn; var. p. 250.
S t.ll.rrenderc, to surrender. See reodere.
, .Il.rMderc, to smile. See rUler
1
.9,.,ogere, to add j a defective verb; var. p. 303
.9,cenderc, to ascend. See ,cendere.
Alci6lvere, to breakfast. See
t.ll..c6ndere, to conceal. See credere, p. 141. Also, perf.
Qlc6ai, I concealed; part. (Qlc6w or QlC6Ito), conoealed.
i .9ICmere, to ascribe. See ,cri"crc.
to sprinkle. See merger.
.Il.1$a1tre, to assault. See 1IJItn.
i .Iluldere [Ii,] to ait down. See drdue.

p:I
c..
.....

(;)
o
o
C..
n
tAwlere, to lAist. See erUere, p. 141. Part. -utilo, i
. [...isted.
tAu61"ere, to absolve. See 161"ere. Abo, pen. au6lri, $
[I absolved; part. (0116/10), absolved. S
JJ,,6rbere, to absorb; var. p. 247.'
Auumere, to assume. See e.rprimere. Perf. CIlIUM, I i
[assumed; part. auUnto, llS6umed. S
A,tenere, to abstain. See tenere. $
A:tergere, to cleanse a wound. See tl:rgere.
Alirdere or to abstract. See trdere. S
Actrdrre, S $
or } to compel. See ,trig1\ere. I
Allendere, to wait. See tendere.
8I1efll:re. to hold to. See tenere.
811ignere or d S
8tllilgere, Sto I'llW. See tignere. $
8116reere, to twist. See t6reere. i
8Uraere or , I
8I1ran-e, Sto attract. See tracre.
lJeillere, to root np. !i!ee arellere.
feere, to !lave; auxilil\l'Y verb; var. p. 114.
'Illertere, to turn away. See rirertere. $
'lcoedere, to perceive. See "edere. t
g""enll'e, to happen. See l'enlre. The former i
S""enve [ri,] to meet with. S is a unipersonal verb. S
.4D1Meert, to tie. See "inure. S
.8r1IlUgere or ,,_ _LI_ S
Sto wrap. .,.0 w ..ere. S
Colrulere, to bruise. See lUcre.
CommEltere, to command. See ",ellere.
to move. See ",u6lIere.
tCompanre, to appear before. See apparire.
Compilleere, to comply. See piaeere.
or to lament. See pi6gmre.
Comp,angtrc, S
or to compose. See p6nere.
ompUTTe, S
Comprenderc, to comprehend. See prendere.
Compnlllcrc, to compress. See uprtmere.
COlllpromellrrc, to compromise. See pro",Eltere.
or I to grieve. See pUgmre.
tConeedere, to grant. See cedere. .
t Contcpire, to conceive. See uiMre, p. 164. AllO,
info (contepere) ; part. concepUto (eoncello), conceived.
COfIChiUdere or } IdS _L f ..
C I
f... to conc u e. ee ""' ere.
one uaere,
Conedrrere, to concur. See cOrrere.
Coneu6cere, to concoct. See cu6cere.
ContU/ere, to shake. See dUcUlere
Condi,cendere, to condescend. See diaeendere.
08ndoIEre, to complain. See dolere.
CondUce,e or to conduct. See cu6cere. Perf. contlUui,
Condit"e, S I conducted; pert. contl6110 [(condut.
Confare, to become. See/are. [to)], conducted
Configgere, to nail. See Jtggere. Part. eonJitto, nail
eonffIM,rc, to 5eej6nder,. red.
c.o
toa
o

(;)
o
o
C..
n
f Baltnare, to ligbten; a unipersonal verb. See piOlIert.
tBIU/are, to be enougb; used as a unipersonnl verb.
, [See pi6tJere.
tBened'u;ere or l to bles.. See abborrlre, p. 167. Part.
tBened'tre, 5 benedetto, blessed. Also, perf. bene-
tBellere or bere, to drink; var. p. 280. [dun, I blessed.
Benrolere, to love. See lIolere.
fBere, to drink. See blrere.
t Buogn6re, to be ncedful; osed IlS a unipersonal verb.
'adhe, to fall; "o.r. p. 211. [See pi6oere.
'alere, to care for; 1\ defective verb; var. p. 298,
(Capel'e), to comprebend ; II. defective verb; var. p. 304.
tCMere, to submit. See r.rwere, p.141. Also, perf. ees
[n, I submitted; part. eeuo, submitted.
(Cb6rere), to demand; a defective verb; var. p. 304.
Chiedere, to ask. See ardere. Pres. iDd. childo, chilg.
[go, or chilggio, I IlSk. Part. chils/o, IlSked.
Chiudere, to shut. See drdere.
Cignere or} 'rd S .,
Ci
to g.. 'p"6..ere or gsungere.
/lgere,
Circo1lCidere, to circumcise. See ardue.
Ciuollclgnere or l II S '
'irconcl1Jg(re, S to surroull. ell. ctg7Iere.
'irconjle/lcn, ttl circumOeet. See COftnellere.
'irclJllflilfere, to sbine round. See rifUlgere.
Circolucnrere, to limit. See .moere.
Cir<;on"enire, to circumvent. See lIentre.
Cdgliere or c&rre, to gather; var. p. 269.
(Colere), to adore j B defective nrb; var. p. 299.
Congi{,gnere or l t .. t tb S' '
5 0 Jom oge er. ell. gtugnere.
l tConnellere, to conneet j var. p. 272. Also, perf. con-
i [nel/li, I connected; part. connellUto, connected.
I
Con6,cere, to know; var. p. 276.
ConquUiere, to afflict. See ardere.
Conscricere or coscnoere, to enlist. See smoere.
Con,egutre, to obtain. See ,eguire.
tConn.tere, to cODsist. See credere, p. 141. Part. eon-
[Ii./tio, consisted.
Com/rignere or cos/rignere, C01l!/rillgcre or to
[constrain. See ,ITlgnere.
t Collltrutre or cOsli'utrt, to build. See elihtre, p. 154.
[Also, part. <;OnitrW/o or cos/rUllo, built.
ConmmeTt, to consume. See esprimere. Perf. con.un-
[Ii, I consumed; part. comilnto, consumed.
Contendere, to quarrel. See /huleTt.
Contenlre, to eootain. See tenere.
Cont6reere, to twist. See t6rcere.
I
Con/radkere,
Con/ramre or to contradiet. See d'lI'e.
COllJradtltre,
S Contra.Jfare, to counterfeit. See fare. ,
Cantrapp6nere or l L_
S Contrapp6rre, 5to oppose. See pvneTC.
f Con/raue or l '
I
COlurarre, Sto contract. Se. /raerc.
Conlrtuenllere, to eouDter-write. See urtvert.
tCofljrlUlQrt, in tbe IIgnl6cation of to eontrlU/, is regular,

1:0
s=
Ul
W
...
(;)
o
o _
C..
n
llnd it I. varied like mnbe, p. 124. But in the slgai- I
fication of to Rand agaimt, it is irregular, and I. va I
[ried like &/are, which see. f
Con/rorertere, to controvert. See rirer/cre.
ConrEllere, to convulse; a defective verb; var. p. 804.
Clmeenire, to agree. See
or to convert. See rirer/ere. Also, perf. i
t CODl,ertire, 5 eonvcr/u, 1 converted; part. tonrer/Ilo, (
'onrlnccrc, to couvict. See tineere. [converted. )
'onrlrcrc, to live togetber. See vlvcre. S
'onr6lgcrc or} I S 6 S
, ... 1./ to wa low. e" r tgere. s
OltttU l'trt,
t Coprire, to cover. See &enlire, p. 149. Also, perf. co- S
rpern, I covered; part. coper/o, covered. $
C6rrc, to gatber. See c6"liere. S
:orri:ggcrc, to correct. See reggcrc. $
:6rrere, In ru\); VBI', p, 26B. !
Corri.p(mdcrc, to corre3pollI1. See ri&p6ndtrc. J
Corr6dcre, to corrode. See r6dcre.
CorrOmpere, to dcprl>vo. See r6mpere. i
Co,Icr',cere, to enlist. See cOllSenvere. I
COlpE;gere, to stre\v. See mergcre.
or} to constrain. See coDl/rigntre.
teollruire, to huild, See COllltrutre. I
Cre,,"., (0 l:I'OIV. See conDlCere. )
c\"Ucify: See figgere. Part. eroci.(iuo, J
CIlllW'C, to ,ew, vor. p. 283. [cruCified.
a.6cere, to cook; Vllr. p. 248. AI.o, info edeere. )
Diltgere to love. See diligere.
t to del age ; a unipel'llonal verb. See
Dimirgere, to drown. See demh'gere. rpi6rere.
Dim;lIere, to discontinue. See mellere.
mpingere, to paiat. See pangere.
Diplwiere or L....
DiJlnre, S to depose. See puncre.
Dire, to SRy, See (cllcere).
DirlJrert, to direct; var. p. 2M,
mr6mpcre, to break. See r6mpere.
t Diubtdere, to descend. See Kenlkre.
uchiudert, to disclose. Bee .cJaiUdere.
or} to botie. See Ki6gliere.
DI&COnrClllre, to misbecome. See conrenire.
t Difroprirc, to discover. Bee cupriTe.
Di&c6rrerc, to discoal'lle. See c6iTere.
DilcUiere, to discuss; var. p. 270.
or }
F>:_J! to deny. See dITe.
AlUu'Ire,
Dilfare, to undo. See fare.
Di.giugnere or t d'" Se "
DUgiungere, 5to IIJom. e /pugnere.
Di8mellere, to dismiss. See mellert.
DUparire, to disappear. See uiblre
J
p. 164. Also,
[part. di8parlO, disappeared.
t Di8perdere, to dispene. See ,erdere.
DUpergere, to scatter. See
DiipiaUre, to displeue. See puuere. '
fA
..a
...

:<
Dtzr" to give; var. p. 204.
D,.atlhe to decay. See ClUlb,.
Decid,r. to decide. See Order,.
or} to See .omp6nere.
Du6rTere, to pass away. See mere.
to decrease. See
DedUcere or to deduce. See cu6eere. Part. ded61lo,
DttlUrre, 5 [deduced.
DelUdere, to delude. See ardere. .
D.mbgere or dimbgere, to drown. See mErgere.
Dtponere or _,- .
Deporre, 5to depose. See """er,.
Depnmere, to depress. See e.tprimere.
Deridere, to deride. See rldere.
DelCrivere, to describe. See ,m.ere. [desisted.
t DeAttere, to desist. See .redere, p. 14I. Part. den,tuo,
Demmere, to infer. See elp7imere. Perf. de.unn, l"1n
[ferred ; part. demnlo, inferred.
Detb;ere, to scour. See tbgere.
Detraere or ,
Detrtirre, . 5 to See traere.
Deeolgere or} . 6
Der61.ere to devolve. See" 1gere.
, ,
(Dicere) or avoe, to say; var. p. 285.
t Ditendere, to defend. See fi:iuJere. .
Diff6ndere, to diffuse. See f6ndere.
t Dighiaceitire, to thaw; a unipel'lOnal verb. See ghiae.
[cUirc and pW"erc.
I =;or Ito dilpol4l. See p6mre. .
,J tDW61vere, to dissolve. See 161"ere. Part. dUrolUlo,
I [dissolved.
S t DiuuOdere, to dissuade; var. p. 213. Also, see teo
Dillendere, to extend. See ,tbulere. [mEre, p. 135.
J Diltil/guere, to distinguish; var. p. 262.
S Di8tOgliere or diltOrre, to divert from. See t6gliere.
) DUttircere, to twist. See t6reere.
J DiIlOrre, to divert from. See dillogliere.
$ DUtraere or d' t S '
DUtrarre, S to IS ract. ee traere.
J DUtrUggere or d S'
J Di,trUrre, Sto eltroy. ee ,trugger,.
S Dinmere, to pull up. See ",euere.
s or } to unfold. See ,,6Igere.
! Ditenbe, to detain. See tenbe.
) Diredbe) to see. See vedbe.
J Dirmere, to root out. See 'I,ellere.
I
Dire7lJre, to become. See "enire.
tDiewere, to divide. See credere, p. 141, Also, perf.
[divUi, I divided; part. diM, divided.
Dir61gere or __
J Div6t.ere, Sto roll together. See ""lgere.
I
Dolbe, to grieve; var. p. 216.
Dovbe, to owe; var. p. 217.
EJf6ndere, to effuse. See jOndere.
to elect. See IIIS",e.
,
<
toJ

!Xl
CII
l-a
.C11
(;)
o
o
C..
n
ElVlere, to elide. 8ee lUera. Part. dUo. I
Eilldera, to elude. See arden. f
Emergere, to emerge. See mb'gere.
or to diminish. See mugnere. $
to be equivalent. See 'flalere. I
E'rgere. to raise. See mergere.
Engere, to erect. See dirigere.
Er6mpere. to burst out. See r6mptre. i
tEItJurVe, to exhaust. See uibITe, p. }M. Also, part.
[uGuto, exhausted.
E,elUdere, to exclude. Bee chiUdere.
tEngere, to exact. BeelUm-e, p. 144. Part. uOuo,
[exacted.
tErimere, to exempt. See IUltf'e, p. 144. Part. ublla-
[to, exempted.
t ENtere, to exiat. See eredere, p. 141. Part. emilio,
[eXis,ed'l-
EIJlmere, to expel. See Perf. uyUlIi, I ex-
[pelled; part. erpUUo, expelled.
EJP6.nere or ,
ErpOrre, Sto expose. See ponere.
E,rprimere, to express; val'. p. 266. i
,;,tre, 10 be i nuxiliary vorb; val'. p. 119.
'Ilindere, 10'exlend. See ,Ifndere. J
,tlnguere, to extinguish. See dillinguere. I
to utort. See tbretrt. _
ErfrOere 01' l' _L
ElhUrre, Sto extract. See I,.,..,re. i
hnpthtere 01' l to Impose. See p6nere.
Imp6rrt, S
t lmporlare, to be important i uled as a unipenonal
[verb. See pi6flere
lmprendere, to undertake. See prendtre.
lmprirnere, to rrint. See
Inchlwere or wc/udtre, \0 includo. See eII__
lnddert, to grave. See ardere.
1 ' }
or to be pregnant. See eignere.
lnctllgere,
Inc/were, to include. See inclliwere.
IncOrrere, to incur. See c6rrere.
IncrelUre, to be sorry i a unipersonal verb. See pi6"ere.
IndUeere or Ito induce. See cu6cere. Perf. indUui, I
IndUrre, induced; part. ind61lo, induced.
or to iuliL Seetigers.
nJ-egere,

or ?to feign. See /ig<nere.

/I '''lI:c,.e, \
J,ljIillcrt, 10 bentl. See connet/ere.
10 infliCt. See lrjigere.
IIIf{mdcrc, to infuse. See/cJIldere.
II/rommel/erc, 10 iotermeddle. Soe /rammel/ere.
In/rangere, to break. See /rangere.
or} s.'
Ingiungere, to charge. ee gtupere.
Imcriflere or Ucri"ere, to iUllClribe. See ,eNtre.
tlmUtere, to lusist. See crldere, p. 141. Part. inrilti
Imdrgen, to rue against. See Idrgere. [to, insisted.

te

or} to do; var. p. 2OlI.

tFrndere, to cleave. See Iluere, p. 144. Also. JlP.rf.
rfeui, 1 cleft; part. flm, cleft.
E1gere or to fix. Sec fIIergere or llffgere. Perf. fin
Fi,gere, S or fiui. 1 fixed; part. fuo or fiuo,fl1lo,
or l to feign. See l'JIegnere or giungere. [fixed.
....ngere. S
t Fd.ldere, to melt. See leuere, p. 144. Also, perC.
[lWi, I melted; pRrt.fmo, melled.
- Nl ammll/ere, to put between. See mellere.
00 Frangere, to break. See giungere.
F: or to interpose. See p6nere.
rappurre, S
Friggere, to Cry. See U/{gere. Part. frillo, Cried.
t GetO.re, (0 freeze; a uniperaonal verb. See
GWI/jUt/ere. 10 kneel down. See eonaellere.
t (;ltiucciure, III freeze; Runipersonat verb. See
Gineen, 10 lie down; var. p. 219.
Glre, to go; a deCective verb; var. p. 310.
G!t!gnere or to arrive' nr. 1". 200
Giungere, 5 ' .
t Grandinare, to hail; a unipersonal verb. See
Illiulere, to delude. See eliulere.
tlmb're or b'b S b'
t Sto 1m I e. ee
Immergere, to immerge. See mergere.
ImpJllere, to impel. See ,cellere. Perf. impuUi, lim
[pelled; part. impUllO, impelled.
CJ
Q

f'I
1t IrlllTUve or i"nWe. to inltruct. See eftbire, p. 1M.
( Also, perf. irlllrUui, 1instructed; ill,llrullo, iUltrlMlted.
S Inlendere, to understand. See Mndere.
t IlIltretdere. to Intercede. See /:tdere.
$ In/erauere or I h'b' d
J
(. I I dt to pro I It. See .re.
S 11 er lret
I IJllermellere, to interpose. See
or to interpose. See p6nere. .
S n e11,,,"e. S
I
Inlerr6mJere. to interrupt. See r6mpere.
Inler/enere or in/rallwere, to detain. St'e Ira/lmere.
In/errenve. to be prellClnt. See "enve.
I nl/gnere or ,
IIIlingere. Sto dIp. See /tgnere.
Inlrap"lndtre, to undertake. See prbllUre.
$ Inlral/enere, to detain. See inltr/enere.
InlMdere, to temper. See tirdere.
I Inlrodiu:ere or to introduce. See eu6eere. Perf. in
Ill/rodurre, S Irodmn, I introduced; part. introd61.
$ Inlrodere to intrude. See tirdere. [/0, introduced.
IJmwere. to invade. See ardere.
l Invalere, to prevail against. See "Illere. Part. inraIlO,
. [prevailed againlt.
Inr61 ere
lrtr6tf.ere, or } to wrap up. See rtlgere.
1're. to go; R defective verb; var. p. all.
i. Irridere. to deride. See rid"re.
$ I_lrere, to iDscribe. See inlCrivere.
S I"TUve, to instrw:t. See iunWCo
=
Pf
..
..
ClI

Q\
!
f tPer,uarere, to persuade. See dimuldere.
Perrenire, to reach. See tlen"'e.
S Perrerlere or lto prevent. See "Verter... Part. per
t Per"erlire, S rer,o or perrerlito, perverted.
$ Piaeere, 10 please; val'. p. 224. .
( Pi6.gnere or Is' .-
i Pial/gere, to weep. ee Iprgnere or gt"ngere.
i or to paint. See Ipegnere or glullgere.
i t Piorere, to rain; R unipersonal verb; val'. p. 190.
$ P6nere or p6rre, to put; val'. p. 267.
$ P6rgere, to offer. See rnbgtre. Part. p6rto, offered.
i Porn, 10 put. See ponere.
1 or } to postpone. See p6nere.
$ POlledbe, to possess. See 'edere.
S Potere, to be able; val'. p. 225.
PrecHere, to shorten. See ardere.
S Prubrrere, to COIerun. See c6rrere.
Predieere or preuve, to predict. See dire.
Prediligere, 10 Iike beforehand See dil/gere.
S Predv., to predict. See preull'ere
f Preflggere; to prefix. See liggere. Perf. prtlWi, I pre-
[fixed; part. pre/wo, p."tixed.
I
tPremere, to press. See credere, p. 141. Also, perf.
,[(pressi), 1 prl.'lIed; (prello), pressed.
Premellers, to premise. See mitt"e.
Prmdere, to take. See ardere. Perf. prui, I took;
[part. prelOl taken.
tLampegg;a,.e, to lighten i a unipenJonal verb. See
Ledere, 10 offend. See ardere. [pi6Dere.
Ltcere and /lure or l to he lawful; a unipcrsonal vcr!> ;
and liclTf, S' val'. p. 306.
LeKgere, 10 read; val'. p.
Lture or licere, to be lawCul. See lecere or leeere.
t LUcere, to shine. See credere. _"-Iso, perC. lu.n. I
[shin.,d.
tMaledicere OF lto corse. Sce abbmire, p. 167. Part.
tMaledire, - S maledello, cursed. Also. perC. male-
Ma1fare, to do wrong. See fare. [dun, I cursed.
Manomellere, to manumit. See mel/ere.
Manlenere, to maintain. See tenere.
Merlere, to dive; val'. p. 257. '
tMe.tcere, to mil. See teuere, p. 144. Also, part. mi-
[,10, miled.
Mettere, to put. See connellere. Pm. min, 1 put;
[part. meuo, put.
(Malcere), to assuar;e; a deCecti"e verb; val'. p. 306.
Mordere, to bite. See ardere.
Monre, to die; val'. p. 287.
Mugnere or l ,
S to milk. See ugnere.
Muovere, to move. See .mvere. PerC. mom, I mov-
[ed; part. m6110, moved. Also, inC. m6l1tre.
NtUcere, to be born; val'. p. 2'18.
tNalCondere, to conceal. See a,condere.
Negrogere, to neglect. See dingere.
tNevicare, snow; a unipersonal verb. See pi6t:ere.
(;)
o
o
C..
n
XulJeereto hurt. See ,wistere. Also, iuf. n6cere. Prep6nere or } t fi' S On e
Oce6rrere, to bappen; a unipersonal verb. See cOTTere. PrepfJrre, 0 pre er. ee p er.
or piOvere. Fut. nceorrera or occorra, it shall or will i Pruct,gliere or t fi S 'gl" e
o [happen. Prueerre, 5 a pre ell ICe ler.
Qjfendere, to offend. See ardere. Pe.rf. ojf[,i, I of- Prucnvere, to prescribe. See acnvere.
. [fended; part. Ojfe80, offended. Pruedere, to f'reside. See ledere.
tOjfenre or 1to offer. See abbo..nrc, p. 157. Also, tPrenlmue., to See p. 141. Also,
S put. ojferto, offered. SI peri. pre8unn, 1 presumed; part. pruUTlto, presumed.
Ol"e, to smell; a defective \'erb; var. p. 313. Prtlupp6nere or 1 t e S e III 6nere
to omit. See mellere Preluppfnre, 5 0 presuppos. e pp ..
Opponere or to oppose. See ponerfi. Also, part. op- Pretfndere, to pretend. See tmdere.
Opporre, ,polilo, opposed. . ( PrCfJalere, to prevail. See valere.
Oppnmerc, to opprll5s. See uprlmere. S Preredere, to foresee. See redere.
to,truve, to obstruct. See erihire, p. 154. .4lso, part. l Prevenve, to prevent. See venire.
Ollenere. to obtai 0. -See lenere. [08/rUI/O, obstructed. S tProoedere, to proceed. See cedere.
Parere, to appear; vu. p. 22!. Also, used 6S a uniper $ PrsdUcere or to produce. See cu6cere. Perf. prodUui,
[sontll verb. See piouere. l Produrre, 5 I produced; part. prodol/o, produced.
tPti8cere, to feed. See te88ere, p. 144. Part. palciUto, t Prs/6ndere, io dissipate. See/ondere.
(Pavere), to fear; var. p. 300. [fed. -Prometlere, to promise. See meltere.
tPercepire, to perceive. See enlnre, p. 154. Also, P/,omuovere, to promote. See
- [part. pereello, perceived. $ Proponere or } S e POI' re
P
-< S ' (p L.. ,0 propose.. e Ie.
ercurrere, to ru0 over. ee carrere. S ropUITe, - -
Per,cuotere, to strike. See Also, info percotere. i to break forth. See rompere.
tPerdere, to lose. See credere, p. 141. Also, pel'!. Promogl'ere or t b IS" l"
[(pern), I lost; part. (perlU), lost. Pr08cifnre, 5 a a so ve. ee 8C10g lere.
Permetlere, to permit. See mel/ere. $ Prtncnvere, to proso:ribe. See lenrere.
Perle!f".ire, to persecute. See leguire. Prolc.,"'Uire, to prosecute. See leguire.
tferlLltere, to persevere. See credere, p. 141. Part. S Prol/erldere,'to prostrate. See Ilendere.
-[peni8Iuo, persevered. $ ProJeggtre to protect. See teggere..
-<
t'j
==
CA
Nl
--t
Rieoftllemre, to sue one in the law. See conc.llve.
Rieon.,erlen or} to convert again. See conllertere or
tRiconllertire, coneertir,.
tRicoprin, 10 cover again. See cop",e.
Riedrre, to gather. See ric6gliere.
Ric6rrere, to have recourse. See c6rrere.
Ricredere, to undeceive one's self. See credere.
RierelCere, to increase. See cre,eer
Ricw., to sew again. See cum.
Ricu6cere, to cook IIgain. See cu6cere.
RWere, to lallgh. See ardere.
Riduere or I .>!
Ridire, to repeat. See atre.
Ridmere or to reduce. See cu6cere. Perf. ridum, I
Ridu"" reduced; JIlIrt. rid6t1o, reduced.
Riedere, to return j a defective verb; var. p. 307. Also,
Rijare, to do again. See/are. [info
t Rijlellere, to reflect. See p. 144. Also, Pllrt.
rijle_, reflected, which is exclllsivelyapplied to light,
Rv..dndere, to new cast. See fUllIlere. [sound, &l.c.
Rif!fmgere, to reflect. Sec fTt",!!.ere.
to fry again.
RiJe.:/{ere, to read again. See IIggere.
t Hi/mtre, to shine. See lmere.
Bimtmb'" to remain; var. p. 227.
Rimettere, to replace. See mellere.
Rirn6rder" to cause or feel remorse. See m6rdere.
lIimuIJllere, to remove. See rnu611ere.
__, to be born again. See n6leere.
(;)
o
o
C..
n
ProlefJlkr" to stretch. See thad".,. !
Prolraere or} 5 aer
Prolrarre, to protract. ee tr e. S
Prov,dere, to provide. See lieder,. I
PrOrlllir" to proceed. See II,nin.
Pugnere or } . k 5 '
P
to pr.c. ee tlgnere.
unger" .
PUlr'/ar" to putrefy. See/ar,.
Raeeentur" to kindle. See (Keend,re.
Racehi"'!,rt, to See CKChiUdere.
or} to gather. See aee6g1i,re.
IWcc6,.,." I
tRtider" to shave. See teuere, p. 144. Also, re
rf
. I
[ran, I shaved; part. rMo, shaved.
Raggiugnere or } S .,
Ra
.. to reJolD. ce agglugnere.
g/{lul/gere, '
&t/enere,16 detain. See ttentre. S
Rallvedere [ri], to reform. See avcedere. S
Rallv61gere or } 6 I
R
.AI to wrap. See c Igere.
Dtre,
Reddere, to retrench. See ardere. S
Redimer" to redeem. See eqwimere Perf. redenn, I t
[redeemed; part. redenlo, redeemed. S
Reggcre, to govern. See teggere. I
t Rend,re, to render. See erhlere, p. 141. Also, perf.
[ren, I rendered; part rflo, rendered.
Repellere, to repel. See ",eller,.
Reprimere; to reprell8. Bee uprimere.
tBucindere, to re.cind. See ,cindere.
t.a
...
OIl

(;)
o
o
C..
n
Ruemere, to anlwer in writing. See ICritcre.
tRen.tere, to resist. See ertdere, p.141. Part. Tui,/uo,
Rupigner. or l tiS ,..1 [resisted.
Rupingere, . S. 0 repe . ee 'l',gnere.
Rutrignere or l r' S '
Rel/ringere, S to Imlt. ee ,'ngnere.
Riaeeerulere, to rekindle. See aecendere.
t Riapparire, to re.eppear. See apparire.
t lliaprire, to re-opeu. See apnre.
Riardere. t9 burn again. See ardere.
Nl RiauUmere, to re-assuwe. See auUmere.
Riavere, to bave again. See avere.
t or .
t Ribenedire, Sto ble.. agalD. See benedacerc.
tRibereor d' k . S b'
t Ribevere, Sto rID agalD. ee evere.
Ricadere, to fall again. See eadere.
Richiedcre, to requed. See ehitdere.
to sbut again. 8ee chiUdere.
RlClrrncre or ,
Sto gird. See ngnere.
Ric6gliere or ric6rre, to gatber. See e6gliere.
Ricomp6nere or}
R
' om 6 to compose again. See eomp6nere.
Ie p rre, .
Ricondmere or . ,
Rieondurre, Sto bring back. See eondw:ere.
Ricongiugllere or .. S . ,
Ricongiungere, Sto reJolD. ee eongtugnere.
Ricon6lCere, to know again. See eon6lCere.
RinehiUdere, to incloMl. See chiUtlerc.
to be displeased. See inerucere. Also,
, [used as a ulliper50nal verb. See piOrer,.
to find out. See venire.
or to involve. See r6/gcre.
, tllV reTl. S
Ripereu6tere, to strike back. See pereudtere.
! Riperdere, to lose agail1. See perdere,
RiJ,jaJ'nere or} . S .,
( R' . ,<> to weep agalD. ee p1agnere.
Iptangere,
or to replace. See p6nae.
(Rtporre, S /
tRipremen, to repress. See premere,
SR;prelldere, to take back. See prmdere.
( Ri,a/ire, to mouut again. See IaLire.
Ri,apere, to know by report. See ,apere.
! Ri,ehiuderc, to open again. See ,chiUdere.
$ Riurtrere, to wrile again. See ,emere.
$ Ri,eu6tcre. to exact. See 6CU6ttre.
j Ri.cderc, to ,'eside. See ,edere.
$ t RiM)I"erc, to fesolve. See I6lvere. Also; perf. n.6Ui,
$ Ri.6rgtre. to rise up again. See I6rgere. [I resolved.
( RRt:,o'l'!gnere or to drive back. See
lIolpwgue, S . -r--
I Ri,ovt'enire, to remember. See,ovvellire.
Ri'pignere or IS'
S Ri,pi:"gere, S to repu 5e. ee Telptgnere. .
Rilp6ndere, to answer. See titdere. Part. rilpo,to, an-
I Riltare, to de.ist. See #ar,. [swered.
<
-ta:l
=0

ClD
WI
10
t.!embf'ar" to appear; uscll u a unipenonlll urb: See
[picSz,u,.
(SUpere), to creep; a defective verb; vat. p. 308.
Sfaggsre to avoid. SeefuKgir.
(SiI6re), to be or to keep 5ilent; II defective verb; var.

or to dry up. See mtAgnere. [po 300.

mungere, 5 .
Smu6rere, to move. See llIu6vere.
SohiUdere, to shot up. See .kiUder.
Soec6rrere, to succour. See c6rr.....
Soddiifar., to satisfy. See far
tSuff'erire or IOffrl,re, to suiter. See off'w
SOff'riggere, to1ry slightly. Seefrigger.
Soff'"rt, to suffer. See lOff'enr.
Soggiacerc, to be subject. See gitJdr.
or } to add. See giUgn.r.
to be wont; a defective verb; var. p. 300.
tSdlc.r., to solve. See reuere, p. 144. Also, part.-
[lwo, solved.
Sommerg.r., to submerge. See merger.
Sommelier.. to submit. See meller.
Soppr1m.rc, 10 suppress. See upnm.re.
SOlJTlJggiiJ.gnert or .,
Supragg-iting.r., 5 to come opon. See glugnu
S0l'ruppaner. or On
soprapp6rr., 5 to put nver. See p err..
Sopprapprmd.re. to surprise. S.e prendtre.
Sopt"lUCMflU', to superscribe. See ..NlIere.
(;)
o
o
C..
n
or} to restrain. See ,'rignm. i
Hilenire, to retain. See t,nlr.. !
Hi/ign.r. or} .,. . S ' i
R
:.' to ule agam. ee lagner.
"Illgert,
Hilo/{lier. or ritarr., to retake. See laglier.. l
Hildrcer., to twist back. See tareer..
Rilarr., to retake. See rit6glier.. S
Rilraer. or . ,
Rilrarre, 5 to ntract. See traer.. S
Rifl.der., to see again. See fledere. I
Birentkre, to resell. See fJendere.
.flirensre, to returD. See flenire.
llifJerter., to return; var. p. 271.
Ririfl.re, to live again. See fJScere.

or to revolve. See r:6Iger.. S

III cere, 5 S
RiUlcir., to 8ucceed. See tUcire. I
ROd.re, to gnaw. See arder. J
Rampere, to break; var. p. 279.
Salve,' to ascend; ver. p. 289. i
Sapere, to know; var. p. 2..<>9.
SC4der., to fall due. See eader.. I
Scegliere or ,terr., to choose. See e6g1i.r.
t Sund.re. to descend. See crUer., p.14I. Also, perf.
[.cen, I descended; part. ICUo, descended.
Scerre, to choose.. See ,ugli.re.
SclaiUderc, to open. See .l&iUdere. I
Col
CA
o

..
Sopraulllire, to attack unexpectedly, See mr..c.
Soprauedere"lo superse,de. See 'edere.
Soprllltare, to superinlend. See ,tare.
Sopravren,re, to happlln. See ven're.
Sopraolirere, to survive.' Slle mrer'e.
Soprin/elldere, 10 superintend. See inlendcre.
S6rgere, to arise. See mer-gere. Part. tJ6rto (surto),
; {arisen.
Sorprendere, to take by surprise. See prendere.
Sorreggere, to sUf.port. See reggere.
Sorridere, to smi e. See Mdere.
SlJTVenire, to come upon. See "enire.
SdJcnoere, 10 subscribe. See ,trirere.
So'pendere, to suspend. See Ipendere.
or l to push. See ,"""-ere.
rupulgere, 5 :re"
SOJlenbe, 10 sustain. See tenere.
Sollinlbldere, 10 understand. See inlendere.
Sol/omettere,lo submit. See mellere.
Sollopanere or l . 0
Sottop6Tre, Sto, submit. See p nere.
Sollo,cnrere, to subscribe. See ,envere.
Sollraere or l '
Sollrarre, Sto subtract. See Iraere. '
Sovvenire, to help. See vwire. .
or l to subvert. ,See ri"erlere. Also, perf.
tSollllertire, S [,o""er/ii, I lubverted; part. ,0llve
rtitO
,
[lubverted.
tSpGndere, to pour Ollt. See crUere, p. 141. Also,
CJ
o
o
CO
rr
Seindere, to cleave. See arqere. Perf. 1Ciui, I cleft;
[pari. 1c1.r1O (sclnlo), cleft. S
Scignere or l . ei
Sto ungird. See gnere. S
SSe! liere or l to untie. See eogliere. !
CI rre, S !
Seommellere, to bet. See' eommettere. . (
Scompollere or l t discompose. See CIImpfmere.
Scomporre, S 0 $
ScOIlJtgtrCre, to roul. See configgere. S
t Seol/utl/ere, to disconnect. SdO f
SeonoJcere, 10 be ungrateful. See conoJcere. (
Seontareere, 10 wrest. See eon/oreere.
Seonven,re, to misbecome. See COfI!'enire. I
or} to confound. See eomolgere.
tSeopnre, to discover. ' See coJ'nre. I
Seorgere, to perceive. See mergere. Part. narto, per-
SernTere, to lay waste. See correre. [ceived.
Seo,eendere, to break. See ,eetldere. Perf. ,eo,een, I,
[broke; part. ,coleho, broken, S
Scnrere, to wrile; var. p. 274. S
Seucire, to rip, Dee cue're. !
Scu6lere, to shake. See discWere. Also, info leotere. (
Sdrucire, to rip. See eucire.
Sedere, to sit down; var. p.231. f
SedUeere orl to seduce. See eu6cere. Perf. ,etIuri, I f
Sedu"e, seduced; part. let16tto, seduced. ,
Seguire, to ollow; var. p. 291.
=

ClIl
ClIl

>
t'"

c.e
c.e
tot
Transpo,leTC, IrlU]J6nere or I t
Trao/qJOrre, Irasp6rre, 5 0 ranspose.
Trtirre, to draw. See Iraere.
Trascegliere or tra.etirTt, 10 select. See seegliere.
Traseendere, to surpass. See tran.eendere..
Tra.cerre, to select. See tra.cegliere.
TrlllC6rrere, to pun over. See e6rrere.
Truerivere, to transcribe. See tranUMllm.
Tergere, to clean. See mergerc.
Tignere or l d S' ..
T
" to yeo ee spegt&n'e or g.ungere.
.ngere,
Togliere or IOrre, to take away. See c6gliere.
t T6ndcre, to shear, See Muere, p. 144. Also, perf. 16ft,
, sheared; part. 1610, sheared.
Tarcere, to twist. See vlRcere.
Torre, to take away. See 100liere.
Tradiu:ere or to translate. ScI' codtere. Perf.lradu.,.
Tratlv.rre, 5 ai, I translated; part. tradol/o, trans-
Trtjggere" to draw' var. p. 252. [Ialed.
Traerc or trarre, 5 '
,!:ati,p;ere or to transfix. See Jtgerc or figgere.
raJ 'p:gere, 5
t Tralmere, to shine through. See lv.eere.
Tramcendere or Iraacendert, to surpass. See accndere.
Tranacnverc or Irascnbtre, to transcribe. See scriverc.
Transftindere or Irasf6ndere, to transfuse. See f6ndere.
Transmellere or trasmellere, 10 transmit. See ",el/ere.
Trampanre or traqJarire, to be transparent. See ap-
[pariTe.
See p6nere.
perC. 'l'ciri, I poured out; pari. 'P&.o (spaoto), poured S
[dut. S
Spargere, to lipread. See mergers. Also, part. (sparto), $
tSpanre, to disappear. See appame. . [spread. i
or l to extinguish; var. p. 261. S
Spe" dere, to spend. See ardere. Perf. spen, I spent;
tSperdere, to dissipate. See perdere. [part. 'Peso, spent. $
Spiaeere, to displease. See piaeere. S
Spignere or l h 5' . , (
S
' to pus. ee spegtlere or glungere. Sf
ptngere, .
Spargere, to stretch out. See pargere.
Sp6nere or S' , (
SpfJrre. 5to expose. ee ponere. S
tSpremert, to squeeze. See premere. f
Spromettere, to go back Crom one's word. See promet- S
Sprovvedere, to leave destitute. See provvedere. [Iere. S
Slare, to stand; var. p. 208. S
Stendere, to extend. See tendere. S
Stignere or } . S ' (
St
' to staID. ee tumere. S
mgere, <;>
or stOrre, to from. See toglierl'.
StOTeere, to twist. See tOTeere. S
StOrre, to divert from. See .t6gliere. S
tStraperdcre, to Jose a great deal. See perdere. s
Stravedere, to see much. See tr/JI'edere. (
Stravolgere or S 61
Siravolverc, S to wrelt. ee trllf! gere. I

Slrignere or ( to bind fast. See ''Pegnere or g;utlgere.

Slringer-e, 5 Part. Itretto, bound fast.
StrUggere, to dissolve. See !eggere. .
(Stupere), to be astonished; a defective verb; var. p.
fSuccedere, to succeed. See eellere. [302.
Sucngnere or (. S'
Sllcnngere, S to gIrd up. ee cmgere.
tSUggere, to suck. See tb.cn,. p. 144. Also, perC.
J(sUssi), I sucked; part. 8UcchUlto, sucked.
Svellere or Irerre, to root uy; var. p. 2M.
Svenlre, to faint. See ventre.
Sverre, to root up. See svetlere.
Scolgere or } d S '1
Seolvere, t6 lin 01. ee vo gere.
or lto suppose. See p6nere.
uppv.. e,
Suueglllre, to olio\\'. See
SlUNlue, to subsist. See credere, p. 141. Part. 8Uln-
[ltltO, subsisted.
Tflcere, to be or to keep silent; var. p '233.
(Tangere), to toueh; a defective verb; var. p. 309.
t Tempe,tfue, to hail; a unipersonal verb See piovere.
tTendere, to tend. See credere, p. 141. Also, perf.
[jeri, I tended; part. telO, tended.
Tenere, to hold. var. p. 235.
l Trtuf6ndere, to transfuse. See tramJ6ndere.
S Trametlere, to transmit. See trammel/ere.
I Tra'}Jarire, to be transparent. See trlln'}Jarire.
. or } to transpose. See
Trat/enere, to entertain. See tenere.
Travedere, to see double See vedere.
Travolgere or! . 0
Tracolvere, to Invert. See" Igere.
tThonare, to t under; a nnipersonal verb. See pio-
Uccidere, to kill. See drdere. [rere.
Udire, to bear; var. p. 292.
U'gnere or ( . 5' .,
U'tlgere, Sto anomt. ee '}Jegnere or sraungere.
(Jlrgere, to nrge; a defective verb; VIII'. p. 309.
U8Cire, to -go out; var. p. 294.
Valere, to be worth; var. p.23'1.
Vedere, to see; var. p. 240.
Venire, to come; var. p.295.
(Vigere), to be vigorous; a defective verb; var. p. 309.
Vlncere, to conquer; var. p. 249.
Vlt'ere, to live. See Imvcre. Part. tJiuUto or rivUto,
Volere, to will; var. p. 242. . [lived.
Volgere or } A'15.
Villeere, to turD; var. p. '"'
;3

1=
CA
ca
CIII
SS4
ANALOGY.
CHAPTER VI.
Of Participle,.
ITALIAN participles, like the adjectives, have three ter-
minations; viz. e (in the present), and 0, a (in the past).
Participles ending in 0 are inasculine, and in the plu-
ral change 0 into i; as,
amato, lid' u6mo amato, loved man;
amati, S ove , uomini amciti, loved men.
Participles ending in a are feminine, and are formed
(rom the masculine, by changing 0 into a; as, _
temilto, 2fi d' u67110 temilto, feared man;
temuta, 5 eare , donna temuta, feared woman:
and in the plural change a into e; as,
temuta, l fi d' d6nna temUla, feared woman;
temilte, 5 care , donne ttT/lute, feared women.
Participles ending in e are of the common gender, and
form their plural, by changing 6 t ~ i; as,
d 't I . ~ uumo dormente, sleeping man;
ormen e, s. cepIDg ; donna dormente, sleeping woman:
do {t' I' uomini dormenti" sleeping men;
rm n I, 8 eeplog; donne dor71lenti, sleeping women.
When participles are used as adjectives, they form
their comparatives and superlatives according to the
general rute.,
There are many participles in cUo, ata,' which are
commonly contracted, in these terminations, by suppress.
ing the at; these are:
accetto,-tt, (for) acceft-at-o,-at.a, accepted;
fl&c6ncio, acconciato, fitted up i
PARTICIPLE. SS5
(ldatto, (for) d.dattato, adapted;
ad6rno, adornato, adorned;
asciutto, asciuttato, dried;
avvezzo, avvezzato, accustomed ;
cMmo, calmato, ' calmed;
carico, caricato, loaded;
casso, cassato, void;
cereo, cercato, sought;
cMmo, colmato, heaped;
c6mpro,
cOmP"alo,
bought;
c6ncio, conciato, fitted;
confesso, confessato, confessed;
contento, contentato, contJlnted;
conto, contato, counted;
crespo, crespato, wrinkled;
<
desto, destato, awakened;
dimentico, dimenticato, forgotten;
dimestico, dimesticato, tam,ed;
disaootto, disadattato, unfit.;
d6mo, damato, tamed;
fermo, fermato, stopped-;
fisso, fissato, fixed;
g6't;,0'
gonjiato, swoIlen; ,
gu sto, guastato, spoiled;
infermo, infermato, sickened';
infetto, infettftto, infected;
ing6mbero
ingomberato,
incumbllred ;
ing6nJbro ingombrftto,
lacero, lacerato, torn ;
lasso, lassato, wearied;
libero, liberato, delivered;
l6goro,
logorcito,
worn out;
16gro, lograto,
macero, macerato, macerated;
manifesto, manifestato, manifested;
m6stro, mostrato, shown;
mozzo,_ mozz;ato, < cut off;
netto, nettato, cleaned;
n6to, notato,
Doted;
p6o,
pagato,
paid;
(for)
"6
pisto,
prif10,
ritul6mo,
ric6mp"o,
rirn6stro,
ripesto,
rit6cco,
rifJ6lto,
rizzo,
.6.IfJO,
.aRD,
,azio,
.cdlzo,
.campo,
"drico,
scemo,
.c6ncie,
.contento,
secco,
.g6mbero,
l{f6mbro,
.p6rco,
.tanco,
.tracarico,
,traccio,
.tracco,
'fJeglio,
t6cco,
trito,
tr6nco,
u.o,
"Uto,
116Ito,
fJu6to,
ANALOGY.
pestato,
prifJato,
riadorncito,
ricomprdto,
rimostrato,
ripestato,
ritoccato,
rifJoltdto,
nuato,
.alvato,
.anato,
sazidto,
sealzato,
.campato,
.cancato,
scemato,
sf;onciato,
scontentcUo,
seccdto,
'gomberato, '2
'gombrato, 5
'porcdto,
,tancato,
stracaric.ato,
,tracciato,
.tracccUo,
.veglidto,
toccato,
tritato,
troncdto,
lisato,
vietato,
voltato,
f1uotdto,
pounded;
deprived;
readorned;
rebought j
remonlltrated ;
repounded;
retouched;
revolted;
erected;
saved;
cured;
sat isfied. ;
unshod;
escaped;
unloaded;
diminished;
spoiled;
discontented :
dried;
e ~ r e d ;
soiled;
tired;
overloadecl ;
torn off;
fatigued;
awakened;
touched;
crumbled;
cut off;
used;
forbidden;
turned;
emptied.
ADVERB.
CHAPTER VB.
Of Adverb,.
ssT
THE greater part of Italian adverbs are formed of
a feminine adjective, and the noun mente, manner (from
the Latin mens); as,
, ) in a learned manner,
d6tta, learned; dotta-mente, 2learnedly;
,.. i' t 5in a wise manner,
saV&Q, wise; sav a-men e, (wisely;
, 5in a sweet manner,
d61ce, sweet; dolce-mente, (sweetly. .
If tbe adjectivll ends in Ie or re, for the sake of euphony, the
linal e is dropped, in the formation of the adverb; as,
fedele, faithful; fedel-me71te, faithfully;
tnaggidre, greater; maggior.mellte, more greatly.

These adverbs have their comparatives 8fld superla-

tives, formed from the comparatives and superlatives of
the adjectives; as, '
pill sincera, more sincere; piu sinceramente, sin-
[ccrely I
feltce, less happy; meno felicemente, less happi-
[ly;
very prudent; prudentissimamente, very
[prudently. '
Some adverbs are mere adjectives, and are used alsO
in their comparatives and superlatives; as,
chiaro [chiaramente], clearly; piu chiaro, more clearly;
schietta [schiettamente], candidly; schieUa, less
. [candidly;
[. '] dl ttristssimo, } dl
. frute tnstamente, sa y; t' t" very sa y.
ns lssama,
29
8S8
ANALOGY.
The following are the other adverbs most in use in Ital-
ian, arranged according to their signification; viz.
-Of Time.
the mean
[time ;.

mo, now,
_6ra,
all6ra, then;
anc6ra, still, .
tutt6ra, 5 '
tal6ra, sometimes;
ogn6ra, always'
5 '
$ovente, often;
testeso, "2 just now'
tesa, 5 '
ieri, yesterday;
a"antieri, the day before
[yesterday ;

l'cUtro,
it
',' the other day;
a nerl, .
iermattina,yesterday morn-
[ing;
iersera, last evening;
6ggi, to-day;
oggidt,' in our days;
stamane, this morning;
stasera, this evening;
stan6tte, to-night;
domattina, to-morrow morn-
[ing;
dimani,
d
-' to-morrow,
omane,
posdimani, "2 the day after
posdomcine, 5to-morrow,
innanzi, 5
before;
pnma,
dietro } 11
;u 'aterward ;
uupo,
p6i, h
d
' 6" ten,
Ip I, '
d 6' sJDce,
app, I, afterward '
p6sela, '
indi, h
, .,,:J' ten, -
ut,.en
9. , , afterward'
appresso, '
infine, in fine;
da capo, once more;
'd .
gzd' "d already;
Igi ,
guciri, not long since;
mai,
. " never;
glammaz, .
omcii,
now;
ogglmaz, .
quasi, almost;
drea,
indrea, about;
int6rno,
tardi, late;
pertempo, soon;
quick;
adlt.gio, slow;
mentre, whilst;
intant",
in
trattanto,
since;
fincke, until;
quando, when;
tuttavia, still.
..
ADVERB. 889
-Of Place.
1here, hither r dande, whence;
fU , 5 ozmnque, ! wherever.
! thete, ; dovunque, 5 '
au. 5 6gni d6ve, every'where;
costt 2 L altrove, 2 I h
costd, 5 tucre near you; altr6nde, 5e sew ere ;
colt, h - thth avanti t l' t ere, I er, J "t', before;
COla, aav...n I,
stl, up j - dietro, b h' d
"' d d'd"t e In ;
gau, own; I Ie ro,
gn, indietro, b Ii.
lvi, therB ; addietro, ac,
fflivi, . s6pra, upon, above;
Indt, ; s6tto, under, below;
gui7lci, from beaee ; abbcisso,
q.f"m, from thence; entro, I'b'
quasstl, bere above j - dentro, Wit 1D;
quaggitl, here below; fu6ri, ' h
i7lsU, upward; JOOra. Wit out;
ingitl, downward; difu6ri, ! Ii ' b
lassu, there abave ; difu6ra, S rom Wit out;
laggiuJl there below; allato, .d .
colassu, there above; accanto, Sasl e;
there below; 'att6rno,"2 around'
CDltaggiu, there below near datt6rno, S
[you; rimpetto, l 't
cosdnci, from thence; dirimpUto; SPPOSI e ;
o"e, 1 h lungi, far;
d6ve, Swere; 6ltre, beyon.d.
Of Order.
prima, first;
dip6i, then;
quf.ndi, afterward;
inftne, finally;
alia fila, is a row;
in po, by turns;
h
toget er;
InSIc:me,
a vicenda, by turns j
al tUtto, altogether;
al rov6scio, the revene ;
loss6pra, topsyturvy.
ANALOGY.
Of Quantity.
piu, more;
,neno, "2 less
mdnco, ,
assai, much;
abbastanza,
enough;
a sufficienza,
nUnte, 1.' .
affatto, S nothlDg;
davantdggio, more. -
alpill, at the most;
almeno, f tit
l' a eas.
a,manco,
bene, well;
male, badly;
appena, hardly;
app6sta, purposely;
a gara, emulously;
a caso, by chance;
a t6rto, wrongly;
teRt6ne, gropingly;
Of
bocc6ne, with one's faee
[downward;
branco16ne, crawlingly;
inginocchi6ne, on one's
[knees;
carp6ne, upon all fours;
a cavalci6ne, astride over.
Of I1jJirmation.
Il, yes;
gid, yes, certainly;
bene, well j
maid, yes indeed;
Ii bble, yes truly;
invero, }. d d
da
' In ee ,
vvero, t I
, ru y,
da dovero, . t th'
in veritd, In ru ,
aft, in faith;
appUnto, just ;
volentieri, willingly;
very willing-
(Iy;
malvolentieri, unwillingly.
Of Negatiox.
no, no, not;
mai, never;
maino, no indfled;
certo no, certainly not;
n071i'id, not, not at all ;
nonmai, never;
mica, not;
nonmica, not at all ;
per n(j,lla, by no means;
niente affatto, nothing at
[all.
ADVERB.
Of DoulJt.
f6rse, 1
5perhaps;
pulJ essere, f b
may e;
puu warn,
per . .
peT s6rte, , perchance:
per avventura,
so, thus;
c6me, aSj
siccome, so, as ;
pill, more;
meno, less ;
assai, much;
Of Comparison.
viappitl, 2. a deal
vieppitl, 5 [more;
via71lmeno, 2. a great deal
vie71lmeno, 5 [less;
a guba,
a modo, like.
al pari,
Of Interrogation.
6ve where?
dove'! where, whither? .
d6nde '! whence?
quando'! when?
eM'! how?
come'! how?
perche '! why?
quanto '! how much?
anzi, 2. rather,
prima, 5sooner;
Of Choice.
piupresto,2. rather,
piutt6sto, 5sooner.
Of Demoustration.
ecco, here or there is, )0,
[behold;
eccoqul, h . 'h .
, ere IS, ere are;
eccoqua,
29'
eeeoU,
eceogU, there is, there
cecold, [are.
ANALOGY.
A list of the adjectives, which are used ia ltalialt, ....
HftrblJ,
f6rte, very mucb ;
,pesso, often;
s6do, fast, hard;
alto, softly;
certo, certainly;
rriste, sadly;
d6lce, sweetly;
chiaro, clearly;
schietto, candidly;
piano, low, softly;
tardo, late;
tento, slowly;
presto, soon;
pr6T11o, readily;
t6sto, d'l
ralto, Sspee 1 y ;
tanto, so much;
raro, rarely
s610, only;
'tulto, all;
p6co, little;
molto, much;
tr6ppo, too much;
bello, handsomely;
bu6no, very weU ;
meglio, better;
peggio, worse j
.aperto, oprmly;
subito, immediately;
sicUro, surely;
dimesso, lowly;
sommesso, humbly;
'Vicino, near;
Ionta1lO, fa r.
In order to know when these words are adjectives,
and when adverbs, it is sufficient to observe whether in
the discourse they Btand by themselves, or are added to
or used for a noun; for, in the former case, they are al-
ways adverbs, and in the-latter, adjectives.
Besides the above adverbs there are some expression&,
which in several words announce the same idea, that
might be expressed by an adverb. These are called ad-
verbial phrases, and are, chiefly, the following:
di subito, suddenly; ad un trc!tto, at once;
di b6lto, Jresently; di rado, ( .
in un baleno, in an instant; di raro, 5seldom, rarely,
in un batter d' 6cchio, in the infatti, (, Ii .
[twinkling of an eye; difatti, S10 act,
r-.
PREPOSITION.
34&.
p6cofa, a little while ago; di gran lunga, by far;.
fta p6co, in a short time; a lungo anOOre, in the 10Dg'
un pezza fa, some time ago; [run, in time;
a piu potere, with all one's
dWe v6lte, at times i [might;
all' improvviso, unexpected- di mala v6glia, unwillingly i
Ely i a un di presso, almost;
all' avvenire, in future; d allora in qua, since that
a miinuto, in. detail; [time;
di fresco, newly; d' ora innanzi, henceforth;
di bu6n grado, willingly; in que1me-ntre, in or at that
mio malgrado, agains! my [time;
[will; di punta in punta, exactly;
senza meno, positively; di punta in bianco, point-
quanta pnma, very soon; [blank;
a bello studio, (d' dl' di quando in quando, now
a bella posta, 5 eSlgne Y, di traito in trauo, and
a meno che, unless i . di tanto in tanto, ;
da per tuUo, (every if pi,,), per 10 piu, on the
per 6gni d6ve, Swhere ; [whole, at the utmost.
CHAPTER VIII:
Of Prepositions.
Prepositions of Place.
(about.
Incirea, 5 '
contra, .
contra, .
. , t agalDst ;
tncon ro,
inc6ntra,
. pre-sso,
Ileaf ;'
appresso, .
a, to;
da, from;
di, of, from;
in, in;
su, upon;
per, through or by ;
lungo, along; .
appo, at or with;
verso, towards;
Mtre, beyond;
ANALOGY.
S44r
'unci, - fi
'--t ' !ar rom;
um ano,
56""a ,
d
r6' upon or above;
IS pra"
,6tto, ( d
dis6tto, 5 un er;
entro, ( in or within;
dentro, S
fu6ri,
fu6ra, out of, without j
difu6ri,
difu6ra,
avanti,
before'
,nnanzl, '
dinanzi,
dUtro, b h' d
d
'd"t e In ;
I Ie ro,
rimpetto, .
d
'tt opposIte;
Inmpe 0,
att6rno, '(
datt6rno, 5around ;
accanto, 2 'd
allata, 5 asl e;
add6sso, upon j
appWo, f . t
a fr6nte, agaInS;
a iUe "
pp. ' at the Coot of'
a '
di lel, thence;
di qua, hence.
Of Order.
,
di, of;
da, trom;
Infra, in or in about;
verso, towards;
circa,
incrca, about;
int6rno,
avanti, before j
diUro, after j
con, with;
fra, } amongst.
tra, '
Of Time.
sino,
fino, . .
insino, till, untl1 ;
infmo,
prima, first;
anzi, before;
d6po, afterward;
durante, during.
prima, first;
,dopo, afterwards.
Of Union.
I
infra,
L t amongst;
ra,
in mezzo, amidst. ,
i
i
j
PREPOSITION.
Of Separation.
fu6ri, ~ f. h salvo, ~
r.fi 6' out 0 ,wit out; ,
In u ", e ~ e t t o except
. lungi, far from; tranne, .
senza, w.thout;
contl'a, against;
oltre, besides;
lungi, far from;
per, for;
verso, toward;
a, to;
00, from or by ;
per, for;
di, of;
a, to;
da, from or by ;
in, in;
Of Opposition.
nonostante, notwithstanding;
1Ilalgrado, in spite of.
Of Ena.
riguardante, regarding;
concernente, concerning.
Of Cause.
a callsa; on account of;
aUeso, wi ereas ;
mediante, through.
Of Specificati.on. -
giusta, }
secondo,. according to.
conJanne,
Some of these prp,positions are the same as the ad-
verbs; as, sopra, sotto, prima, d6po, dentro, difuori, etc.
which, when they are followed by a noun, a pronoun, or
a verb .which they govern, are always prepositions, but
otherwIse are adverbs.
346
..
CHAPTER IX.
Of CoJ!junctiom.
Copulative Conjunctions.
e, and
and, either.
cinco, } al
cinclae, so, even ;
mu:6ra, .
eziandio, also, even.
altred,
Negative.
110, n.o, Dot;
raon gia, not, not at all ;
cinzi, on the contrary,
nor;
ruppure, l
nemmeno,
tamp6co neither.

Ay;Mentfltive or Adjunctive.
eli piu, motemer;
in 6ltre, .}
inn6ltre, besides;
tI'altr6nde,
0,
ossia, or;
oppare,
b .d th"
oltraccio eSI es IS ;
,
Q714;6ra, } again,
altrest, also.
Disjunctive.
ovvero, }
or
ovveramente, '
nor, neither.
.
Adversative.

sebbene,
although;

as,
Swhereas ;
'2 th t
5 even a;
,
CONJUNCTION.
pure,
JIOJUlimeno,
.ulladimeno,
tuttarJfa,
, tuttav61ta,
tuttafiata,
contutto ei3,
cia non ostante,
cia non eli meno,
cia non per tanto,
n0!l per questo,
. Elective.
still, yet,
however,
nevertheless,
notwithstanding,
for all that.
prima, } .
anzi, fi
. ,. rst,
Innanzt, h
l' rat er,
mGg 10,
sooner;
pIli. presto,
piueehe, rather,
anziell.e, Ssooner;
anzi ehe no, rather than
[not;
pi'll volentieri, more wil-
{lingly.
s6.lvo,
eccetlo,
. tratto,
tranne,
fu6ri,
ipfu6ri,
J'u6,r di,
fuoreM,
inp6i,
save,
'saving,
except j
Exceptive.
. if not,
se non, h"
se non eh ot erwlSe,
e, but;
ma" ! but.
pero, 5
Conclusive.
perCM, because j
1.> because, since,
pOlcm;, as, after;
polciJJch , since,tafter;]
pera, but;
'2 b
5 ecaulIe;
348
ANALOGY.
5therefore, for sicche, } so, thus,
perelo, (which reason; cost ehe, wherefore; .
pereioeeM, because, talehe, }
imperciocche, whereas, tanto the, so, so that;
as, intantoch ,
avvegnacltC, since j di maniera ehe,
dunque, l tl' di m6do ehe, - so that;
--'-< len, . < h
auunqlle, In gu.sa c e,
6nde, twherefore, in s6mma, h t
J-6 d h . fl 10 S or,
&a II e, w ereupon j m ne, " l'
il perchi, th fi per 10 cone uSlon ;
, ere ore, d I' h'
per 10 cite, fi h" h e resto, ot erwlse;
, or w IC 6
per reason' raJ now. .
per la qual e6sa,' _
c6me, as, likc ;
cost, so, thus;
doe, that is ;
Explicative.
'eioe a dire, th t' t
vale a dire, a IS 0
, t d' say.
quan 0 a trel
Causal.
e6me,
eh
e
" } for bccause'
perehe, ' ,
whercfore;
to the end that
affme, . '
affinehe,
( as,
eomecl/e, 5because j
per 10 dIe, for the which;
per la qurU c6sa, for which
_ [thing;
per la qual causa, for which
[cause.
Conditionat
se, if;
Ie mai, if, if ever;
p6sto ehe, } supposing that,
d/Lto ehe, granting that;
ancorehe, even, although;
a menD ehe, unless;
purehe, provided;
ogni v6lta ehe, } any time
titUe Ie volee che, that;
con che, , } o.n condi-
con questo pera, tlOn;
quando, when; .
quand' anche, even when,
f6rse, perhaps. [whenever.
INTERJECTION.

84'
prima elae, befQre tbat ;
d6po ehe, after that;
tanto ehe, so that;
mentre ehe, whilst that;
t6sto ehe, }
, b"t la as 100Q as.
su .0 e e,
..
oAf} hI
alai" ! a.
. "}
ca.- " alas 1

01&! ah I
01& 01&! ah ah I
delal ah !
pUre! yet!
oh!
CHAPTER X.
Of Interjections.
InterjuiWns of Grief.
lasso!
me lasso! alas !
alai lasso!
p6IJero me! poor me I
misero me! wretched me I
OfJoy.
ola! ob ! [joy!
o ehe allegrez.zo.! oh what
Of Desire.
ola se! oh if! [you I
di grazia! pray I I delire
()j .a."ersion.
'b"
0: 0;, fye I fye upon I
elf 'II"a"
OfIlnger.
'fJ'UA! pooh!
rna via! away I
so
,
350
ANu.oGY.
ok! oh!
o i m ~ alas!
Of Fear.
sta! still I
ok])o! ob!
Of Indignation or Contempt.
puh! pooh!
via! away 1
oibo I rough!
ok! oh r
eM eh!
rlela! psbaw!
It! yes 1 .
co,tll "I'
gid ! 5 yes certalD y .
bene I well!
Of .Ilpprobation.
bu6no! good 1
bravo! bravo 1
.viva ! l
eh viva.' 5well done !
oAt ob!
O! 01
c6mel why I
Of .Ildmiration.
cti;Jperi ! ~ ay, 1
cappita ! heyday!
poffare ! marry!
. ok/ oh!
OfSurpriae
ah! ah 1
Sll! ~
orsu! come 1
via!
Of Encouragement.
animo I }- ,
coraggio ! courage "I
fate cu6re! cheer up. .
Of Warning.
bad6.te ! l have care! piano!' ~ ,
. state all' &ota 1S~ i n d 1 adagio l Sslowly.
. . fermati oldI hold hold !
INTERJECTION.
S51
Of Beleeching.
per am6r del Cieto! for the
love of Heaven I for Hea-
ven's sake!
dell! pray!
mu'ci! prithee!
RIJ7I pi'll! enough! [sake!
per carita! for charity's
Of Calling.
O
'h . Ll., }
. 0 "''''.. 'h h 'ho there I
ehi eeli ld! who is there! old.! 0 ey.
Of Silencing.
zi! st!
zitto! hush'
cheto! be still !
silinzio! silence!
tadte! peace there I
basta! enough I
p6vera me! poor me !.
mfsera me! wretched me!
,The interjections msso! p6vero! misero ! 'are mere ad-
jectives, and when used by a female take the feminine
termination; as,
lassa! .
me lana! alas !
ali lassa ! .
PART IV.
-
01' Tn
ITALlAN SYNT.AX.
CHAPTER I.
Of the Order of Word
CflJsar conquered j
I write j
the beautiful [beauty] p ~
es;
to study [study] is useful;
to die for one's country is a
pleasaot thing.
WOIlDS may be arranged, either ip the natural or-
der of the ideas which they are used to convey, or
in a somewhat different order, in which euphony or em-
phasis is consulted. Hence there are two dift'erent e08-
structions, the one called simple or diret:t, tbe otber PI-
verse or indirect.
In tbe simple construction, the subjective is put in
the first place and always before the verb. It is gener-
ally a noun or a pronoun, an adjective or a verb used as
a nouo, or a phrase; as,
Cesare tJlnse,
10 ScMtJO,
il bello [18 bellezza] piciu,
10 studiare [10 studio] eutile,
il mor1r per la patria ~ c6sa
d61ce,
The subjective is followed by the verb, and the verb
by the objective, which is generally a noun, a pronoun,
an adjective, a verb, or a phrase; as, .
Ce.sare mnse Pompeo, Cresar conquered Pompey;
10 amo te, I love tke, i
ORDER OF, WORDS.
eiascUfto ammfra it bello,
guei volkndo morire,
e significlJ il fatto come sta-
va,
everyone admires beaM'Y j
he wishing to die;
and declared the fact tJI it
was.
Peter and Pmd read;
theykilled both men and beall,.
the sun shines;
love [the] virtue.
near [to] home;
come to see.

,
....
If the subjective or the objective consists of more thao ooe
nouo, pronoun, &C. these are all of them put in their 'respective
places with the conjunction.s or other particles which accom-
pany them; as,
Pietro e Mggono, - ,
ued.tero uomini ed animali,
The adjectives belonging to the subjective or the ob-
jective are put immediately after them; as,
gli scoUiri morigerati di- the well-behaved and diligent
ligenti stUdiano, scholars study;
il maestro premia gli scolari the master rewards the *
attenti e studiosi, tentive and studious
Ilcholars
If the subjective or objective has an article, this arti-
cle is put always before j as,
it s61e luce,
ama la virtu,
The -adverb is placed immediately after the verb
which it qualifies; as"
Giovanni ama ardentemen- John 100ves glory fJ7'deRtly.
te la g16ria,
The preposition is always put before the word which
it governs; as,
vicino a casa,
venite a 1Jedere,
The conjunction is placed _between those paJ1J of a
sentence which it connects; as,
mangio e bevo, I eat and drink;
bianco 0 aero, white or
so-
854
SYNTAX.
he loved ardently;
it is nothing else but to
pass one's life in vain.
The interjection bas no fixed pl!lce, because it has
no intrinsic relation to other words; it is, however,gen-
era11y put at'the beginnipg of the phrase; as,
ahi! tradit6ri, v6i siete an.! traitors you are dead;
[morti,
cn.e dici tu ? alas! what d{) you say?
The relative is always put after antecedent; as,
l'u6mo, il quale adOra Iddio,. the man, who adores God.
With regard to the inverse construction no certain
rules can De established, it varying according to the
taste and ear of the speaker or writer.
It can only be said, that in this construction the sub-
jective may be placed likewise after the verb; all,
gid s' era ribellata l' armata the army of Misena had al-
Misena, ready revolted;
presemi a1l6ra la mi8 scorta then my guide took me by
per mana, the hand.
The objective may be put before the verb; as,
argento e oro non anno, they have neither silver nor
. [gold;
umana cosa eaver compas- it is a humane thing to take
sione digli aJllitti, pity on the afflicted.
The adjective may be put before the substantive which
it qualifies; as, >
col suo prezioso with his precious blood;
guantunque fosse tondo I! although he was a maD
grosso u6mo, burly and fat.
The adverb may be placed before the verb which
it qualifies; as,
focosamente amava,
non altro che sUa vita va-
namente mendre.
AGREEMENT OF WORDS. 555
These inversions are very common in Italian, ani add
great expression and beauty to thd phrase, but in using
them we must always consult euphony. A learner ought
never to avail himself of such liberties until, by a compe-
tent knowledge of the language, and a long perusal of the
classics, he be able to appreciate their value and to
make use of them with propriety.
In the phrases which are commonly called imperative,
the subjective, which, according to the simple construc-
tion, ought to be put before the verb, as in English, i.
always put after it in Italian; as,
quinci estimino i secoli chi let future times judge from
fu Ott6ne, this who Otto was; ,
riabbiasi VitelIio il fratel- let Vitellius take his broth-
10, er.
CHAPTER II.
Of Concordance or .I1greement of WfJrdl.
, ADJECTIVES agree with their Douns in gender and
number; as,
u6mo virtu6so,
"icende umane,
virtuous man;
human vicissitudes.
Paul and John are good j
Mary and Frances lU'8
flJise.
l
When two or more nouns singular of the same gender
come together the adjectives belonging to them are put
in the p l u ~ l as,
Paolo e Giovanni s6no huoni,
Maria' Francesca s6no sa-
vie,
116
II the nouns are of di1J'erent genders or different Dum-
bers, the adjectives are put in the plural, agreeing with a
masculine nOUD understood j as,
Paolo e Mana [questi indi- Paul and Mary [tkese indi-
o vidui] s6no amabili, "iduals] are amiabk;
kjigliu6k e i jigliu61i [que- the daughters and the sons
. sti soggetti] s6110 docili, [thue persons1are docilt ;
i1 flglio di Pietro e k sorel- the son of Peter and his
Ie di lUi s6no partlti, sisters have gone.
When, in a phrase in which there are several nouns,
tbe adjective is affirmed or denied alternatively, tbis ad-
jective always agree. with the nearest noun; as,
WI "z%O, una scintUla, ca- a brand, a spark might set
pace d' appicdr/u6co, fi:re ;
, Pietro 0 Maria emorta, Peter or Mary is dead ;
Francesea, ne Giovanni neither Frances nor JOM
ftmI parnto, has gone ;
ae"a la mano e it 0'80 he had his hand and his
mozzo, nose cut off;
i1 cappello e la beretta the red hat and cap.
[ro.sa,
the maternal affection and
. [pietp; .
the jilial respect and love;
he is of a wonderful agree-
ableness, and "ivacity.
la ri"erenza e l'amore fili-
ile,
ed' un.a piacevoUzza e
d' un brio maraviglioso,
And when there are in a phrase several names of in-
animate beings which are not separated from their ad-
jective by a verb, this adjective agrees likewise with the
nearest noun; as,
e la pieta materna,
Calandrino, Bruno, and Buf-
falmacco go in searc4. 01
the heliotrope.
AGREEMENT OF WORDS. 157
The verb agrees with the subjective, either expreued
or understood, both in Dumber and person; as,
10 ti cOBsolerl), I will tonsole tbee ;
[eglino] v&glwno III m6rte, [they] wish for death.
When the subjective consists of several nouns and the
action can be performed either successively or alter-
nately, the verb always agrees with the last noun j ai,
gli 6cchi v6stri ch' am6re, e your eyes which love, and
it cieJo onora, heaven honours;
qual fortuna 0 destino what fortune or destiny
qu'!fgiu ti mlma 'l brings you here below?
non ~ n n a non Silla signa- Deither Cinna nor Sylla rul-
reggia lun.gamente, ed long.
If there are different subjectives which eODcur simul-
taneously to perform the action of .the verb, the verb
agrees with a DOUD plural understood; as,
consiglio e rf4,rri6ne [queste advice and reaSOD [the.se
due case] cODdIlcono la two things] lead to victa-
vitt6ria, ry ;
se VirgUio ed Omero [que- if Virgil and Homer [these
sti due soggetti] avesser troo persons] had seen...,
vista...,
Calandrino, BrUno, e Buf-
falmacco vanno cercando
di trovar I' elitropia,
When the subjectives are of two or more different
persons; as, 0 e tu, I and thou j tu ed egli, thou and he ;
&c. the verb agrees with a personal pronoun in the plural
unoerstood. Hone of the subjectives is 0, I, the pronoun
understood with which the verb will agree, is n6i, we; if
one of the subjectives is tu, and fa is not one of the
others, the pronoun understood is v6i, you; and if the
subjectives are all of the third person, the pronoun un-
derstood is eglino or ellena, they. Thus,
tu doll' un Mto e Steechi thou on one side anil Stee-
dall' altro [voi] mi verre- chi on the other [you]
te sostenendo, will .support me ;
SYNTAX.
egli e ella [6ssiJ 'cen.arono
lin p6co :di carne.sabita,
w, egli; Siro,e 7,0 [noi) pi-
glieremo uno per
1&e and s1&e [tltey] Slipped on
a little salt beef;
thou, he, 8yM'S, and I [we]
will take one for
neither rain, nor the water
which they threw on it,
nor any other wet thing
extinguished them;
I will cause it [the gene-
rosityJ to be painted there
in such a manner, that
neither yOIl nor any other
one will be able to tell me
. any longer, that I have
not seen it;
great, small, rich, and poor,
110 one can .escape death.
U1 cRa faro dipirl!(ere [fa
cortes!a] di maniera, c1&e
mdi v6i altri mi po-
trA piu d!re ch' fa non
l' dbbia veduta,
grandi, Mccki, zn.ccoli, e p6-
ven, nessuno PUQ sottrar-
si alla morte,
Sometimes one of the subjectives is a word which com-
prehends thl;! others in its signification i as, altro, altn,
nessuno, &c. and then the verb agrees directly with this
;wo'rd'; 'as,
.ne pi6g{(ia cad6ta, ne ffcqua
gittdta, ne umidore
gli spegneva,
the greater part [of the indi-
viduals] were killed and
cut to pieces.
If the subjective is formed of two nouns dependent
on each other, the one being a part of the other,
the verb agrees with the whole and not with the part;
as,
la parte degli uo- the greater part of men are
miDI s6no ambizi6si, . ambitious;
ciascUno di n6i ,sa cite de' everyone of us knows that
luoi sono la maggi6r par- the greater part of our
te morti, friends ,are dead ..
sometimes the noun expressing the whole is understood;'
as,
la maggi6r parttta [di indi-
vidui] CUron morti e fa-
gliMi,
AGREEMENT OF WORDS. 859
When the subjective is a collective noun, which,
though composed of several individuals, still presents
to the mind the idea of singleness, the verb is always put
in the singular; as,
dimmi perche que! popolo e tell me why that people is
st emfio, . so impious;
comando che tlilla la sua fa- he commanded that aU his
miglia gli venbse davan- - family should appear
ti, fore him.
Participles, they stand as adjectives, agree with
nouns in gender and number.
When the participle is joined to the verb essere, to be,
it has always the force of an adjective qualifying the
subject of the proposition, and consequently it agree"
with the subjective in gender and number; as,
moltifurono quest' anna ac- many were accused this
cusati, year;
erano Ie ialte de' Vitellia- the faults of Vitellius' troops
ni punite, ma ben paga- were not punished, but
te, well paid.
When it is joined to the verb avere, and this verbis
used in the signification of possedere, to possess, tenere,
to hold, and not as an auxiliary, the participle has the
force of an adjective qualifying the object of the propo-
sition, and agrees with the object we in gender and num-
bel'; as,
d tagliata la mano, or,
a[possiede, tiene] Ia rna-
no tagliata,
otrovata una seatola, or, 0
[possiedo, una sea-
tola [da me] trovata,
he has [possesses, holds] Ai'
hand cut off;
t have [possess, hold] a lHn
. found [by me].
860
SYNTAX.
But if the verb (Were is used as an auxiliary, and not.
ia the meaning of posudi:re, tenere, tbe participle then is a
mere form of the verb; as, ci tagfjata, be b811 cut oft'; 0
trtTDato, I have found; for tagli;', he cut off; trtnJdi, I
found; and consequently it remains invariable; as,
la Icatola che Qtrovato, or, the box wbich Ifound;
la uatola ehe f.o trovai,
la marto ehe a. tagliato, or, the hand he cut off.
la mano ehe ei taglio,
When the participle is preceded by one of the COD-
junctive pronouns 10, la, Ii, gli, Ie, ne, it takes always
the terminations analogous to the object represented by
tbem; as,
.lIa medesima mele a dbt- she henelf h811 told tms, OJ'
te, or, mi a. d6tte queste these things, to me ;
i)Ose,
didva averla e1so uccisa, or., he said t/wt he had h1lul
esso uCclsa la don- "her, ortlu lady, himself.
na,
The relative quale, with the article, agrees witb its
antecedent; but witbout the article, and denoting an
absolute quality or likeness,' it agrees with what follows;
88,
gKel cuore, il.quaIe la lUta that "eart, which propitious
fortuna non avea potfdo fortune had not been able
aprire, to open;
mdesi di tal moneta pagatohe saw himself paid in
quali Erano state, Ie der- money for which tlu pro-
.rite vendvte, visions had been sold.
I have been all over Rome;
I have looked all over the
[house.
AGREEMENT OF WORDS. 861
Possessive pronouns- agree with the thing possessed
and not with the possessor; as,
cd ella abbracciando il ,'6-0 and she embracing her in-
bambino, fan! ;
Iegl'J ass/!state Ie sue bis6- [he] having settled his af-
gne prrrfi per R6ma, fairs departed for Rome.
When the noun bestia, beast, fool; is applied as an ep-
ithet to a man, the adjective or participle belonging to it
agrees with the word u6mo understood; as,
tjuMla Mstia [d' uomo] era that fool [of a man] was
pur disposto . , nevertheless disposed . ..
The pronoun v6i, you, used instead of tu, thou, in ad-
dressing a person, takes the adjective in the singular,
agreeing with sign61'e, Sir, or sign6ra, Madam, either ex-
pressed or understood, and has the verb in the plural; as,
v6i [signore or signora] you [Sir or Madam] arc
siete motto civlle, v,ery civil.
The adjective mezzo, half, when preceded by a femi-
nine noun qualified by a numeral adjective, remains in-
variable; as,
t6gli una lIbbra I! mezzo -eli take a pound and a half of
castrone, mutton.
The adjective tlito, all, preceded by the preposition
pl!T, through, and followed by a feminine noun is invari.
ble; as,
s6no stdto per tutto R6ma,
c6rco per tutto la casa,
!l
162
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER III.
Of the Use of the Article.
A NOUN may be used either in an indeterminate, or io
a determinate sense.
A noun may be used in a determinate sense in three
different manners:
First, when it is employed to designate a kind of ob-
jects j as) gli u6mini, [the] men: the noun u6mini being
taken in its largest signification, the article gli shows-
that all the individuals composing the human kind are
here spoken of.
Secondly, when the noun is employed to designate a
class of objects of any kind; as, gli tlumini virtu6si, [the]
virtuous men: here dIP, noun u6mini, expresses only a
certain number of men, its signification being limited by
the adjective virtu6si. '\
Thirdly, when it is employed to one object of
a kind 01' of a class; as, l' u6mo di cui 7Ji parlo, the man
of whom I speak to yon; the noun u6mo being taken
individually, and the article used to express the man
who is spoken of.
When a noun is used in a determinate sense the arti-
cle is always employed j but when used in an indeter-
minate sense, the article is never employed; as,
gli uomini di questa terra si the people of this land will
leveranno a "umore, rise in an uproar;
per crudeUa della d6nna by the cruelty of the be-
amatn, loved lady:
qual che tu od 6mbra, od
uomo certo,
risposemi: Non uomo,
giafM,
whoever you are, whether
a shadow, or a real man j
he answered me: I am not
a man, I was formerly a
man.
USE OF THE ARTICLE.
S6S
q ~ v i sospiri, pianfi, ed al-
tri guai risonavan... ,
sani, canti, vesttr, giuochi,
viviinde, quanto puo cu6r
pensar, puo chiMer bocca,
they have great beasts in
theil' woods;
they had from him [of]
good luncheons;
there are some very hand-
'some ODes, who love me.
The articfe is generally suppressed when the nouns
are sufficiently determined by the nature of the thing,
or by the circumstances of the case. Thus,
gli direbbe novelle, for gli he would tell _him [the]
direbbe le novelle, news;
cosi camilli, e uomini fur thus [the] horses and [the]
, vittime ... , men were victims .. ;
eon atti e lusinghe ~ : '. , with gestures and flatte-
ries .. ;
there sighs, tears, and
groans echoed ... ;
music, singing, dresses,
games, viands, all that
the heart can think of, and
all that the palate' can
desire.
When we wish to designate a portion or a number
of the objects iu a class, this may be done in four differ-'
ent ways:
First, by naming only the objects of, the class; as, 0
buon vino, or buoni vini, I have good wine, or good
wines.
-Secondly, by using the preposition di, of; as, 0 di buon
vino, or di hu6ni v ini, I have [of] good wine, 01' [of]
good wines.
Thirdly, by using the same preposition and the article;
as, 0 del huon vino, or dei hu6ni vini, I have [of], good
wine, or [of] good wines.
Fourthly, by using the indefinite pronoun uno, a, an, in
the singular; alcuni, sarno, in the plural; as, 0 un buon
vino, or alcuni buoni vini, I have a good wine or some
goodwines. Thus,
grandi bfstie dnno ne' 16ro
b6schi,
avevan da lui di buone ,he-
rende,
egli ci sono dei ben leggia-
4N ehe m' amana,
564
SYNTAX.
fatn prestlDllinte cAiant6re [having] caused some friends
alcUrti. amici, to be immediately called.
they died not like men, but
like beasts ;
he appeared to roar like a
lion, and to bleat like a
sheep, and to bray like
an ass.
In the comparison of equality, as we are obliged com-
monly to express the objects in an indeterminate seose,
neither the preposition, the article, nor the indefinite
pronoun is used; as,
U1I c6me u6naini, ma quasi
c6me bestie morti7arw,
parerJa du ruggisse cOme
k6ne, e btlitsse c6me pe-
cora, e ragghilisse c6me
c1.irto,
When several nouns come together before or after
th(;l verb, and one of them takes the article, this article
is repeated before every noun in the sentence; as,
la debolzza, il tim6re, la
malinconia, e l' ignoran-
za s6no Ie sorginti della
superstizi6ne,
Romani erono assuifiitti
al disdgio, ciliaf a t ~ c a ed
aUa rJifa militare,
weakness, fear, melanchQ..
Iy, and ignorance are the
sources of superstition;
the Romans were inured to
hardship, fatigue, and a
military life:
and
But this rule is not without exceptions, since many
instances are found in the classics in which the article
is not so rigorously repeated; as,
am6re e I' ira del re, the love and anger of the
king;
burst lengthwise
breadthwise;
praying him that he would
be pleased to come with
. this daughter of his, and
with his son . ~ ;
for all this it is not the case,
that sOInetirnes in tbe tbick.
crtpcUa per 10 lungo, e per
traverso,
pregdndalo ehe gl' piaeesse
di dover con questa sua
figliu6la, e col jigliu610
venire . . ,
non i egli pereio, ehe alcu-
M v6tta fraiolli b6schi,
USE OF THE ARTICLE.

e tra It rigide A'lpi, e
diserte spe16nehe non fde-
cia Ie sue furze sentre,
woods, and the rug-
ged Alps, and in lonely
caves, it does Dot make us
fe,el its power.
/
These are tbe principles which regulate the use of
the article in Italian; there are however some nouns
'which appear to require or to reject the article inde-
pendently of these rules.
the beautiful, the good;
the sublime, the excellent.
All adjectives used as Douns, require the article before
them; as, '
il Mllo, il bu6no,
il sublime, l' eeeellente,
All verbs used as nouns require the article; as,
c 'I suo parlare, e 'I bel vso both hel' conversation and
mi piaequj:r sz ... , her beautiful countenance
pleased me so ... ;
la d6nna veggendo ehe il the woman seeing that
pregare non le valeva, ri- prayers were useless, had
e6rse al minaeeicire. recourse to menaces.
, I have already thought of
the where;
I should be happy to know
tho when;
[how can we?] I have al-
seen the how;
do not trouble yourself a-
bout the how, I will tell
you the why;
I am certain of the affirma-
tive;
everyone answered in the
[negative.
Any other word, when used as a noun, requires the
article; as,
il d6ve lJ io gid pensato,
sarei contento di sapere il
quando,
[e6me Il e6me,
() io ben vedUto,
del e6me non Ii eciglia, il
ti diro,
son certa del st,
ciaseuno risp6se del no,
31-
s66
SYNTAX.
Master Charles;
Mistress Theresa ;
Master Dati;
Madam Spinola;
Master lawyer;
my lady Marchioness;
I have seen Master ... ;
I gave it to Mistress or
[!\Jadam
Tho words signore, Master; signOra, Mistress" or Mad-
am; when used before nouns dtlnoting persons, take the
article; as,
il signor Carlo,
la sign6ra Teresa,
il sign6r Da.ti,
la signora Spinola,
il signor avvocato,
la signora rnarchesa,
Gveduto il sign6r .. ,
I' 0 dato alta signora . ,
These words also take the article when they are' used
in the signification of master or mistrtlss of a thing; as,
il signore [il sign6re eli the master [the master of this
questa casa] euscito, house] is gone out;
la signora occ"prita, the mistress is engaged;
,,6i 'lui siete il signore, you are the master here.
But, when signore, sign6ra, are used as epithets in .
calling a person, they refuse the article; as,
signor Andrea. Master Andrew;
signora Nina, Mistress Nina;
sign6r giUdice, Master judge;
signora contessa, my lady Countess;
Sigoore, ascoltafe, Sir, listen.
They also refuSe the article when used with the par-
ticles ii, yes; no, no; in an affirmative or negative phrase;
Ii, signore, yes, sir; no, sign6ra, no, madam; &c.
Quale, when a relative pronoun, always takes' the
article; but when it is used as an adverb to express si-
militude, &c. always refuses it; as,
il qlllJle essendo venuto . , who having come . ;
e '1uale aquei, che , and like him, who .
USE OF THE ARTICLE.
S6r
take mine [my book] ;
thy garden:
1 am the first;
behold the second:
The possessive pronouns mio, my or mine, tuo, thy or
thine, suo, his, her or hers, its, &c. when followed by &
noun, either expressed or understood, always take the
article; but when the noun precedes them they refuse
it; as,
prendete il mio [libro],
il tuo giardino,
questa casa esua, this house is his;
quetlo eil libro v6s/ro, that is your book.
, When these pronouns are followed by a noun of
quality; or kindred, and this noun is in the singular num-
ber, they refuse the article; but if the 'Joun is in the
plural, they always take it ; as,
suasignoria, his lordship;
mio padre, ' my father;
tuo fratello, thy brother;
vostra Santitd; your Holiness:
Ie loro signorie or le signo- their lordships;
i miei alii, [Tie loro, my ancestors;
i tuui fratezti, ' thy brothers;
le maestd l6ro, their majesties.
Except when the pronouns are separated from the noun by all
adjeclive placed between tbem, mwhich case they ta"e tbe arti-
'cle; as, al mio affesionatissimo padre, to my very.atl"ectionate fath-
er; la sUiJ cara lorflla, bis or her dear sisler. The pronoun lOrD,
their, never refuses it; as, la loro madre, their mother; i lOro
figliuoli, lbeir children; &.c.
The ordinal numbers general1y take the article; but
they always refuse it when joined to a proper name.
as,
io sono il primo,
~ o il secondo,
Luigi decimo-quarto,
Leone d ~ i m o
Louis the Fourteenth j
Leo the Tenth.
Names of kingdomJl, provinces, mountains, and rivers,
- when they arc considered with regard to their extcnt
S68 SYNTAX.
take the article; but when they are considered as single
points or parts of the earth, they refuse it j as,
I" Itdlia ~ bella, Italy is beautiful;
la Sptigna ~ spopolata, Spain is depopulated;
a.varctito il Po,he has crossed the Po ;
osaMo il VesurJio, I have ascended Vesuvius:
stavi in Francia,
viene d' Inghilterra,
ecaduto in A'rno,
ovisto E'tna,
thou wast in France;
he comes from England;
he fell into the Arno ;
I have seen Etna.
EIcept il Lano, [the] Latium, which always takes the article; IUI!!./
rda, Ida; O'88a, Ossa, which always. refuse it.
Names of islands, cities, lakes, and seas are generally
used without the article; as,
.Mazta, Malta; Mgo di Garda, lake of Garda;
Corfu, Corfu j lago di Como, l ~ of Como ;
Napoli, Naples; mar Tirreno, Tuscan sea;
L6ndra, London; mar Jlfero, Black sea.
Some names of islands; 88, 'Sicilia, Sicily; Sardegna, Sardinia;
C6rrica, Corsica; E'lba, Elba; IlIghilterra, England; may b.
used with or without the article.
The names of those isl1;mds which are spoken of in the
plural; as, Ie Baleari, the Balearic islands; Ie Filippine,
the Philippine islands; &r.. always'take the article.
And the names of seas, when the word mare is omit-
ted, require the article before them; aifJ il Mediterraneo,
the Mediterranean; l' Adriatico, the Adriatic j l' Atlan-
tico, the Atlantic; il Pacifico, the Pacific.
Dio, God, and p r ~ p r names of persons, when used in
their full meaning, neVel' take an article; but when we
limit their signification to designate a.particular object,
they always take the article; as,
Dio, God; il Dlo dWa guerra, the god
[of the war j
USE OF THE ARTICLE.
369
Ap611o, Apollo;
E'rcole, Hercules;
I' Ap6110 del Belvedere, the
[Apollo of Belvedere;
I' E'rcole FarRese, the Far-
[nese Hercules.
Dio in the plural always takes the article i gli Dei, the Gods.
Proper names also take the article when they are used
to express persons familiarly or publicly known; as,
la N i n ~ t a [the] Ninetta;
la Caterina, [the] Catherine.
Or when they are preceded by a noun of quality,
rank, or dignity, expressed or understood; as,
il poUa Dante, the poet Dante;
il c6nte Ugolino, [the] cOllnt Ugolino;
l' arcivescovo Ruggieri, [the] archbishop Rug&ieri.
il [poeta] Tasso,
il [c6rate] BOTTomeo,
il [cardinale] Mazzarini,
Tasso;
[count] Borromeo;
[cardinal] Mazzarini.
...
But if proper Dllmes are preceded by one of the
nouns, Sere, Sir; Messere, Malter; maestro, master;
DOnna, Don; D6nna, Donna; Su6ra, Sister; Frate,
Friar or Brother; Santo, Saint; they refuse the article:
and the nouns Papa, Pope; re, king, before a proper
noun, are better used without it; as,
Ser Brunetto, Sir Bl'unetto;.
Don Francesco, Don Fraucis ;
maestro Giovanni, Master John;
Su6r Maria, Sister Mary;
Frat' Alberto, Brother Albert;
Sant' Jlnt6nio, Saint Antony;
re Carlo, King Charles;
Papa Innocnzio, Pope Innocent.
Finally, there are several ellpressions in Italian, in
in which the article is always suppressed; as,
mer fame, to be hungry; stare ira Cala, to be at
lIVer ctildo, to be hot; [!.tome;
170
SYNTAX.
parlar In/(lest, to speak
[English;
parrar Francese, to speak
[French;
dar malleveria, to give se-
[curity;
dare ordine, to give orders;
far testimonianza, to bear
[witness;
far naufragio, to be shit>-
[wrecked:
antltire a easa, to go home;
andare a c6rte, to go to
[court;
andd.re a n6zze, to go to
[a wedding;
stare in piazza . , to live
[in the square. " . ;
avb"e in mana, to have at
[hand;
mena,"e a spasso, to take
[one to walk;
e6rrer rischio, to run a
[risk;
render c6nto, to give ac-
[count;
mettere in Meea, to put ioto
[one's mouth;
tener tcivola, to give a din-
[ner;
prestar fede, to give credit.
CHAPTER IV.
Of the Position of .I1djectives.
Adjectives in Italian may, generally, be placed eithel"
before or after their nouns; as,
curi6sa avventura or }
. a curious adventure;
avventura euri6sa,
feltce suceesso, or happy success;
successo felice,
n6bile aspetto or }" a noble countenance:
aspetto n6bile,
there are however some adjectives which always follow
their nouns, and others which always go before them; as,
uomo crudele, a cruel man;
tempo freddo, cold weather:
bv6n pane,
bei .fi6ri,
good bread;
beautiful dowen.
a sickly youth;
a leamed man;
rainy weather;
wholesome air.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. STl
Aqjeeti"esthat follow their Nouns.
The adjectives of nations; as,
un principe Romano, a Roman prince;
ufla dama Inglese, an English lady;
I' idi6ma Spagnu6lo, the Spanish idiom;
la letteratura Italiana, the Italian literature.
Verbal adjectives; ,as,
"ina c6tto, burnt wine;
par6le finte, feigned words;
strada battuta, beaten road;
passi6ne p"edominfmte, ruling passion.
Adjectives of taste, smell, and hearing: as,
frutto d6lce, sweet fruit;
erbe odorifere, odoriferolls herbs;
v6ce sonora, sonorous voice;
pUle m6"bida, soft skin.
Adjectives expressing colours; as,
panno nero, black cloth;
fazzozetto bianco, a white handkerchief;
nastri gialli, yellow ribbons;
occhiali verdi, . green spectacles.
Adjectives denoting shape or form,. as,
trivola rot6nda, a round table;
specchio ov6[e, an oval looking-glass;
camera larga, a wide room;
,,6lta piana, a plane ceiling..
Various adjectives expressing physical or mental
qualities,. as,
una gi6vane malaticcia,
un u6mo d6tto,
tempo piov6so,
aria salubre,
a hunchback j
a lame horse;
a blind bird;
a squinting woman.
five pounds;
twenty years;
the first monarch;
the second person.
SYNTAX.
Adjectives that may be used 8S nouns; like g6bbo, an
g6bbo, a hunchback; z6ppo, [uno %6ppo, a cripple];
neUJ, [1171 deco, a blind man]; guercio, [un guercio, a
squinting man] ; as,_
vn 1l6mo g6bbo,
ctJ'l/allo z6ppo,
IlceeUo eieeo,
vna dunna guercia,
And, generally, the following adjectives:
lUngo, long;
_corto, short;
y..gro, lazy;
neutro, neuter;
intiero, entire;
l6.nguido, languid;
importfl.n.o, importunate i
fJ;zi6so, vicious;
fJirtu6so, virtuous;
paur6so, fearful;
,ingolare, singular;
partieolare, particular;
gmerale, general i
coosiderabik, considerable:
but thjs rule is liable to exceptions.
AcijeetifJes that go hefore their No"n,.
The numeral adjectives, both cardinal and ordinal;
u,
ciftque libre,
venti anni,
it primo monarea,
la s e n d ~ pers6na,
Eltcept when tha ordinal numeral adjectives are joined to a
J'I'Oper name, or are used in Ipeaking of the dh'isionl of a work;
III which case they are put after the nouns i u, Corio fU1"'.,
bello c6me un a youth as handsome a. 811
angel.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 31'S
Cbarles tbe Fiftb; Bani/aeia l t a ~ o Boniface tbe Eigbtb: libro
primo, book first; capilllio Urso, chapter third"; pagina n6ncl,
ninth page; linea decima, tenth line: canto !ecOndo, second canto,
lIan.ra decimatersa, thirteenth stanza; lerrina quar/a, fOUl1b terzi-
na; ver,o undecimo, eleventh verse. When, in spfJaking of books
the article is used, we may also say, il primo libro, the first book,
la IIan.ra oi/aDa, the eleventh stanza; &c.
And, generally, the following adjectives:
bu6no, good;
cattivo, bad ;
grande, great;
picciolo, small ;
MUo, handsome, fine;
hrritto, ugly, bad;
ncco, rich ;
p6vero, poor:,
but this rule is likewise liable to exceptions.
When two or more adjectives belong to the same
noun, they are generally put after the noun; all,
una d6nna bu6na e religi6- a good and religi'ous 11"0-
sa, man;
un u6mo ricco, MUo, e ,tLvio, a rich, beautiful, and wise
man.
Adjectives are always put after nouns, when the
same adjective relates also to another noun following;
as,
un gi6vane
angiolo,
32
ST4
f3YNTAX.
CHAPTERV.
Of the Use and the Position of Pronouns.
I speak to thee;
he said to him;
PERSONAL pronouus are generally put before tbe
verb, but may also be placed after it; as,
aoeva I' anello assai he held the ring very
. caro, dear;
vi rUbano, they rob you:
na flOgl' io passar s6tto si- nor I wish to pus over in
Unzio, silence;
dimmi il perche, diS!' 10, tell me the reason, said I.
In the phrases commonly called interrogative, and in
the i'"peratiwe, they are always put after the verb; as,
la figliu6la con6$1i [tu] di dostthou know the daugh-
Cidippe ter of Cidippe ?
IJbbidte [v6i] compassi6ne take [ye] pity on the afilict-
degli alftitti, ed ;
voglid'e v6i .. , may you be pleased to
bless. .
These pronouns, in Italian, may be either expressed or under-
stood, the verbs showing by their different terminations the person
and number of the subject of the proposition; they ought however
to be expressed before the first and third persons ringullJl" of the
imperfect of the indicatille, and the firs and .eetnul persons ringu-
lar oC the imperfect of the eOfl}unclive, to avoid a confusion of
persons, the terminations of the verh in those instances being the
same.
Conjunctive are, most commonly, put be-
fore the verb, but may also be placed after it. When
before the verb,they are -placed immediately after the
personal pronouD, and when after, they are always
joined to the verb; as,
fo ti favUIo, or favelloti,
ei gli diceva, or diceJ1agli,
here I am;
here she is;
bere we are.
,.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. -575
diedegli or gli diede la lua he gave him his blessing.
benedizione, "
When the verb is in the infinitive, in the gerund,
in the participle, and in the imperative mood, the con-
junctive pronouns are always put after the verb; as,
ricominci3 afargli i maggi6r she began again to do him
piaceri, the greatest kindnesses;
trovandosi egli una volta a he finding himself once in"
Parzgi, Paris;
salutatolo, il domando se after he had saluted him,he
egli si sentisse niente, asked him whether any
thing ailed him ; [me.
ltisciami, non mi toccare, let me alone, do not touch
But if the negative particle precedes the verb in the
infinitive or in the imperative, the conjunctive pronouns
must be put before the. verb; as,
non mi parlan, do not speak to me ;
Ron ti ric6rda dost thou not remember?
If the verb is in the gerund, the pronoun ma, be put either be-
fore or after; as, non gli or non i,erivendogli, not writing
to him; but if in the participle, always after.
The conjunctive pronoun loro, to them, them, is al.
ways put after the verb; as, _
e mand3 lorD dicendo , and sent to them saying .. ;
non die laro eke, . . , he did" not give them but ... ;
rJeduti 16ro in st p6vera con- having seen them in so rpis-
dizi6ne . . , erable -a condition . . .
When" lOra is in the objective, the pronouns gli or Ii for the mll-
culine gender, and Ie for the feminine, generally take its place.
If the conjunctive pronouns occur with the adverb
ecco, they are always put after the adverb, and form
with it a single word j as,

eccola,
t.ccoci,
316
SYNTAX.
they wish to make me beHeve ;
they tell him or he.r ;
they attribute it to us.

When the conjunctive pronouns are followed by the

indefinite pronoun si, this is always put after, and some-
times joined to them; as,
",i Ii fm61 dare a crMere,
gli or Ie si dice,
attrihufscecjsi,
Conjunctive pronouns are used instead of person-
al pronouns, when the phrase contains but one personal
pronoun in the objective or in the relation of attribu-
tion; but if the phrase consists of two or more propo-
.itions in each of which is found a personal pronoun
in the objective or in the relation of attribution; the
conjunctive pronouns are not used; alid the personal
pronouns retain their place; as,
'0 ti ringrcizio della lUa of- I thank you for your otTer ;
ferta,
e1ae vi prire di questa vUla '! what do you think or this
villa?
lJu61k belUzze, cAe
e vmser te, anno
di p6i preso e vinto rae,
,..bo a me unafigliu61a, e,"
fJ6i la sorella,
the same beauties which
captivated and conquer-
ed you, did afterwards
captiJVate and conquer
me;
he took away a daughter
from me, an"d from you a
sister.
it pleases me to speak of it i
seeing no onc of them;
The relative particles ne, of him, her, or it; of them;
ei, vi, here, hither, there, thither, &c. follow the same
rules as the conjunctive pronouns. They may be put
either before or after the verb, except when the verb is
in the infinitive, in the gerund, in the participle, and in
the imperative, in which cases they are always put after
it; 8S,
eg/i mi piaee di.parlar71e,
niuno veggendone,
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 377
Ina pUre wcltone, s' ineo-
minciiJ a maravigliare,
gett6nne i fondamenti il re
TarquInio,
Dotwithstanding having
come out of it, he began
to wonuer;
King Tarquin laid the foun-
datioDs of it :
10 5071 del tutto disp6sto ad
andarvi,
ma pur niente perdendoei,
it eu6eo p6stovi t/'tta l' arte,
fateei dipfngere fa eortesia,
I am entirely disposed to
go there;
still losing nothing here;
the cook having employed
there OT in it all his art;
cause generosity to be paint-
ed there.
he makes me enter there;
,I see you here always:
If the relative particles ei, vi, occur with one of the
conjunctive prononns mi, ti, ei, vi, usage sttictly requires
that the particles should be placed after the pronouns;
but they are put sometimes before them, particularly
if euphony demands it; as,
egli mi ei fa entrare,
10 ti ei vedo sempre,
10 vi ti porro una tavolue-
cia, '
diriJ ,he vi ei abbia fatta
venire per denari,
I shall place for you t r ~
a small table; ,
I will say that he has caus-
,ed you to come here for
money.
she put him in her room, and
there she locked him in. '
When the parfcles ei, vi, occur with the pronouns, 10.
la, ti, gli, Ie, they are generally put before the pronouns
and form with them a single word; but they may be
placed also after them, separately; as,
ingegnati di ritenereeIo, contrive to keep him
there;
thanking God that he had
conducted him there:
ringrazicindo Iddio ehe con-
d6tto '!lel' aveva,
nella slia eam.ra il mise, e
de7ltro il vi ,erro,
32
\
SYNTAX.
POllui"e pronouns may be placed either before or
.fter the objects possessed; as,
una mia "icina, one of my neighbours;
mia mtidre mlsera, my unhappy mother;
mU dine il padre miD my father told me that I
cla' tu 1Ili guardo,ssi .. , should take care ... ;
I' Qnltco miD e non della "en- a friend, not of my fortune,
turn, but of myself.
he sent him to kill his
father [the father of him
who sent];
my mother loves equally
her sister and her chil-
dren [the children of her
lister].
mia madre ama epalminte
,ua sorella , i figli di lei,
To avoid the ambiguity, which in many instance.
would arise in Italian, as it does very often arise in En-
glish, from the indiscriminate use of the possessive pro-
nouns, .lUll, !!fa, suoi, ,ue, his, her, or hers; when these pro-
nouns do not relate to the subject of the proposition, they
al'e changed for the personal pronouns di lui, di lei, di 16-
ro, of him, of her, of them. Thus in the English phrase
-John loves Peter and his children-if the pronoun /lis
relates to JoAn, the subject of the proposition, it is ren-
dered in Italian by i suM; as, Giovalllli ama Pietro e i
IIwi .ftgliu61i, John loves Peter and his children [John'.
children] ; but if his does not relate to John, the subject
of thft propositiou, but to Peter, then it is rendered by
i di lui; as, Giot'linni ama Pietro e i di lui .ftgliu61i,
John loves Peter and his children [Peter's children].
The Englis\;1language in similar cases labours under ltD
ambiguity, which in Italian is always avoided by the use
of different pronouns; as,
6g1i 10 mandi) ad uccidere
suo padre,
I tell you;
I see you;
CHANGE OF PERSON.
CHAPTER VI.
Of the Change of.Person.
IN Italian, as well as in English, in addressing per-
sons, \pstead of using the pronoun tu, thou, in the second
person singular, for a show of civility, we say v6i, you,
with the verb in tbe plural j while all the, other words,
suCb as, adjectives, participles, &c. agreeing with the sub-
jective, remain in the singular j as, v6i sarUe rispettato,
you will be respected. This demonstration of polite-
ness has been carried still further in Italian, in-
Btead of sa)'ing, as in English, v6i il eommandate, you
command it; we often make use of the words V6stra
Signoria, your lordship or ladyship, (generally contracted
into and often written V. S.) to designate
an individual whelher of the masculine or of the feminine
gender, with the verb in the third person singular; as,'
vdstra .ignona (vossignorla or V. S.) il (omanda, your
lordship or ladyshil) commands it. To avoid the too
frequent repetition of vostra signoria it.becomes neces-
sary to substitute a pronoun, .and v6stra signor'ia being
feminine and in the third person, ella, she, takes its
place j all the words agreeing with it taking the femi-
nine gender, whether the person signified by it is femi-
nine or masculine; as, ella sara rispettata, .rou will
be respected; il eomando di lei, or il di lei eomando
stato eSLglltlo, your command has been executed.
In addressing in Italian, then, in the most civil way,
the pronoun v6i is changed into ella; the verb is put in
the third persan singular; the adjectives and participles
take the feminine termination; and the conjunctive pro-
noun vi is accordingly changed into Ie, la, to her, her,
whether the subject is of the masculine or leminine gen-
der. Thus, instead of saying v6i eanlate, we say Ula
canta, you sing; ,
fo fJi dieD, to Ie dieo,
111 fJi "ido, III la vedo,
380
SYNTAX.
I will give you lome
of it;
I will tell it to you;
you are respected ':
I received it {'roID
YOU;
I thank you {or it ;
10 I' ariuri-
to ria Iii,
JIC la ringra-
zio,
g/ime -dara,
,,4ne ringrazio,
velo diro,
v6i riete ri'pdtato,
vme tiara,
glWo diro,
tUa erilpd-
tata,
al in the following examples:
'" I' aricerito ria f16i,
I' campiaciuta di Icri"er-
mi,
fo nela ringrazio infinita-
mente,
Ie cia f6sse vero, 0 quanta
inv1.dia Ie porterei !
eke teme ella feme di ve-
derla e di [fggerla? non
tema, no, .
la ca,a OV' ella abitava, mi
par tuttama abifata da
lei medesima, quando pas-
so per quelia strada,
6"dt, con ringram:idrla eor-
dialissimamente dell' uno
e dell' alll"o, e piu ane6-
Ta del biaYimo ehe dU-
la lode, credo 10 darie
ben autentica pr6va del/a
mia stima, e nun perdere
, il drUto a conserval"11li la
,ua,
you have been pleased to,
write to me ;
I thank you for it infinite-
Iy;
were that true, 0 what en-
vy I should bear you!
what do JOU fear? do you
fear to see it and to read
it? do not fear, no;
the house where you lived',
appears to me to be
occupied stilt by you
when I pass through that
street;
therefore, thanking you ve-
rycordially both for the
one and the other, and yet
more for the blame than
for the praise, I think I
give you an authentic
proof of my esteem, and
do not lose the right of
preserving yours. .'
When tbe pronoun etla is used in addressing a person tbe ad-
jectives agree with it in gender; except tbose of nation" wbich
alwBJs agree witb tbe noun signified; a8, ella mi ,embra un
lnglue, you [Sir] seem to me an Englishman; etltna or Ie rig-
norie lbra ICIranno firta Italiani, you [gentlemen] are certainly.
Italians. .
USE OF THE AND TENSES. 881
CHAPTER VII.
Of the Use of the Moods and TBnles of Verb
Of the Use of the Indicative and SulOunetive Moods.
There- are some conjunctions, in Italian, which re.
quire the verb to be in the indicative mood; as,
ehe, as soon as; intanJothe, as long as,
'2 since, see- mentre ehe, Swhilst;
atteso ehe, 5iog that; forse ehe, perhaps;
di maniera ehe,} so that, in - 'tt h except th. at,
L h ecce 0 eel b
talmt;nte ehe, so muc h' un ess, Ilt,
se non e e h
ri ben de, that; , saye t at;
perehi, '2 b .eeondo ehe, according 08 ;
a callsa eke, 5 ecause; 6ltre ehe, besides that;
tanto ehe, as long as ; dopa ehe, since, after that.
Others require it i.n the subjunctive; as, -r
affineM, l in order pa"Jmnati eehhee,' before that;
aecioccM, 5that; , S
bencM" } though, a meno ehe, except, unless;
although, ira caso eke, in case that;
,enza ehe, without; eon patto ehe, on condition
per tema ehe, for fear., lest J a eondizione that; pro-
ddto eke, 2suppose, ehe, purehe, vided that;
,upposto ehe, 5grant that; fintantoehe, till.
With the conjunction ehe, not joined to any other
word, the verb is sometimes used in the indicative, and
sometimes in the subjunctive.
It is used in the indicative after all verbs that signify
telling, prtsnging, perceiving, seeing, l..-nowing, under-
stanrJing, judging; after all verbs implying affirmation;
and after all verbs used in such a manner as to denote
certainty in the action spoken of; as,
,i dieo eh' em6rto, I tell you he is dead;
382
SYNTAX.
eridD fermammte eA' egli ~
ricco,
~ l sta bene, .al"o cAe gli
duM" il capo,
'0 che egli econ, ma nora ne
comrendo la ragi6ne,
mandtirorao fIIII1Huciad6ri i
quali [or cAe] c01lSulta..
rorao Sucrate.
I firmly believe that be i.
rich;
he is well, except that be
has the headach ;
I know that it is so, bot d.
not ondentand the reason;
they sent ambassadon, who
consulted Socrates.
The +erb if. used in the conjunctive after ail verbs that
signify asking, entreating, suspecting, wondering, rt'joie-
ing, grudging, supposing, lwping, imagining, conjectur-
ing, intimating; after all verbs expressive of desire, will,
command, permission, prohibition, fear, belief; after all
verbs implying doubt, ignorance, uncertainty, or future
actio,.; and after ail verbs used with a negative; as,
CM "u6i lu ch' lo .appia '!
per am6r di (e ti p r ~ o [cAe]
tene rimanghi,
,i crede che sia il piu' rfcco
prelato della chiela di Dfo.
command;' ad uno de' lIu6i
famigliari cAe nma sua
casa il menasse,
what do you think that I
know?
for your sake I beseech
you to desist;
it is thought he is the richest
prelate in the Church;
he ordered one of his do-
mestics to bring him into
his house.
I wish to marry a woman
who pleases me ;
I wish to marry a woman
who may please me:
Some of these verbs, however, appear sometimes to be
used indiscriminately, either in the indicative or in the
conjunctive mood; but it is not so in fact, for when they
are so used, each mood expresses the action in a dif-
different manner; as may be seen in the following ex-
amples,
Boglio sposa.Ie flna d6nntJ
che mi piace,
voglio sposare una dOnna
cke mi piaccia,
USE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES. 388
ehe mi I am seeking one, who wish-
es me well;
uno ehe mi I am seeking one, who
may wish m ~ well :
vado eereando uno
vIl61 bene,
'Dado eereando
v6glia bene,
Ie mi domandi qual ~ la ea-
gi6ne del mfo do16re, .
se mi domandi ~ l l sfa la
eagi6ne del mlo dol6re,
if you ask me what is the
cause of my grief;
if you ask me what may
be the cause of my grief:
iii which, in the fi,rst instance, being certain of the ex-
istence of the action expressed, we use the indicative;
and in the second we use the conjunctive, because the
existence of the action is not certain, but doubted or de-
sired.
After sembrare, pa,-ere, tiisognare, or any other uni-
personal verb, the conjunctive is always used; as,
",i sembrava ehe aoesse v6- he appeared as if he had a
glia di rfdere, wish to laugh;
pG7'evami ehe ellafosse pil1 she appeared to me to be
the la neve biant:a, whiter than snow;
bis6gna ehe v6i partiate do- you must go away to-mor-
mani, row.
The verb is also used in the conjunctive after the
relative pronoun ehe, following a comparative or a su-
perlative; as,
bella quant' altra d6nna as handsome as any other
[ehe] f6sse mai in Fi- lady in Florence ever
renze, was;
~ la migliore 6pera ehe sfa it is the best work which
co_parsa, eYer appeared
ne he might govern such Ii part,
as he should wish; .
. And after the relative quale, not used in an iriterroga- .
lIve manuer; as,
una parte qutUe voUsse
reggerebbe,
aYNTAX.
6U6pa fdr, uella de' !IIi-
gli6ri scrilt6ri" da qllt-
,ti con6scere qual uso far
Ii debba delle v6ci, .
one must make a choice 01"
the best writers, and learn
froll\ them how to make
use of words.
Of the Use of the Imperfect, Perfect-definite, and
Perfect-indefinite.
The prtterite of English verbs answers to the imper- .
feet as weH as to the perfect-de.finite and perfeet.iadlji-
nite. In Italian these three tenses are rendered in
three different forms; I loved, for instance, may be ren-
doced by 10 amava, 10 amai, or io 0 amato; but these
forms are not indifferently used.
We make use of the first, the imperfect, when the
action of which we speak was present in respect to
another action past at the samB time; as,
eantava qudndo voi veniste, I was singing when you
came;
~ l n o a tcivola quando nOi they were at table wheD
entrallUllO, we ell1ered.
The imperfect is also used when we speak of an actioa
continued or repeated several times; as,
,edeva oppresso eli me, she was sitting by me;
per questo a Napoli mene for this I was coming to
veni'lla, . Naples;
quando 10 era gi6vine, an- when I was young, I went
dciva a caccia, a hunting.
Finally we use the same tenses in speaking of the
qualities of persoDs who are no more; as,
noa btl parlatore, he was a fine speaker j
Nerone era un u6mo crude- Nero was a very cruel
ltssimo, man.
he has lost a thousand guin-
eas in gaming;
I have received many visits
during these last days;
,he has set out to-day.
,
USE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES. S85
The perfect-rl,finite is used to denole an action done
in a period of time completely past; as,
fui gravemente ammalato [was dangerously sick last
,I" anna sc6,'so, year;
poiche a m6rte mi sentii fe- after I found myself mor-
rita," tally wOllnded ;
4vvenne ehe il re di Francia it happened that the king
marl, cd in suo lu"go fa of France died, and his
cOI'onato ilfigliu610, son was crowned in hi.
stead.
The perfect-indifinite is used to express an action
done in a periud uf time not specified, or if specified, not
completely past. ,
d perduto mUle h i n ~ a1
gilt6eo,
o rieevuto m6lte vsite in
questi ultimi gi6rni,
~ parma 6ggi,
Of the Tenses of the Dependent Verbs in a Compound
. 1:Jentence.
When, in a compound sentence, the principal verb is iD
the present of the indicative, or the future, the dependent
verb must be in the present of the conJunctive, if we
mean to imply the present or future time; and iu the
perfect of the co'!iunctive, if we meau to imply the past;
as,
bis6gna or bisognerd che Sa he must be more attentivo;
piu esalto,
Msta ehe gli abbia data it is sufficient that she has
tina risp6sta, answered him.
When the principal verb' is in the impe'feet or the per-
fect-dcftnite of the indicative, the dependent verb is geller-
ally put in the imperfect of the conjunctive, when we meaa
SS '
186
SYNTAX.
if I had this money, I would
lend it to you immedi-
ately;
who would be more happy
than ], if that money was
mine?
what o'clock is it ?
to-morrow is a holyday ;
to express the present with respect to the principal
Terh; as,
eretIefJa eke f6sse partlto J thought he was gone into
per la eamp6.gna, the country;
feme che aeeadesse qualehe he feared that some mis-
disgrazia, fortune would happen;
d afJnto due mariti prima she had two husbands befo","
che sposasse il prineipe, she married the prince.
When the dependent verb expresses an action which
may be done at all times, it may he put either in the im-
perfed or the present of the conjunttive, although the
principal verb be in the perfect-indefinite of the indica-
.
Itldio ei ci d6.to Ia. ragi6,., God gave us reason in or-
aJfineM. ci distinguiamo, der that we might distin-
or ci distinguessimo, dd- guish ourselves from ani-
gli anilllali, mals.
In suppositive or conditional phrases, the imper-
fect of the indicative in English-had, was or were.
is rendered in Italian by the iTllperfed oj the eOJVuRe-
nlJe; as,
Ie 10 alJessi questi denari,
tegli preslerei ineoRta-
Rente,
chi starebbe meglio di me,
se quetli denari f6sser
miei
Of tAe Use of urtain Tenses of the IndieatifJe for some
other Tenses of the same and of the Use of the In-
finitivefor urtain Tenses of the I11dieatilJe, andfor tke
Conjunctive and Imperative moods.
The present of the indicative is sometimes used for
the future r as,
eke 6ra '! [for
Gomani ep.sta,
what will you do, if she
tells it to her brothers?
if I do not cure you in
eight days, have me burnt.
USE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES. SST
,M farai tu, se ella il diee
a' jrafUli?
Ie fo infra 6tto gi6rni non
vi guarf.seo,fatemi bru-
giare,
The perfer.t-definite may be used for the present, or
for the perfect-indefinite; as, ,
or ehe avesti [for ehe aiJ, ehe now what nils you, that you
tu fai cotal viso, make such a face;
Anie'hino giltO un gran so- Anichino gave a deep sigh.
spl.ro. La dOnna duse : The woman said: What
eke avesti, A7liehi1l0? ails you, Anichino ?
6nde f6sti tu [for sei stato where have you been thia
tu] stamane? non so 6ve - morning? I know not
io mi fui, where I have been;
seegliesti '1-0 seelto.- have you chosen ?-I have
Em6n?-M6rte-L' a- -EmJn ?-Death-Yoll
vrai, shall have it.
The infilllitivt! may be used for the third person singu-
lar 'Of the present and of the imperfect of the indicative,
and their compounds, depending on another verb the
same mood; as,
eon6seo lui essert!- [for ehe I know that he is a wicked
egli eJ un malvtigio u6mo, man;
lui essere perjido e she said he was perfidious
vile, and vile;
egli s' aee6rse [for si ae- he had fOllud out, that the
e6rto] I' abate aver man- abbot had eaten dry
giato fave, secc'he, beans;
penso eost{"i dover taze he thought that this man was
quale la malvdgitd de' such as the wickedness of
Borgogn6ni it riehiedea, the Burgundians required.
The infinitive may likewise be IIsp-d for the third per-
Ion singular of the present and of the imperfect of the
conjunctive, and their compounds; as,
credo lui esser [for ehe egli I believe that he is rich;
,ia] MeeD,
J88 .
SYNTAX.
they said that he was dead;
she believing that he was
Gisippo, answered les ,
dieEr7tDlo lui ",6"to,
cUa t;rule"do lui esser [for
eM egli j6m] Gisippo,
risp6se di sl,
III egli crUe In republica if he thinks that the repub-
afJer bis6gnn ehe i senat6- lie npeds lhat the senaturs
ri pdrlino libero . , should speak freely. "
Finally the infinitive is, used for the second person
lin/tular of the imperative mood when preceded by the
negKlive particle non;. as, J
nO'lljare strepito, do not make a noise;
lion ti lu,i"Rare, do not flatter thyself;
rio '110'11 tl!11ler, do not fear that;
1IOJ& mi toccare, rib6.ldo; do Dot touch me, rascal.
Of the Mode of Expre8lt"ng the English Present Parti-
ciple in Italian.' . .
The English present participle may be expressed in
Italian:
First, by the gerund of the corresponding. verb; as,
il re ordinato, the king having ordered;
QpjJieca'ldo il ju6co per file to every
6gni lu6go . . , place . . . ;
Secondly, by the relative pronoun che and a tense of
the indicative, mood; as,
,
Ii 0 incontr6:to che I met them riding post;
no la p6sta,
pauato ehe ju, or d6po che that day having passed j
ju passato, qufi gi6rno.;
Thirdly, by a preposition arid the verb in the infini-
tive; as,. .
,finito di scrlvere, " having done wriling;
pando comineio a cantare, having commenced singing.
When the Englisb present participle has before it a
prepositioQ, such as oj, from, witla, 0'11, in, jor, witkout,
s6no contento d' avere un
amico,
USE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES. S89
before, after, it is always rendered in Italian by the cor-
responding verb in the infinitive with a prepositioD.
If the participle is preceded by the prepositions, of,
from, with, they are expressed in Italian by the preposi-
tion di, attended by the infinitive; as,
oavuto il piacere di veder- I had the pleasure of seeing
la, her j
Ula m' impedisce di faria, she prevents me from do-
ing it;
I am content with having a
friend.
The preposition 011, before the participle, may be ex-
pressed by the prepositions di, in, or su j as,
egli si vanta d' fiver la 16- he values himself on being
7'IJ C6nosce,lZa, acquainted with them j
nel partire, or sui partire, on my departure' I recol-
mi sovvenne di v6i, lected you.
The preposition in is rendered by a or in j as,
aiutciremi afar cia, assist me in doing that;
nel venir qui a incontrato in coming here I met John.
Giovanni,
The preposition for is expressed by per j as,
s6no stati impiccati per a- they have been hanged lor
, fler rubbdtd, having robbed.
The prepositions withouf, before, after, are literally
translated by senza, prima eli, d6po j as,
Wa beve il senza p6rvi 10 you drink tea without put-
zucchero, ting sugar in it;
Ie faro una visita prima di I will pay you a visit be-
partire, fore setting out;
dopa aver detto questa, after having said this, he
sen' andO, went away.
83
390
SYNTAX.
scholars learn the rules of
a language by studying
them.
the divine Julius checked
the sedition (if his army.
by only saying: Ah Ro-
. [mans
I am told so i
which was considered ver,
important:
If tbe participle is preceded by the preposition b!l,
tbis preposition is generall)' omitted in halian, and the
participle reudered by the gerund of the corresponding
verb; aS
l
61i scoltiri ImprJ.rmw It re-
gole di una lingua stu-
didndote,
But if we wish to express the preposition, therr tbe
"erb must be put in the intinitive, and by renderel1 by
eon or col; as,
il diflino Giulio rintltzzo la
,edizi6tle del sun esercito
dir s61o: Ah Quiriti!
Remark, on tAs U,e of certain Italian Verb, as COfltoo.
pared with the English.
There are in most languages many verbs, which are.
llsed with an idiomatic turn very different from theil:
pr6per signification.
The verbs flenre, and volere, for instance, do not al-
ways answer to the English v..rbs, to come, and to be filiI--
ling; but the former is sometimes used instead of tbe
verb essere, to be i and the latter, being preceded by the-
particles ci, vi, and unipersonally employed, has the same
meaning as the verb bisognare, must, or to b. necessa.
ry t as,
..i vUn detto cosl,
il che flenlf1a con,itkratD
n,6lto importdnte,
ea' "u61' pQzietlzo, we mus't have patience i-
wi VOTTa del temp8, time is necessary.
The verb dovere is uprelsed in English by tbe verb
to OfDC, when it means to be a debt.,., and by the verb to be
.
USE OF CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. 391
obliged, when it signifies duty or the necessity of doing
an action; it is also used instead of the verb bisogndn,
in the signification of must; as,
e' gli dot'eoa trecento fiort- he owed him tbree hun-.
ni,. dred tlOJ,j ns ;
dOfJra sempre a un she will still be obliged to
tal partito, come to this point;
devo andar fll6ri, se v6glio I must go out, if I w.ant
qu6.lche c6sa, anything.
The English verb to be, usoo in the sense of to be
one's turn, business, or duty, is rendered in Italian by
the verb toccare in the signification of to belong; as,
t6cca a me a giuocare, is it for me to play;
t6cca a lui a [eggere, it is fur him to read;
toccava a lei a clirlo, it was for her to tell it.
The verb to tAink, used in English in the sense or-to
believe or to Buppose, is translated into Italian by the
verb credere, and when ill the sense of to reflect o,r medi-
tate, by the verb pen,are.
The verb to know, is translated by the verb
when intellectual knowledge is meaot, and by the verb
con6scere, when personal knowledge, derived from tho
evidence of one of our senses, is in,tended.
CHAPTER VIII.
,Of the Use of certain Preposition&..
Of the Prepositions di, a, da.
Tha preposition di, of, is generally used to espresa
,the idea of possession or of extraction; as,
e ion il denara di l'i il and paid him with his own
1:0, ' money;
192
8YNTAA.
d81Dr. _ pen. tli cGnIe
.,dGta, la 8ItIIIdO COlI
Dio,
la ,tatllQ rli _,..", 0 di li-
gno, 0 di meuillo, rima.1I
per mea6rill d' ll/cUn IIG-
Unte 116Il1O,
haYing given to her a piece
of AI t meat, bid ller God
speed;
the statue of marble, of
wood, or of metal, remain-
ing there in memory of
some great man.
The preposition tJ, to, is used to express the idea of
attribution or of tendency of action; as,
al dell' i"']JU'ad6re
Federigo pM.O,
Juggfrono II Rodi,
II 116i non IIi on6"e
eM '1 116,tro lignfJggio
a:ndtJsse II pOlJertate.
in the time of the emperor
Frederic the First;
they fltd to Rhodes ;
it would not be honourable
to yOIl that your lineage
should become poor.
The preposition da, from, is used to express the idea
of deriva,tion; as,
I' UJlII men del 'fme rli Paa,
l' altra d' Aldde,
da Par\,ui II Ge7lOIIa tor-
nando,
erUlui eM la manna da
Regl(io a Gaeta Ita quci.-
,i la piu dilettevole parte
d' lta/ia,
ODe is a descendant from
Pan, the other from Al-
cides;
returning from Paris to Ge-
noa;
it is believed that the sea-
coast from Rl'ggio to Gae-
ta is almost the pleasant-
est part of Italy.
These prepositions which express by themselves ideas
so different from each o_ther, appear sometimes to be
used, in Italian indiscriminately; we shaH see how-
ever, that even in these instances their bse is dis-
tinct, and invariable. In the following examples,
P,ehia un' isola 1II,6.i iii- Ischia is an island very
dna rli Napoli, Dear [toJ Naples j
USE OF CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. S9'
I have found v ~ r y near [to]
here a girl to my liking;
fo b trovato una giovone
see6ndt) il cll6r "do assdi
'presso di qut,
frano uomini, e femmi"e di
{(rosso l"gegno, e i piu di
tdli serv1ifi non usati,
they were men and women
of common minds, and the
greater part not al;custom-
ed to such a trade:
the preposition di appears to be used instead of the prep-
osition a, but we shall be immediately convinced of the'
contrary, if we supply the words which in all these ~ l l l l
are suppressed by ellipsis; as,
Psehia e,m' isola aSlrii vid- Ischia is an island very near
na [alia citla] di Napoli, [to the city tifl Naples;
100 trovato fUIa giovane se- I have found very near [to
condo if euor mlo assai the place of] here a girl
presso [alluogo1di qut, to my liking;
erana u6mini, e femmine di they were men and women
grosso iTl{(egno, e i piu of common minds, and the
[all' esercb:io] di tali greater part not accustom- -
,ervfgi non usciti, ed to [the exercise of] such
a trade.
Peter having had occasion
10 depart from Palermo;
Soppravvenuta cagi6ne a
Pietro di partirsi di Pa-
16rm
n
,
il Guardastagno passato di
quella laR-cia ccidde, e po-
co app' isso morl,
cAiunque di qllesti carbOni ~
toceo in segno di cr6ee,
"'lto quello anno pub vi-
"ere sicitro, che fu6co nol
toccherd,
Guardastagno 'fell pierced
with that lance, and soon
after he died;
whoever is mal,ked with
these coals with the sign
of the cross, may live se-
cure that for all that year
he shall not be harmed
by fire:
in these examples the preposition di seems to be em.-
ployed for the preposition da, but by supplying the el-
194
SYNTAX.
lipsis we find that di is ulled in its own meaning and that
da bas been suppressed; as,
loppraooenuta eagi6ne a
Pietro di partirsi [daUa
eittA] di Palermo,
il Guardastagno passato
[con un col{lo or da un
col poJ di quilia Lancia
t:6.dde 0 0 0 ,
cAiunqwe [con unoJ di que-
sti earb6ni t6uo, teo
Peter having had occasion
to depart from [tke city
ofJ Palermo; .
Guardastagno fell pierced
with [a blow or by (J
blOllJ of] that lance 0 0 ;
whoever is marked with
[one tif] these coals; &c.
[davanti] dol eardin6.1 Mo-
r6ne andJrono tutti gli
ambasciad6ri,
r0 oi mmero da lli,
dal frate pal-titosi, dBUa
,asa n' andO della d6n-
na,
dal cardinal Mor61te, appe-
na arrivato, andtiroRO
tutti gli ambaseiadori,
I wi1l r.onduct you to her;
having departed from the
friar's, he went to the
house of the lady;
aU the ambassadors went
to the cardinal Morone's,
when he had hardly ar-
rived;
in tbese examples the w.ord dal.anli is suppressed,
and the preposition da, far from being used for tbe prep-
osition a, as it might appear, is employed in its own
meaning; as, .
{o oi mmero [davanti] da I will conduct you to [or
Ui, before] her;
dal fi-ate partltosi [davan- having departed from the
til dtilla casa n' andO, friar's he went to [or be-
della donna, fore] the bouse of the
lady;
all the ambassadors went to
[or before] the cardinal
Morone.
USE OF'CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. 896
There are some other phrases in the language in
which usage appears to have sanctioned the employment
of one of these prepositions rather than the others; but
these it is difficult to subject to any positive rule. Wo
give _here- a collection of phrases, which, consulted by
learners, may direct them to make a proper use of these
prepositions in similar instances by analogy.
Phrases in which the Preposition di is used.
prati seminati di amaranti,
campi ilparsi di vi61e,
montagne coperte di pam-
pano;
un uomo oppresso, or pene-
trato, di dolore,
lssere annoiato di uno,
egli e occupato di mode,
rl' inezie,
s6no stanco or stufo di.n-
_ aggi, dei piaceri, di vi-
vere,
ella era ornata,-or fregiata,
di ricclti cestimenti,
lafronte corORtita d' aliori,
una dttd cfnta di mUra,
{sole circondcite di tigli,
un-lu6go chiuso (1' alben,
fu trovalo m6rto di fame,
ml1ere di lim6sina,
mortr di fame, di sete,
ndere or piangere d' alle-
grezza,
piangere di dolOre, d' {ra,
meadows Jjown with ama-
ranths;
fields sprinkled with violets;
mouutaitls o v ~ r e with
vine-leaves; .
a man oppressed, or pene-
trated, with grief;
to be tired of one;
he is occupied with fash-
ions, with trifles;
I am weary or tired of
travelling, of pleasures, of
living; -
she was adorned with rich
garments;
the forehead crowned with
laurels;
a city surrounded by walls;
islands surrounded by lill-
den-trees,
a place encircled by trees ;
he was found dead from
hunger;
to live on alms;
to die of hunger, of thirst;
to laugh or to weep for
joy;
to weep for-grief, for anger;
SYNTAX.
,
IIIDrir di trmt' aMi,
isser di gltardia,
tsser di n6ia,
pun(re di ".orte,
'emere d' uno,
cader di mano,
weir di mente, di capo, di
Mua,
scappar di mano, di Mcca,
1erJare, trarre, cavare di
testa, di b6cca, di dUo,
di cuore,'
'opere di gramritica, di ma-
tematicAe, di politica,
to die at thirty yean of age;
to be on guard;
to be tiresome;
to pllnish with death;
to have fear of one;
to fall fronl one's hand;
to slip out of oue's mind,
head, month;
to e!fcape from one's hanlJ,
mouth;
to take out of one's head,
mouth, finger, heart;
to know grammar, math&-
matics, politics.
Phrases in which the Preposition a is used.
II mani chiuse,
II b6cca aperta,
CI clai6me sci6lte,
a su6n di cetra, di tr6mbe,
di tambUro,
II r6mor d' armi,
oroZogio a mOlla,
scala a lumaca,
.ala a mangiare,
camera a dormire,
camminare a cercarlo,
'IImdere a peso,
andtire a spasso, a dip6rto,
andare a gtnio,
essere a piedi, a cavo.lZo,
giuocare a palla, a scacchi,
al bigliardo, tille dame,
essere a tfro di sasso, di mo-
scMtto, di cann6ne,
with closed hands;
with open mouth;
with dishevelled hair;
at the sound of a lyre, of
trumpets, of a drum;
with the noise of arms;
a watch;
a winding stair-ease;
a dilling-room ;-
a bed-chamber;
to walk to find him;
to sell by weight;
to go to t3.ke a walk;
to suit one's taste;
to be on foot, cin horseback;
to play at ball, at chess, at
billiards", at draughts;
to be at. a stone's throw,
within a musket shot, a
cannon shot j _
USE OF CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. 397
andare a vela,
andare a mba,
antiare a grrido,
; "
venzre a nOla,
parlare a giu6co,
tOrTe ad uno,
imparare, sapere a mente,
tenere a mente,
fare a stento, a pena,
monre a migliaia,
cadere a torrenti,
tagliare a fette, a pezzi,
andare a galla, af6ndo,
MUo a vcdere,
CarD or grato ad udire,
. to sail;'
to pillage;
to be agreeable;
to be tiresome;
to jest; !
to take away Irom one;
to learn, to know by heart;
to have, to hold in mind;
to do hardly, scarcely, with
difficulty;
to die by .
to fall in torrents ;.
to Ctlt in slices, in pieces;
to go adrift, to tbe bottom;
beautiful to see;
pleasant to hear.
Phrases in which the Prepositzon da is used.
occupato dal piacere,
commosso da pieta,
penetrato da dolo"e,
oppresso da nemici,
fastidito da uno,
ferHo du una saetla,
stanco du vifrggi, .
tinto' da corda,-
passato da una palla,
punUo da Dio,
astencrsi rIa una cosa or da
fare una cosa,
distornare, diS1Jiare uno da
una c6sa,
ritirarsi da uinto,
essere, stare da un 1I1,to,
andare, fuggire da una
parte,' [parte,
rntrare da lfn lata, da una
34
occupied by pleasure;
moved by pity;
penetrated by grief;
oppressed by enemies;
troubled by anyone;
wounded by an arrow;
fatigued by travelling;
girded with a rope;
pierced by a bullet;
punished by God;
to abstain from doing a
thing;
to divert one from doing
a thing;
to step ;
to be, to stand aside;
to go, to fly in any direc-
tion; .
to enter by any way;
SYNTAX.
to turn one's self, or turn a
a thing to any side;
to turn one's self, or to turn
one's eyes to any side;
to speak in my name, in
your name;
to go in my name, in their
name;
to tell on his part, on the
part of the prince.
dire da sua parte, dtJ parte
ddpnncipe,
wire dtJ un leito, dtJ llu to hear (rom any side;
parte,
inclinare da un lato, da una to incline to any side;
parte,
"oltarsi, or "oltare una c6sa
da Ull Uto, da una parte,
,,6lgersi, or ,,6lgere gli 6cchi
dtJ un leito, da una parte,
parlrire da parle ",ia, ,,6.
stra,
andate dtJ parte mia, 16ro,
Phrases in which, by using the Preposition di for da or the
Preposition dafor di, the meaning of the expres-
sion is alttred. -
io non v6glio n ~ n t di v6i, I wish nothing of yours ;
10 non ,,6glio niente da v6i, I wish nothing from you:
non ricevo niente di lui,
non ricevo niente da lui,
I receive nothing of his;
I receive nothing from him;
che di tu saputo da 16ro?
che di tu saputo di 16ro,
what hast thou learnt from
them? [cerning them?
what hast thou learnt con-
che di inteso dire da lui"?
che di inteso dire di lUi?
what hast tholL heard from
him? _[cerning him?
what hast thou heard con-
o ricevuto la Uttera della
m6glie, ma non quella
del marito,
b riuvuto la lettera deflla
m6glie, e la ,assa dtJl ma-
rita,
I have received the wife's
letter, but not the hus-
band's;
I have received the letter
from the wife, and the box
from the husband.
USE OF CERTAIN PREPOSTIONS. 899
In the phrases, etempo di ritirarsi, di scostarsi, di uscirtJ,
di desinare, <tc. and, etempo da ritirarsi, da scostcirsi, da
!llcu'e, da desinare cosa da ridere, da piangere, ria
osservare, do vende,'e, <tc. and, ecosa di ridere, di piangere,
di osservare, di vendere, <tc. though the preposition di ap-
pears to hold indifferently the place of do, and da that of
di; yet the difference between the two expressions is
very great, and the employment of the prepositions re-
markably distinct.
E tempo di ritirdrsi, signifies that is already time to
retire, that it is time when one ordinarily retires;
but etempo da ritirarsi, means that it is a time conve-
nient, propitious to retire, that it is the time when one
ought to take the opportunity to retire, the time when
one must retire, and which having passed one cannot re-
tire. E c6sa da vendel'e means that it is a thing which
is good to be sold, which ought to be sold; but c68a
di vendere signifies that it is a thing which is commonly
off.ered for sale.
. OJ the oj rendering into Italian the English par-
tille to before the infinitive oj verbs.
The particle to prefixed to English verbs is used
sometimes as a mere 'sign, and sometimes as a preposi-
tion. When it is a mere sign, it is never in
Italian, except when the infinitive is used as a noun, and
then it is expressed by the articles ii, 10. When to has
the force of a preposition, it is rendered by the preposi-
tions di, 0, per.
When the infinitive of verbs can be expressed in Ital-
ian by a noun; 8s,-to read is useful,-la lettura eutile;
-always to study is fatiguing,-lo studio continuo efa-
tic6so; the particle to is rendered by the article it or
10; as,
il legger, itile, to read is useful;
400
,
SYNTAX.
he forbids bim to produce
the proofs of his inno-
cence;
the woman, seeing that
prayers were useless, bad
recourse to tbreats.
10 $tudicir sempre efatie6$o, l\1ways to study is fatiguing:
gli vietrril produrre k [ or la
procluzione delleJ pru6ve
della sUa innocenza,
la dOnna clre i1
. pregare [or 11l preghiere]
non Ie valeva, ritorse al
minaccicire [or aUe mi-
nacu], .
But if the infinitive cannot be expressed by a noun,
the particle to is rendered by a preposition.
If the particle to is preceded by a verb signifying re-
membering or forgetting, pleasing or displeasing, rejoi-
cing or grieving, O'Ioning or denying,pennitting or prohib-
iting; telling, declaring, affirmillg, supposing, suspecting,
fearing, commanding, asking, entreating, doubting, prom-
ising, advising, concluding, .finishing, proposing; or
by any verb implying desire or aversion, it is rendered in
Italian by the preposition di; as,
mi rallegro di vederla, I am very glad to see you;
mi dispiace di trovarvi cosl I am sorry to find you so
ajJlztto, afflicted;
telllelJa d' essere udUo, I feared to "bs heard;
vi di accordarmi quel I beseech you to grant me
fav6re, that favour.
The particle. to is translated by the preposition 0,
when it comes after verbs signifying beginning, teaching,
learning, attaining, insisting,_ persisting, proaeding,
maining, continuing, opposing, contrifJllting, engaging,
ing, accustoming, encouraging, obliging; after verbs im-
plying inclination, difficulty, application,. thought, reillc-
tance,jitness; and after verbs signifying motion; as, ,
comfncia a pi6rJere, it begins to rain;
egli ama a gil/ocare, he likes to play;
egli a parlare, he, can hardly speak; I
venUta a ballare, she came to dance.
EXPLETIVES.
401
The conjunctiou and, used sometimes in English between a verb
expressive of motion and another verb in" the same tense, person,
and number with the former, is rendered in Italian by the prepo-
sition a, and the verb which followl it is put in the infinitive; as,
I will Gome and dine with. you, verro a pram:ar con voi.
And whenever the particle to joined with the infinitive
of English verbs can be explained by the phrases in order
to, with the design of, or by the preposition for with the
gernnd of the same verbs, it is rendered in Italian by the
preposition per with the verb in the infinitive; as,
10 feci per obbligarvi, 1 did so to oblige you;
pcirla cod per tormelltarmi, she speaks thus to vex me.
CHAPTER IX.
Of Expletives.
EXPLETIVP.!l are certain words which are not
lutely necessary in grammatical cQnslruction, but
to give strength and energy to the discourse.
are the following:
abso-
serve
Such
egli ~ qud un maZvrIgio u6-
mo, ehe m' Ii tagZiato la
b6rsa eon ben cento jiorf.-
ni d:' 6ro,
Bene, ben, be' : .
gli d(lmandcii, se gli bastava I asked him, if he had COU1'*
l' cinimo di cacciarZo via; age to send him away;
ed ~ i rispose: Sl bene, and he answered: Yes,
indeed:
here is a wicked man, who
has cut my purse with full
'one hundred florins of
gold; "
402
SYNTAX.
be', rispos' 0, ffUSSere, par-
lert". poi; noll fate qrd
per rrr que.to fraeauo,
lCeU, Sir, answered I,. ...e
will speak afterwards; de
Dot make DOW such a
Doise here.
Bello:
il ,,6:1lro rJestito ebell' efat- your suit of clothes is fio-
to, ished;
per bella pav.ra gitto k ba1l- through fear he threw down
ditrt chi ComUM, the standards of the COlD-
monwealth.
son tUlto stanco,
la d6nna ucIendo costui par-
lUI'C, il qllale Mla credeva
mut%, tutta strrrdl,
Tullo:
I am quite tired;
the womau hearing this
man speak, whom she
thought dumb, was quite
amazed.
-. Mica:
.on l u v ~ l l e "ere, non son
micafavolc,
non mica icli6ta n ~ materia-
le; ma scienziato, e di
oClllo ingegno,
these are news and true,
they are not fables;
not an idiot nor a vulgar
man; but learned, and of
an aCllte miud. .
Punto:
.enza sbigottfr punto, without being frightened at
all ;
non ne rJ6glio punto, I do not wish for any at all.
I
Pure:
but even if it should happen;
the affair went off so ;
do but show me him whom
you like.
ma Ie pure avvenls,e,
10 c6sa ando pur cod,
.fa pure che tu mi m6stri
qual ti piace,
i i ~ Dio non ,,6g1ia,
Gid:
may God forbid;
EXPLETIVES.
non credoio gill. ehe ne ave- I do not think you take
te a male, it ill.
O'ra:
essi af- ah! would that they had ,
you;
now whl\t does this mean?
deh! or t' avessero
fogato,
'ora che vorra dir questo ?
UYcio,
ecco, Giann6tto, a te piace
eh' io divenga crista-
no . .. ,
ed ecco Pietro
E'cco:
chiamo all' and lo Peter called at the
door;
here, John, you wish that I
should become a
tian ..
Poi:
'IOn e poi vero q1tanto' mi what you told me is not
-diceste, true.
Via:
va via, "isp6se, e cia eke tu go away, answered he, and
vuoi conta, relate what you please.
St:
. si e tanta fa benignitd, e.so great is the goodness
la misericordia di Dio, and the mercy of God,
che ... , that ..
Ne:
chetamente n' andr) per la he went tranquilly through
camera insino 'Filla fine- the room to the win-
stra, dow.
Non:
temo ehe v6i non mi I fear
donidte, me.
you will aband.oD
\
404
stassi con meeo,
I1K6i tIC qlCell' uno?
SYNTAX.
Con:
he is with me.
Ul
no
:
do you want that one?
Elgli:
egli ~ una compassi6ne a it excites pity to see him;
vederlo,
E'lla:
eUa non andra sempre cost, it shall not always go on 10.
EI
SSO
:
0 mi son venUto a stare al- I have come to stay a little
quanta con esso Lei, while with you.
E'Ull, as an expletive{is invariable and may be used equally well
before a masculine ant.! a fellliDine pronoun, both singular aDd (llu-
ral j as, con ~ s s o r n ~ o with me; con ~ s s o teeo. with thee j con. esso
lui, with him; con esso l ~ with her, or with rOil j con ~ s s o neSi.
with UI j con esso v6i. with you j con ~ s s o 16ro, with them.
CHAPTER X.
C!f the Ellipsil.
ELLIPSIS is a figure in grammar, which consists in the
omission of one or more words in order 10 add con-
.dseness and elegance 10 the phrase without affecting
its clearness. This figure is very frequent in Italian,
and offers one of the principal difficulties in the gram-
matical analysis of the Classics. We will here give some
ELLIPSIS. 405
I will return and give you
so many blows, that I will
make you sorry as long as
you live; .
he did not hurt himself in
falling, although he fell
from a high place.
examples in which the ellipsis is employed, supplying
the words which are omitted, that the learner may fa-
miliarize himself with similar locutions.
Ellipsis of tke Noun.
Ruppe [la nave] in mare, he made shipwreck;
rni sCllsai [della colpa] di I exculpated myself from
cia, that fault;
Alessandro mu6re [per amo- Alexander dies for that
re] di qlcella vedova, widow;
conoscendo ehe qUlz,i non era knowing that here was no
[luogo] da piangere , place to weep. j
bcistami [ladisgl'aziaJ di it is enough to have been
essere stato schernUo una once j
v61ta, .
to ci torneri'J, e dar6ttene
tante [busse], ell' 0 ti
farl! tristo per tfltto il
tempo, che tu ci viverai,
niuno male si nella ca-
duta, quantunqlle alquan-
to cadesse da alto [I u6go] ,
Ellipsis of the Adjective.
E,sempre p6i per [buono]
da m61to I' ebbe, e per
amico,
fu [abile] da f{mto, e Ui.nto
seppefare, ch' egli pacifi-
c;' iljigliu610 col padre,
lion suspiea, ehe ti;' Guccio
Batena gli avesse faUo,
percioccM nol eonoseeva
[capace] da ttinto,
and considered him always
afterwards as a very good
man, and as a friend l
he was so able, and knew
how to do so much, that
he reconciled the son with
the father; .
he did not suspect that Guc-
cio Balena had done this
to him, because he -lid
not think' him capable of
so much j
406
SYNTAX.
il re gli c1Iiama, e quei, the king called them, and
il "idcro, tennersi they, when they saw him,
limmobiJi], stopped.
Ellipsis of Relative Pronouns.
Esaminitimo se delle e6se
[che si 'sono] delle ne d
fatto air-una, .
fa donna Ifli flee apprestare
panni [i quili eranoJ sta-
ti del marito,
riscontr6110 quivi Petitio ee-
, nale [il quale era] fug-
gito drille guardie di Vi-
tellio,
let us examine if he has
done any of the things
which have been said;
the woman caused clothes
to be prepared which had
been her husband's;
there met him Petilius Ceri-
alis, who had. escaped from
the guards of V)tellius.
Ellipsis of the Infinitive of Verbs.
Andate per [prllDdere] essi,
qui il sole non vi pua [pe-
netl'are], .
0 era un asinticcio che non
poteva [sostenere] la "i-.
ta,
go after them;
here the sun cannot peD'-
etrate ;
I was a great ass, that could
not endure life.
Ellipsis of the Verb in the Indicative Mood.
Tessa, 6di tu quel ch' io
[odo] ?
eil capitano, gli aUri
_ [sono] da nulla,
era parente strftto di Vespa-
- siano e [era] soldcito di
,6nlo,
Tessa, do you hear what I
hear?
this is the captain, the oth-
ers are of no account;
he was a near relation of
Vespasian and a good 101-
dier.
ELLIPSIS.
40r
ala! ah! se non [fosse]
eh' 1:0 0 ,"everenza a v6i,
pridre, fo direi pure il
bell' on6re 'ch' ei mi fa,
eIe non .f6sse [stiitc8 ch' egli
era g"lrlvane, egli avrebbe
avuto m6ltu a sostenere,
Ellipsis of the Verb in the Conjunctive.
qui d questa cena, e non here is this supper, and
sarebbe chi [potesse] there is no one to eat
mangiarla, it ;
e avrei gridato, se non [fosse and I would have cried out,
stato] che egli flti chiese .had it not been that he .
merce per Diu, e per v6i, besought mercy both in
the name of God and in
your name;
ah! ah! were it not for the
respect - that I bear to
you, father, I would tell
the great honour he does
me.
EI'tipsis of the Gerund.
[Essendo] durante laguerra, during the war;
[avEmdo] veduto il lu6go having seen the solitary
solitario, place;
giunto il famigliare a Ce- the domestic having arrived
nova, e [essendo state da at Genoa, and having con-
lui] date ie zettel'l', e [es- signed the letters and de-
sendo stata da lui] fatta livered the message ...
I' anlbasciata . .. "
Ellipsis of the Participle.
Se ~ mi cacciasser gli 6c- if they should pull out my
chi a che sare' 10 [ridot- eyes, to what should I be
to
1
? reduced?
Ie no'n f61se [stato] il gran if it had not been for the
prete, a cui mal prenda, high priest, whom curses
light on; .
and had he not been a
young man, he would have
had a great deal to suffer.
408
SYNTAX.
Ellipris of Adverbs.
never among men did any
with such speed haste to
their profit .. as I when
these words were spoken.
(Jra [coal] f6ssero essi pur would that they were dis-
gid di.sp6sti a IImire, cM posed to come, so that we
lIeramente potremmo d... . might truly say. ;
re ,
al m6ndo non fur mai p r s ~
He [talmente] ratte, afar
lor f.ro . com' io dlJpo
cotai par61e fatte,
El/ipsi.s of Prepositions.
rers;
she served certain fisher-
men;
he frequented much the
church;
he reigned for fifteen years;
In casa [di] qrcesti usurdi, in the house of t ~ usu-
serollla [a] ce,1i pescat6ri,
usava m6lto [in] It!' chiesa,
.sedUte re [per] anni gutn-
dici,
cmeremo [can] un p6co di we ",ill sup upon a little
carne salata, salt meat.
Ellipsis of Conjunctions.
I'0 s6no la miser:a [e] sven-
turata Zi7leVra,
real natura, [e] angelico ,in-
tellMto, [e] chiar' alma,
[e] pr6nta vista, [e] 6e-
chio cerviero,
I am the miserable and un-
fortunate Ginevra;
a royal nature, and im an-
gelic mind, and "clear
spirit," and a quick sight,
and piercing eyes.
THE END.
ANALYTICAL TABLE
or
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION-DEFINITIONS OF THE TERMS
OF GRAlllMAR
Psge
]-11
2
ib.
ib.
ib.
ib.
r
ib.
ib.
3

-
ib.
NOl1K-Proper, common
feminine, common,
Number-singular, plural
Case-subjective, objective, relation of
possession, of attribution, ofderiva-
tion
Decleruion or Variation of Nouns
AaTlcLE-definite, indefinite
Grammar, Word,
Words considered as Articulate Sounds
Syllables, Letters, Vowels, Consonants
--considered as Signs of our Thought,
Part. of SpeecA - .,
ADJECTIVE-positive, comparative, superlative
(relative, absolute) 4
PaoKoUN-personal, conjonctive, possessive,
demonstrative, interrogative, relati,e,
indefinite - II

410 AIULYTIC.A.L TABLE
P.p
paui"e, neoter--pl'Onominal,.
unipenonal 6
Noo4--infinitive, indicative, conditional,
imperative, conjunctive - w.
reue--present, past, future 7
Prumt ib.
Pcut or Preterite-imperfect,
fect-definite, perfect-indefinite,
pluperfect-definite, pluperfect-
indefinite ib.
Fulure--indefinite, definite 8
Number-tlingular, plural w.
Per_-fint, second, (see p. 5.) - ib.
Conjugatima or Variation of verba w.
-----or Aa&emblage of verbs w.
Reguhu', irregular, defective verbs ill.
PAaTICIPLJ:-present or active, past or pauiV8 9
Gerund ill.
ADvz&B-of time, place, order, quantity, &c. w.
P&J:POBITIOII'-of place, order, union, BepaQ-
tion, &c. 10
COlllUII'CTIOII'-copulative, augmentative, al-
ternative, advenalive, &c. - - OJ.
mJ:a1EcTIo1l'-of grief, joy, inllignation, con-
tempt, &c. - - - - II
Di",iaion of the Grammar w.
ALPHABET 16.
Pao1l'u1I'CIATI01l'-o&THOaaAPHy-ANALOGT-
BJ'lI'T.AX w.
OJ' TBIl IT.A.LL\N ALPHABET 12
01'
PART I. 01' THE ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION
411
Pap

CHAP. I. Of the Pronunciation of Vowels 13
a; _open, close; i; o-open, close; II, ill.
CHAP. II. Of the Pronunciation of Conso-
nants - 14
c-hard, soft; cc
g-hard, soft; gg
I-sharp, flat
z-sharp, flat -,
ill.
- u
16
ib.
ill.
- ilJ.
20
ill.
ilJ.
21
ib.
CHAP. III. Of J and H 17
i, a vowel in Italian "'ib.
h has no sound, a sign, a mark of distinc-
tion, rather than a letter 18
CHAP. IV. Ofthe Pronunciation ofSyllables 19
eh, gh [-
gl-hard, liquid
gn -
Ie-hard, soft
leh -
gud, {fUe, guf
qua, que, qui, qu6
General Remarks on the Italian Pronunciation th.
Diphtbongs-Double consonants - ill.
Final consonants-gli followed by a vowel ib.
Rules for determining. when the vowels E,
0, are pronounced open or close, 22
A Synoptical Table of the Sounds of the Let-
ters 27
412 ANALYTICAL TABLE
Words of Similar Orthography, but of DifFer-
ent Signification, distinguished by the Dif.-
ferent Sound of E, 0 - - - 34
ilJ.
ib.
39
37-49
37
,0.
POT ll. 0 .. THE ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY
CHAP. I. Of the Accent
Accent-grave, acute
Words on which the accent is generally put
The accent used, in Italian, as a mark of dis-
tinction between words of the same spelling,
but of different signification -
----used by some instead of h, in the
words ho, hai, ha, hanflO
CHAP. II. Of the Apostrophe w.
Words which are written with an Apostrophe 40
r, 'l, gl' ih.
m', t', c', "'t .', d', n' - w.
e', de', a', d4', co', ne', pe', be', ae', tie', po',
me', tlO' - - - - - ib.
Apostrophe, whether used when the elision of
the vowel might produce in nouns a confu-
sion of gender, number, ~ 41
when it would
change tbe sound of the conllOoants i as, in
gli, ci, Rnd in nouos ending in ce, ci, ge,t:it
followed by one of the vowels, a, 0, U - ih.
----., other instances in which it is not
used 42
CHAP. III. Of the Reduplication of Conso-
nants - ib.
Words in which the consonants arc gene-
rally doubled - ib.
g doubled before the vowels ia, io, iu, and
when ib.
~ d l ~ b l e d between two vowels, and when ib.
01' CONTENTS. 413
Page
CHAP. IV. Qf the Formation of SyIIables 44
A vowel can receive after it, in the same
syllabic, no more than one consonant;
\- may be preceded by more than one ib.
Double consonants in the middle of a word,
what syllable they belong to - 45
A consonant between two vowels, what
vowel it belongs to ib.
CHAP. V. Of the Increase of Words ib.
Increase of words beginning with an im-
pure s ,. ib.
Impure ., what w.
Other instances of Increase of words-ad,
ed, od, sur, insur 46
CHA.P. VI. Of the Diminution of Words ih.
Diminution or Retrenchment of words
ending in Ie, me, ne, re; 10, mo, no, ro ib.
----- of words ending in llo, nno ib.
The words unll, bene, bll6no, bello, queIln,
grande, retrenched. and when ib.
----- Frate, Santo, Su6ra, ura, fu6-
Ti, retrenched 47
Words that are retrenched before a conso-
nant, how \nitlen before a vowel - ib.
-- that are never retrenched' 48
Contraction of words-infinitive of verbs
-imperfect of the indicative - ib.
The words ca'lla', cape, be', de', a',
da', ne', pe', co', .u', tra', qua', ma', ta', for
etJ'IllJi, contractionsof ca'llalli,
&c. - - - - - - - w.
E' for ei; contracted from egli or egli1lo 49
55-
414 .&lULY'J'ICAL TABLE
PART m. OJ' THB ITALIAN ANALOGY
Pap
50-351
CHAP. I. Of the Articles 50
Use of the ii, 1o,-their plural ib.
- of the article la-its plural 5
Union of the prepositions di, a,oo, in, COli,
per, Sri, frs, with the articles ii, 10, la - 52
The English indefinite article Q, an, how
expre!sed in Italian 54
The adjectives some and any, how express-
ed ib.
CHAP. II. Of Nouns
58
ib.
ib.
ib.
- 59
ib.
ib.
Terminations of nouns-a, e, i, Ot u i&..
ib.
ib.
56
57
Gender
_ of nouns ending in a, i, u
- of nouns ending in 0
_ of nouns ending in e
- of the lIouns flne,june, tra..
ve, gregge
--- of 6ste, 6rdjne, margine, diTllane
- of names of countries, and cities
_ of names of trees -
- of Barnes of fruits
- of the names of the vowels
- of tbe names of the consonants
Number-formation of tbe plural ib.
Plural of feminine nouns ending in a ib.
- of masculine nOltns ending in a ib.
_-- of nouns ending in e, 0 - . ib.
__of the llQuns fA6glie, Dia, ,,'mo, bUt,
of Douns in i, u 60
- of DOUDS ending i. ie b.
--of DOUDS iD which a syllable has
01' CONTENTS. 415
Page
been suppressed, and of nouns ac-
cented on the last syllable - ib.
- of nouns ending in ca, ga - ib.
- of nouns ending in co, go ib.
Nouns ending in co, go, which in the
plural have two terminations 61
- of nouns ending in cia, gia 62
--- of nouns ending in cio, gio ib.
--- of nouns ending in chio, ghio, glio ib.
- of nouns ending in aio, 6io, ib.
--- of all other nouns ending in io ib.
Some nouns have two terminations in
the singular, and two in the plural 63
Some masculine nouns have two ter-
minations in tbe singular, and but one
in the plural ib.
Masculine nouns which have aDO ter-
mination in the singular, and two in
the plural,- i, a - th.
Masculine nouns which in the plural
have only the termination Q - 66
- of the nouns riso, membro
2
gesto,
frUtto, legno, 6sso 66
Nouns which have no plural ib.
---which have no singular ib.
Case-variation of nouns ib.
Variation of proper nouns 67
----of the noun Dio 68
---- of common nouns ib.
---- of common nouns taken in an
indefinite sense 74
CHAP. III. Of Adjectives 78
Terminations of adjectives-a, Q, e 16.
Gender of adjectives ending in a ill.
- of adjectives ending in a - ill.
Their-formation ib.
41&
"
ANAL"ITICAL TABLE
Geatkr of adjectives ending in e
Plural of adjectives ending in 0 - -
--of bEllo before nOUDS beginning with
a vowel, a III, or an impure _
- of adjectives ending in a
--of adjectives ending in e
- of adjectives ending in co, go, ca,
ga, cia, cia, gio, c/,ia, gllio, and io
COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES
Fonaation of COJIIparalive5 of superiority
of comparatives 'of inferiority
The particle tJum which follows com-
paratives of superiority and inferior-
ity in English, how rendered into
Italian
of comparatives of equality
Comparatives derived from the Latin,
which do not requirfl, in Italian, the ad-
dition of any adverb
Use of the abverbs m6lto, assai, and of the
particles vfa, v(e, before comparatives
Formation of Superlatives relative
of superlatives absolute
A few superlatives take the terminations
errimo, emma
Adjectives derived from the Latin, which
in Italian are superlatives by themselves,
without any addition or' alteration -
Superlatives of Exaggeration
AUGUJlENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
Augmentati.ves expressing bigness and
grandeur-terminations 6ne, 6z%0; oae,
o ~
~
78
ilJ.
ib.
-w.
Sh.
i ~
Sh.
ib.
79
80
\b.
ib.
81
lb.
ib.
ib.
Il2
ib.
------ expressing strength, vigor,
and beauty-6tfo, otta 8S
expressingcontempt-accio,
auo, astro, ciccia, aua, astra, a/llia ib.
(I' CONTENTS.
4]1
~ e
------ double, treble ib.
Diminutives expressing smallness or pret-
tiness-terminations ino, etto, ezlo, uceio,
uzzo; ina, etta, ella, uccia, uzza ib.
-----oxpressing kindness or tender-
ness-erello, erella 84
----- expressing compassion-fno,
etto, ella, "ccio, uzza, 1cci1l610; ina,
etta, ella, "ccia, ,"zza, iccit:61a ib.
----- expressing contempt and in-
dignation-flto, ella, uccio, uzzo, iceiu6-
10, iccicUto, icciattolo; etta, ella, ,"ccia,
taza, icciu61a, iccialta, icciattola .ib.
Other terminations of diminutives-dllo,
idno ,. cello, icello; c1na, idna; cella,
icma - - - - ib.
Lfoo, lina, i u610, "ala ib.
Nouns which have an irregular termination
in their diminutives ib.
Double diminutives 86
Augmentatives diminished "'- 87
Diminished Augmentatives augmented i6.
Verbs and Adverbs which may be aug-
mented or diminished ~ ib.
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES 88
Cardinal numbers ib.
Ordinal numbers 89
Collective, distributive, and proportional
Dltmbers 91
Numbers that vary either with regard to
gender or number- i6.
CHAP. IV. Of Pronouns 94
Per.'tmal Pronouns-1o, tu, egli, ella, essa,
se,-their Render, their plural, their use i6.
variation of ib.
Desso, dessa, used instead of esso, essa,
and. when 97
ib.
104
ib.
106
,ib.
418 N.lLYTIC.4L T.&BLE
Pronouns rltua, medesimo, r:.edesi- Papr
ma added to personal pronouns-their
force 98
MeeD, teeD, SeeD i6.
ConjuJlCtifJe Pronouns-mi, ti, gli or Ii, il
or lo, Ie, la, ci or ne, vi, 16ro, gli or Ii,
16ro, It, si, ne,-their gender, their use 99
Union of the pronouns mi, ti, gli, ti, vi, si,
with.the pronouns 10, la, gli, Ii, .Ie, RI!-
melo, glielo., &c. 100
Melo,. telo, &c. con1racted into mel, tel, &c.
and when-written with an apostrophe 101
Nol contracted from non lo i6.
Posstssme Pronouns-mw, tuo, suo, n6stro,
fJ6stro, loro- their geuder-their plural 102
variation of ib.
Demonstrati"e Pronoun,
------ that point out an object
near the person who speak"l-questo,
coslui-their feminine, their plural 105
----that point out an object
at a distance from the person who
speaks, as well as from the person who
is spoken to-quello, fem-
inine, their plural 105
------ that point out an object
near the person who is spok.en to-
codeslo, coleslo-their feminine, their
plural
------questa, quello, codesto, co-
lesto-costfi,i, coiUi, when used ib.
Cio a demonstrative pronoun-its meaning,
its use
- variation of
Stamattifla, stamaM, stasera, stmlolle
Plural of wben followed by a 1lO1Del,
a z, or all impun ib.
OF CONTENTS.
4]9

'.
. Paga
Questi, quei, in the singular, and
queglino in the plural-their meaning,
their use
E'sto, eQtesiUi, eotestei,-their mean-
. ing-obsolete ib.
Relative Pronm.lns-qu61e, eke, ehi,-their
gender, their plural, their use ib.
variation of 107
Cui a relative pronoun-its meaning, its
number, when used 108
Onde used as a relative pronoun, and when
-its meaning when so used ib.
Relative Particles-ne, ci, vi,-their sig-
nification, their use ib.
Inte'f'rogative Pronouns-"-eki? eke '! qua..
le?-their gender, their number, their use 110.
------ variation of;. ib.
Indefinite Pronouns-6gni, quatehe, &c.
uno, un'altro, &c. l' uno, aleuno, &c.-
their gender, their number ib.
------ their use 112
------ variation of ib.
Si considered as an indefinite pronoun-
its equivalent meaning in English-its
gender, its number ib.
Chi used as an indefinite pronoun, and
when,-its meaning 11S
altri, used in the singular, and when-
its signification ib.
CHAP. V. Of Verbs w.
Terminations of verbs-are, ere or en,
ire-three different conjugations-va-
ried with one of the auxiliary verbs avere
or essere 114
Variation of avert, ib
.\
420 AIULYT1CAL TABLE
Poetical fonns---GlNJ; tltliG, tltIi&ao.
tit/riA, at/riano or at/rURO,
Variation of ~ s s e r e
Poetical fonn...-.EI4l
fumo.Juro.Jur.JIro - - -
fw., jlano or fleRO; .ariA, J6rrJ, ltlriano
or ItJrit.Ao,J6rarw - - -
~
115
111
119
ill.
no
l!U
Of Regular Verbs 123
ib.
ill.
145
144
w.
124
125
U6
U1
U8
ib.
134
135
141
142
143
Variation of Actil1e Verbs-with the auxili-
ary verb ol1ere
First cOlljugation-mnart,-paradigm of
verbs eoding io an
Poetical forms-amaro or tamar,
ameria, arlleriano or amerieno,
limll
Variation of verbs ending in Cart, gare
Cerf:art-puradigm of verbs eod.ing io care
l'oetical forms-cercheria, cercherlano-or
urcherieno 130
cErche 131
Pregare-paradigm of verbs ending ingare 132
Poetical forms-pregheria, pregheriano
prrgherieno
prEghe
Second conjugation-erc, ere,-perfect defi-
nite ei aod eUi) or ei only - -
Temere-paradigm of verbs ending in ere,
accented
Poetical fonns-temeria, umllriano or teme-
rieno ~
Credere-paradigm of verbs ending in ere,
unaccented
Poetical forms-credw,' credh>, cretUro,
crederia, &c.
TtsStTll-p'lfadigm of verbs ending, in the
perfeet-definitll, in ii ooly
'Poetical forms-tUte, tuta, tuti, tUte; tu-
.h>, te.dro
OF CONTENTS. 421
ib.
ib.
ib.
ib.
149
154
156
157
159
161
Page
147 Participle of verbs ending in cere, scere
Regular Verbs of the second conjugation
that in the perfect-definite have the ter-
mination ei only
Participle of the verbs annettere; con-
sconnettere; esigere, esimere, re-
scindere, rifletUre, scindere, s61vere; fer-
ttl'ere,t6r-
pere; suggere
Third conjugation-present indicative, 0,
Sco, 0 and isco
Sentire-paradigm of the verbs in
the present of the indicative ends in 0 only ib.
Poetical forms senlto 151
sentina, .entirtano 152
Esibire-paradigm of those verbs, which
in the present of the indicative have the
termination 1SCO only
Poetical forms-esibirl.a, &c.
Abborrire-paradigm of those verbs which
in the present of the indicative, end both
in 0 and isco .,
Poetical form-abborrina, &c.
Regular verbs of the third conjugation,
that in the prestnt of the indicative have
the termination 0 only
--- verbs that have the termination
isco only _
Participle of the verbs ostruire;
construfre, costrufre, instruire, istrulre;
apparire, comparfre, trasl'arire, rial'panre 174
- verbs that end both in 0 and isco ib.
Participle ofthe verbs benedire, ma-
ledi/'e; offerire, offri.re, sofferire, soffrire 135
Verbs which in the infinitive have two ter-
minations-ire and ere -
So
ANALYTICAL TABLE
Verbs which have the two terminations
irt and are
--- which have all three terminations-
irt, trt, ar/!
Variation of Passive Verbs-with the aux-
iliary verb essere
Essert amato-paradigm of the passive
verbs
Variation of Ntllter Verbs-with the aux-
iliary verb esscre
Partire-paradigm of the neuter verbs
Neuter verbs that are varied with the aux-
iliary verbs i ..ere and a"'tre -
--- verbs that are varied wilh -the aux-
iliary verb aflere, only
Variatiou of Pronominal Verbs-with the
auxiliary verb essere
Pentirsi-paradigm of the pronominal
verbs
Active verbs may become pronominal by
the addition of the conjunctive pronouns
mi, ti, Ii, &c.
Pronominal v r ~ tbat may be varied with
eitber tbe auxiliary verb ulere or a"iTe
Pap
176
ih.
ih.
ih.
182
ih.
185
Wh.
w.
186
189
Variation of Unipersonal Verbs-with the
auxiliary verb aveTe 190
Pwvere-paradigmofthe unipersonal verbs ih.-
Poetical form pi6bbe - 191
The unipersonal verbs most in usc 192
Verbs, which, though Dot unipersonal in
themselves, are ofteu unipersoDally used 198
E'ssere uDipersoDally used-its variation-
here is, there is ih.
Aver/! substituted for essere, when uniper-
Bonally used-ci 0, vi tl 196
'fhe greater part of aclive verbs may be-
come unipenonal, and how - 197
0)' CON'n:NTS. 423
Page
How to express in Italian here is or there is
some qf it, here. are or there are some of tkern ib."
The English unipel"sonal verb it is, express-
ed in Italian by fa, and when ib
A Synoptical Tuble of the Variations of the
Regular Verbs, showing their Different
Terminations in their Simple Tenses 198
Of Irregular Verbs 202
Variation of the Irregular Verbs of the first
conjugation ib.
Andare-varied with lssere ib.
Poetical forms-anderia, andria, &c. - 203
vadi 204
- Dare-varied with allere ib.
Poetical forms-d-iei, dieo, die, dirono, die-
ro, J':r, dmo; daria, &c. - - 205
Flire-varied with avf:.re 206
Poetical forms-faccio, face, fun; fa, &c.
ji,flsti,jo, fe', fmmo,fste, jen,jenno,
jer,Jfro,flrno,jerono; jaj-ia,jare', &c. 207
-flasi,fesse,jeste,jesswo,fessono 208
Stare-val'ied with essere ib.
Poetical forms-sUi, ste, sUro, ster, stiero,
sWr. 209
The verbs andare, dare, sttire, in some of
their compounds become regular 210
Variation of"the Irregular Verbs of the sec-
ond conjugation in ere accented 211
Cadere-varied with essere ib.
Poetical forms-caggio, eaggiamo, caggiano;
cadei, c ~ d e t t i cado, cadette, cade, cadero,
cader.. caderono, caaUtero; cadro, ~ c 212
cadrli, caderia, cadrio. j caggia, caggi-
amo, caggiate, caggiano 213
Dissuaderc-varied with essere or avere ib.
Poetical forms-dissuaderia, ~ c 214-
DoUrt-varied with essere 21:1
ill.
226
227
ill.
229
~
231
424 ANALYTICAL TABLE
Poetical f o ~ d6le, IUgliotw; rlor- Page
ria, &-c. 216
d6glia, d6gliano - 217
Dlmire-varied with avere - ill.
Poetical forms-diggio, em, dee, debbiamo,
rleggi/&mo, de"imo, diggiono, dlono, den.
no; doDeria, d01lria, &0. 218
tUggia, deggiamo, deggi/JU, diggiaAo 219
Giacere-varied with avere or essere - ih.
Poetical forma-giaceria, &c. 2!!0
Partre-varied with essere 221
Poetical forms-jlar; parri, par." par.ero 222
parrill, &c. 223
Persuadere-varied with essere or avere ib.
Piacere-varied with fllere 224
Potere-varied with avere or essere 225
Poetical form_pUll', pu6te, p6te, potlmo,
p6rmo, pon -
potrilJ, &c.
Rimanere-varied with essere
Poetical forms_rima.o; rim4gno
Sapere-varied with avere
Poetical forma-.ape; .apria
Sedere-varied with avere or essere
Poetical forms-.-.eggendo
.edrb; udrei, .ederia; .eggiamo 232
.lggia, .l.ggi, .eggiiJ.te, .l.ggiano 233
Tacere-varied with averc or easer, ih.
Poetical forms-tiJ.ceio, lacciono ; taeeria, &c. 234
taccia, 'iJ.ccWno .. 235
Tenere-varied with avere or essere ih.
poetical form&-terria, &0., 236
Ugna - .., t. 237
VaUre-varied with were or essere ih.
Poetical forms.-1liJ.uo; "tiglio, "al 23B
"ama, &c. 239
Vedere-varied with avere 240
Poetical forms---wtto; 'Ie' ,II-
OF CONTENTS.
425
ib.
ib.
253
248
Page
241
242
244
247
mder; &c.; tIe' -
Volere-varied with avere
.Po.elical forms--'Vuoli, "orria, &c.
Variation of the Irregular Verbs of the sec-
ond conjugation euding in ere unaccented
-arranged according to their terminations
-bere, cere, dere, ere, gere, ggere, glieTe,
gneTe, gut;re, lere, 1nere, neTe, rere, tere,
Uel"e, Vere
Assorbere-par.adigm of the verbs ending
in bere-varied with avere or
Cu6cere-first paradigm of verbs in Cere-
varied with avere
Verbs ending in cere, syncopated in the in-
finiti'Ve.futuTe-indefinite, and present nfthe
conditional, and when-form their paT-
ticiple in otto ib.
Vincere-second paradigm of verbs in cere
-varied with avere
A'rdere-paradigm of verbs in dere-varied
with avere 250
Particle and present of the verb chUdere 252
Participle and perfect of/andere ib.
Participle of rispondere, ib.
Traere-paradigm of verbs in ere-varied
with avere
Verbs in ere, syncopaLed in the
and pruent of the
conditional
DiMgere-first paradigm of verbs in gere
-varied with avere 254
Giungere-second paradigm of verbs end-
ing in gere-varied with essere 255
Participle of tbe verb stringers 256
Verbs in ngere maIo end also in ib.
Mergere-third paradigm of verbs in
gere-varied .with avere or essere
36- III
426
ANALYTICAL TABLB
Page
ih.
266
258
264
ib.
ib.
262
ib.
Leggere-paradigm of nrbs in ggere-
varied with avere
Verbs inggtrll, syncopated in the i'llini-
ti'lIt,Iutun-1ndejiniu, and prumt of the
conaitional, aDd when
C6g1iere-paradigm of verbs in glure-
varied with avere
Poetical form-c6glio
Verbs in glitrt may btl syncopated into
rrt, and then are syncopated also in the
future-indejiniU and pruent of the con-
ditiolUll - 261
Spegnere-paradigm of verbs in "gncre-
varied with avere
Poetical
Verbs in gntrt may end also in ngert
Distinguere-paradigm of verbs in gutre
-varied with avere ib.
SvUlere-paradigmofverbs in lere-varied
With
Poetical
Participle and perfect-definite of the verbs
uptllert,
Esprimere-paradigm of verbs in mere-
varied with Qvere
Participle and perfect of the verbs cu.ume-
re, rtdtmtre
P6nere-paradigm of verbs in nere-varied
with avere 267
Verbs in nere, syncopated in the infinitille,
future-indefinite, and PTe8mt of the CORdi-
tiolUll '. ". - 268
COrrere -paradigm of verbs in rere-vari-
ed with essere or avere ib.
Di'cUtere-first paradigm of verbs in tere-
uried with 270
01' CONTENTS. 427
Page
Rivertere-seeond paradigm of verbs in
tere-varied with essere 271
Connettere-parudigm of verbs in ttere-
varied with avere 272
Participle and perfect of the verb mittere 273
paradigm of verbs in vere
-varied :with avere' -
Volvere-second para'digm of verbs in vere
-varied wllh avere or essere 275
Variation of other Irregular Verbs in ere
unaccented not included in any of the
preceding classes "' 276
Con6scere-varied with avere ib.
Participle and perfect of the verb crucere 277
Nascere-varied with essere 278
Participle aDd perfect of the verb nu6cen 279
R6mpere-varied with avere . ib.
Variation of the verb bevere or bere-with
avere 280
Poetical forms-b&>, bii, bie, beUe, biono ib.
bibbi, bibbe, bibbero; beveru, bellru, &c. ;
be",erii, be",eria, bevrl.a, &c. 281
, bii, bia, beUe, biano, bi"'i, beuaero, beu-
.ano 282
Variation of the Irregular Verbs of the
. third conjugation 283
Cudre-varied with avere ib.
Dire-varied with avere 285-
Poetical form-dicere ib.
Morzre-varied with hsere 287
Poetical form-mu6r ill.
morirl.a, morrta j m6ra, m6ia j m6ri 288
Salire-varied with arJere or 289
Poetical forms-..agli6no - ill
.aui. .aue, .alia, .Cd.ero, .aliro, .aUr j
.liglia 290
4J8 .&.NA.LYTICAL TAJILE
Segnre-varied with avere or enere
Poetical formB--ltgui, ,Ugui -
Udire- varied with avere
Poetical form-6di -
Uscfre--varied with essere
Venire-varied with essen
Poetical forms--tltgno, tlegnamo, tlfgnono;
tleniro; '!lerna
BoUire -
Defective Verbs
Page
291
2CJ2
w.
~
294
29'
296
297
298
Variutiol1 of defective verbs in ere ac-
cented
Calere
Ca{ere
Pavere
Silere
Sotere -
Poetical forms-I61e, ,oltmo
Stupere
W.
i6.
299
300
i6.
ib.
301
302
S10
ib.
ib.
ib.
303
304
ib.
- ib.
306
ib.
307
308
- 309
ib.
ib.
Variation of defective verbs in ere unac-
e n t ~
A'lgere
A'ngere
Arr6gere
Capere
Ckerere
C07ll:e /lere
Ucere and licere, or lecere and licere
M6lcere
Riedere
Serpere
Tangere
U'rgere
Vigere
Variation of defective verbs in ire
(1{re
lire.
Olire
OF COl\TENTS. 429
Page
ib.
311
- SUI
General Observations on the Conjugations of
Italian Verbs, and the Formation of their
Tenses ib.
ReguIar Tenses-impeifect ofthe indicative,
future-indefinite, present of the condition-
. tal-imperfect of the conjunctive-gerund ib.
------ their terminations 314
Irregular Tenses-present and perfect-de-
finite ofthe indicative; imperative; pres-
ent of the conjunetivc-participle 815
-----their formation - 316
A General Alphabetical Table of the
Irregular Verbs, \lith References to
their Paradigms 318
CHAP. VI. Of Participles 334
Terminations of participles-<f:, 0, a - ib.
Gender-plural ib.
Comparatives-superlatives. - ib.
Participles which are generally contracted
in their terminations ib.
CHAP. VII. Pf Adverbs 337
Formation ofthe greater part ofltalian adverbs ib.
Comparatives and Superlatives of these
adverbs ib.
Adverbs of time 338
--'- of place, order 339
430 A.NA.LYTICAL T.lBLE
Page
Adverbs of quantity, quality, affirmation,
negatioD 340
---- of douut, comparison, interroga-
tion, choice, demonstration 341
Adjectives, which are used in Italian as
adverbs 342
Rules for deterlllining when these words
are used llIl adjectives, and when as ad-
verbs ill.
Adverbial Phrases i6.
CHAP. VIII. Of Prepositions 343
Prepositions of place i6.
----- of time, order, uni8D 344
-----of separation, opposition, end,
cause, specification 345
Rule for determining when a word is us-
ed as a preposition, and when as an
adverb ib.
CHAP. IX. Of Conjunctions
Conjunctions copulative, negative, aug-
or adjullctive, dis-
junctive, adversative i6.
----.-- elective, exceptive, conclu-
sive 347
-----explicative, causal, conditional 348
----- periodic 349
CHAP. X. Of Interjections
ib.
Interj ections of grief, joy, desire, aversion,

of fear, indignation or con-
tempt, approbation, admira-,
tion, surprise, encouragement,
warping 8,50
OF CON-TJl:NTS. 431
Paga
----- of beseeching, calling, silen-
cing s:a
Tae interjections lasso! p6vero! mlsero!
mere adjectives-their change with re-
garod to gender.
PART IV. OF THE ITALIAN SYNTAX
CHAP. I. Of the Order of Words
352-408
352
Simple Construction ib.
Place of the subjective, verb, objective ib.
-- of the adjective, article, adverb, pre-
position, conjunction S:lS
-- of the interjection, relative 8:14
Inverse Constructiun ib.
Place of the subjective, objective, adjec-
tive, adverb - ib.
CHAP. II. Of Concordance or Agreement
of Words 355
Agreement of adjectives ib.
---- of verbs - S57
---- of participles - 859
---- of the relative quale 860
---- of possessive pronouns ~ 6
---- of the noun bestia,-the pro-
noun v6i ib.
---- of the adjectives mezzo, tutto ib.
CHAP. ill. Of the Use of the Article 6 ~
Nouns used either in an indeterminate or
in a determinate sense ib.
Different ways of making use of a noun in
a determiate seDse - ib.'
Article, when used and when not ib.
--- suppressed, and when 863
ANM.'!TICM. '1'.uJLE
Page
Different .,.y. of designating a portion
or a number of the objects in a class
-by. preposition, article, indefinite
pronoun -' - - - 363
Instances in which the preposition, arti-
cle, or indefinite pronoun is not used 364
Whether the article used before a noun,
is to be repeated before the other
nouns in the llame sentence, either
before or after the verb ib.
Words which require the article in Ital-
ian-adjectives, verbs, all other words
that can be used as nouns -'. 365
Sign6re, ripra, when they require
the article . 366
Quale, when ill.
Possessive pronouns, when - 367
Oniinal numbers, when w.
Names of kingdoms, provinces, moun-
tains, rivers, when ib.
Names of islands, cities, lakes, seas,
when 368
.Dio, and proper names of men, when ib.
Different expressions in which the arti-
cle is always suppressed in Italian 369
CHAP. IV. Of.the Position of Adjectives 370
Adjectives that follow their nouns 371
----- of nations, verbal, of taste, of
smell and hearing, expressing
colours, denotingshape or form,
various expressing physical or
mental qualities ih.
----- that may be used as nouns,
other abjectives "872
Adjectives tbat go before their nouns ib.
----numeral - ill.
--,
or CONTENT'.
4U
Pal
other adjective. '73
Instances in which adjective. are general-
ly put after the noun ib.
ChAP. V. Of the Use and the Position of
Pronouns 374
Position of Personal pronouns ~ i6.
Personal pronouns, may be either express-
ed or understood-when they ought Dot
I to be suppressed ...
- of Conjunctive pronouns when they
occur with a verb - ib.
~ of the pronoun l6ro ~
- of conjunctive pronouns when they
occur with the adverb ecco - i6.
------------ when they
are followed by the indefinite pronoun Ii ar6
Use of conjunctive pronouns i6.
Position of the Relative particles ne, ci, ui,
when they occur with a verb th.
-,when they oq:ur with the pro-
noilns mi, ti,ei, vi aTT
---, when they occur with the pro-
nouns lo, la, Ii, gli, Ie ib.
- of PotsessivB pronouns - 'r.
How to avoid in Italian the ambiguity
arising in English from the indiscrimi-
nate use of the llossessive pronouns Ais,
ler or AeTs . - - - - th.
CHAP. VI. Of the Change of Person 370
Polite way of addressing in Italian-use
of V6stra Signorra or Vossignoria,
V. S.,-ella-agreement o( adjective.
5T
ANALYTICAL TULE
Page
and participles in this case-use of the
conjunctive pronouns ie, 1a 379
CHAP. VII. Of the Use of the Moods and
Tenses of Verbs - 381
Of the Use of the Indicative and Subjunc-
tive Moods - - - - w.
Conjunctions that require the indicative
mood ill.
----- that require the conjunctive ib.
With the conjunction die the verb is some-
times used in the indicative, and some-
times in the conjunctive ib.
When it is used in the indicative ib.
When in the conjunctive - 382
Some verbs appear to be used indiscrimi
Dately either in the indicative or in the
conjunctive mood, but are not so ib.
Verbs used in the conjunctive aftersembra-
re, parere, bisognare, or any other uni-
personal verb 383
----after the relatives ehe, quale,
and when ib.
Of the Use of the Imperfect,'Perfect-de-
finite, and Perfect-indefinite' 384
The preterite of English verbs, how ren-
dered in Italian ib.
Use of the imperfect ib.
-. of the perfect-definite 385
- of the perfect-indefinite ib.
Of the Tenses of the Dependent Verbs in
Compound Sentence ib.
OF CONTEST!!. 496
Page
Of the tenses of a verb depending on an-
other verb in the present of the indica-
tive or the future ih.
----- depending on a verb in
the imperfect or the perfect-definite ib.
of a dependent verb ex-
pressing an actiou which may be done
at all t.imes 386
----- corresponding to the im-
perfect of the indicative in English,
in a suppositive or a conditional phrase ib.
Of the Use of certain Tenses of the Indica-
tive for some other Tenses of the same
Mood; and of the Use of the Infinitive for
certain Tenses of the Indicative, and for
the Conjunctive and the Imperative Moods ib.
The present of the indicative used for the
fidure ib.
The perfect-definite for the present, or
for the perfect-indefinite S87
The infinitive for the third person singular
of the present and imperfect of the in-
dicative and their compounds ib.
----- for the third person singular
of the present and imperfect of the
conjunctive - ib.
----- for the second person singular
of the imperative, and when - 388
Of the mode of expressing the English Pres-
ent Participle in Italian ib.
The English Present participle expressed
in Italian, by a gerund-by the relative
eke, and a tense of the indicative-by a
preposition with the infinitive ib.
ill.
390
.......LYTICAL T"'BLa
!'lip
The presont participle espreued by the
infinitive with a preposition, and when 388
The prepositions of,frttm, with, before the
participle, how rendered in Italian ib.
------ Oft, in, for, how rendered 389
------without, before, after, how
rendered -
------by, how rendered
Remarks on the Use of certain Italian Verbs
as compared with the English - w.
On the verbs "enire, o l ~ r e a.
-----dOrJire th.
On the English verb to b. 391
-----to think a.
-----to know .. th.
eRA VIII. Of the Use of certain Prepo-
sitions 16.
01 tbe Prepositions di, a, da i1J.
Use of the preposition di i1J.
--the preposition a 892
--the preposition da 16.
I'hrBses in which the preposition di ap-
pean to be used instead of the preposi-
tion a - ib.
- in which the preposition di ap-
pears to be used ftlr the preposition da 393
--- in which the preposition da ap-
pears to be used for the preposition a 394
A collection of phrases, which, consulted
by learners, may direct them to make
proper use of tho prepositions di, a,
tla, in similar instances, by analogy 39"
Phrases. in which the preposition di is used ill.
OJ' CONTENTS. 437
Pap'
- in which the preposition a is used 896
--- in which the preposition da is used 897
--- in which by using the preposition
di for da, or the preposition da for di,
the meaning of the expression is altered 898
Difference between the phrases etempo di
ritirdrsi, di scostarsi, di uscire, di desina-
re, &c. and ~ tempo da ritirarsi, da
scostarsi, da uscire, da cksinare, &c. 399
Of the way of rendering into Italian the
English particle to before the Infini-
tive of Verbs ib.
To either a sign or a preposition in
English-how expressed ib.
- rendered by the article iI, 10, and
when ib.
- rendered by the preposition di, a,
per, and when 400
CHAP. IX. Of Expletives 401
B ~ n e b'"en, be' - ib.
Bello-tutto-mlca-pUnto--p(Jre-gid 402
Gra-ecco-r6i-via-d-ne-non - 408
Con-fj,no-egli-ella-esso - 404
E'sso invariable, when used as an exple-
tive - ib.
CHAP. X. Of the Ellipsis i!J.
Ellipsis of the Noun - 4 ~
--- of the Adjective ib.
--- of Relative Pronouns 406
--- of t he Infinitive of Verbs ib.
--- of the Verb in the Indicative Mood ib.
--- of the Verb in the Conjunctive 407
--- of the Gerund ib.
- of the Participle - ib.
438 COMTENTS.
Ellipsis of Ad'm'bs
---of Prepositions
---of Ctnljundions
ANALYTICAL TABLE 01' CONTENTS
Page
40S
ih.
ih.
ERRATA.
For Read
Page 19 line 33 son child
" 25 " 4
from Latin the from the Latin
"
38
"
8 crimin cremiJi
"
41
"
]0 plural - plurals
"
"
12 which'rreceded
preceded
..
55
"
3
those 0 the five l
the five vowels
vowels
..
59
"
16 j, of j, and of
"
61
"
7
-manuclcao manucalco
"
83
"
31 ina ina
"
85
"
20- consontina cansoncina
"
98
"
6 oi noi
"111
"
10 taUlan taluna
"-
"
38 Ortbog. pp. 48, 49 Or!hog. p. 46
" 114
"
10 ao re avcre
"
"
14 latter, from latter from
"
"
15 former the former, the
" 141
"
18 cred-endo cred-enle
" ]47
"
10_ aballersi abbaltersi
" 161
"
25 abbelire abbelltre
" 168
"
19 7.UqUUir inquisiTe
" 2U7
"
24 fari> fard
" 209
"
26 *3[o.rO slara
"210
"
13 "slia
slta
"- "
15 her she
"-216
"
8 dolgano dolgono
" 238
"
4 Past Parliciple
" 239
"
14 might may
" 243
"
]9
i'Orra
rorra
"-
" 23
vorrei vorrei
" 245
"
13 from form
" 246
"
25 revtr-si rivb-Ii
" 268
"
7
possero .posero
" 308
"
6 (s.-pendo) (serptlndo)
" 317
"
18 sinl;lIlar, from singular from
., --
"
19 infi!!!tive by in.!,i!lilive, by
" --
"
33 motano mouJllo
" 321
"
24 Canlrapponere Cvntrappontre
" 843
"
8 d aUora d' altura
" 359
"
25 object we objective
" 372
"
1 un gobbo, a [un gObbo, a
hunchback hunchback]
" 384
"
27 tenses tense
" 387
"
17 L' avrai L' arrai
" 415
"
13 Some nouns Some feminine nOUDS
" 420
"
1 aoUno at'teno
" 426
"
2 avere afleee
'432 "34
abjective. adjectives